TM 9 759 Tank Medium M4a3 9 15 1944

WAR DEPARTMENT TECHNICAL MANUAL
TANK, MEDIUM
M4A3
WAR DEPARTMENT . SEPTEMBER 1944

WA R DEPA RTMENT TECHNICAL MA N UA L
TM 9-759
This manual supersedes TM 9-759, dated 18 Febnmary 1943; OFSTB 759-5. dated II September 1943. reprinted
as TB ORD 43: OFSTB 759-6. dated 14 September 1943; OFSTB 759-7. dated 12 October 1943: OSTB
759-8. dated 4 November 1943; OFSTB 759-9, dated 24 November 1943: WDTB 9-759-10, dated 29 February
1944. This manual also supersedes pertinent information in OFSTB 700-1, dated I January 1942; OFSTB
700-14. dated 17 June 1942; OFSTB 700-15. dated 21 July 1942: OFSTB 700-48. dated 22 April 1943: OFSTB
700-49. dated 22 April 1943. reprinted as TB ORD 158: OFSTB 700-57. dated 22 May 1943; OFSTB 700-59
dated 8 June 1943: OFSTB 700-66. dated II June 1'43: OFSTB 700-67, dated I June 1943: OFSTB 700-70.
dated 21 June 1'43; OFSTB 700-72. dated 24 June 1943: OFSTB 700-91. dat:d II August 1943: OFSTB
700-98. dated I October 1943; WI)TB ORD II, dated 13 January 1944 WI)TB ORD 12, dated 12 January
1944; WDTB ORI) 19, dated 24 January 1944; WDTB ORI)D 20. dated 24 January 1944; WDTB ORD 30.
dated 3 February 1944; WI)TB ORI)41,dated 12 February 1944: WI)TB ORD 83. dated 25 April 1944; WDTB
ORD 88. dated 4 May 1944; W)TB ORD 90. dated 13 May 1944:WI)TB ORD '5. dated 22 May 1944; WDTB
ORL 96. dated 22 May 1944; WDTB ORI) 116. dated 28 June 1944: WI)TB ORD 125, dated 22 July 1944;
WDTB ORD 126, dated 19 July 1944; WDTB ORD 131. dated 2 August 1944.
TANK, MEDIUM
M4A3
WAR DEPARTMENT * SEPTEMBER 1944
United States Government Printing Office

Wafhington I941,
WAR DEPARTMENT
Washington 25, D. C., 15 September 1
TM 9-759, Tank, Medium, M4A3, is published for the informati
and guidance of all concerned.
rA.G. 300.7 (6 Jan 44)

LO.O.M. 461/Rar. Ars. (18 Sep 44)
BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF WAR:
G. C. MARSHALL,
Chief of Staff.
OFFICIAL:
J. A. ULIO,
Major General,
The Adjutant General.
DISTRIBUTION: D 17 (10); IR 9 (4); 17 (2); IBn 9 (2), 17 (4)

IC 9 (5), 17 (1).
(For explanation of symbols, see FM 21-6.)

CONTENTS Contd.
Paragraphs Pages
SECTION XXIV. Vertical volute spring, sus-
pension and tracks ... 132-137 328-345
XXV. Hull and turret .......... 138-146 345-349
XXVI. Turret traversing mecha-
nism ............... 147-15, 350-359
XXVII. Radio interference suppres-
sion ........................ 152-158 359-366
PART FOUR-AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
A-AUXILIARY GENERATOR, FIXED FIRE EXTINGUISHER
SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT
SECTION XXVIII. Auxiliary generator ............ 159-160 367-369
XXIX. Fixed fire extinguisher sys-
tem . ... 161 369-372
XXX. Communication equipment. 162-164 372-379
B-ARMAMENT- 75-MM GUN M3 IN THE COMBINATION
GUN MOUNTS M34 AND M34A1
SECTION XXXI. Introduction ........................ 165-167 380-381
XXXII. Operating instructions ....... 168-176 381-392
XXXIII. Sighting and fire control
equipment .................... . 177-181 392-395
XXXIV. Ammunition .............. 182-183 395-398
C-ARMAMENT-76-MM GUN MIAI, M1AlC, OR M1A2
IN THE COMBINATION GUN MOUNT M62
SECTION XXXV. Introduction .................... 184-186 398-403
XXXVI. Operating instructions ....... 187-195 403-417
XXXVII. Sighting and fire control
equipment ............. 196-202 417-426
XXXVIII. Ammunition ............. 203-204 426-428
D-ARMAMENT-105-MM HOWITZER M4 IN THE COMBI-
NATION GUN MOUNT M52
SECTION XXXIX. Introduction .. ..................... 205-206 428-432
XL. Operating instructions ...... 207-214 432-441
XLI. Sighting and fire control
equipment ................ 215-219 441-443
XLII. Ammunition ..................... 220-221 443-447
APPENDIX
XLIII. Shipment and Limited
Storage .. . 222-224 448-451
XLIV. References .................. 225-227 452-457
zEX . 458-472
CONTENTS Contd.
Paragraphs Pages
SECTION XXIV. Vertical volute spring, sus-
pension and tracks ....... 132-137 328-345
XXV. Hull and turret ......... 138-146 345-349
XXVI. Turret traversing mecha-
nism ........................ 147-151 350-359
XXVII. Radio interference suppres-
sion ....................... 152-158 359-366
A-AUXILIARY GENERATOR, FIXED FIRE EXTINGUISHER
SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT
SECTION XXVIII. Auxiliary generator ........... 159-160 367-369
XXIX. Fixed fire extinguisher sys-
tem .......................... 161 369-372
XXX. Communication equipment. 162-164 372-379
B-ARMAMENT- 75-MM GUN M3 IN THE COMBINATION
GUN MOUNTS M34 AND M34A1
SECTION XXXI. Introduction ........................ 165-167 380-381
XXXII. Operating instructions ..... 168-176 381-392
XXXIII. Sighting and fire control
equipment .................... . 177-181 392-3
XXXIV. Ammunition ....................... 182-183 395-398
C-ARMAMENT-76-MM GUN MlAl, M1A1C, OR M1A2
IN THE COMBINATION GUN MOUNT M62
SECTION XXXV. Introduction ...................... 184-186 398-403
XXXVI. Operating instructions ........ 187-195 403-417
XXXVII. Sighting and fire control
equipment .................. 196-202 417-426
XXXVIII. Ammunition ........................ 203-204 426-428
-- ARMAMENT-105-MM HOWITZER M4 IN THE COMBI-
NATION GUN MOUNT M52
SECTION XXXIX. Introduction ........................ 205-206 428-432
XL. Operating instructions ........ 207-214 432-441
XLI. Sighting and fire control
equipment ...................... 215-219 441-443
XLII. Ammunition ........................ 220-221 443-447
APPENDIX
XLIII. Shipment and Limited
Storage ... .... 222-224 448-451
XLIV. References ..............
...... ... 225-227 452-45~
IN DEX . . ...... ...... . .. . . .............................................. 4 5 8- 4
TM 9-759
1
This manual supersedes TM 9-759, dated 18 February 1943: OFSTB 759-5. dated 11
September 1943, reprinted as TB ORD 43: OFSTB 759-6. dated 14 September 1943; OFSTB
759-7, dated 12 October 1943: OFSTB 759-8. dated 4 November 1943: OFSTB 759-9, dated
24 November 1943; WDTB 9-759-10, dated 29 February 1944. This manual also supersedes
pertinent information in OFSTB 700-1. dated I January 1942; OFSTB 700-14, dated 17 June
1942; OFSTB 700-15. dated 21 July 1942: OFSTB 700-48. dated 22 April 1943: OFSTB
700-49; dated 22 April 1943, reprinted as TB ORD 158: OFSTB 700-57. dated 22 May 1943;
OFSTB 700-59. dated 8 June 1943: OFSTB 700-66. dated 11 June 1943; OFSTB 700-67,
dated 15 June 1943: OFSTB 700-70. dated 21 June 1943: OFSTB 700-72, dated 24 June 1943:
OFSTB 700-91, dated I I August 1943: O.. .B 700-98. dated I October 1943: WDTB ORD I 1,
dated 13 January 19'.; WDTB ORD 12. dated 12 January 1944: WDTB ORD 19, dated
24 January 1944: WDTB ORD 20. dated 24 January 1944: WDTB ORD 30. dated 3 February
1944; WDTB ORD 41, dated 12 February 1944: WDTB ORD 83. dated 25 April 1944;
WDTB ORD 88. dated 4 May 1944: WDTB ORD 90, dated 13 May 1944: WDTB ORD 95,
dated 22 May 1944: WDTB ORD 96. dated 22 May 1944: WDTB ORD 116, dated 28 June
1944: WDTB ORD 125, dated 22 July 1944: WDTB ORD 126, dated 19 July 1944: WDTB
ORD 131, dated 2 August 1944.
PART ONE-INTRODUCTION
Section I
GENERAL
1. SCOPE.
a. These instructions are published for the information and guid-
ance of the personnel to whom this equipment is assigned. They
contain information on the operation and maintenance of the Medium
Tank M4A3, as well as descriptions of the major units and their
unctions in relation to the other components of this vehicle.
h". This manual has the following arrangement:
(1) Part One-General, contains description and data. It lists
the tools, spare parts, and equipment carried on the vehicle, and also
organizational special tools for this vehicle.
(2) Part Two-Operating Instructions, contains instructions for
the operation of the vehicle, with description and location of the
controls and instruments.
(3) Part Three Maintenance Instructions, contains information
needed for the performance of the scheduled lubrication and pre-
ventive maintenance services, and instructions for maintenance opera-
tions which are the responsibilty of the using organizations (first and
second echelons). Stock numbers in this part were obtained
from Ordnance Supply Catalog ORD 7-8-9, SNL G-104, Volume 15,
SNL G-205 dated 1 June 1944.
(4) Part Four covers the auxiliary equipment mounted on this
vehicle. Detailed instructions pertaining to this auxiliary equipment
are contained in separate technical manuals (see section XLV for
references).
(a) Part Four-A identifies the auxiliary generator, fixed fire ex-
tinguisher, and communications equipment, and contains the informa-
ion necessary to connect this equipment for use or transportation,
End to protect it properly.
1
TM 9-759
1-2
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
(b) Part Four-B contains the essential instructions for the oper 4
tion of the 75-mm gun M3 in the combination gun mounts M34 and
M34A1. It lists the authorized ammunition and sighting equipment
for the 75-mm gun.
(c) Part Four-C contains the essential instructions for the opera-
tion of the 76-mm gun M1A1, M1A1C, or M1A2 in the combination
gun mount M62. It lists the authorized ammunition and sighting
equipment for the 76-mm gun.
(d) Part Four-D contains the essential instructions for the opera-
tion of the 105-mm howitzer M4 in the combination gun mount M52.
It lists the authorized ammunition and sighting equipment for the
105-mm howitzer.
(5) The appendix contains instructions for shipment and limited
storage, and a list of references including standard nomenclature lists,
technical manuals, and other publications applicable to the vehicle.
2. RECORDS.
a. Forms and records applicable for use in performing prescribed
operations are listed below with brief explanations of each.
(1) STANDARD FORM No. 26, DRIVER'S REPORT-ACCIDENT,
MOTOR TRANSPORTATION. One copy of this form will be kept witi
the vehicle at all times. In case of accident resulting in injury c
property damage, it will be filled out by the driver on the spot, or as4
prompItly as practical thereafter.
(2) WAR DEPARTMENT FORM No. 48, DRIVER'S TRIP TICKET
AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SERVICE RECORD. This form, prop-
erly executed, will be furnished to the driver when his vehicle is
dispatched on nontactical missions. The driver and the official user
of the vehicle will complete in detail approximate parts of this form.
These forms need not be issued for vehicles in convoy or on tactical
missions. The reverse side of this form contains the driver's daily
and weekly preventive maintenance service reminder schedule.
(3) W.D., A.G.O. FORM No. 478, MWO AND MAJOR UNIT As-
SEMBLY REPLACEMENT RECORD. This form will be used by all
personnel completing a modification or major unit assembly (engine,
transmission, transfer case, and tracks) replacement to record clearly
the description of work completed, date, vehicle hours, and/or mileage,
and MWO number or nomenclature of unit assembly. Personnel per-
forming the operation will initial in the column provided. Minor
repairs, parts, and accessory replacements will not be recorded.
(4) W.D., A.G.O. FORM No. 6, DUTY ROSTER. This form,
slightly modified, will be used for scheduling and maintaining a record
of vehicle maintenance operations. It may be used for lubricatio
records.
2
TM 9-759
2
GENERAL
O
c'
C.
0c
a
a
IIs 4
w
.u
U
S
E
E
16
f"
C
a
I.-
I~~~~~~~~~~~~~I 6
E
.0
a
-.4
I
B-
0a.I
a'
L.
3
TM 9.759
2.4
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
(5) W.D., A.G.O. FORM No. 462, PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

SERVICE AND TECHNICAL INSPECTION WORK SHEET FOR FULL-TRACK
AND TANK-LIKE WHEELED VEHICLES. This form will be used for
50-hour (500-mile) or 100-hour (1,000-mile) services, and for tech-
nical inspections of these vehicles.
(6) W.D., O.O. FORM No. 7353, SPOT-CHECK INSPECTION RE-
PORT FOR ALL MOTOR VEHICLES. This form may be used by all
commanding officers or their staff representatives in making spot-
check inspections on all vehicles.
(7) W.D., A.G.O. FORM No. 468, UNSATISFACTORY EQUIPMENT
RECORD. This form will be used for reporting manufacturing, design,
or operational defects in materiel with a view to improving and cor-
recting such defects, and for use in recommending modifications of
materiel. This form will not be used for reporting failures, isolated
materiel defects, or malfunctions of materiel resulting from fair wear
and tear or accidental damage, nor for the replacement, repair, or the
issue of parts and equipment. It does not replace currently authorized
operational or performance records.
(8) W.D., O.O. FORM NO. 7370, EXCHANGE PART OR UNIT
IDENTIFICATION TAG. This tag, properly executed, may be used
when exchanging unserviceable items for like serviceable assemblies
parts, vehicles, and tools. 4
Section II
DESCRIPTION AND DATA
3. DESCRIPTION.
a. The Medium Tank M4A3 is an armored, full-track laying
vehicle, powered by a 500-horsepower Ford tank engine which is an
8-cylinder, liquid-cooled, V-type engine designed specifically for tanks.
The engine is located in the rear of the hull. The operator steers the
vehicle by means of two levers, located in the front end of the hull.
The vehicle has five forward speeds and one reverse, and is wired
for radio installation, and for an interphone system within the tank.
The turret can be rotated through 360 degrees. An auxiliary electrical
generating system, consisting of a generating set powered by a 1-
cylinder, 2-cycle gasoline engine, is used to charge the batteries when
the main generator is not operating, or when the use of electrical
units in the vehicle draws large amounts of current.
4. DIFFERENCES AMONG MODELS.
a. M4A3 Tank (76-mm) (fig. 2). The M4A3 tank with a 76-mm
gun is provided with 76-mm ammunition racks which have liquid
filled containers on either side to prevent fire in case the side of
4
TM 9-759
4
4h
,,
IL
0,
e 1 4
/ z
I z-e
v as E
,LU~~~~~~ q
o ~ ~
PI~~L.~~~Y~i"
i~~~a ;:1 ~~a~L ~ E
D.' 4k Dn~~~~~ Os ~C
W.
Z I~ar~ L~IS.
TM 9.759
4
TANK, MEDIUM. M4A3
ao 'i
o :a
..
Z 10~~~~~
Us |
P ·. $··-.f h~~~~~~~~~
::~~~~~~~~~~.
I~~~~~~f~~~~nJ ii~~~~~a
U-
o o~~~~~~~
TM 9.759
4
aDa
n - D -
. -
E
E
Ln
e-
= a ,,a!
7~>
7a W IQ.
TM 9-759
4
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
a.
4
2'
,_
i.d ¢
~1: * ,, / i
at
pql
O| I \ 't:
· a~~~~~~~~~~
z O
o~~~zI
TM 9-759
4-5
DESCRIPTION AI'D DATA
Fehicle is pierced. This is referred to as wet stowage. This vehicle

is equipped with a different style turret than the other M4A3 tanks
(fig. 16). The turret is larger, and has only a partial platform for the
gunner and commander. The loader stands on a subfloor, which
extends across the lower hull level with the sponson.
h. M4A3 Tank (75-mm Wet Stowage Vehicles) (fig. 3). The

M4A3 tank with wet stowage and a 75-mm gun has a full turret floor
which is bracket-mounted to the turret.
c. M4A3 Tank (75-mm Dry Stowage Vehicles) (fig. 4). The

M4A3 tank, with dry stowage and a 75-mm gun, has a basket and
floor that is attached to the turret (fig. 17). Some dry stowage
vehicle turrets, however, are identical to the turret in the M4A3 wet
stowage vehicles. Engine compartment door shutters or a gun travel-
ing lock are not provided for the early M4A3 dry stowage vehicle.
d. M4A3 Tank (105-mm Howitzer Vehicles) (fig. 5). The

M4A3 tank with the 105-mm Howitzer is identical to the M4A3
tank with wet stowage and 76-mm gun, with the exception of the gun
and turret. The 105-mm gun has a larger bore, and the barrel is
onsiderably shorter than the 76-mm gun. The turret on the 105-mm
owitzer vehicle is smaller than the one on the 76-mm gun vehicle,
nd can be rotated manually only (fig. 19).
5. DATA.
a. Vehicle Specifications.
Length, over-all (with sand shield) .................. 20 ft 7 in.
(76-mm including gun) ......... ........ 24 ft 8 in.
Width, ov;er-all (with sand shield) ............. 8 ft 9 in.
Height, over top of A.A. gun pintle stand:
76-mm .... ........................ .................... 1347/s in.
75-mm ...................... .. .. .. ...... . 1327/8 in.
105-mm ......................... ..... ................... 132 7/8 in.
Tread (center to center) .............................. 83 in.
Crew ....... ... .... . . 5 men
Weight of vehicle-empty (approximate):
75-mm .................. ..................... 63,097 lb
76-mm ... ........... ..................... 65,127 lb
105-mm . . . 63,357 lb
Weight of vehicle-loaded (approximate):
75-mm . .......... ....... .......... 69,565 lb
76-mm ...... ....... ................. 71,175 lb
105-mm ...................................... 69,915 lb
9
TM 9.759
5
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
Ground pressure:
23 in. wide track . 10.3 psi
1691,; in. wide track ......... -14.3 psi
Ground contact area:
169,; in. wide track .... 4,870 sq in.
23 in. wide track . 6,760 sq in.
Ground clearance . .......... ... 171/s in.
Octane rating of gasoline ......... ..... 80
Approach angle . . .................. 38 deg
Departure angle ........... 25 deg
Engine (Ford tank engine) model .. ..... GAA
Net horsepower .... ....... 500 at 2,600 rpm
Number of cylinders (60-deg V) ........................... 8
Weight of engine with accessories ......... 2,350 lb
Weight of engine without accessories .... 1,470 lb
Net torque foot pounds . 950 at 2,100 rpm
h. Performance.
Maximum sustained speed on hard road ....... 26 mph

Expected cross-country speeds for various
terrains....... 4 to 26 mph
Maximum allowable engine speed-no load .. 2,800 rpm
Minimum engine idling speed . .......... 500 rpm
Maximum grade ascending ability . ........ 60 pct
Maximum grade descending ability .60 pct
Maximum width of ditch tank will cross 90 in.
Maximum vertical obstacle, such as wall, that the
tank will climb over .. ...... . .. .. 24 in.
Maximum fording depth (at slowest forward speed) 36 in.
Number of miles without refueling (approximate) . .. 100
Oil consumption (approximate) . 50 mi per gal
c. Capacities.
Fuel capacity 168 gal

Power train capacity 164 qt
Cooling system capacity 14 gal
Crankcase capacity . 32 qt
d. Commnlunications.
SCR-508, SCR-528 or SCR-538 (FM) sending and receiv-

ing. SCR-506 sending and receiving (command tanks only).
Five-place interphone system part of all above radio sets.
TM 9.759
6
Section III
* VEHICLE STOWAGE AND SPECIAL TOOLS
6. VEHICLE TOOLS.
a. Pioneer Tools.
Number
Tool Carried Where Carried
Ax, chopping, 4 lb . 1 Rear deck
BAR, crow, pinch point, 5 ft long 1 Rear deck
CUTTERS, wire .. 1 In tool box
HANDLE, mattock ... 1 Rear deck
MA'ITOCK, pick, M1 (without
handle) .... ........... 1 Rear deck
SHOVEL, short-handled ......... 1 Rear deck
SLEDGE, blacksmith, double face,
10 lb ............ ..... ...... 1 Rear deck
hi. Vehicular Tools.
BAR, cross ........ 1 In bag, tool D71860
CHISEL, cold, 3/4-in. ... . 1 In bag, tool D71860
EXTENSION, handy grip, 1/2-in. sq
drive, 5 in. long 1 In bag, tool D71860
EXTENSION, 1/2-in. sq drive, 10 in.
E long .... . .... 1 In bag, tool D71860
FILE, hand, smooth, 8 in. 1 In bag, tool D71860
FILE, 3-sq smooth, 6 in..... . 1 In bag, tool D71860
FIXTURE, set, track connecting and
connector pulling 1 Right rear compart-
ment floor
HAMMER, machinist's, ball peen,
32 oz ... 1 In bag, tool D71860
HANDLE, combination tee, I/2-in. sq
drive, 11 in. long. ........... 1 In bag, tool D71860
HANDLE, combination tee, 3/4-in. sq
drive, 17 in. long .... 1 In bag, tool D71860
HANDLE, flexible, 1/2-in. sq drive, 12
in. long 1 In bag, tool D71860
HANDLE, speeder, 1/2-in. sq drive, 17
in. long ............... .... 1 In bag, tool D71860
JOINT, universal, '/'2-in. sq drive 1 In bag, tool D71860
OILER, trigger-type, 1 pt . 1 In bracket on floor
by assistant driver
PLIERS, combination, slip joint, 8 in. 1 In bag, tool D71860
PLIERS, side-cutting, 8 in ......... 1 In bag, tool D71860
RATCHET, reversible, 1/2 sq drive,
The lists in this section are for information only. They are not to be used as a basis for
lfequisit11on.
11
TM 9-759
6
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
Number
Tool Carried Where Carried
SCREWDRIVER, machinist's, 5-in.
blade ....................................... 1 In bag, tool D71860
SCREWDRIVER, special purpose, 11/2 -
in. blade ....................................... 1 In bag, tool D71860
SCREWDRIVER, special purpose, 13/4-
in. blade ...................................... 1 In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, adjustable, single end, 8
in. long ..................................... 1 In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, adjustable, single end, 12
in. long ...................................... 1 In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, engineer's dble hd alloy
steel, Y.1; x 3/s in........................... 1 In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, engineer's, dble hd alloy
steel, -7/; x 1/2 in............................. 1 In bag, tool D71860
steel, 'Ix 'l/; in........................ 1 In bag, tool D71860
steel, %/8 x 3/4 in............................ 1 In bag, tool D71860
steel, l x 7/s in......................... 1 In bag, tool D71860
steel, l(; x 1 in .. .................... 1 In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, plug ¥' ,;-in. hex (for trans-
mission and oil drain plug) .......... 1 In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, plug, 3/4-in. hex (for differ.
ential filler and drain plug) .......... 1 In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, safety screw, :3.-in. hex .... 1 In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, safety screw, '/s-in. hex ...... 1 In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, safety screw, :Yl;-in. hex ... 1 In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, safety screw, 1/4-in. hex ..... 1 In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, safety screw, /e(;-in. hex ... 1 In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, safety screw, 3 /s-in. hex ...... 1 In bag, tool D71860
5 In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, safety screw, /s-in. hex ..... 1
WRENCH, socket, 1/2-in. sq drive, 3/8
in. sq .. ........................ 1 In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, socket, I/2-in. sq drive, A u-
in. hex ................................... 1 In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, socket, '/2-in. sq drive, 1/2-
in. hex ...................................... In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, socket, 1/2-in. sq drive, :l¶;-
in. hex .. .. .... .... .... 1 In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, socket, 1/2-in. sq drive, S/8-.
in. hex . . .... In bag, tool D71860
12
TM 9-759
6-7
VEHICLE STOWAGE AND SPECIAL TOOLS
Number
Item Carried Where Carried
WRENCH, socket, 1/2-in. sq drive, 3/4-
in. hex ..................................... 1 In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, socket, I/2-in. sq drive, 7/8-
in. hex .............................. .......... 2 In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, socket, 1/2 -in. sq drive,
'lrG-in. hex ....................... 2 In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, socket, 1/2 -in. sq drive, 1-in.
hex ..... .............. 1 In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, socket, 1/2-in. sq drive,
l',;-in. hex ......................... 1 In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, socket, 1/2-in. sq. drive,
11/s-in. hex .................................. 1 In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, socket, 3/4-in. sq. drive,
1l/2-in. hex ........... .................. 1 In bag, tool D71860
WRENCH, track-adjusting .................. 1 On rear deck of tank
in bracket
7. VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND SPARE PARTS.

a. Communication Equipment.
Item
TENNA, complete with cover
(SCD1241) ........................... 1 Blanket roll rack,
rear of tank
Consists of:
Mast section MS49 ................ 1
Mast section MS50 .............. 1
Mast section MS51 ................. 1
Mast section MS52 .................. 1
Mast section MS53.................. 1
FLAG set, M238.......................... 1 In turret bracket,
right side
Composed of:
Case CS-90 .............................. 1 Mounted in channel
Flag, MC-273 (red) ................. 1 Mounted in channel
Flag, MC-274 (orange) ............ 1 Mounted in channel
Flag, MC-275 (green) .......... 1 Mounted in channel
Flagstaff, MC-270 ................... 3
FLARES ...................... ............ 12 In box-mounted on
battery box
White star, parachute, flare, M17 3
White star, cluster, flare, M18 ...... 3
Green star, parachute, flare, M19 . 3
Amber star, parachute, flare, M21 3
813550) -48 2 13
TM 9-759
7
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
Number
PANEL set . ................. 1 In blanket roll rack,
rear of tank
Consistsof:
Cases CS 150 .......... ......... 2
Panel AL 140 .......... .... 1
Panel AL 141 .................. .. 1
PROJECTOR, ground signal, M4 ....... 1 In flare box
RADIO set, SCR-506 ............ ....... . 1
RADIO set, either SCR-508,
SCR-528, or SCR-538 ..... 1
h. Fire Fighting Equipment.

EXTINGUISHER, fire, 4 lb CO ... 2 1 right side transmis-
sion in front hull, 1
rear of turret basket
c. Rations.
TYPE "K," 2 days' rations for 5
men OR ... ........................... 30 boxest Ration box, right
TYPE "C." 2 days' rations for 5 men 60 cans [ rear sponson
TYPE "D," 1 days' rations for 5 men 2 boxes)
dl. Sighting Equipment.

BINOCULAR, M13, complete ...... 1 In bracket in turret
right wall
Consists of:
Binocular, M13 . . ....... 1
Case, carrying M17 ...... 1
BLOCK, direct vision .......... 2 In box in turret to
right of radio
BULB, lamp (for elevation quadrant
and azimuth indicator) ........ 10 In box C101039 be-
hind driver
CASE, carrying, gunner's quadrant,
M1 .... ....... .. 1 In bracket in right
sponson over 5-gal.
water can
HEAD (for periscope, M4A1 and
M6) (spare) ..... .. 15 6 in bracket hood
hatch holder 4
3 in each periscope
box
HEADREST ............. .. 1 On gun mount
HOLDER, periscope .... ... 1 In periscope box in
turret
14
TM 9-759
7
Number
LAMP, electric (for telescope reticle

lights) ...... 2 In box C101039 be-
hind driver
LIGHT, instrument, M32 or M39'
(for telescope M70F) 1 In clip on gun mount
LIGHT, instrument, M30 (for elev.
quadrant periscope M4A1) ..... 1 In clip on gun mount
MOUNT, telescope, M57 1 On gun mount
PERISCOPE, M4A1 (w telescope,
M38A2) (spare) .. 1 In gunner's sighting
device D50897
PERISCOPE, M4A1 (w telescope,
38A2) (spare) . .. 1 In box to right of
gunner's seat on tur-
ret floor
PERISCOPE, M6 6 Mounted in position
PERISCOPE, M6 (spare) 6 4 in hood hatch hold-
er, 2 in turret
UADRANT, elevation, M9 1 On gun mount
ADRANT, gunner's, M1 1 In box in right spon-
-F son over water can
TELESCOPE, M70F . 1 In telescope mount
e. General Equipment.
ADAPTER, extension, hose, type,
lubricating 1 Stowed with lubricat-
ing gun
APPARATUS, decontaminating,
11/2 qt M2 2 In box D82339
BAG, canvas, field O.D., M1936 5 Right front sponson
BAG (for arm spotlight C100212) 1 On spotlight
BAG, tool ... 1 Behind driver's seat
BATTERY (6 to be put in flashlight)
(6 to be put in instr. lights)
(12 spares) 24 In box, C101039
BELT, safety 5
Box. flare 1 On side of battery box
in hull
BUCKET, canvas folding, 18-qt 1 Right sponson
CABLE. towing, 1 's-in. x 20 ft 1 Over left side of ve-
hicle. outside
&ANTEEN. M1910, with cup and
cover M1910 5 3 mounted on turret.
and 2 in hull front
15
TM 9-759
7
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
Number
CATALOG, service parts SNL-G-104 . 1 Manual compartment
CONTAINER, water, 5-gal (QMC
Standard A353) ................. 3 Right sponson
CRANK (for tanks with Wright
R975 engine) ................ 1 On outside and rear
end of tank
FLASHLIGHT, TL-122 (spec.
17-197) .............. 3 In turret on wall,
1 by commander
1 by gunner
1 by loader
GROUSER (when track D48076 or
D48067 is used) ................. . 26 In grouser compart-
ment in rear of tank
GUN, lubricating, pressure (hand-
operated) ... ........................ 1 Right rear lower hub
H OOD, hatch ........ ....................... 1 In bracket between
driver and ass't
INSTRUCTION sheet for compass ........ 1 Manual compartment
KIT, first-aid (24-unit) (spec. 1553) . 1 Right front sponson
KIT, accessories, Homelite ....... 1 In tool box right front
sponson
Consists of:
Plug, spark .... ....... 3
Rope and grip, starting ............ 1
Screwdriver .................... 1
Socket, spark plug ............... 1
Wrench, double-end .............. 1
LAMP, inspection .......................... 1 In lamp, inspection,
B209297A
LAMP, inspection ..... .............. 1 In tool box
LAMP (spare for flashlight) ....... 1 In box C101039 be-
hind driver
LIST, organizational spare parts
and equipment, SNL G-104 .... 1 Manual box, right
rear sponson
MANUAL, field, for cal. .30 MG
M1919A4, FM 23-50 .......... 1 Manual box, right
rear sponson
MANUAL, field, for cal. .50 MG M2,
FM 23-65 1 Manual box, right
rear sponson
16
9.759
7-8
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
Number
TUBE, flexible, nozzle 2 Right rear sponson

next to manual box
WAR DEPT. Lub. Order No. 58A for
comb. gun mount M34 ............. 1 In bracket in hull
WAR DEPT. Lub. Order No. 104 for
M 4A 3 ........................................... 1 In 'bracket in hull
WIRE, soft iron, 14 ga, 10 ft ........... 1 Tool bag behind
driver's seat
f. Vehicle Spare Parts.

BULB, lamp, 3 cp 24-28V ....... 4 In tool box - right
front sponson
CONNECTION, end (furnish in accord-
ance with track) ...... 1......
2 Right rear tool box
in hull
~ ING, lubrication, straight 1/s in.
---- 3 Stowed with lubricat-
ing gun
TING, relief---/s-in. 27 N.P.T .. 3 Stowed with lubricat-
ing gun
NUT, safety, %/a-18 NF-3 (furnish in
accordance with track) .... 16 Right rear tool box
in hull
PIN (used with 23-in,. T55 track) ... 6 In right rear tool box
in hull
PIN (used with 23-in., T63 track) .... 24 In right rear tool box
in hull
SHOE assembly (furnish with wide
track only) ............ 6 3 mounted in left
rear side
3 mounted right rear
side
TRACK (shoe) assembly (to match)
track furnished) ............... 6 In brackets on rear
of tank
WEDGE (furnish in accordance with
track being used) ..... 12 Right rear tool box
on hull
GUN TOOLS.
'a. 75-mm Gun.
EYE bolt, breechblock removing . 1 Spare parts box
ROD, push (for shaft B163351) . 1 Spare parts box
18
TM 9.759
7
Number
MANUAL, technical (for Homelite
generator)), TM 9-1731K . 1 Manual box, right
rear sponson
MANUAL, technical (for hydraulic
traverse (Oilgear)), TM 9-1727K 1 Manual box, right
rear sponson
MANUAL, technical (for Gyro-
stabilizer) .................. 1 Manual box, right
rear sponson
MANUAL, (technical for 76-mm gun
M1) ............ 1 Manual box, right
rear sponson
MANUAL, technical (for operator),
TM 9-759, (Med. Tk. M4A3 only) 1 Manual box, right
rear sponson
MITTENS, asbestos, prs . . 2 On oddment tray, in
turret
NET, camouflage, cotton, shrimp,
45-ft x 45-ft (spec. T-1669) . 1 In bracket on rear
of turret
OIL, engine (spec. 2-104) (in con-
tainer 1-qt, type 1, class D, spec.
100-13) ........ ........... . 8 Right rear tool box
OIL, hydraulic (spec. 2-79) (in con-
tainer 1-qt, type 1, Class D, spec.
100-13).... . 1 Right rear tool box
PADLOCK, 1 /2 -in., 2 keys . ........ 1 In turret
PAULIN, 12 ft x 12 ft .......... 1 In bracket on rear of
tank
ROLL, blanket ... .... . 5 In bracket on rear of
tank
STOVE, cooking, gasoline M1941,
1 burner .............. ....... 1 Right rear sponson
with rations
Consists of:
Coleman military burner No.
520 with accessory cups,
81/2 in. high 4 7j ,; in. dia.
TAPE, adhesive, olive drab, 4 in. wide
x 15 yd long (spec. AXS-871) 1 Tool box, right front
sponson
TAPE, friction, 3/4 in. wide, 30-ft roll 1 Tool box, right
hull
17
TM 9-759
8-9
b. Caliber .30 Machine Gun M1919A4.

Number
Ihm Carried Where Carried
SCREWDRIVER, common, 3-in. blade 2 Spare parts box
WRENCH, combination, M6 ............ 2 Spare parts box
WRENCH, socket, front barrel bearing
plug ............. .............. ....... Spare parts box
c. Caliber .50 Machine Gun M2.
WRENCH, combination, M2 .............. 1 Spare parts box
9. GUN EQUIPMENT.
a. 75-mm Gun.
(1) AMMUNITION. 4 rounds in box on
75-MM rounds .............................. 104 basket floor
100 rounds in vertical
racks on hull floor
(2) EQUIPMENT. Manual box, right

-- iOK, Arty. gun, O.O. Form 5825 .... 1 rear sponson
lE In tool box, right
WlUSH, bore, M10, w/staff ................ front sponson
Consists of:
Brush, bore, M10, B168024 .... 1
Staff, end, B197239 .................. 1 Under blanket roll
carrier on rear of
tank
Staff, middle, B197240 .......... 1.. Under blanket roll
carrier on rear of
tank
Staff, middle, B164039 ........... 1
COVER, bore brush, M516 ............... 1 On bore brush
COVER, breech .................................... On gun
COVER, muzzle ................................. 1 On gun
EXTRACTOR, shell .............................. 1 Behind driver's seat
GUN, lubricating oil (2 oz) .............. 1 Spare parts box
HOSE, assembly ................................1 With gun lub. oil
OIL, recoil, special (spec. AXS-808)
(in container I-qt, type 1, class D,
spec. 100-13) .............................. 1 In tool box, right
rear lower hull
MMER, cleaning and unloading,
4 ................................ In spare parts box
19
TM 9-759
9
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
Number
Item Carried . 'ere Carried
ROLL, spare parts, M13
(w o contents) ........................... 1 In spare parts box
SETTER, fuze, M14 .............. 1 In spare parts box
SIGHT, bore, complete muzzle-
RF11CD, breech-RF11HA ........ 1 Tool box, right rear
lower hull
TABLE, firing ......... .......... 1........
TARGET, testing (set of 4) .............. 1 Tool box, right rear
lower hull
WRENCH, fuze, M7 ..................... 1 Tool box, right rear
lower hull
hi. Caliber .30 Machine Gun M1919A4.

(1) AMMUNITION.
CAL. .30, rounds (in box, M1 D44070
and belt C3951) .. . . 6250 16 boxes right fr
sponson
7 boxes in left spon-
son over battery
2 boxes on gun
(2) EQUIPMENT.
BAG, empty cartridge, cal. .30
(flex bow gun) ..... 1 On gun
BAG, empty cartridge, cal. .30
(turret) ...... ............ 1 On gun
BELT,.ammunition, 250 rounds . . 25 In box, ammunition,
cal. .30 M1 D44070
Box, ammunition, cal..30, M1 ..... 25 See ammunition
stowage
BRUSH, chamber-cleaning, M6 1 Spare parts box right
front sponson
BRUSH, cleaning, cal..30, M2 6 Spare parts box right
front sponson
CAN, tubular (w/o contents) .. 1 Spare parts box right
front sponson
CASE, cleaning rod, M1 ............ 2 Spare parts box right
front sponson
CASE, cover group ..... . 1 Spare parts box ri
front sponson
CASE, spare bolt, M2 (w/o contents) 4 Spare parts box rigP
front sponson
COVER, muzzle, cal. .30 (flex bow
gun) .......... .. . 1... On gun
COVER, muzzle, cal. .30 (turret) 1 On gun
TM 9-759
9
Number
COVER, receiver, cal. .30 (flex bow

gun) . ........................ 1 On gun
COVER, receiver, cal. .30 (turret) ... 1 On gun
COVER, spare barrel, cal. .30 . 2 On spare barrel
COVER, tripod mount, M2 (head
cover) 1 On tripod, M2
Envelope, spare parts, M1 (w'o
contents) .. ...... 2 Spare parts box right-
front sponson
EXTRACTOR, ruptured cartridge,
Mk IV ........... . 2 In small tool box
1 in turret
1 in right sponson
MOUNT, tripod, machine gun, cal. .30,
M2 . 1 On floor next to wall
under ass't driver
OILER, rectangular, 12-oz 1 Spare parts box
REFLECTOR, barrel, cal..30 1 Spare parts box
ROD, cleaning, jointed, cal. .30, M1 2 One in each of two
cleaning rod cases,
lEb~~~~~~~M1-C6573
L, spare parts, M13
(w.'o contents) . ... 2 Spare parts box
ROLL, tool, M12 (w.'o contents) ... 2 Spare parts box

(1) AMMUNITION.
CAL. .50 rounds (in box,
M2-D73913) ...... 600 6 boxes, right rear
sponson
(2) EQUIPMENT.
BAG, eml-ty cartridge ..................... On gun
BAG, metallic, belt link 1 On gun
Box, ammunition, cal..50, M2 ...... 6 See ammunition
stowage
BRUSH, cleaning, cal. .50, M4 .... 4 Spare parts box
CASE, cleaning rod, M15 ............ 1 Spare parts box
CHUTE, metallic, belt link, M1 . 1 On gun
COVER,barrel 2 On barrel
ENVELOPE, spare parts, M1
(w.'o contents) 2 Spare parts box
EXTRACTOR, ruptured cartridge 1 Spare parts box
OUNT, cal. .50 machine gun 1 In brackets on rear of
turret
21
TM 9-759
9-10
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
Number
OILER, filling, oil buffer ................ 1 Spare parts box

ROD, jointed, cleaning, M7 ........... 1 Spare parts box
d. Caliber .45 Submachine Gun M3.
(1) AMMUNITION.
CAL. .45, rounds (in 30 rd. clips
D35506) .................. ........... 900 In cases D90242
(2) EQUIPMENT.
CASE, cal. .45 submachine gun clip ... 5 2 in turret under ra-
dio, 3 in right front
spare parts box
e. 2-Inch Mortar M3.
(1) AMMUNITION.
BOMB, smoke, 2-in. ................ 12 3 in armored box in
turret
9 in armored box in
left sponson oveA
battery box
(2) EQUIPMENT.
BRUSH, bore-cleaning, 2-in. bomb
thrower, Mk 1 ................ . .. 1 Spare parts box
CATCH, hammer ........ ....... ......... 1 Spare parts box
PIN, firing ... .. .. 1 Spare parts box
PIN, swivel, also catch ......... 1 Spare parts box
SPRING, catch ... 1... Spare parts box
SPRING, catch, junction nut ....... 1 Spare parts box
SPRING, main .. ............. 1 Spare parts box
SWIVEL, hammer ............. ....... 1 Spare parts box
Hand Grenades.
f.
FRAGMENTATION, Mk 11 .. ... 4 In turret
SMOKE, WP M15 .......... . 4 In turret
SMOKE, colored, M16 or M18 . 4 In turret
10. GUN SPARE PARTS.

a. 75-mm Gun.
FORK, firing pin cocking . 1 Spare parts box
GASKET, recoil cylinder filling plug 2 Spare parts box
MECHANISM, percussion, assembly 1 Spare parts box
Consists of:
Guide, (firing pin) . .. 1
Pin, firing 1
Pin, straight, 1'2 firing
x 5/8,
pin guide . 1
Spring (firing pin retracting) 1
Stop (firing spring) 1
TM 9-759
10
Number
PIN, cotter, 1/8 x 13/4 ...... 3 Spare parts box

PIN, firing ............... ...... ....... 1 Spare parts box
PLUG, filling, recoil cylinder .......... 2 Spare parts box
PLUNGER, cocking fork ........... 1 Spare parts box
RETAINER, sear ........................ .... 1 Spare parts box
SPRING, cocking fork plunger . .... 1 Spare parts box
SPRING, firing ................................ 1 Spare parts box
SPRING, (firing pin retracting) .......... 1 Spare parts box
SPRING, sear ... ............................... 1 Spare parts box
h. Caliber .30 Machine Gun M1919A4.

BAND, lock, front barrel bearing ........ 1 Spare parts box
BARREL ........................................ 2 Lower hull, mounted
vertically next to
ass't driver
BEARING, barrel, front .................. 1 Spare parts box
LT group .............................. 2 1 each in small spare
parts boxes, located
near each .30-cal.
gun
Consists of:
Bolt, assembly ............... ....... 1
Extractor, assembly .......... 1
Lever, cocking ..... .................... 1
Pin, cocking lever ............. 1
Pin, firing, assembly .................. 1
Rod, driving spring, assembly .. 1
Sear ........................................ 1
Spring, driving .......................... 1
Spring, sear, assembly .......... 1
COVER group 1 Spare parts box
Consists of:
Cover, assembly ................... 1
Lever, feed belt ............. .......... 1
Pawl, feed belt ................... 1
Pin, belt feed pawl, assembly .... 1
Pivot, belt feed lever, group
assembly ................................ 1
Slide, feed belt, assembly ........ 1
Spring, cover extractor ............ 1
Spring, feed belt pawl ......... 1
23
TM 9.759
10
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
Number
EXTENSION, barrel, group .... 1 Spare parts box

Consists of:
Extension, barrel, assembly 1
Lock, breech ........ 1........
1
Pin, breech, lock, assembly ....... 1
Spring, locking barrel .. ..... 1
FRAME, lock, group .. ......... 1
1... Spare parts box
Consists of:
Accelerator ......... 1
Frame, lock, assembly ............ 1
Pin, accelerator, assembly .... 1
Pin, trigger .. ................ ... 1
Plunger, barrel, assembly ...... 1
Spring, barrel plunger .......... 1
Spring, trigger pin ............. 1
Trigger ......... ........... 1
LEVER, cocking .................. 1 Spare parts box
LEVER, feed belt ............... ........... 1 Spare parts box
PAWL, feed belt . ................ 1 Spare parts box
PAWL, holding belt ................... 1 Spare parts box
PIN, accelerator, assembly .. 1 Spare parts box
PIN, belt holding pawl, split ...... 1 Spare parts box
PIN, cocking lever ..... ....... 1 Spare parts box
PIN, firing, assembly ............... 1 Spare parts box
PIN, trigger ........... 1 Spare parts box
SCREW, belt feed lever pivot .......... 1 Spare parts box
SPRING, barrel plunger ................ 1 Spare parts box
SPRING, belt feed pawl . ........ 1 Spare parts box
SPRING, belt holding pawl ........ 2 Spare parts box
SPRING, cover extractor ............. 1 Spare parts box
SPRING, locking barrel ........... 1 Spare parts box
SPRING, sear, assembly ....... 2 Spare parts box
SPRING, trigger pin ................... 1 Spare parts box
TRIGGER ..... .. . .. ... 1 Spare parts box
WASHER, lock, toothed. S. Reg. No. 6 1 Spare parts box

BARREL, assembly .. 1 In bracket on rig
i
side plate behiAl
ass't driver
DISK, muffler . . 1 Spare parts box
EXTENSION, firing pin, assembly 1 Spare parts box
EXTRACTOR, assembly ..... 1 Spare parts box
24
TM 9-759
10-11
Number
LEVER. cocking 1 Spare parts box

PIN, cotter, belt feed lever pivot stud 1 Spare parts box
PIN, cotter, cover pin 1 Spare parts box
PIN, cotter, switch pivot 2 Spare parts box
PIN, firing 1 Spare parts box
PLUNGER, belt feed lever 1 Spare parts box
ROD, driving spring, w spring
assembly 1 Spare parts box
SLIDE, belt feed, group 1 Spare parts box
Consists of:
Arm, belt feed pawl, B8914 1
Pawl, feed belt, ass'y B8961 1
Pin, belt feed pawl, ass'y B8962 1
Slide, belt feed, ass'y B261110 1
Spring, belt feed pawl, A9351 1
SLIDE, sear 1 Spare parts box
SPRING, belt feed lever plunger 1 Spare parts box
SPRING, belt-holding pawl 1 Spare parts box
SPRING, cover extractor 1 Spare parts box
RING, locking barrel 1 Spare parts box
Spare parts box
i ING. sear
bolt
D,
1
1 Spare parts box
11. SPECIAL TOOLS.

Name Federal Stock Number Mfr. Tool Number
Adapter, volute spring, removing 41-A-30-650

Block, riser, bogie wheels 41-B-1411-200
Compressor, suspension volute
spring 41-C-2556 MTM-M3-3
Fixture, removing and replacing,
power train assembly 41-F-2997-220 MTM-M3-165
Guide, bogie wheel gudgeon, in-
stalling (formerly 41-G-2500) 41-G-1235-505 MTM-M3-5
Indicator, top dead center, and
timer 41-I-115 KRW-T-77
Lift, bogie wheel 41-L-1375 MTM-M3-813
Pin, alining, tapered, bolt-holes-
to-power-train and hull points 41-P-555-600 MTM-M3-164
Pin, holding, tapered, power
train assembly 41 -P-647
Puller, idler wheel 41-P-2940-800 MTM-M3-8
ler, slide hammer type, bogie
Dudgeon 41-P-2957-27
~~~~- ~25
TM 9-759
11
TANK. MEDIUM, M4A3
Name Federal Stock Number Mfr. Tool Number
Replacer, bearing cups, inner

bogie and 13-in. idler wheels,
inner and outer 10-in. idler
wheels
Replacer, bearing cups, track
rollers (inner and outer) 41-R-2385-350
Screwdriver, special, adjusting 41-S-1652-500 KRW-T-59
Sling, radiator lifting 41-S-3332-86 TEC-50-63
Tool, idler wheel installing 41-T-3216-150 MTM-M3-9
Wrench, box, double offset, long,
double hex, 91j; x %/8 in. 41-W-601-543 BF-2806L
Wrench, box special offset,' car-
buretor heatbox nuts 41-W-639-850 KRW-T-40
Wrench, cylinder head nut, long 41-W-866-200 KRW-T-9
Wrench, cylinder head nut, short 41-W-866-250 KRW-T-29
Wrench, engineer's, 45- and 90-
deg angle, dble hd, open end,
/ 5-in. opening both ends (for-
merly 41-W-1465) 41-W-1059
Wrench, pipe, chain, flat link,
pipe capacity 5/8- to 41/2-in.,
117/8 in. long 41-W-1781-100 TEC-50-54
Wrench, set, socket, 1-in. sq drive,
extra heavy duty, consisting of: 41-W-2622 TM-M3-16A
Bar, socket wrench, exten-
sion, 8 in. long, 1-in. sq drive
(formerly 41-B-310-100) 41-B-310 SN-L-63
Bar, socket, wrench, sliding,
22 in. 41-B-312-200 MTM-M3-16L
Handle, tubular, 36-in. long,
11/s in. inside diameter,
1GuA in. outside diameter' 41-H-1408-50 MTM-M3-160
Head, ratchet, socket wrench,
1-in. sq drive 41-H-1838 MTM-M3-16M
Head, square, 1 in. male 41-H-1779-50 MTM-M3-16E
Wrench, socket, hex, 1-in. sq
drive, 11/2 in. 41-W-3058-200 MTM-M3-1
drive, 1ila, in. 41-W-3058-300 MTM-M3-1W
drive, 21 in. 41-W-3058-430 MTM-M3-16F
drive, 23/s in. 41-W-3058-450 MTM-M3-16H
TM 9-759
11
Name Federal Stack Number Mfr. Tool Number

drive, 25/ in. 41-W-3058-480 MTM-M3-16K
Wrench, socket, splined, turning
camshaft 41-W-2964-300 KRW-T-80
Wrench, socket, (detachable)
1-in. sq drive, 12-point dble hex
opening 21/ -in. 41-W-3059-40 SN-LDH-683
Wrench, spanner, track support
roller retainer 41-W-3261 MTM-M3-11
27
TM 9.759
12-13
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
PART TWO-OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Section IV
DRIVING CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS
12. DOORS.
a. Driver's and Assistant Driver's Doors (fig. 174). The doors
provided for the driver and assistant driver on some vehicles are
held open by means of a spring-loaded latch. On other vehicles the
doors are held open or closed by a locking-type handle. To close
the doors on the spring-loaded latch type doors, pull down on the
latch lever, and at the same time pull the door closed. The doors
may be secured from the inside by means of a sliding bolt latch.
b. Escape Hatch (fig. 175). The emergency escape hatch is
located in the hull floor directly behind the assistant driver's seat. To
open the hatch, lift the ratchet release, and kick the locking lev
forward.
13. DRIVING CONTROLS.

a. Brakes (fig. 6).
(1) SERVICE BRAKES. Pulling back simultaneously on both steer-
ing levers slows down or stops the vehicle, depending on the effort
applied.
(2) PARKING BRAKES.
(a) Steering Lever Type. The steering-lever type parking brake
(fig. 7) is controlled by means of a foot pedal which operates a
quadrant in conjunction with the steering brake control levers. To
set the brakes, kick the pedal toward the rear (this will raise the
quadrant into position to contact the pawls on the steering brake con-
trol levers), then pull hard on both levers. To release the brakes, pull
back on both levers and push the pedal forward and down, then re-
lease the levers slowly. The brakes must be released before attempting
to move the vehicle.
(b) Transmission Type. On some vehicles the parking brake is
located at the rear of the transmission to the right of the driver. This
design is a transmission-type brake, and must never be used for any
purpose other than parking. To apply the parking brake, pull bac,
on the lever. To release the brake, push the lever forward as far
possible.
b. Steering Levers (figs. 6 and 7). Two steering levers are
mounted on the floor of the vehicle in front of the driver's seat. To
steer the vehicle, pull the steering lever on the side toward which it
28
TM 9.759
13
zZ 1' _
z C,
z > z - X
0 -0
~ 0E
_n _ I
zD X s O
ZZ
_, <, 0
0, Q
'- -
'V
he
D <-
ad z
- -
0 Z
,, , ,~~~~~
~~u v
81:,,:-,.,)o
o -4_ - 3 29
TM 9-759
13
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
oo.
Xz - U Z U
O O ,_ O c
IL
I L I-.U O' °
0w P
In
r4
M.E
co| ~ _
Cl < o V
TM 9-759
13
STEFRING LEVER S PARKING BRAKE PEDAL FOOT THROTTLE PEDAL
RA PD 329245
Figure 8-Parking Brake Controls (Later Vehiclesl
is desired to turn. Pulling back either one of the levers slows down
the track on that side, while the speed of the other track is increased.
e. Throttle Controls (figs. 7 and 8). A foot throttle pedal is
located on the floor in front of the driver's seat, convenient to the
driver's right foot. In conjunction with the foot pedal, a hand-operated
throttle is provided, which is bracket-mounted to the differential case
above the foot throttle. A lock button is located in the center of the
hand throttle button. This lock button holds the hand throttle at the
desired setting. To close the hand throttle, press the lock button. On
75-mm and 105-mm howitzer vehicles there is a two-speed idle
mechanism connected to the throttle sleeve on the clutch cross shaft
assembly at the rear of the driver's subfloor. When the clutch pedal
is depressed, the stop screw on the engine carburetors should be
adjusted (par. 72 e) so that the engine idles at 375 revolutions per
minute. When the clutch pedal is in the engaged (fully back) posi-
tion, the linkage of the two-speed idle mechanism should be adjusted
to idle the engine at 800 revolutions per minute. This mechanism is
orporated so that the propeller shaft driven generator will charge
Fe batteries when the vehicle is standing with the engine idling at
31
TM 9-759
13
TANK. MEDIUM. M4A3
AIR CLEANER 1 -
1 -RIGHT HORIZONTAL
FUEL TANK VALVE
2-RIGHT VERTICAL
FUEL TANK VALVE
3-LEFT VERTICAL
FUEL TANK VALVE
4-LEFT HORIZONTAL
FUEL TANK VALVE
RA PD 329604
Figure 9-Fuel Shut-off Valves (75-mm Dry Stowage Vehicles)
800 revolutions per minute, and the gear shifting will be easier when
engine idle drops to 375 revolutions per minute.
d1. Clutch (fig 7). The clutch pedal is located on the floor in
front of the driver's seat, convenient to the driver's left foot. To per-
mit shifting of gears, the clutch is disengaged by depressing the clutch
pedal. At any time that the clutch pedal free play becomes less than
21/2 inches, the clutch pedal must be adjusted. CAUTION: Do not
ride the clutch pedal.
e. Fuel Shut-off Val'es (figs. 9 and 10). On wet stowage and
105-mm howitzer vehicles, two shut-off valves, one for each set of fuel
tanks, are located on the right and left side of the bulkhead at the
rear of the fighting compartment. On 75-mm dry stowage vehicley
four fuel shut-off valves are provided (one for each tank) located c
the fighting compartment bulkhead to the right of the transmissiol
oil cooler (fig. 9).
f. Primer (fig. 7). A priming pump is located either to the right
of the steering lever above the hand throttle or on the instrument
32
TM 9.759
13
z
o E
0~Z eC,( eI
z 0z
I-- Z L
D -U 0z · -'" I E
U0 U \ u
E
oZ
- -C
O0 < "3
0 Zo
. - ,E z o"
o ,, A
TM 9-759
13
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
RA PD 27493
Figure 11--Gearshiff Lever Positions
panel on earlier models. To operate the primer, the knob is pulled

out and pushed back in. This causes a quantity of gasoline to be forced
directly into the intake manifold. for cold weather starting. The
priming pump is used in place of the conventional choke. Ordinarily
it will not be necessary to use the primer except during cold weather.
Excessive priming of the engine will cause flooding and failure to
start, and the excess gasoline will wash the oil from the cylinder walls,
with the result that the cylinders will not be properly lubricated until
the engine oil starts circulating.
g. Gearshift Lever. Shifting of gears in the transmission is ac-
complished by means of the gearshift lever, located on the left side
of the transmission, to the right of the driver. The positions of the
gearshift lever for the various speeds are shown in figure 11. The
gearshift lever is equipped with a latch which prevents accidental
shifting into first speed or reverse. The latch must be released bi
pressing down the button on top of the lever before shifting into firs
speed or reverse.
h. Engine Comnlartlent )Door Slihutter (:Cntrols. The engine
compartment doors on some of the vehicles are provided with shutters
34
TM 9-759
13
A
B E F
¢ D H
-UI T P MOL
A-UTILITY OUTLET
B-PANEL LIGHT SWITCH
C-AMMETER
D-OIL PRESSURE GAGE
E-CIRCUIT BREAKER RESET BUTTONS
F-TEMPERATURE GAGE
G-FUEL GAGE
H-LIGHT SWITCH
J-FUEL GAGE SELECTOR SWITCH
K-IGNITION SWITCH
L-STARTER SWITCH
M-BOOSTER SWITCH (NOT USED)
N-TACHOMETER
O-PANEL LIGHT COVERS
P-FUEL CUT-OFF
Q-SPEEDOMETER
R-HI WATER TEMPERATURE AND LOW OIL PRESSURE
SIGNAL LIGHT
RA PD 329471
Figure 12-Typical Instrument Panel 175-mm Wet Stowage,

76-mm, and 105-mm Howitzer Vehiclesl
controlled by cables, mounted on the rear bulkhead in the fighting

compartment (fig. 10). These shutters should be closed only when
I operating the engine in cold weather. To open the shutters, push in

the control cable knob with the palm of the hand. To close the
tters, press in on the lock button with the thumb, and at the same
tne pull out on the knob.
35
TM 9.759
13
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
3t
O _Db *6tOI L E
v0 m
36
TM 9-759
13
W
wio
0 3
o .s _ *1: 0_
0~C37
I II I l
U- 0- 0
<a-U <
D
TM 9.759
14
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
14. INSTRUMENTS.
a. Ammeter (figs. 12 and 13). An ammeter (B199959) is pro-

vided with a range of 100-ampere discharge to 100-ampere charge. If,
during normal operation, when little current is being used, the am-
meter consistently indicates discharge, refer to paragraph 43.
b. Tachometer (figs. 12 and 13). A tachometer is provided on

the instrument panel. On the 75-mm dry stowage vehicles, the throttle
stop screw on the carburetor should be so adjusted that the engine
will idle at 500 revolutions per minute after warming up, and on the
wet stowage and 105-mm howitzer vehicles, the throttle stop screw
must be adjusted so the engine will idle at 800 revolutions per minute
with the clutch pedal in a fully returned position (par. 72 c). If, dur-
ing operation under full load, it is possible to run the engine at speeds
above 2,600 revolutions per minute, or if the governor limits the
speed at some point below 2,600 revolutions per minute, notify higher
authority.
c. Oil Pressure Gage (figs. 12 and 13). An engine oil pressur 1

gage (6208795) is provided on the instrument panel, and at normal
temperatures the oil pressure should be between 60 and 110 pounds.
If, during operation, the oil pressure suddenly drops off, immediately
stop the engine. This fault may be due to low oil level. If oil pres-
sure drops off slowly, it may be due to a change in the viscosity of the
oil caused by overheating. Check the engine temperature.
d. Engine Boil and Low Oil Pressure Signal (figs. 12 and 13).
A red jewel-type light on the panel signals the driver when the oil
pressure drops below 8 pounds, or when the water temperature is
higher than 235°F. On some earlier vehicles, two separate units are
provided (fig. 13).
e. Speedometer (figs. 12 and 13). The speedometer is equipped

with a trip mileage reset, located at the rear of the instrument panel.
f. Engine Temperature Gage (figs. 12 and 13). The engine

temperature gage is calibrated either from 60°F to 260°F or from
100^ to 260°F. The cooling sy-*em is sealed, with the result that
the boiling point of the coolant is raised, and overheating does not
occur until a temperature of approximately 235°F is reached. In
normal operation, under maximum power on a level, hard surface
the engine temperature should not be greater than 90°F above
atmospheric temperature.
g. Fuel Level Gage and Selector Switch (figs. 12 and 13). A

selector switch and fuel level gage permit the checking of the fuel
38
TM 9-759
14-15
[vel in the fuel tanks. The selector switch has two "ON" positions,
"R" and "L." With the selector switch in the "OFF" position, the fuel
level gage (6209888) will read "E" (empty).
h. Engine Oil Level Gage (fig. 13). An engine oil level gage is
provided on some earlier vehicles. It indicates whether sufficient oil
is carried in the engine oil pan sump. As long as the oil level gage is
in the green sector with the engine idling, the oil level is satisfactory.
When the reading drops to the red sector, oil should be added to bring
the oil level up to the 32-quart or "FULL" mark on the engine bayonet
gage. Oil level gages are not supplied on vehicles of current produc-
tion and are removed, when they become inoperative, from vehicles
of early production (par. 92 h (6)).
i. Transmission Oil Temperature Gage (fig. 13). An oil tem-
perature gage (6208797) having a range of from 100°F to 325°F
is provided on some vehicles. It indicates the temperature of the oil
in the transmission. In normal operation the temperature of the
transmission oil should not exceed 200°F. The most common cause
of overheating is too much oil in the transmission. Check the level of
se transmission oil.
I j. Compass (fig. 7). The driver's compass is mounted either on
the front hull plate over the instrument panel or on the center of the
front hull plate.
15. SWITCHES, CIRCUIT BREAKERS, AND UTILITY OUT-

LETS.
a. Light Switch.
(1) ROTARY TYPE (fig. 12). On some vehicles a rotary-type
switch (C136186) is provided, which includes the blackout driving
light control. The switch is equipped with a safety button to prevent
the switch being accidentally turned to other than blackout position.
To release the safety button, push it with the thumb and at the same
time turn the switch. The switch has four positions (besides "OFF")
controlling the lights as marked on the switch.
(2) PULL TYPE (fig. 13). On other models the knob on the
instrument panel marked "LIGHTS" controls the service lights and
the blackout driving lights. A spring-operated safety button prevents
the knob from being accidentally pulled out beyond the blackout
)osition. To release the safety button, push the button in with thumb,
At the same time continuing the outward pull on the knob with the
39
TM 9.759
15
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
first and second fingers. The switch has three positions (besides
"OFF") controlling the lights as follows:
Light Switch
Position Lights Operating Location
Blackout- Blackout marker lights Top of right and left
1st position headlights
Blackout taillights Lower section right and
left taillights
Blackout stop light Upper section right-
(when steering lever hand taillight
is pulled back)
Service- Service headlights Right and left headlight
2nd position
Service taillight Upper section left-hand
taillight
Service stop light (when Upper section left-hand
steering lever is pulled taillight
back)
Stop light- Service stop light Upper section left-han
3rd position taillight
(3) BLACKOUT DRIVING LIGHT SWITCH (fig. 13). The blackout
driving light may be used to supply illumination for driving when
the service driving lights might reveal the position of the vehicle.
First, remove both service head lamps from their sockets at the front
of the vehicle. Then insert the blackout driving lamp in the left front
lamp socket. With the master light switch pulled out to first position,
pull out on blackout driving light switch button to turn on driving
light. The blackout headlight, marker lights, taillights and stop light
will also be on with switches in this position. CAUTION: Under battle
conditions the blackout driving light should be used intermittently
and only when absolutely necessary for safe vision.
h. Instrument Panel Light Switch (figs. 12 and 13). A five-

position rheostat switch C-102763 is provided which controls the
brilliance of the panel lights.
c. Battery Master Switch (figs. 7 and 14). The battery master

switch is located to the left of the driver on most vehicles; however.
on some early vehicles the switch is located approximately 30 inches
to the rear of the driver's seat. The switch is "ON" when the knob
is all the way in. To turn the switch off, raise the knob and turn
so that the knob stays in-the "OUT" position. When this switch is
"OFF," all electrical power is shut cff at the battery (with the excep-
tion of the power used by the radio, which is controlled by a separate
radio master switch).
TM 9-759
15
TURRET BASKET ,
RADIO MASTER SWITCH
BATTERY MASTER SWITCH
RA PD 329508
IFigure 14-Battery and Radio Master Switches lEarly 75-mm

Dry Stowage Vehicles)
d. Radio Mlaster Sitch (figs. 7 and 14). The radio master

switch is located next to, and is turned "ON" or "OFF" in the same
manner as the battery master switch (subpar. c above).
c. Ignition Switch (figs. 12 and 13). The two 4-cylinder Bosch
magnetos are controlled by a four-position rotary switch on the instru-
ment panel. When the switch lever is turned to the "BOTH" position,
both magnetos are "ON." When the switch lever is at the position
marked "L," only the left-hand magneto is "ON," and the engine will
run only on the left-hand four-cylinders (left or right is as viewed
from the rear of the vehicle when facing in the direction the vehicle
is headed). When the ignition switch lever is at the position marked
"R," the right-hand magneto is "ON." and the engine will run only
on the right-hand four cylinders.
f. Starter Switch (figs. 12 and 13). Either a starter switch or
button is provided on the instrument panel. With the battery
master switch "ON," turn the lever to the left (on early models push
the starter button "IN"), this completes the circuit through the
anking motor relay closing the cranking motor circuit, causing
e cranking motor to crank the engine.
41
TM 9-759
15.16
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
g. Fuel Cut-off (figs. 12 and 13). On the instrument panel a push

button or a spring-located toggle switch marked "FUEL CUT-OFF"
(G 103-17-93650) operates the carburetor degasser electrically.
This shuts off the fuel from the idle fuel supply wells in the car-
buretor. When stopping the engine, always press this button in
(on early models push the toggle switch to the right) and hold it
in this position until. the engine stops, before turning off the ignition.
h. Horn or Siren Button (fig. 7). A push button for sounding
the horn or siren is provided and is located either on the right-hand
steering lever, or is bracket-mounted directly above the clutch pedal.
i. Circuit Breakers. Circuit breakers are used in most of the
various circuits, as shown in the different circuit drawings in section
XIII, to protect the circuit from overload. When an overload occurs,
the circuit breaker opens the circuit automatically. To again close
the circuit, press the particular circuit breaker button. If the circuit
breaker continues to open, refer to the paragraph and symptom thal
applies in section XIII (Trouble Shooting). q
j. Utility Outlets (figs. 12 and 13). Utility outlets are provided
on the instrument panel that permit plugging in a trouble light, a
hatch hood windshield wiper power plug, etc.
Section V
OPERATION UNDER ORDINARY CONDITIONS
16. USE OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS IN VEHICULAR
OPERATION.
a. New Vehicle Run-in Test. Before a new or reconditioned
vehicle is placed in service, be sure that the new vehicle run-in test
described in paragraphs 31, 32, and 33 has been performed.
b. Before-operation Service. Perform the services in items (1)
through (6) in paragraph 35 h before attempting to start the engine.
Start and warm up the engine (subpar. c (2) below), and complete
the before-operation services.
c. Starting the Engine.
(1) PRELIMINARY INSTRUCTIONS. Before attempting to start tnk
engine, familiarize yourself with all the various instruments and
controls as outlined in paragraphs 13, 14, and 15. Make sure that
the function of each instrument and control is thoroughly understood,
and that the significance of the readings on the various instruments
is appreciated.
47
TM 9.759
16
(2) WARM WEATHER STARTING. If the vehicle is equipped

with engine compartment door shutters, make sure they are open.
If the fuel tanks are full, open all fuel shut-off valves, and run the
vehicle for 30 minutes to provide expansion space for the fuel. After
30 minutes of operation, all but one fuel valve may be closed and
the vehicle.can be operated off any one fuel. tank. Turn the battery
master switch to the "ON" position. Put the gearshift lever in neutral.
Press the foot throttle pedal, and pull the hand throttle out about
1/4-inch. Turn the ignition switch to the "BOTH" position. If the
engine is cold, prime it with one to three quick strokes of the primer.
Turn the starter switch lever to the left (press the starter button on
early models). The engine should start readily. If it does not con-
tinue to run, repeat the priming.
(3) COLD WEATHER STARTING. If the temperature is lower
than 10^F, and the vehicle is equipped with engine compartment door
shutters, make sure the shutters are closed. If the temperature is
below 0°F, see paragraph 25. Close the battery master switch. Put
the gearshift lever in neutral. Press the foot throttle pedal, and pull
the hand throttle out about 1/4 inch. Turn the ignition switch to the
"BOTH" position. Prime the engine with five or six quick strokes
of the primer. Turn the starter switch lever to the left (or press
- starter button on early models). Hold the clutch pedal all
way down while the cranking motor is cranking the engine.
Ps the engine starts, two or three quick strokes of the foot throttle
pedal will assist in keeping the engine running by supplying addi-
tional fuel.
d. Operation of the Vehicle.

(1) PRELIMINARY INSTRUCTIONS. Before attempting to drive
the vehicle, the prospective driver should be thoroughly familiar with
all the instruments and the significance of their readings. He must
also know the function and operation of all the controls in his com-
partment. Review of paragraphs 13, 14, and 15 will be helpful.
The limitations of the vehicle and engine are covered under para-
graph 5 a.
(2) SETTING THE VEHICLE IN MOTION. With the engine at
idling speed, and all instruments showing normal readings, the driver
may now operate the vehicle. Disengage the clutch by pressing the
clutch pedal down to the floor and holding it down. Move the
gearshift lever into second gear position (fig. 11) for normal opera-
tion (first gear will be used only when shifting vehicle in buildings
or over obstacles). Gradually release the clutch pedal, at the same
time depressing the foot throttle. When the vehicle has started, and
is moving with an engine speed of 1,200 revolutions per minute,
Rlease the foot throttle, depress the clutch again, and move the
parshift lever into the third gear position. Release the clutch and
43
TM 9-759
16-17
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
again depress the throttle to pick up the load of the vehicle. Repeat
the above procedure until the highest gear is reached, which will
enable the vehicle to proceed at the desired speed without causing
the engine to labor. Do not ride the clutch. The driver's left foot
must be completely removed from the clutch pedal while driving,
to avoid unnecessary wear, and burning out the clutch. NOTE:
Do not move the vehicle in or out of close quarters without the aid
of personnel outside of the vehicle to serve as a guide.
(3) STEERING THE VEHICLE. :To steer the vehicle, pull back the
right-hand steering lever to make a right turn, or the left-hand lever
for a left turn. This action applies the brake to the track on the
inside of the turn, and speeds up the outside track. The driver should
anticipate each turn, and be ready to apply more power as it is
needed to compensate the braking effort. The hands should be free
of the steering levers when not actually steering the vehicle.
(4) BACKING THE VEtIlCLE. Backing the vehicle should never
be attempted unless an observer is stationed in front to guide thI
driver. To place the vehicle in reverse gear. a complete stop mum
be made. The throttle must be closed until the tachometer read
500 revolutions per minute (lowest idling speed). Depress the
clutch pedal, and move the gearshift lever to the reverse position
(fig. 11).
(5) USE OF GAGES ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL. The tachome-
ter and the oil pressure gage give the most satisfactory indications
of the engine's performance. Should the indications of these instru-
ments appear to be irregular. the engine should be stopped and the
cause investigated.
(6) STOPPING THE VEHICLE. To stop the vehicle, release the
throttle and pull back on both steering levers at the same time.
Depress the clutch pedal when the vehicle has slowed down to
approximately 2 to 5 miles per hour, depending upon which gear
is being employed before stopping.
(7) STOPPING THE ENGINE. After completing a run, the engine
must be allowed to operate at 500 revolutions per minute for 2
minutes to assure a gradual and uniform cooling of the valves and
other engine parts. To stop the engine, press the fuel cut-off button
until the engine stops (on early models push the fuel cut-off toggle
switch and hold it in this posi,._n). then turn the ignition switch to
the "OFF" position.
17. TO(-'IN(; TIlE VEHICL.E.

a. Equipment. A towing shackle is mounted on each corner of
the hull. Two of these shackles are mounted in front, and two in
the rear. These shackles provide a quick method of attaching either
a towing bar or cables.
A-
TM 9-759
17
31. ~ , ~-. -_
_
PINTLE HOOK
TOWING SHACKLE TOWING SHACKLE

RA PD 329250
Figure 15-Towing Shackles and Pintle Hook ILater Vehiclesl

h. Towing a Disabled tl
llicle.
(1) PRECAUTIONS. If there are tracks on the vehicle to be
towed, always disconnect the propeller shaft at the transmission
companion flange, and leave the vehicle in fifth gear. The procedure
insures adequate circulation of the transmission oil while the vehicle
is in motion. If the tracks are removed before towing the vehicle,
this precaution is not necessary. In towing, there are several precau-
tions that the driver must take to avoid trouble or unnecessary delay.
Changes of direction are always to be made by a series of slight
turns so that the vehicle being towed is, as nearly as possible, directly
behind the one doing the towing, or "tracking." NOTE: This will
prevent the cable from contacting the track, which might ruin both
the cable and the track blocks. The maximum speed when towing
should be not more than 12 miles per hour, and then only with an
operator for steering and braking the towed vehicle. If no operator
is available to steer the disabled vehicle, one cable will facilitate
tracking of the towed vehicle. NOTE: When turning, take care not
to get the cable tangled up with the track of either vehicle. Except
cases where a "short hitch" is absolutely necessary, a towing cable
will not be coupled to another vehicle by other than the thimbled
sl:,55f ()---4S-----4 45
TM 9.759
17-18
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
eyes provided at both ends. Doubling the cable causes sharp bends
in the wire rope which will cause rapid failure of the strands, and
will leave the cable extremely dangerous to handle. When a "short
hitch" is desired, the two eyes of the cable are attached to the towing
vehicle. The cable, with leads crossed. is then passed through both
shackles of the towed vehicle. This provides an arrangement hav-
ing a minimum of bending action and movement at the shackles, and
furnishes clearance between cable and tracks.
(2) TOWING ON MUDDY OR IRREGULAR TERRAIN. Soft, muddy
ground is to be avoided, since the tracks may slip on such a surface.
If it is necessary to cross a muddy area. the driver should be careful
to straighten out both vehicles before entering it, as it is more diffi-
cult to pull a vehicle at an angle than when following in tow. On
vehicles equipped with rubber block tracks, grousers may be in-
stalled as required.
C'. lTowing to Start. If the engine is forced to turn over while
there is water or antifreeze in the cylinder above the pistons (as
result of condensation or leakage), breakage of internal parts of thy
engine will result. Turn the engine over two complete revolutions
by hand (fig. 81) prior to towing. Never use other than fifth
gear when towing the vehicle to start the engine.
(1) TURN ENGINE OVER. Turn the ignition switch off. Tow
the vehicle several feet with the transmission in neutral (fig. 11) to
remove the slack from the towing line, and to break the track loose
from the ground. Depress the clutch, and place the gearshift lever
in fifth gear (fig. 11). Tow the vehicle at 1 mile per hour. and
engage the clutch gradually (permitting it to slip) until two com-
plete revolutions of the engine have been made. If the engine will
not turn over with the clutch slipping. discontinue attempting to
start, and notify higher authority.
(2) START THE ENGINE. After the engine has been turned over
as outlined above, turn the ignition switch on and engage the clutch.
Increase towing speed to from 3 to 5 miles per hour (in fifth gear.
fig. 11) and make from three to five strokes with the priming pump.
If the engine does not start. see paragraph 41 b. (1).
Section VI
TURRET CONTROLS AND OPERATION
18. :(ONTR(L..%
a. ti rretl I.ockslii .
(1) WHEEL TYPE (fig. 17). To unlock the turret. turn the
wheel on the turret lock counterclockwise as far as it will go. To lock
the turret. turn the wheel clockwise as far as it will go. The turret
46
TM 9-759
18
0 u 0
,~
ur>~~~ <i · ~~~~~~
o
O
_U
CY - Cl:
.u
uS ZU
r~ " ~ - II
a,- -
0 _
47
U1~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a Z~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ul~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~l
O
z
0
7 r - zI...0
o a'·o
474 ~
47 ~
TM 9.759
18
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
n
F~
~ ~~~ ~ ~ >~~~~~
0~~~~~~~~~~~~
oe M ~
uJ a~~~~~~~_
co ~~ ~~ ~ ~ ~
~C0c< 0
\< -
z V-
4-
4. ~
> I3~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.
'<? L
J~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~U
I C3~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-
u~~~
LUC3 ~ I~P U. U
Ix ~~~~~~~
~ ~'i~~~0 ~ ~
Lu~~~~I ~ ~~~Q
z @1~
w WI-
4 >4
4 *~lr ".
I- ~ I- ~
0 ·
48~~~~~~U
48
TM 9-759
18
0 (n
U cZ
~Z
"aHi.~~~~a ~~~~~~
>
u
_0
.
o
: z :
z ~z~~~
o _ 0
O
"
·"
1V , O P' ¢
o/
z t
949
TM 9.759
18
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
0
u> 0
Z U
l Z
> i
41.
0z 0PL~RE HEAD
50
TM 9-759
18-19
Iy have to be rotated slightly by hand to engage the turret lock

into the ring gear. :
(2) LEVER TYPE (fig. 18). Disengage the turret lock by turning
the lever one-quarter turn clockwise and at the same time pulling the
lever outward so that the lugs on the lever shaft come through the
lock bracket, then turn the lever one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
To lock the turret, turn the lever one-quarter turn clockwise so that
the lugs on the lever shaft go through the lock bracket. then turn the
lever one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
h. Shift Lever (fig. 17). All M4A3 vehicles with the exception
of the 105-mm howitzer are equipped with power traversing mech-
anism. To engage the shift lever to the power position, disengage
the turret lock (subpar. a (1) and (2) above). Rotate the hand
traverse lever (subpar. e below) slightly and at the same time push
the shift lever upward until the manual traverse mechanism is disen-
gaged. This places the shift lever in the power position. To shift
into manual traverse, rotate the hand traverse lever slightly and at
the same time push down on the shift lever until it is engaged into
manual traverse. The M4A3 medium tank with the 105-mm howitzer
is also equipped with a shift lever (fig. 19); however, when this lever
sin the up position, the traversing mechanism will be in neutral
ition.
c. Hand Traverse Lever (fig. 17). To operate the hand traverse

lever, squeeze the lever and at the same time rotate it in the direction
desired. The turret rotates in the same direction as the lever.
Releasing the hand lever applies a brake in the hand traverse drive.
19. OPERATION.
a. Manual. Before traversing the turret, if the vehicle is

equipped with a gun traveling lock, be sure the gun is free of the
lock, and that the driver's and assistant driver's doors are closed.
Make sure personnel are clear of rotating parts. Disengage the turret
lock. Engage the shift lever into manual position (par. 18 b). Ro-
tate the hand traverse lever.
h1. Power.
(1) POWER ROTATION OF TURRET BY GUNNER (figs. 16, 17, and
18). Refill the reservoir with hydraulic oil if the oil is below one-
half inch from the top of the gage. Disengage the turret lock (par.
18 a (1) and (2)). Turn the battery master switch and the tra-
versing switch to the "ON" position. This will start the electric
otor and the hydraulic pump. Place the shift lever on the gear
x to the power operating position (par. 18 b). Grasp the valve
51
TM 9.759
19-20
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
control handle and turn it in the direction the turret is to be traversed.

The farther the valve control handle is turned, the faster the turret
will traverse. Release the valve control handle to stop the turret
from traversing. When the turret traversing mechanism is not in
use, lock the turret (par. 18 a (1) and (2)) and turn off the
traversing switch.
(2) POWER ROTATION OF TURRET BY COMMANDER. e
vehicles are equipped with a commander's turret control (figs. 16
and 18). To traverse the turret using the commander's control,
grasp the control handle and press the release button down, at the
same time push the lever forward to rotate the turret counter-
clockwise, or pull the lever back to rotate the turret clockwise. The
farther the handle is moved, the faster the turret will be traversed.
Set the handle back to vertical position to stop the turret from
rotating.
Section VII
OPERATION OF AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
20. AUXILIARY GENERATOR.
a. Description (figs. 20 and 21). The auxiliary generator,
mounted at the rear end of the left sponson in the fighting com-
partment, is a self-contained generating unit. It is used to charge
the vehicle batteries at such times as the use of the stabilizer unit,
traversing motor, gun firing solenoids, radio and interphone instal-
lations impose too heavy a load on the electrical system. The control
panel on the auxiliary generator contains a starting button, for start-
ing the unit electrically, a circuit breaker reset button, and an am-
meter. The button for stopping the engine is on the magneto cover.
The normal charging rate with discharged batteries is 50 amperes.
With fully charged batteries and no current being used, the rate
should be from 3 to 5 amperes. A separate fuel tank for the unit
has a capacity of 5 gallons, and is filled through a filler hole in the
hull above the generator (subpar. c below).
h. When to Use Auxiliary Generator. The auxiliary generator
should be kept in operation when any of the turret electrical units,
such as the traversing or stabilizing mechanisms, are in use. On some
vehicles the unit may also be used to preheat the engine comparti
ment or the batteries in cold weather.
c. Fuel Mixture. Use a mixture of 3 /s-pint of engine oil to
1 gallon of gasoline, and mix thoroughly before pouring it into the
fuel tank. Thorough mixing of the oil and gasoline is essential to
52
TM 9-759
20
<0 ' oI
>.00 >-0: =(
< < I-
<ci. AJ
x~Z<
0 Z x Z . ' a~ , .
' I .~~~~~~~~~~'
41
0 Zfio0
00=
D
53
TM 9.759
20
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
CARBURETOR FUEL FILTER SEDIMENT BOWL

EXHAUST COUPLING CHARGING CIRCUIT RESET
STOP BUTTON \ FUEL SHUT-OFF VALVE
AIR FILTER \ \ | / I i STARTER BUTTON
RA PD 329397
Figure 21-Auxiliary Generafor (Early Vehiclesl
prevent fouling of the spark plug, and for proper lubrication of the
engine.
d. Cold Weather (below 100F) and Cold Engine Starting.
Close the battery master switch. Turn the shut-off cock at the fuel
outlet in the bottom of the fuel tank counterclockwise to open it.
Turn the shut-off cock on the fuel filter (fig. 20) counterclockwise to
open it. Pull the choke on top of the carburetor away from the stop
pin. Press the starting button on the control panel. Release the
starting button as soon as the engine starts, and open the choke
partially, easing it to fully opened position as the engine warms up
e. Warm Weather (ahove 50 0 F) or Warm Engine Starting
Close the battery master switch. Turn the shut-off cock on the
fuel tank (fig. 20) counterclockwise to open it. Turn the shut-off
cock on the fuel filter counterclockwise to open it. Press the
starting button on the control panel. Release the starting button
54
TM 9-759
20-21
OPERATION OF AUX.LIARY EQUIPMENT
LOCK PIN CONTROL CABLE HAND CONTROL
-s
FIXED FIRE EXTINGUISHER RA PD 329248
Figure 22-Typical Fixed Fire Extinguishers
as soon as the engine starts. Do not use the choke unless the
engine does not start within 5 seconds.
f. Emergency Manual Starting. Wind the starting rope on the
starting plate and, with the choke closed, give the rope a quick, hard
pull to spin the engine. If the engine fails to start, repeat the
procedure.
g. Stopping the Generator Engine. Press the stop button on
the magneto, and hold it in firmly until the engine stops. Turn off
the fuel shut-off cock.
21. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS.

a. Fixed Fire Extinguisher.
(1) DESCRIPTION (fig. 22). The fixed fire extinguisher system
consists of two 10-pound cylinders charged with carbon dioxide
(CO-). The cylinders are bracket-mounted to the hull floor at the
left rear corner of the fighting compartment. These cylinders are
krtment.
connected by tubing to the six discharge nozzles in the engine com-
The system is controlled from the outside or inside of
vehicle by means of control cables.
55
TM 9-759
21
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
FIXED FIRE EXTINGUISHER CONTROL HANDLES
RA PD 329247
Figure 23--Typical Driver's Fixed Fire Extinguisher Controls

(2) OPERATION.
(a) Outside Controls (fig. 24). Pull the handles marked "FIRE
PULL" located outside and to the rear of the turret, and adjacent
to the left fuel tank filler cap.
(b) Inside Controls. Pull the control handles marked "FIRE
PULL" located on the 'hull ceiling above and to the rear of the
driver's seat (fig. 23), or by removing the lock pin in the control head
and rotating the lever marked "PUSH" on one side and "PULL" on
the other (fig. 22).
b. Portable Fire Extinguishers.
(1) DESCRIPTION. One portable 4-pound fire extinguisher is
installed in the vehicle just forward of the assistant driver's seat,
or to the left of the driver on the left sponson, and another is in-
stalled on the turret platform wall.
(2) OPERATION OF PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS. Remo
the extinguisher from the bracket. With the cylinder in an upright
position, squeeze the trigger and direct the discharge at the base of
the flame, working upward. Continue the discharge after the flames
56
TM 9-759
21
Cl
Cl
Z 0 O'
0
I-)
~~~~~~~~Cl)
cp,
4
mo < N
·
0
o' ad~~~~~~
U
<: *'7 Z 0
1
u') Z I--~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I
<
z~~~~~~~~~~~
~~~~L
0U,
' m
cc~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~--l
0 .0
0 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~E
0
uIL
rr~ ~ ~ ~ ~~~~Q
(3 O~~~~~~~~~~
Z Y~~~~~~~~~~ qq
I.-) a,
o~~~~~~~
w U,
u ILu
8z z z
0
= 0 D w
o z I
~~~~~~~~~~-z
57-x m
57
TM 9-759
21-25
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
are out, to coat the hot material with carbon dioxide snow. Repl
used extinguishers with fully charged ones at once. CAUTIO1
A cylinder containing gas under high pressure is as dangerous as a
loaded shell; therefore, do not drop, strike, or expose to unnecessary
heat.
22. WINDSHIELD.
a. A detachable windshield and hood, equipped with an electric
wiper and defroster (fig. 123), is provided for the driver's use dur-
ing bad weather. The plug on the electric cord is to be inserted
in the utility outlet in the instrument panel.
23. VENTILATING FANS.
a. Description. A ventilating fan is provided in the hull and in
the turret on some of the M4A3 vehicles (fig. 116).
b. Operation. The battery master switch must be in the "ON"
position. Push the toggle switch lever, located on the fan motor, to
the "ON" position. The flow of air can be directed as desired by
turning the air horns. To turn the fan off, push the toggle switch
lever to the "OFF" position.
24. PERISCOPES.
a. Description. The driver and the assistant driver each ha
two periscopes, one in each of the hatch doors above them, and
adjacent to each door (figs. 2, 3, 4, and 5). Periscopes that a
mounted in hatch doors on all M4A3 vehicles can be rotated through
360 degrees, and can be tilted approximately 30 degrees up or down.
Housings may also be tilted to provide observation vertically. Peri-
scopes are equipped with forehead rest which permit movement of
the housing by means of the driver's head.
b. Operation. The rubber weather-seal, fastened around the
inside top edge of the housing, may be used as a wiper. This is
done by releasing the knurled nut on the back of the housing and
the safety catch, and then moving periscope up and down in the
housing by means of the handles. All periscopes are interchange-
able, and, in the event of damage, the periscope heads are quickly
replaceable (par. 140 b) from the spares carried in the vehicle.
Section VIII
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
25. EXTREME COLD.
a. General. Operation of this equipment at subzero tem-
peratures presents problems which do not exist at moderate temper
tures. Consequently, operating and maintenance personnel q
58
TM 9.759
25
ide special precautions and extra careful servicing to avoid

ional failure. Systems most likely to suffer from extreme cold
are lubrication, fuel, cooling, and electrical (battery). In addition,
the strength of metals is seriously lowered at extremely low tempera-
tures. Inspect vehicle frequently for broken screws, bolts, or other
metal parts, and for loosened nvun Shock. resistance of metals is
greatly impaired by extremely cold temperature; stress and strain, due
to jolting on frozen ground, is increased. Exercise care in moving the
vehicle from a warm place into subzero temperature. Moisture will
immediately condense and freeze on all exposed surfaces.
b. Deep Mud, Snow, and Ice. When operating in deep mud,
snow and ice, clean caked mud or ice from the vehicle frequently.
Do not allow mud, snow, or ice to cake on the tracks and bogies.
Keep these substances off all electrical connections.
c. Cold Weather Accessories. Cold weather kits are furnished
with some of the vehicles. Use of kit components will simplify cold
weather operation and maintenance. Complete instructions for the
use of this equipment accompany the kit.
d. Cold Weather Preparation. Prepare the vehicle for cold
ather operation by following the instructions in subparagraphs
, g, h, and i. which follow.
e. Engine Lubrication System.
(1) Methods for keeping crankcase oil sufficiently fluid for proper
lubrication are listed below in order of preference:
(a) Keep vehicle in a heated enclosure when not in use.
(b) When engine is stopped, drain crankcase oil while still hot.
Tag vehicle in a conspicuous place in the driver's compartment to
warn personnel that crankcase is empty. Store oil in a warm place if
possible. Otherwise heat oil before reinstalling. CAUTION: Do not
overheat oil; heat only to a point where bare hand can be inserted
without burning.
(c) Dilute crankcase oil with gasoline, or, in an emergency, with
Diesel fuel. If gasoline is used as a diluent, fill engine crankcase to the
"FULL" mark with the grade of engine oil prescribed for use at tem-
peratures from +32°F to 0°F (par. 29 d). Add 91/2 quarts of gaso-
line to the crankcase. Run the engine 5 to 10 minutes to mix the
lubricant and diluent thoroughly. Stop the engine and note that the
level of the diluted oil is above the normal "FULL" mark on the oil
gage. This level should be marked on the gage for future reference.
The presence of a large percentage of gasoline will increase oil con-
JLption and, for that reason, the oil level should be checked fre-
59
TM 9-759
25
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
quently. Use the grade of engine oil prescribed for use betwW
+32:F to O'F to maintain the oil level to the "FULL" mark on the
gage during operation. If the vehicle is operated 4 hours or more
at operating temperature, redilution will be necessary if it is antici-
pated that the vehicle will be left standing unprotected for 5 hours or
more. This can be accomplished by adding engine oil prescribed
for use between +32-F to 0'F to the "FULL" mark; then adding
gasoline to the dilution mark on the gage as described above. If Diesel
fuel is used as diluent, drain the crankcase while the engine is still
warm and refill, using engine oil prescribed for temperatures between
+-32°Fto 0OF diluted with 91/2 quarts of grade X Diesel fuel oil. The
presence of a large percentage of Diesel fuel will increase oil con-
sumption and, therefore, the oil level should be checked frequently
during operation and maintained to manufacturer's "FULL" mark on
gage with engine oil diluted with Diesel fuel as described above.
CAUTION: When Diesel fuel is used as a diluent, the quantity of
diluent necessary for starting is added when the crankcase is refilled
and maintained by the addition of diluted make-up oil. Further addi-
tions of diluent prior to overnight shut down are unnecessary.
(d) If the vehicle is to be kept outdoors, and if the crankcase can-
not be drained, shelter the engine compartment with a tarpaulin. About
3 hours before engine is to be started, place fire pots under the t
paulin. A Van Prag, Primus-type, or other type blowtorch or ordin
kerosene lanterns may be used. With due consideration for the fi
hazard involved, the flame may be applied directly to the oil pan
below the oil level.
f. Fuel System.
(1) If possible, use a winter grade gasoline. When within conti-
nental limits of the United States, a winter grade of gasoline meeting
U. S. Army Specification 2-114 must be used. Regardless cf the fuel
used, a certain amount of condensation from moisture in the air can be
expected. At low temperatures the water thus formed will form ice
crystals which will clog fuel lines and carburetor jets. To overcome
this difficulty, observe the following precautions:
(a) Strain fuel through a chamois skin, or other type of strainer,
to prevent passage of water. WARNING: Provide a metallic contact
between container and tank to "ground" static electricity.
(b) Keep fuel storage tanks full at all times if possible. The more
fuel there is in a tank, the smaller will be the volume of air from which
moisture can condense.
(c) Keep all containers clean and rust free.
(d) If possible, after filling or moving a container, allow fuel&.,
settle before filling vehicle from it.
60
TM 9-759
2s
I3) Keep all containers tight to prevent entrance of snow, ice,

t, or other foreign matter.
(2) Carburetion trouble suddenly encountered with lowered tem-
peratures may be due to a faulty carburetor. A carburetor which gives
no appreciable trouble at normal temperatures may not operate satis-
factorily at low temperatures. Replace suspected carburetor.
(3) A fuel pump which delivers enough gasoline for normal start-
ing at 500 revolutions per minute may have leaky valves or a faulty
diaphragm. Either would prevent it from delivering sufficient fuel
for cold weather starting. Replace suspected fuel pump.
(4) Follow the directions in paragraph 29 (l to prepare carbu-
retor air cleaners for cold weather operation.
g. Cooling System.
(1) Only antifreeze compound is prescribed for protection of cool-
ing system during operation below +32°F. Permissible materials and
quantities to be used for various temperatures follow:
Pints of Antifreeze Compound per
Temperature Gallon of System Capacity
30°F 1
20°F 1 /2
10°F 2
0°F 2 1/2
-- 10°F 3
-- 20'F 31/2
-30'F 4
-40°F 41/'2
-50°F 5
-60°F 5
-- 70°F 5
(2) Observe the following precautions before installing anti-

freeze solution:
(a) Drain and flush entire cooling system with fresh water
(par. 83). Flush radiator and engine separately in order to prevent
transfer of residue from one to the other. To accomplish this, discon-
nect hose connections. Use a flushing gun if available.
(b) Inspect entire system. Replace checked, rotted, or damaged
hose and connections. Tighten all connections-
(3) In an emergency, the vehicle can be operated without anti-
freeze solution in moderate freezing temperature by partially covering
e engine compartment doors. Drain system upon stopping engine,
refill upon starting.
5350 (-48--5 61
TM 9.759
25
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
h. Vehicle Lubrication.
(1) TRANSMISSION DIFFERENTIAL AND FINAL DRIVE. Use SAE
30 engine oil, below +32°F. When temperatures below 0°F are im-
mediately anticipated and transmission, differential and final drive do
not contain the specified grade of engine oil, drain immediately after
use and while lubricant is still warm. Refill to proper level -:th
SAE 30 engine oil. After standing overnight in sub-zero temperatures,
warm up transmission after the engine has been warmed up by engag-
ing clutch and maintaining engine speed for 2 minutes, or until gears
can be engaged. Put transmission in low gear and drive vehicle 100
yards, being careful not to stall engine. This will heat up gear lubri-
cants to the point where normal operation can be expected.
(2) OTHER LUBRICATION POINTS.
(a) If vehicle has been operated 1000 miles using general purpose
grease No. 0, for lubrication, no special precautions are necessary
for the bogie wheels and track roller bearings. If general purpose
grease No. 1 is in these bearings, it will be necessary to disassemble and
wash them in dry-cleaning solvent, dry and then relubricate with
general purpose grease No. 0, for satisfactory operation (par. 29 d).
(b) All other places where No. 0 general purpose grease is pre-
scribed for temperatures of +32°F to 0°F shall be lubricated w_
the same lubricant below 0°F (par. 29 d).
(c) When extremely low temperatures are encountered and No. 0
general purpose grease is not satisfactory where specified above No. 00,
O.D. grease, Ordnance Department Tentative Specifications AXS
1169 may be used.
(d) For oilcan points where engine oil is specified above 0°F, use
special preservative lubricating oil.
i. Electrical System. Battery efficiency decreases sharply with

decreasing temperatures and becomes practically nil at -40 0 F. To
overcome this obstacle, observe the following precautions:
(1) Keep batteries fully charged (hydrometer reading between
1.275 and 1.300) at all times. A fully charged battery will not freeze
at temperatures likely to be encountered even in arctic climates, but
a fully discharged battery will freeze and break at 5°F.
(2) Do not add water to batteries in subzero weather, unless they
are to be charged immediately.
(3) At temperatures of -30°F and below, heat the batteries be-
fore trying to start engine with them.
(4) Keep all wiring connections and battery terminals clean and
tight.
62
TM 9.759
25.27
5) Check generator and cranking motor brushes, commutator

bearings. Replace brushes if worn. Keep commutator clean.
Replace assembly if bearings "drag." If cranking motor fails to engage
flywheel, remove cranking motor and clean grease and dirt from
throw-out mechanism.
(6) Keep spark plugs clean and check adjustment. Replace spark
plugs when gap increases to 0.030 inch (par. 68).
(7) Check timing carefully and adjust, if unduly advanced or re-
tarded (par. 58 c (8)).
(8) Inspect lights carefully for short circuits or presence of
moisture around sockets. Perform needed repairs.
(9) Before every start, see that spark plugs, wiring, and other
electrical equipment are free from ice.
26. OPERATION UNDER DUSTY, SANDY CONDITIONS, OR

UNDERBRUSH.
Iid
a. Operation on Dusty, Sandy Terrain. In operating the vehicle
cross-country on dry, dusty or sandy terrain along with other vehicles,
running in the dust cloud of the other vehicles as much as pos-
e. When operating in sand deep enough to force the use of lower
Or ratios, do not exceed the speed specified for the particular gear
ratios. Even when the above precautions are taken, it may be neces-
sary to clean the carburetor air cleaners and the air cleaner on the
filter pipe as often as every two hours. If the air cleaners are kept
clean and their oil level is maintained, little damage to the engine
will result. It is possible to wear out the engine in one hour or less
if the air cleaners are neglected.
h. Underbrush. Keep the air intake grilles on the engine com-
partment bulkhead open and free from all obstructions or covers,
particularly if the vehicle is camouflaged.
27. FLOOD OR SUBMERSION.

a. Report to higher authority immediately the flooding or sub-
mersion of the vehicle. Dirt and abrasives and particularly salt water
will cause serious damage to such units as the engine, clutch, etc. Salt
water will damage aluminum parts beyond repair.
63
TM 9-759
28-29
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
PART THREE-MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION?

Section IX
LUBRICATION
28. LUBRICATION ORDER.
a. War Department Lubrication Order No. 104 (figs. 25 and 26)
prescribes lubrication maintenance for M4A3 tanks.
h. A Lubrication Order is placed on or is issued with each vehicle
and is to be carried with it at all times. In the event the vehicle
is received without a Lubrication Order, the using arm shall im-
mediately requisition a replacement from the Commanding Officer,
Fort Wayne Ordnance Depot, Detroit 32, Michigan.
c. Instructions on the Lubrication Order are binding on all
echelons of maintenance and there shall be no deviations from
these instructions.
d. Service intervals specified on the Lubrication Order are for
normal operation conditions. Reduce these intervals under
treme conditions such as excessively high or low temperat/ i
prolonged periods of high speed, continued operation in sand~
dust, immersion in water, or exposure to moisture, any one of
which may quickly destroy the protective qualities of the lubri-
cant and require servicing in order to prevent malfunctioning or
damage to the materiel.
e. Lubricants are prescribed in the "Key" in accordance with
three temperature ranges: above +32 0 F, +32°F to O'F, and
below 0°F. Determine the time to change grades of lubricants
by maintaining a close check on operation of the vehicle during
the approach to changeover periods. Be particularly observant
when starting the engine. Sluggish starting is an indication of
thickened lubricants and is also the signal to change to grades
prescribed for the next lower temperature range. Ordinarily it
will be necessary to change grades of lubricants only when air
temperatures are consistently in the next higher or lower range,
unless malfunctioning occurs sooner due to lubricants being too
thin or too heavy.
29. DETAILED LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS.

a. Lubrication Equipment.
(1) Each tank is supplied with lubrication equipment ap
quate to maintain the materiel. Be sure to clean the equiprr
64
TM 9-759
29
Ih, LUBRICATION
before and after use. Operate lubricating guns carefully and

in such a manner as to insure a proper distribution of the lubri-
cant. If lubrication fitting valves stick and prevent the entrance
of lubricant, remove the fitting and determine cause. Replace
broken or damaged lubricators. If lubricator cannot be replaced
immediately, cover hole as a temporary expedient with tape to
prevent the entrance of dirt. If oil lines become clogged, dis-
assemble the line and remove the obstruction.
(2) Wipe lubricators and surrounding surfaces clean before
applying lubricant. Where relief valves are provided, apply new
lubricant until the old lubricant is forced from the vent. Excep-
tions are specified in notes or on the Lubrication Order. Always
wipe clean metal surfaces on which a film of lubricant must be
maintained by manual application, before the film is renewed.
b. Points of Application.
(1) Lubrication fittings, grease cups, oilers and oil holes are
readily identifiable on the vehicle. Wipe clean such lubricators
and the surrounding surface before lubricant is applied.
I (2) Where relief valves are provided,

il the old lubricant is forced from the vent.
apply new lubricant
c. Cleaning. Use SOLVENT, dry-cleaning, or OIL, fuel, Diesel

to clean or wash all parts. Use of gasoline for this purpose is
prohibited. After washing, dry all parts thoroughly before applying
lubricant.
d. Lubrication Notes on Individual Units and Parts. The fol-

lowing instructions supplement and repeat for clarity those notes
on the Lubrication Order which pertain to lubrication and service
of individual units and parts.
(1) AIR CLEANERS. The instructions regarding air cleaners
which appear on WDLO No. 104, 18 March 1944, will be revised
in a later edition to agree with the following instructions.
(a) Oil Bath Type. Daily, check lever and refill engine air
cleaner oil reservoir to bead level with used crankcase oil or OIL,
engine, SAE 50 above +32°F, and SAE 30 from +32°F to 0°F.
Below 0°F, use OIL, engine, SAE 10. Every 500 miles, daily
under extreme dust conditions, remove air cleaners and wash all
parts.
(b) Mesh Type. Every 50 hours or more often if required,
move auxiliary generator air cleaner, clean and oil filter element
th used crankcase oil or OIL, engine, SAE 50 above +32°F,
65
TM 9-759
29
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
z
||CeDg
18 Aw QI ;S, -- i I
E~ .rs a'All
-' I C c - c' 3
I. i 00 a 0 0 0
aI~g
a
So Z
:i... a S S
|
.. :..;,
:_,. ;
l .u
~ 2r --
3:~/
O.,o uu,,
ou ·- il,oa ,
m
C .,.
Figure 2S-LubricationEngine
66
TM 9.759
29
LUBRICATION
m!,1.:
' 'z- :~ ~'; ;
Ir
.- ,a~~ o~ ~ j
5 jj-5
OL 6 ·. ·5 . 6EI. , o
__ o _ - - - f
,.~ .: i,· -::~

w
-El ~ L
lBm; r ~ts-,~ J tlil o --
i"
, 0;I.
2 'r' ; 2 zz
· Js i! fgf 015
,, r
:ct-·I3
· ' ~~ - and
~.~~~~
~
'". I-
Cefi- iP'a;16 X-uE
n-~,t.~§,~ "Z TrrtRi,
ix
. < . z~ z
zi_ .t1riVv e
01,10,
and Certan Turret Point;
67P
67j
TM 9.759
29
TANK, MEDIUM, rd4A3
C; gm
Mc t
°~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c;
'E,
C..,a-
)..;_ ao=,z - - o :
IM
~ · de~'~ ·
=- : c- E, _
,. ~.!:.R-- o ~,.
-' I'
-IIF',
IE Z - .,E.Li 5~dzo o
III ul 1~~~l
8I
O. fu O.1i o
s jC t~~C4 C
oo .= Ci; 0.o , I0
Bit Fiue 6-uriato-Trrt

z . ' 1 Ot~~
a68 - Fi gu
Ec 2 0·
e(..) 0
' ,I
Figur 260--Lbrceton -rre
681
TM 9-759
29
LUIRICATION
, d _od ~l~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~l
 o8 X
a , ] a a a a
_D d3 w w
'~E ' 7
~~~~~~m...- 'EW
' -.E: ' ~
1 ' m-
o o o o~ o '~- o o
o
m-- I
.~i. ,. ·. ~ J~ ].
at -" ~ ~ oeo-" -- ooo

i~~~i(
a
~~f9a oa a ·) I55 tZ3a
d · a r ~P na :~~~~L
, j!L
.:.
'; O P ~ 80 O ~0 . 'ij
&,, - _ ,, , zrB,,
Fclr, Supesin an Gu
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~:
'I.
-- _~ .,--, ,.-- .. : .
p'ocks, S upns anG
69
TM 9.759
29
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
and SAE 30 from +32°F to 0°F. Below 0°F, use OIL, engl[
SAE 10.
(2) ACCESSORY DRIVE SHAFT HOUSINGS, UNIVERSAL JOINTS
AND SLIP JOINTS. Weekly, check level. Filler plug in housing is fitted
with bayonet gage; fill to FULL mark on gage. Drain and refill
at intervals indicated on Lubrication Order. Lubricate universal
joints through fittings with GREASE, general purpose, No. 1,
above +32°F, or No. 0 below +32'F. There is no relief valve
in these joints; do not use excessive pressure. To lubricate slip
joint, apply GREASE, general purpose, No. 1 above +32°F, or
No. 0 below +32°F, to fitting until lubricant is forced from end
of spline.
(3) AUXILIARY GENERATOR. The two-cycle air-cooled engine
mounted on the sponson in left side of fighting compartment,
is lubricated with oil mixed with the fuel. Mix thoroughly 3/8 pint
of OIL, engine, SAE 30, with each gallon of gasoline before pour-
ing into tank. CAUTION: Do not pour gasoline and oil separately
into tank. Keep fuel strainer clean. Monthly, lubricate magneto
cam follower sparingly with GREASE, general purpose, No. 2.
(4) BELL HOUSING CLUTCH SHAFT BEARING. To lubricate,
open door in turret basket floor and remove plate over fittin
or remove tunnel shield to expose fitting. q
(5) BREATHER. Every 500 miles, remove filtering medium
from transmission and differential breathers, wash thoroughly, dry
and reoil with used crankcase oil or OIL, engine, SAE 50 above
0
+32°F, or SAE 30 from +32°F to 0°F. From 0°F to -40 F,
use OIL, hydraulic. Below -40°F, wash and replace dry.
(6) BREECH AND FIRING MECHANISM. Daily and before and
after firing, clean and oil all moving parts and exposed metal
surfaces with OIL, engine, SAE 30 above +32 F, SAE 10 from
+32 ° F to 0°F, or OIL, lubricating, preservative, special, below
0°F. CAUTION: To insure easy breech operation and to avoid
misfiring in cold weather, clean, dry and lubricate with OIL, lubri-
cating, preservative, special. To clean firing mechanism, remove
and operate pin in SOLVENT, dry-cleaning. Use OIL, lubricating,
preservative, special, for machine guns.
(7) CLUTCH PILOT BEARING. Before replacing engine after
inspection or overhaul, clean and lubricate with GREASE, ball and
roller bearing.
(8) CRANKCASE. Daily, check oil level, add oil if necessary.
Every 500 miles or 50 hours, drain and refill. Drain only when
engine is hot. Refill to FULL mark on gage. CAUTION: Be
sure pressure gage indicates oil is circulating.
70
TM 9-759
29
LUBRICATION
t9) GEAR CASES. Transmission, differentials and final drive.

some assemblies, the transmission, differential and final drives
are combined in one unit. Fill through transmission filler to mark
on bayonet gage with fill cap resting on top of fill pipe. Drain
through transmission and final drive drain plug holes. Other
assemblies use 3-piece units. Fill through transmission filler to
mark on bayonet gage with fill cap resting on top of fill pipe, and
through each final drive filler to 1 inch below fill plug hole when
cold, or to plug level when hot. Drain through transmission, dif-
ferential and final drive drain plug holes. Weekly, check level
with tank on level ground, and if necessary, add lubricant. Every
3,000 miles, drain and refill. Drain only after operation when
oil is warm. Refill with OIL, engine, SAE 50 above +32°F, or
SAE 30 below +32°F.
(10) OIL FILTER. The oil filter is of the self-turning type and
is located in the engine crankcase. Daily, check operation of self-
turning mechanism. Weekly, remove filter element from housing,
clean and inspect.
(11) OILCAN POINTS.
(a) Every 250 miles, lubricate parking brake shaft (some

bdels), machine gun mount ball socket, door and shield hinges,
· ep hole protector slides, door latches, lever bushings, control
rod pins, throttle and gear linkage ball joints, pintle hook, escape
hatch mechanism, seat supports and devises with OIL, engine,
SAE 30 above +32°F; SAE 10 from +32°F to 0°F; OIL, lubri-
cating, preservative, special, below 0°F.
(b) Gun Mounts. Weekly, lubricate handwheel handles, firing
button, firing lever link, machine gun ball socket and other rub-
bing parts with OIL, engine, SAE 30 above +32°F; SAE 10
+32°F to 0°F; OIL, lubricating, preservative, special.
(12) GUN BORE. After firing, and for 3 consecutive days
thereafter, swab bore with a solution of ½/2 pound SODA, ash, to
each gallon of warm water. Rinse with clear water and dry thor-
oughly before oiling. When gun is not being fired, renew oil film
daily. Every 5 days, swab with SOLVENT, dry-cleaning, dry
and reoil.
(13) MACHINE GUN BORE. After firing, and for 3 consecu-
tive days thereafter, clean with CLEANER, rifle bore, dry and
reoil. When machine gun is not being fired, renew oil film daily.
Every 5 days, clean with SOLVENT, dry-cleaning, dry and reoil.
(14) POINTS NOT NEEDING LUBRICATION. Water pump, bogie
· heel suspension linkage, final drive sprocket bearings, clutch re-
71
TM 9.759
29-30
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
lease bearing, auxiliary generator bearings, engine governor;

Mounts) elevating control arm bearings, hydraulic oil pump mo
bearings.
e. Reports and Records.

(1) Report unsatisfactory performance of materiel to the
Ordnance Officer responsible for maintenance in accordance with
TM 38-250.
(2) A record of lubrication may be maintained in the Duty
Roster (W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 6) and in the Artillery Gun Book.
30. POINTS TO BE LUBRICATED BY ORDNANCE PERSON-

NEL ONLY.
a. Generators. Once each year, remove generators, clean and

repack bearings with GREASE, ball and roller bearing.
b. Engine Magnetos. At time of inspection or general overhaul,
clean and repack bearings with GREASE, ball and roller bearing.
Lubricate cam wick with 1 or 2 drops of OIL, engine, SAE 10.
c. Cradle Trunnion Bearings. Every 6 months, disasse
trunnions, clean and lubricate with GREASE, general purpU
No. 2.
d. Elevating Worm Gear Case (75-mm and 76-mm only).

Every 6 months, disassemble gear case, wash all parts, fill case
' full with GREASE, O.D., No. 0 above +32°F, or No. 00 below
+32°F, and reassemble.
e. Elevating Bevel Gear Cases; Elevating Worm Gear Case
(105-mm only). Every 6 months, disassemble case, wash all parts
and lubricate gears and bearings with GREASE, O.D., No. 0
above +32°F, or No. 00 below +32°F.
f. Turret Traversing Gear Housing. Every 6 months, disas-
semble, clean and repack gears with GREASE, O.D., No. 0 above
+32°F, or No. 00 below +32°F.
g. Breech Closing Spring Cylinder Assembly (75-mm and
76-mm only). Every 6 months, or whenever the breech block is
disassembled, disassemble the breech block closing spring cylinder
assembly, clean and coat the inside and breech ring end of the
closing spring cylinder assembly with GREASE, O.D., No.
above +32°F, and No. 00 below +32°F.
72
TM 9-759
30
LUBRICATION
D STABILIZER OIL RESERVOIR-OH

CHECK LEVEL-KEEP V3 FULL
A STABILIZER GEAR BOX-OE

ONE FITTING
E STABILIZER CYLINOER PIVOT PIN-OG
B RECOIL MECHANISM-RS
2 PLUGS, ONE FOR EACH CYLINDER
FILL TO BOTTOM OF HOLE
WITH GUN DEPRESSED 5 DEGREES
'I.
C BREECH MECHANISM--OE OIL DAILY F STABILIZER PISTON ROD BEARING-OE

RA PD 337123
qjgure 27-Localized Views of Armament Lubrication Points

175-mm and 76-mm Guns)
73
TM 9.759
30
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
BREECH MECHANISM-OE
G CLEAN AND OIL
H ELEVATING BEVEL GEAR CASE-OG CRADLE LINER-OG

USE PRESSURE GUN ONE FITTING. USE PRESSURE GUN
RA PD 337124
Figure 28-Localized Views of Armament Lubrication Poig1

175-mm and 76-mm Guns)
74
TM 9-759
30
LUBRICATION
. '
A CRADLE LINER-OG
ONE FITTING. USE PRESSURE GUN
ELEVATING MECHANISM-OG
TWO FITTINGS. USE PRESSURE GUN
B BREECH MECHANISM-OE
CLEAN AND OIL
RECOIL MECHANISM--RS
2 PLUGS, ONE FOR EACH CYLINDER.
REMOVE PLUGS-FILL UP TO BOTTOM
OF HOLE WITH GUN DEPRESSED
5 DEGREES
FIRING MECHANISM-OE
CLEAN AND OIL RA PD 337125
Wigure 29-Localized Views of Armament Lubrication Points

1105-mm Howitzer)
75
TM 9-759
31-33
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
Section X
NEW VEHICLE RUN-IN TEST
31. PURPOSE.
a. When a new or reconditioned vehicle is first received at the
using organization, it is necessary for second echelon personnel to
determine whether or not the vehicle will operate satisfactorily when
placed in service. For this purpose, inspect all accessories, sub-
assemblies, assemblies, tools, and equipment to see that they are in
place and correctly adjusted. In addition, they will perform a run-
in test of at least 50 miles as directed in AR 850-15, paragraph 25,
table III, according to procedures in paragraph 33 below.
32. CORRECTION OF DEFICIENCIES.

a. Deficiencies disclosed during the course of the run-in test
will be treated as follows:
(1) Correct any deficiencies within the scope of the maintenance
echelon of the using organization before the vehicle is placed in
service.
(2) Refer deficiencies beyond the scope of the maintenai
echelon of the using organization to a higher echelon for correctiq
(3) Bring deficiencies of serious nature to the attention of the
supplying organization.
33. RUN-IN TEST PROCEDURES.

a. Preliminary Service.
(1) FIRE EXTINGUISHERS. See that portable and fixed system
cylinders are fully charged, securely stowed, and inspect the operat-
ing valves. If valves appear to have been opened or are damaged,
report to proper authority for exchange or refill. Examine lines
and controls of fixed system to see if they are in good condition and
that nozzles are properly aimed and not clogged.
(2) FUEL, OIL, AND WATER. Fill main and auxiliary fuel tank,
also see that engine oil is at the proper level. CAUTION: Mix
3/8 pint SAE No. 30 engine oil with each gallon of gas to be used
in Homelite engine unit. If there is a tag attached to engine oil tank
filler cap concerning contents, follow the instructions on the tag
before starting the engine when item 21 is reached. Check coolant
level at water level petcock (fig. 41) and replenish as needed.
During period wnen antifreeze is used, have value of antifreeze
checked and add as needed.
76
TM 9-759
33
(3) FUEL FILTER, ON HOMELITE AUXILIARY GENERATOR UNIT

ONLY. Remove plug and allow water and sediment to drain out.
If any appreciable amount of water is present, remove bowl, wash
bowl and screen in cleaning solvent and reassemble. Wash the
carburetor air cleaner screen and replace.
(4) BATTER'E3. Make hydrometer test, and add clean water
to '/2 inch above the plates if needed. Inspect terminal connections
and bolts, to be sure they are clean and secure. On vehicles so equipped,
read voltmeter to see that normal voltage is indicated.
(5) AIR CLEANERS AND BREATHER CAP. Examine carburetor
and auxiliary generator air cleaners and crankcase ventilator breather
cap, to see if they are in good condition and secure. Remove ele-
ments and wash in dry-cleaning solvent. Fill reservoirs to correct
level with fresh or clean used engine oil and reinstall securely. Make
sure all gaskets are in good condition, and that ducts and air horn
connections are tight.
(6) ACCESSORIES AND BELTS. See that all accessories, such
as carburetors, main and auxiliary generators, regulators, cranking
motor, water pump, fans, radiator cores and oil coolers are in good
condition, clean and secure. Inspect fan and generator drive belts
r good condition and that they are adjusted to have 1/2 to 3 /4-inch
ger-pressure deflection. Inspect fan accessory drive shafts and
niversal joints for looseness and damage. Test auxiliary generator
to see that it operates properly.
(7) ELECTRIC WIRING. Examine all accessible wiring and con-
duits to see if they are in good condition, securely connected, shielded
and supportec.
(8) TRACKS. Clean all foreign material from tracks and sus-
pension units. Examine track blocks for damage, loose wedges, nuts
or connectors. See that tracks are correctly assembled and adjusted.
Vehicles equipped with vertical volute springs should not have more
than 3/4-inch sag at inspection hole in sand shield. Vehicles equipped
with horizontal volute springs should not have any sag between the
drive sprockets and the forward suspension wheels, and between the
idler wheels and the rear suspension wheels. Be sure spare blocks
are present and securely mounted or stowed.
(9) BOGIE ASSEMBLY AND FLANGE NUTS. See that sprocket,
idler, bogie wheel and support roller, assembly, mounting and flange
nuts are present and secure.
(10) FENDERS AND SAND SHIELDS. Examine fenders, sand
hields, lamp and brush guards for good condition and secure mount-
TM 9.759
33
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
(11) TOWING CONNECTIONS. Inspect pintle hook, cables

all connections for good condition and proper operation of latch
and lock.
(12) HULL, TARPAULIN AND CAMOUFLAGE NET. See that all hull
attachments, hardware, lift loops, doors, hatches, their releases and
locking mechanism are in good condition, secure and operating prop-
erly. See that tarpaulin or camouflage net is in good condition and
properly stowed. CAUTION: Do not. fully release bottom escape
hatch latch during operation. See that hull drains open and close
freely, that there are no bright spots on hull to cause glare or rust,
and be sure markings are legible.
(13) VISION DEVICES. Inspect periscope prisms and windows,
mounted or spares, to see that they are in good condition and
clean. See that mounted units are secure in holders, and that
holders are properly mounted. Test each periscope to see that it
will elevate, traverse and depress through full range. CAUTION:
Clean periscopes and windows only with a soft cloth or brush.
(14) LUBRICATE. Perform a complete lubrication of the vehi-
cle, covering all intervals according to instructions on Lubrication
Order, paragraph 28, except gear cases, and units lubricated or ser-
viced in item (1) to (13). Check all gear case oil levels, and
as necessary to bring to correct levels. Change only if conditior
oil indicates the necessity, or if oil is not of proper grade for existil
atmospheric temperature. NOTE: Perform items (15) to (17)
during lubrication.
(15) VOLUTE SPRINGS AND SUSPENSION. Inspect all suspen-
sion brackets, arms, springs, links and guides to see if they are in
good condition, correctly assembled, secure, and not leaking exces-
sively at seals. Inspect rollers and suspension wheel tires for damage
or separation from wheels. On vehicles so equipped, see that s:iock
absorbers are not excessively worn and not leaking.
(16) STEERING LINKAGE. Inspect all shafts, arms, rods, con-
nections, levers and grips to see that they are in good condition,
correctly assembled and adjusted. Check released position of
steering levers. Levers are correctly positioned when horizontal dis-
tance from face of brake drum housing cover to front edge of lever
is 7 to 71/2 inches.
(17) PROPELLER SHAFT AND UNIVERSAL JOINTS. Inspect pro-
peller shaft and universal joints to see that they are properly alined,
securely mounted and not leaking excessively at seals.
(18) VENTS. Examine breathers in transmission and final drive
to be sure they are in good condition, secure and not clogged.
78
TM 9-759
33
19) PRIMER. As engine is being started in item 20, observe

primer action is satisfactory, and look for fuel leaks at primer
pump and connections.
(20) ENGINE WARM-UP. Operate primer, if necessary, and
start engine, observing if cranking motor has satisfactory speed, and
if it engages and disengages properly without unusual noise. Set
hand throttle to run engine at a fast idle. Start and test Homelite
auxiliary generator engine to see if it operates properly.
(21) INSTRUMENTS.
(a) Oil Pressure Gage. Normal oil pressure idling (500 revo-
lutions per minute) is 30 pounds minimum; at operating speed, 60
to 110 pounds. Stop engine if minimum oil pressure is not indicated
in 30 seconds after starting engine.
(b) Ammeter. After starting, ammeter may show high charg-
ing rate until current used in starting is restored to batteries. When
batteries are fully charged and lights and electrical accessories
turned off, the ammeter will remain at zero.
(c) Engine Temperature Gage. Reading should rise gradually
during warm-up period to about 90°F above atmospheric tempera-
ture. Highest safe operating temperature is 235°F. CAUTION:
Do not move vehicle until a temperature of 100°F is indicated.
jkd) High Water Temperature and Low Oil Pressure Signal.
al light or lights will come on if oil pressure is low (below 8
Funds), or if water temperature exceeds 235°F.
(e) Tachometer. Tachometer should register engine speed in
revolutions per minute, and record accumulating revolutions.
(f) Fuel Gage. Operate selector switch; gage should indicate
approximate amount of fuel in each main tank. Ordinarily tanks
will have been filled and gage should register FULL.
(g) Transmission Oil Temperature Gage. On vehicles so
equipped, gage should indicate temperature of transmission oil. Under
normal operation, temperature should not exceed 200°F.
(h) Oil Level Gage. On vehicle so equipped, gage should indicate
level of oil in engine oil pan sump.
(i) Clock. On vehicles so equipped, clock should be wound and
set correctly.
(j) Voltmeter. On vehicles so equipped, voltmeter should indi-
cate voltage of batteries approximately 24 volts when master switch
is on.
(22) ENGINE CONTROLS. Observe whether engine responds to
hand throttle and accelerator promptly and properly, and if there
is excessive looseness or binding in controls.
(23) HORN AND WINDSHIELD WIPERS. Test horn for tone and
[peration and when windshield wipers are in use, operate to see that
des press windshield firmly through full stroke.
79
TM 9.759
33
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
(24) LAMPS (LIGHTS). Observe whether all lamps includl

blackout and stop lights respond to the switches in both the OFF
and ON positions.
('25) LEAKS, GENERAL. Examine in engine, driver's and fight-
ing compartments and under vehicle for fuel, oil, and water leaks.
(26) TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT. Check tools and On Vehicle
Stowage List (paragraphs 6 through 11), to be sure all. items are
present, and see that they are serviceable and properly mounted or
stowed.
1). Run-in Test. Perform the following procedures (1) to (11)

inclusive during the road test of the vehicle. On vehicles which have
been driven 50 miles or more in the course of the delivery from
the supply to the using organization, reduce the length of the road
test to the least mileage necessary to make observation listed below.
CAUTION: Continuous operation of the engine at speeds approach-
ing the maximum indicated on the caution plate should be avoided
during the test.
(1) DASH INSTRUMENTS AND GAGES. Do not move vehicle until
engine temperature is above 100'F. Observe readings of oil pres-
sure gage, ammeter, fuel gage, and tachometer, and on vehicles so
equipped, voltmeter, oil level gage and transmission temperatu
gage, to see if they register the proper function of the units to which
they apply. With the vehicle in motion, the speedometer should
register vehicle speed, and the odometer register accumulating
mileage.
(2) BRAKES (STEERING AND PARKING). Pull back on both
steering brake levers and observe whether they stop the vehicle
effectively and meet resistance slightly bef.re the vertical position.
With vehicle on an incline, apply the parking brakes and observe
whether they hold the vehicle securely and the levers will lock se-
curely in the applied position. Apply the steering brakes indepen-
dently, and notice whether they steer the vehicle properly.
(3) CLUTCH. Clutch must not drag, and should engage with-
out unusual noise, grab or chatter. Test clutch for slippage under
full load. Pedal-free travel must be maintained at 27/8 inches on
vehicles equipped with a clutch booster, and at 3 inches when a clutch
booster is not provided. Inspect clutch booster linkage, spring and
connections, to see that they are correctly assembled and operate
properly. CAUTION: Do not ride clutch pedal, and do not engage
or disengage new clutch severely until clutch plates have become
properly worn in.
(4) TRANSMISSION. Gearshltt mechanism should operate easily M
without unusual noise and not slip out of mesh during operation.
80
TM 9-759
33
FV(5) ENGINE. The engine must respond to controls and have

a maximum pulling power without unusual noise, stalling, overheat-
ing or exhaust smoke.
(6) UNUSUAL NOISES. Be on the alert continually for unusual
noises that would indicate looseness of tracks, bogies, sprockets or
idler wheels.
(7) Halt vehicle at 10-mile intervals or less for services (8)
and (9) below.
(8) TEMPERATURES. Place hand cautiously on each track wheel
and track support roller hub to see whether they are abnormally hot.
If wheel hubs are too hot to touch with the hand, bearings may be
inadequately lubricated, damaged or improperly adjusted. Check
transmission and final drives for overheating or excessive oil leaks.
On vehicles equipped with horizontal volute springs, shock absorbers
should feel warm while vehicle is being operated.
(9) LEAKS. Inspect within engine, driver's and fighting com-
partments, also under vehicle for fuel, oil, and water leaks. Trace
all leaks to their source and correct or report same.
(10) GUN ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING MECHANISM. Place
vehicle on a 10-degree lateral incline (tilted sideways). Traverse
turret through its full 360-degree range by both the hand and
Over controls, and observe whether there is any indication of bind-
. With the gun pointed forward or rearward, elevate it through
its entire range with the hand controls to see if there is any binding,
excessive lash or erratic action.
(11) TRACK TENSION. Recheck track tension to see if it is
within specified limits. On vehicles equipped with vertical volute
springs, track should have 1/2 to 3 /4-inch sag between center and
rear roller at inspection window in sand shield. On vehicles equipped
with horizontal volute springs there should be no sag between the
drive sprockets and forward suspension wheels, and between the
idler wheels and the rear suspension wheels. Be sure adjustment
locking devices are secure.
c. Vehicle Publication and Reports.
(1) PUBLICATIONS. See that the vehicle Operator's Manual,
Lubrication Order, Standard Form No. 26 (Driver's Report-Acci-
dent, Motor Transportation), and W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 478 (MWO
and Major Unit Assembly Replacement Record), are in the vehicle,
legible, and properly stowed. NOTE: U.S.A. registration number
and vehicle nomenclature must be filled in on Form No. 478, for
new vehicles.
(2) REPORTS. Upon completion of the run-in test, correct or
ort any deficiencies noted. Report general condition of the
ide to designated individual in authority.
81
TM 9-759
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
! 2
'. . t t
-- Z
82
82
TM 9.759
34
Section XI
FIRST ECHELON PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
SERVICE
34. PURPOSE.
a. To insure mechanical efficiency it is necessary that the vehicle
be systematically inspected at intervals each day it is operated,
and weekly, so defects may be discovered and corrected before
they result in serious damage or failure. Certain scheduled main-
tenance services will be performed at these designated intervals.
The services set forth in this section are those performed by the
driver or crew before-operation, during-operation, at-halt and
after-operation, also weekly.
b. Driver preventive maintenance services are listed on the back
of "Driver's Trip Ticket and Preventive Maintenance Service
Record" W.D., Form No. 48, to cover vehicles of all types and
models. Items perculiar to specific vehicles, but not listed on
W.D., Form No. 48, are covered in manual procedures under the
items with which they are related. Certain items listed on the
form that do not pertain to the vehicle involved are eliminated
from the procedures as written into the manual. Every organization
Jist thoroughly school each driver in performing the maintenance
edure set forth in manuals, whether or not they are listed
jifically on W.D., Form No. 48.
c. The items listed on W.D., Form No. 48, that apply to this
vehicle are expanded in this manual to provide specific procedures
for accomplishment of the inspections and services. These ser-
vices are arranged to facilitate inspection and conserve the time
of the driver, and are not necessarily in the same numerical
order as shown on W.D., Form No. 48. The item numbers, how-
ever, are identical with those shown on that form.
d. The general inspection.of each item applies also to any sup-
porting member or connection, and generally include a check to
see whether the item is in good condition, correctly assembled,
secure, or excessively worn.
e. The inspection for "good condition" is usually an external
visual inspection to determine whether the unit is damaged be-
yond safe or serviceable limits. The term good condition is ex-
plained further by the following: Not bent or twisted, not chafed
or burned, not broken or cracked, not bare or frayed, not dented
or collapsed, not torn or cut, not deteriorated.
f. The inspection of a unit to see that it is "correctly assembled"
usually an external visual inspection to see whether it is in its
mal assembled position in the vehicle.
83
TM 9.759
34-35
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
g. The inspection of a unit to determine if it is "secure" is usually

an external visual examination, a wrench, hand-feel, or a pry-bar
check for looseness. Such an inspection should include any
brackets, lock washers, lock nuts, locking wires, or cotter pins used
in assembly.
h. "Excessively worn" will be understood to mean worn close to,
or beyond serviceable limits, and likely to result in a failure if not
replaced before the next scheduled inspection.
i. Any defects or unsatisfactory operating characteristics beyond
the scope of first echelon to correct must be reported at the
earliest opportunity to the designated individual in authority.
35. BEFORE-OPERATION SERVICE.
a. This inspection schedule is designed primarily as a check

to see that the vehicle has not been damaged, tampered with,
or sabotaged since the "After-operation Service" was performed.
Various combat conditions may have rendered the vehicle unsafe
for operation. and it is the duty of the driver to determine whether
or not the vehicle is in condition to carry out any mission to whi
it is assigned. This operation will not be entirely omitted, eve
in extreme tactical situations.
1). Procedures. Before-operation Service consists of inspecting
items listed below according to the procedure described, and cor-
recting or reporting any deficiencies. Upon completion of the
service, results should be reported promptly to the designated
individual in authority.
(1) ITEM 1, TAMPERING AND DAMAGE. Examine entire ve-
hicle, armament and special equipment for injury caused by tam-
pering, sabotage, collision, falling debris or shell fire, since parking.
Look within engine compartment for evidence of these conditions,
and for loose or damaged engine accessories or drive belts, loose
fuel, oil or coolant lines or disconnected control linkage. If wet,
dry ignition parts.
(2) ITEM 2, FIRE EXTINGUISHERS. Examine visible fixed ex-
tinguisher lines and nozzles in engine compartment for security,
damage, and correct aiming. Check portable and fixed extinguisher
cylinders for good condition, security and full charge. See that
nozzles are not clogged.
(3) ITEM 3, FUEL, OIL AND WATER. Check supply of fuel,
oil and coolant, and add as necessary to bring to proper leve I
NOTE: Investigate, correct, or report any unusual drop in levI
since After-operation Service. During freezing weather when anl
84
TM 9.759
35
FIRST ECHELON PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SERVICE
ze solution is in use, if an appreciable addition of water is

eeded, have antifreeze value checked and added as necessary
to protect cooling system against freezing.
(4) ITEM 4, ACCESSORIES AND DRIVES. Inspect accessible ac-
cessories such as carburetor, generator, magnetos, fans, fan shrouds,
air cleaners and Homelite heater-generator unit,and its accessories
for good condition and secure mounting. Be sure that fan and
generator belts have V.2 to 3 '4-inch deflection under finger pressure,
halfway between pulleys.
(5) ITEM 6, LEAKS. Check under vehicle, in fighting and
engine compartment, for fuel, oil or coolant leaks. Inspect engine
oil pan, filters, oil cooler, oil lines, radiator and water hose for
leaks. Trace any leaks to their source and correct or report them.
(6) ITEM 8, PRIMER. While starting engine, in item 7, observe
if primer functions satisfactorily and inspect for loose lines or
brackets and traces of leaks.
(7) ITEM 7, ENGINE WARM-UP. Start engine and note if
action of starting motor is satisfactory, particularly whether it has
adequate cranking speed, and engages and disengages without
unusual noise. CAUTION: If oil pressure gage does not indicate
gisfactory pressure immediately, engine should be stopped and
Ible corrected or reported. Allow engine to run at idling speed
W 00 to 1000 revolutions per minute during warm-up period, and
proceed with the following Before-operation Services.
(8) ITEM 9, INSTRUMENTS.
(a) Oil Pressure Gage and "Low Oil" Light. Oil pressure gage
should register 60 to 110 pounds at 2600 revolutions per minute.
Stop engine and investigate if "Low Oil" light comes on.
(b) Ammeter. The ammeter may show high charge until the
generator has restored to battery the current used in starting the
engine; it will continue to register slight charge or zero with
lights and accessories turned off if battery is fully charged. Any
unusual drop or rise in readings should be investigated.
(c) Tachometer. Tachometer should register engine revolutions
per minute and revolution counter should register accumulating
revolutions.
(d) Engine Temperature Gage. Reading should be approximately
90°F above atmospheric temperature. "Water Temp" light or lights
come on at maximum operating temperature, 235 0 F. CAUTION:
Vehicle should not be moved until temperature is above 100°F.
(e) Fuel Gage. Fuel gage should register amount of fuel in tanks.
Use selector switch to check amount in each tank. Normally, tanks
1up be full before operation and gage should register "FULL."
85
TM 9.759
35
TANK, MEDIUM. M4A3
(I) Transmission Oil Temperature Gage. On vehicles so equipj

gage should indicate transmission oil temperature; under normr
operation, temperature should not exceed 200°F.
(g) Voltmeter. On vehicles so equipped, when master switch is
on, the voltmeter should indicate battery voltage approximately 24
volts but not to exceed 30 volts.
(h) Clock. On vehicles so equipped, clock should be wound
and set correctly.
(i) Oil Level Gage. On vehicles so equipped, gage should indi-
cate amount of oil in engine oil pan sump.
(9) ITEM 10, HORN AND WINDSHIELD WIPER. If tactical situation
permits, test horn for proper operation and tone. When used, inspect
wipers, blades and arms to see that they are in good condition and
secure. Start wiper motors and observe if blades operate through
their full stroke and contact windshield surface evenly.
(10) ITEM 11, GLASS. Clean all vision device glass and inspect
for damage.
(11) ITEM 12, LIGHTS. Clean all lights and examine for loose-
ness and damage. If tactical situation permits, operate all switches
and observe if lamps respond satisfactorily.
(12) ITEM 13, WHEEL AND FLANGE NUTS. See that all dr
sprocket, idler wheel, bogie wheel, and support roller assembly an
mounting nuts are present and secure.
(13) ITEM 14, TRACKS. Inspect tracks for damage, loose con-
nectors, wedge nuts or lock pins. Track tension, on vehicles equipped
with vertical volute springs, should allow 1/2 to 3/4 inch sag half-way
between center and rear support wheels at inspection openings in
sand shields. On vehicles equipped with horizontal volute springs,
there should be no sag between the drive sprockets and forward
suspension wheels and between the idler wheels and the rear sus-
pension wheels.
(14) ITEM 15, SPRINGS AND SUSPENSIONS. Inspect volute springs,
arms and all bogie suspension units to see that they are in good
condition and securely mounted. On vehicles equipped with hori-
zontal volute springs and shock absorbers, see that shock absorbers
are secure and not leaking.
(15) ITEM 16, STEERING LINKAGE. Inspect all steering brake
lever linkage to see that it is in condition for safe operation. Check
released position of steering levers. Levers are correctly positioned
when the horizontal distance from face of brake drum housing cover
to front edge of lever is 7 to 71/2 inches. Pull back on both steering
levers, observe whether they both meet firm resistance just beA
86
TM 9.759
35.36
,W ing a vertical position and remain in applied position with lever

locking device on.
(16) ITEM 17, FENDERS AND SAND SHIELDS. Inspect to see that
fenders are in good condition and secure. When equipped with sand
shields, see that they are securely mounted, not damaged, and do
not interfere with tracks.
(17) ITEM 18, TOWING CONNECTIONS. See that tow loops are in
good condition and securely shackled. Examine pintle hook for good
condition and proper operation of latch and lock.
(18) ITEM 19, HULL AND TARPAULIN OR CAMOUFLAGE Nrr.
Inspect doors, deck hatches, bottom escape hatch and hull to be sure
these items are in good condition. See that doors and hatches open
and close properly and that all locks work freely. CAUTION: Do
not fully open bottom escape hatch latch during this inspection.
Inspect tarpaulin or camouflage net for good condition and proper
stowage.
(19) ITEM 20, DECONTAMINATOR. Examine decontaminator for
secure mounting and closed valve. Remove filler plug and see that
it is fully charged.
(20) ITEM 21, TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT. Check tools and equip-
t to see that all items are present, in good condition, and properly
nted or stowed.
-21) ITEM 22, ENGINE OPERATION. Engine should idle smoothly
between 500 and 800 revolutions per minute. Accelerate engine
several times momentarily and note any unusual noises, unsatis-
factory operating characteristics, vibrations or excessive smoke.
(22) ITEM 23, DRIVER'S PERMIT AND FORM No. 26. Driver
must have Operator's permit on his person. Accident-Report Form
No 26, vehicle manual, Lubrication Order and W.D., A.G.O. Form
No. 478 must be present, legible and safely stowed.
(23) ITEM 25, DURING-OPERATION CHECK. The During-oper-
ation inspections and observations should start immediately after the
vehicle is put in motion, in the nature of a road test.
36. DURING-OPERATION SERVICE.

a. While vehicle is in motion, listen for any sounds, such as
rattles, knocks, squeals or hums, that may indicate trouble. Look
for indications of trouble in cooling system and for smoke from any
part of the vehicle. Be on the alert to detect any odor of overheated
components or units such as generator or clutch, fuel vapor from a
S
leak in fuel system, exhaust gas or other signs of trouble. Any time
brakes are used, gears shifted or vehicle turned, consider this a
and notice any unsatisfactory or unusual performance. Notice
87
TM 9.759
36
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
promptly any unusually different instrument indications that may

signify possible trouble in the system to which the instrument applies.
h. Procedures. During-operation Services consist of observing

items listed below according to the procedures following each item
and investigating any indications of serious trouble. Notice minor
deficiencies to be corrected or reported at earliest opportunity, usually
at the next scheduled halt.
(,(1) ITEM 26, STEERING BRAKES. With vehicle in motion, apply
each brake independently, and observe if there is normal response
without excessive pull or lever travel. Disengage clutch, apply both
levers, and observe if brakes stop vehicle effectively, meeting re-
sistance slightly before vertical position. Stop vehicle on a rea-
sonable incline and apply parking brake lock to see if brakes hold
satisfactorily and lock holds levers securely in the applied position.
(2) ITEM 28, CLUTCH. Clutch release mechanism should operate
freely without excessive noise. Clutch should not grab, chatter or
squeal upon engagement and should not slip under load when fully
engaged. Pedal free travel should be maintained at 2 7/8 inches c_
vehicles that are equipped with clutch booster and at approximatel T
3 inches if not equipped with a clutch booster.
(3) ITEM 29, TRANSMISSION. Transmission should shift into all
gear ranges easily without unusual noise and should not slip out of
mesh during operation.
(4) ITEM 31, ENGINE AND CONTROLS. Driver should be on the
alert for deficiencies in engine performance such as lack of power and
acceleration, misfiring, backfiring, unusual noise, or indication of over-
heating or excessive smoke. Observe whether or not engine accele-
rates satisfactorily and controls operate without excessive looseness
or binding. If radio noise during operation of vehicle is reported,
driver will cooperate with radio operator in locating the interference
(par. 54).
(5) ITEM 32, INSTRUMENTS. Observe the readings of all perti-
nent instruments frequently during operation, to see whether they
are indicating proper function of units to which they apply, and
that speedometer registers vehicle speed and odometer records
accumulating mileage.
(6) ITEM 34, RUNNING GEAR. Listen for any unusual noise
from tracks, wheels, and rollers.
(7) ITEM 36, GUNS (MOUNTINGS, ELEVATING, TRAVERSINU
FIRING CONTROLS AND STABILIZER). While the vehicle is in moti.c
but before guns are used in combat, test both manual and hydraulic
controls to be sure that all mechanisms respond satisfactorily and
that all mountings are secure. Test stabilizer action by pressing gun
98
TM 9-759
36-37
ch to see that gun returns to aimed position without "hunting."

ijust stiffness control, as necessary. NOTE: Recoil tests and adjust-
ments must be made while firing.
37. AT-HALT SERVICE.

a. At-halt Services may be regarded as minimum maintenance
procedures and should be performed under all tactical conditions,
even though more extensive maintenance services must be' slighted
or omitted altogether
h. Procedures. At-halt Services consist of investigating any
deficiencies noted during operation, inspecting items listed below
according to the procedures following the items and correcting any
deficiencies found. Deficiencies not corrected should be reported
promptly to the designated individual in authority.
(1) ITEM 38, FUEL, OIL, AND WATER SUPPLY. Make sure that
there is adequate fuel, oil and coolant to operate vehicle to next
scheduled stop; replenish as supply and tactical situation permits. In
freezing weather, antifreeze of proper strength should be added if
considerable coolant is needed.
2) ITEM 39, TEMPERATURES, HUBS, TRANSMISSION AND FINAL
Iin'E. Place hand cautiously on each track wheel and track support
Wer hub to see whether they are abnormally hot. If wheel hubs
are too hot to touch with the hand, bearings may be inadequately
lubricated, damaged or improperly adjusted. Check transmission
and final drives for overheating or excessive oil leaks. On vehicles
equipped with horizontal volute springs and shock absorbers, the
shock absorbers should be warm after vehicle has been in operation.
(3) ITEM 40, VENTS. Examine vents of transmission and final
drives to see that they are present, and not damaged or clogged.
(4) ITEM 42, SPRINGS AND SUSPENSIONS. Inspect all springs and
bogie suspension units for looseness or damage. Remove stones and
other foreign objects embedded in suspension system or between
tracks. Inspect support roller bracket bolts, wedge nuts and bushing
pin lock pins to see that they are present and secure.
(5) ITEM 43, STEERING BRAKE LINKAGE. Inspect linkage for
looseness or damage and investigate any irregularities noted during
operation.
(6) ITEM 44, WHEEL AND FLANGE NUTS. See that all sprocket,
idler and bogie wheel and support roller assembly and mounting
nuts are present and secure.
_(7) ITEM 45, TRACKS. Examine tracks to see that they are
re and not damaged. Make sure that track tension is satis-
~
_it ~89
TM 9.759
37-38
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
factory. Remove stones and trash from tracks and suspension

systems.
(8) ITEM 46, LEAKS -GENERAL. Inspect vehicle generally
for indications of fuel, oil and water leaks. Trace any leaks found
to source and correct or report them.
(9) ITEM 47, ACCESSORIES AND BELTS. Examine accessible
engine accessories, auxiliary and main generators and attachments
to be sure they are secure, properly alined and that drive belts
are in good condition and properly adjusted. Belts should have
V2 to 3/4-inch finger-pressure deflection. If radio noise caused by
operation of the main or auxiliary engine was observed, examine
all wiring harness and coupling rings and nuts; engine, regulator
and master switch bonding straps; regulator filters, auxiliary engine
spark plug resistor-suppressor, and condensers across auxiliary gen-
erator brushes, for damage and loose connections and mountings.
(10) ITEM 48, AIR CLEANERS AND BREATHER CAP. Whe
operating under extremely dusty or sandy conditions, inspect
cleaners and breather cap at each halt to see that they are in c
dition to deliver clean air properly; service as required.
(11) ITEM 49, FENDERS, SAND SHIELDS, AND GUARDS. Inspect
these items for good condition and secure mounting.
(12) ITEM 50, TOWING CONNECTIONS. See that connections are
properly fastened and securely shackled. Examine for frayed or
broken cable. Examine pintle hook for secure mounting and proper
operation.
(13) ITEM 61, HULL, TARPAULIN AND/OR CAMOUFLAGE NET.
Inspect for damage to hull or attachments. See that entrance and
escape hatches operate freely and that camouflage net is in good
condition and secure. CAUTION: Do not fully open bottom
escape hatch latch during inspection. See that camouflage net is
properly stowed.
(14) ITEM 52, GLASS. Clean all vision devices and light lenses;
inspect these items for damage and security.
38 AFITER-OPERATION AND WEEKLY SERVICE.

a. After-operation servicing is particularly important because
at this time the driver inspects his vehicle to detect any deficiencim
that may have developed, and corrects those he is permitted
handle. He should report promptly to the designated individit
in authority the results of his inspection. If this schedule is per-
formed thoroughly, the vehicle should be ready to roll again on a
moment's notice. The Before-operation Service, with a few ex-
ceptions, is then necessary only to ascertain whether the vehicle
90
TM 9.759
38
the same condition in which it was left upon completion of

After-operation Service. The After-operation Service should
never be entirely omitted, even in extreme tactical situations, but
may be reduced to the bare fundamental services outlined for the
At-halt Service, if necessary.
b. Procedures. When performing the After-operation Service,
the driver must remember and consider any irregularities ..oticed
during the day in the Before-operation, During-operation and At-
halt Services. The After-operation Service consists of inspecting
and servicing the following items. Those items of the After-opera-
tion that are marked by an asterisk (*) require additional weekly
services, the procedures for which are indicated in step (b) of each
applicable item.
(1) ITEM 56, INSTRUMENTS. Check all pertinent instruments
to be sure they are operating properly, and continue to register or
indicate correct performance of units to which they apply. Inspect
them for looseness and damage. See that all condensers and bond-
ing straps are securely connected and mounted.
(2) ITEM 55, ENGINE OPERATION. Before stopping engine,
accelerate and decelerate, noting any unusual noise or irregular
performance; investigate any deficiencies noted during operation.
TION: Allow engine to run at idle speed 2 to 3 minutes before
ing the engine. Open master battery switch and close fuel
ves.
(3) ITEM 54, FUEL, OIL, AND WATER. Fill fuel tanks. Check
coolant level and replenish as necessary. If appreciable amount of
coolant is required, have value of antifreeze checked and add anti-
freeze solution as needed. Bring engine oil to proper level, Re-
plenish spare fuel, oil and water supply.
(4) ITEM 57, HORN AND WINDSHIELD WIPERS. If tactical situa-
tion permits, test horn for proper operation and tone. If in use,
see that windshield and wipers are in good condition, that wipers
operate properly and inspect blades and arms for good condition
and security.
(5) ITEM 58, GLASS. Clean all vision devices and inspect for
damage.
(6) ITEM 59, LIGHTS. Clean all light lenses and examine for
broken parts and security of mounting. Turn on switches to see
that all lamps operate.
(7) ITEM 60, FIRE EXTINGUISHER. See if portable extinguisher
is in good condition and securely mounted. Inspect fixed system,
cylinders, valves, lines and nozzles for looseness or damage. Be
sure nozzles are not clogged. If extinguishers have been used, or
Ives opened or damaged, report for exchange or refill.
91
TM 9-759
38
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
(8) ITEM 61, DECONTAMINATOR. Inspect decontaminator for

damage and security of mounting. If decontaminator has been
used, report for exchange or refill.
(9) ITEM 62, ::BATTERIES AND VOLTMETER.
(a) Inspect battery for leaks or damage and security of mount-
ing and connections.
(b) Weekly. Clean batteries and carrier, and inspect for loose
or corroded terminals. If terminals are corroded, remove, clean and
apply a thin film of grease. Add clean water to bring level to
1/2 inch above plates. NOTE: In freezing temperatures, do not
add water until just before vehicle is to be operated. On vehicles
so equipped, when master switch is on, voltmeter should indicate
voltage of batteries (approximately 24 volts).
(10) ITEM 63, *ACCESSORIES AND BELTS.
(a) Examine generator and fan belts for condition and proper
adjustment. Inspect accessible vehicle accessories, auxiliary Home-
lite generator and oil cooler for good condition and secure mountingj
Belts should have 1/2 to 3/4-inch deflection under finger pressui
halfway between pulleys.
(b) Weekly. Clean all trash from in and around oil cooler air
core passages. Inspect Homelite unit for good condition and test for
proper operation.
(11) ITEM 64, ::ELECTRIC WIRING.
(a) Examine conduits for looseness or damage, tighten all loose
connections and clean all accessible wiring.
(b) Weekly. Be sure all radio noise suppression bond straps,
filters, condensers and suppressors on main and auxiliary units are
securely connected or mounted (par. 152). Tighten wiring conduit
coupling rings and nuts.
(12) ITEM 65, AIR CLEANERS AND BREATHER CAP. Examine
carburetor air cleaners and breather cap, including auxiliary gen-
erator, to see that they are in good condition and securely con-
nected. See that oil is at correct level and not excessively dirty. If
excessive dirt is present, clean and service as necessary, according
to Lubrication Order, paragraph 29(d (1).
(13) ITEM 66, ';FUEL, AND OIL FILTER.
(a) Inspect fuel filter on Homelite unit and service as required.
Test operation of engine oil filter at manual turning nut. See para-
graph 61 b. '
(b) Weekly. Remove and clean engine oil filter and HomeliA
fuel filter element in dry-cleaning solvent.
(14) ITEM 67, ENGINE CONTROLS. Inspect accelerator, hand
throttle and all controls for worn or disconnected linkage.
92
TM 9-759
38
5) ITEM 68, :TRACKS.

(a) While inspecting tracks for damage and loose connections,
remove all stones and foreign objects from between blocks and
tracks and wheels and rollers. Check track tension. On vehicles
equipped with vertical volute springs, track sag should be not
less than 1/2 inch or more than 3/4 inch halfway between center
and rear support rollers at sand shield inspection opening. On
vehicles equipped with horizontal volute springs, there should be
no track sag between the drive sprockets and the forward sus-
pension wheels, or between the idler wheels and the rear suspension
wheels. CAUTION: Do not adjust track too tight on vehicle
equipped with horizontal volute springs.
(b) Weekly. Tighten all wedge nuts and on vehicles equipped
with horizontal volute springs, see that bushing pir. lock pins are
secure.
(16) ITEM 69, :SPRING AND SUSPENSIONS.
(a) Inspect volute springs, spring seats, spring seat pins, support
rollers and suspension arms to see that they are in good condition,
correctly assembled and securely mounted. Examine rubber tires
for cuts, breaks, or separation from wheels. On vehicles equipped
* horizontal spring suspension, be sure shock absorbers are secure
not leaking.
) Weekly. Tighten support roller bracket bolts, suspension
bracket bolts and all clamp bolts. Inspect guides, sprockets and
skids for excessive wear or damage.
(17) ITEM 70, STEERING BRAKE LINKAGE. Inspect levers,
linkage and cross shafts for good condition, security, adequate lubri-
cation and free operation. Investigate any unsatisfactory per-
formance noticed during operation.
(18) ITEM 71, :PROPELLER SHAFT (WEEKLY ONLY). Ex-
amine shaft and universal joints to see that they are in good con-
dition, secure and that joints are not leaking.
(19) ITEM 72, *VENTS.
(a) Inspect transmission and final drive vents to see that they
are in good condition, secure and not clogged.
(b) Weekly. Remove vents, clean thoroughly and install securely.
(20) ITEM 73, LEAKS. Inspect engine crankcase, gear case,
radiator and fuel tank lines, connections and seals for leaks.
(21) ITEM 74, GEAR OIL LEVELS. Check oil level in.transmis-
sion and differential and add as necessary. Cold oil level should
not be lower than 1/2 inch below filler hole. NOTE: Allow trans-
MEion to cool for 20 minutes after operation before checking
BWevel.
S1:55( O0-48--7 93
TM 9-759
38
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
(22) ITEM 76, FENDERS AND SAND SHIELDS. Inspect fenders,

lamp guards and sand shields to be sure they are securely mounted
and not damaged.
(23) ITEM 77, TOWING CONNECTIONS. Be sure towing cable
is in good condition and securely attached or properly stowed.
Examine pintle hook for good condition and proper operation of
latch and locking mechanism.
(24) ITEM 78, HULL, TARPAULIN AND/OR CAMOUFLAGE NET.
Examine entire hull for damage from shell fire or collision. Be
sure top and floor escape hatches are alined and that they open and
lock securely. CAUTION: Do not fully open bottom escape hatch
latch during inspection. See that all hull drain plugs and inspec-
tion plates are in place and secure. Examine tarpaulin or camouflage
net for damage and stow it properly.
(25) ITEM 79, ARMOR. Inspect bottom, sides, front, rear and
turret armor for broken welds, loose hinges and latches. Check all
hatches and pistol ports for good condition and proper operatior~
(26) ITEM 80, VISION DEVICES. Inspect the periscope prisms
and windows to see that they are in good condition, clean, secure
in holders and see that holders are securely mounted. Examine
periscope traversing, elevating and depressing mechanism. See that
lever locking devices operate freely and are not excessively worn.
Check the spare prisms and windows and their stowage boxes to see
that they are in good condition, clean and secure. CAUTION:
Prisms should be cleaned only with a soft cloth or brush.
(27) ITEM 81, TURRET AND GUNS: MOUNTING, ELEVATING,
TRAVERSING AND FIRING CONTROLS. Be sure all mounted guns are
secure in their mounts, clean, lightly oiled and in condition for im-
mediate use. Test manual gun-elevating mechanism and all firing
controls for proper operation. Be sure that manual and hydraulic
traversing mechanism is in good condition and operates satis-
factorily. Be sure radio noise suppression bonding strap and bonding
cable at turret slip ring is in good condition, securely connected
and supported. Correct or report to designated authority, any de-
ficiencies noticed during operation.
(28) ITEM 82, ':TIGHTEN.
(a) Tighten any unit mountings and assembly nuts or screws
where inspection has indicated the necessity.
(b) Weekly. Tighten sprocket and idler flange nuts, track con4
nector wedge nuts, universal joint flange, gun mounts, tool and
equipment mountings, ammunition racks and clips or any other
item where inspection or experience indicates the necessity on a
weekly or mileage basis.
94
TM 9.759
38.39
SECOND ECHELON PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
[(29) ITEM 83, *LUBRICATION.

(a) Lubricate all points of vehicle where inspection indicates
the necessity or as indicated on the Lubrication Order as needing
daily lubrication.
(b) Weekly. Lubricate all points of the vehicle indicated on
the Lubrication Order as necessary on a weekly or mileage basis.
(30) ITEM 84, ;:CLEAN ENGINE AND VEHICLE.
(a) Remove all empty shell casings and refuse from interior
of vehicle. Wipe up oil or fuel drippings from driving compartment,
turret, and engine compartment. Remove excess dirt, stones and
grease from tracks and suspension. See that engine compartment
grilles are clear of obstructions.
(b) Weekly. Wash exterior of vehicle and remove all dirt and
mud. If washing is impractical, wipe as clean. as possible and watch
for bright spots that would cause glare. If compressed air is avail-
able, blow all dirt out of engine compartment and transmission oil
cooler fins in fighting compartment.
(31) ITEM 85, "TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT.
(a) Check vehicle tools and equipment stowage lists, para-
graphs 6 through 11, to be sure all items are present, in serviceable
condition, and properly stowed or mounted.
Pb) Weekly. Clean tools and equipment. See that tools with
tting edges are sharp and properly protected. Be sure tools and
equipment are mounted or stowed securely in proper location on,
or in, vehicle.
Section Xll
39. SECOND ECHELON PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SER-
VICES.
a. Regular scheduled maintenance inspections and services are
a preventive maintenance function of the using arm, and are the re-
sponsibility of commanders of operating organizations.
(1) FREQUENCY. The frequency of the preventive maintenance
services outlined herein is considered a minimum requirement for nor-
mal operation of vehicles. Under unusual operating conditions, such
as extreme temperatures and dusty or sandy terrain, it may be
necessary to perform certain maintenance services more frequently.
(2) FIRST ECHELON PARTICIPATION. The drivers should ac-
company their vehicles and assist the mechanics while periodic second
echelon preventive maintenance services are performed. Ordinarily
b driver should present the vehicle for a scheduled preventive main-
95
TM 9-759
39
TANK. MEDIUM, M4A3
tenance service in a reasonably clean condition; that is, it should

be dry and not caked with mud or grease to such an extent that in-
spection and servicing will be seriously hampered. Ho;':er, the
vehicle should not be washed or wiped thoroughly clean, since certain
types of defects, such as cracks, leaks'and loose or shifted parts or as-
semblies, are more evident if the surfaces are slightly soiled or dusty.
(3) If instructions other than those contained in the general pro-
cedures in step (4) or the specific procedures in step (5) which fol-
low, are required for the correct performance of a preventive main-
tenance service, or for correction of a deficiency, other sections of this
manual pertaining to the item involved, or a designated individual
in authority, should be consulted.
(4) GENERAL PROCEDURES. These general procedures are basic
instructions which are to be followed when performing the services
on the items listed in specific procedures. NOTE: The second
echelon personnel must be thoroughly trained in these procedures, so
that they will apply them automatically.
(a) When new or overhauled subassemblies are installed to cj
rect deficiencies, care should be taken to see that they are clean, cAd
rectly installed and properly lubricated and adjusted.
(b) When installing new lubricant retainer seals, a coating of the
lubricant should be wiped over the surface of the lip of the seal. When
the new seal is a leather se 1l, it should be soaked in SAE No. 10 en-
gine oil (warm, if practicable) for at least 30 minutes. Then, the
leather lip should be worked carefully by hand, before installing the
seal. The lip must not be scratched or marred.
(c) The general inspection of each item applies also to any sup-
porting member or connection, and usually includes a check to see
whether the item is in good condition, correctly assembled, secure or
excessively worn. The mechanics must be thoroughly trained in the
following explanation of these terms:
1. The inspection for "good condition" is usually an external visual
inspection to determine whether the unit is damaged beyond safe or
serviceable limits. The term "good condition" is explained further by
the following terms: Not bent or twisted, not chafed or burned, not
broken or cracked, not bare or frayed, not dented or collapsed, not
torn or cut.
2. The inspection of a unit to see that it is correctly assembled is
usually an external visual inspection to see whether it is in its normal
assembled position in the vehicle.
3. The inspection of a unit to determine if it is secure is usual
an external visual examination, a hand-feel, wrench or a pry-bar
check for looseness. Such an inspection should include any brackets,
lock washers, lock nuts, locking wire, or cotter pins used in assembly.
96
TM 9-759
39
"Excessively worn" will be understood to mean worn close to,

~eyond, serviceable limits, and likely to result in a failure, if not
replaced before the next scheduled inspection.
(d) Special Services. These services are indicated by repeating
the item numbers in the columns that show the interval at which the
services are to be performed and show that the parts as assemblies
are to receive certain mnandatory services. Fot example, an item
number in one or both columns opposite a TIGHTEN procedure, means
that the actual tightening of the object must be performed. The
special services include:
1. Adjust. Make all necessary adjustments in accordance with
the pertinent section of this manual, special bulletins, or other current
directives.
2. Clean. Clean units of the vehicle with dry-cleaning solvent to
remove excess lubricant, dirt and other foreign material. After the
parts are cleaned, rinse them in clean fluid and dry them thoroughly.
Take care to keep the parts clean until reassembled, and be certain
to keep cleaning fluid away from rubber or other material which it
will damage. Clean the protective grease coating from new parts,
since this material is not a good lubricant.
Is 3. Special lubrication. This applies either to lubrication opera-

that do not appear on the vehicle Lubrication Order or to items
do appear on such Orders, but which should be performed in
nection with the maintenance operations, if parts have to be dis-
assembled for inspection or service.
4. Serve. This usually consists of performing special opera-
tions, such as replenishing battery water, draining and refilling units
with oil, and cleaning or changing the oil filter cartridge, or air
cleaners.
5. Tighten. All tightening operations should be performed with
sufficient wrench torque (force on the wrench handle) to tighten the
unit according to good mechanical practice. Use torque-indicating
wrench where specified. Do not overtighten, as this may strip
threads or cause distortion. Tightening will always be understood to
include the correct installation of lock washers, lock nuts and cotter
pins provided to secure the tightening.
(e) When conditions make it difficult to perform the complete
preventive maintenance procedures at one time, they can sometimes
be handled in sections, planning to complete all operations within
the week, if possible. All available time at halts and in bivouac areas
must be utilized, if necessary, to assure that maintenance operations
are completed When limited by the tactical situation, items with
Special Services in the columns, should be given first consideration.
(f) The numbers of the preventive maintenance procedures that
h ow are identical with those outlined on W.D., A.G.O. Form
97
TM 9-759
39
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
No. 462, which is the "Preventive Maintenance Service Work Sheet

for Full Track and Tank-like Wheeled Vehicles." Certain items on the
work sheet that do no-t apply to this vehicle are not included in the
procedures in the manual. In general, the numerical sequence of
items on the work sheet is followed in the manual procedures, but in
some instances there is deviation for conservation of the mechanic's
time and effort.
(5) SPECIFIC PROCEDURES. The procedures for performing each
item in the 50-hour (500 miles) and 100-hour (1,000 miles) main-
tenance procedures, whichever shall occur first, are described in the
following chart. NOTE: Those procedures preceded by an asterisk
(*) require additional services at each third 100-hours. Each page
of the chart has two columns at its left edge corresponding to the
100-hour and the 50-hour maintenance respectively. Very often
it will be found that a particular procedure does not apply to both
scheduled maintenances. In order to determine which procedure to
follow, look down the column corresponding to the maintenance due,
and whenever an item number appears, perform the operations indi-
cated opposite the number.
MAINTENANCE ROAD TEST
100-Hour 0How
NOTE: When the tactical situation does not permit a
full road test, perform those items which require little
or no movement of the vehicle, namely items 2, 3, 5, 6,
9, 12, 13, 14, and 15. When a road test is possible, it
should be for three miles, but not over five miles.
1 1 Before-operation Service. Perform the Before-opera-
tion Service as outlined in paragraph 35.
2 2 Instruments and Gages. Check these items as follows:
OIL PRESSURE GAGE. Engine oil pressure must be indi-
cated when engine is idling and 60 to 110 pounds at
2600 revolutions per minute. Stop engine immediately
when "low oil" red indicator light comes on.
ENGINE TEMPERATURE GAGE. Reading should be ap-
proximately 90 F above atmospheric temperature.
"Water Temp" light comes on at maximum operating
temperature, 235-F. CAUTION: Vehicle should not be
moved until temperature is above 100-F.
AMMETER. With a fully charged battery, ammeter
reading may show charge for only a short time afted
starting engine, then zero or slightly above with all light
and electrical accessories turned off. If battery charge is
low, ammeter will indicate higher charge for a longer
period of time.
98
TM 9.759
39
AINTENANCE
00-Hour 50-Hou
TACHOMETER. Inspect tachometer for proper reading,
without excessive hand fluctuation or unusual noise. See
that revolution counter registers accumulating revolu-
tions.
FUEL GAGE. Operate selector switch to both R and L
positions and observe whether fuel gage indicates ap-
proximate amount of fuel in each tank.
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER. Speedometer should in-
dicate vehicle speed and odometer register accumulating
mileage without excessive noise or fluctuation.
TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE GAGE. On vehicles
so equipped, gage should indicate the temperature of the
transmission oil; under normal operation, temperature
of transmission oil should not exceed 200°F.
OIL LEVEL GAGE. On vehicles so equipped, when en-
gine is idling, pointer should indicate the amount of oil
in the engine oil sump.
CLOCK. On vehicles so equipped, clock should be wound
and set correctly.
VOLTMETER. On vehicles so equipped, voltmeter should
indicate the battery voltage when master switch is on
(approximately 24 volts).
3 3 Windlshield, Windshield Wiper and Siren. If wind-
shield is in use, see that wiper blades move through their
full stroke and contact surface evenly. If tactical situa-
tion permits, test siren for operation and tone.
5 5 Brakes, (Steering and Parking, Levers, Braking Effect
antd Steering Action). Observe released position when
steering levers. Levers are in correct position when
horizontal distance from face of brake drum housing
cover to front edge of lever is 7 to 71/2 inches. Pull back
on both steering brake levers and observe whether they
stop the vehicle effectively and meet resistance slightly
before the vertical position. With the vehicle on an in-
cline, apply the parking brakes and observe whether they
hold the vehicle securely and the levers remain in the
applied position. Apply the steering brakes independent-
ly and notice whether they steer the vehicle properly.
6 6 Clutch (Free Travel, Drag, Noise, Grah, Chatter and
Slip). Test pedal for correct free travel. Free pedal
99
TM 9-759
39
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
MAINTENANCE travel must be maintained at 27/8 inches on vehicles

00-Hour 50Hou requipped with clutch boosters, and at approximately 3
inches on vehicles not equipped with clutch boosters
(par. 110 d). Clutch should not drag, and should engage
without unusual noise or grabbing. Test clutch for slip-
ping under load when engaged. Inspect clutch booster
linkage, spring and connections to see that they are in
good condition, correctly assembled and operate prop-
erly.
7 7 Transmission (Lever Action, Vibration and Noise).
Shift through each speed range of transmission. Observe
whether control lever operates properly and whether
there are any unusual vibrations or noise in any speed
range that might indicate damage, excessive wear, loose
mountings, or improper lubrication.
9 9 Engine (Idle. Acceleration, Power, Noise, Smoke and
Oil Consumption).
IDLE. With vehicle stopped, observe if engine rup
smoothly at normal idling speed of 500 revolutions pe
minute. Throughout road test, observe whether there
is any tendency of engine to stall when accelerator is
released and hand throttle is closed.
ACCELERATION, POWER, VIBRATION AND NOISE. Test
engine for normal acceleration and pulling power in each
speed range. While testing in high range, accelerate
engine from low speed with wide open throttle to top
speed and listen for unusual engine noise, ping, or vibra-
tion that might indicate loose, damaged, excessively worn,
or inadequately lubricated engine parts or accessories.
Governed engine cruising speed should be approximately
2600 revolutions per minute. During road test, look for
excessive smoke from exhaust or engine compartment.
OIL CONSUMPTION. At completion of road test, a check
should be made to see if engine has been consuming an
excessive amount of oil.
14 14 Noise and V'ibration (Engine Mountings and Acces-
sories). While accelerating and decelerating engine,
listen for unusual noise in engine or accessories. Notice
whether there is excessive vibration that may indicate
loose engine mountings, or noise that may indicate looi
or inadequately lubricated clutch parts or releag
bearings.
10 10 Unusual Noise (Propeller Shaft and U-Joints, Differ-
ential and Final Drives, Sprockets, Idlers, Bogie
100
TM 9-759
39
NT NANCE Wheels, Support Rollers and Tracks). During road

.ouHou test, listen for any unusual noise from any of the above
items that might indicate damaged, defective or loose
parts, or inadequate lubrication.
11 11 Temperature (Transmission, Differential and Final
Drives, Hubs, Sprockets, Bogie Wheels and Support
'1Rollers). After operating, hand-feel for any abnormal
temperature in above units. On vehicles equipped with
horizontal volute springs, shock absorbers should feel
warm while vehicle is being operated. NOTE: If proper
location is selected for this check, time will be saved in
performing item 12.
12 12 Gun Elevating and Traversing Mechanism. Place
vehicle in a position where it is tilted (sidewise) about
10 degrees. Traverse turret through its full 360-degree
range by both hand and power controls; check for bind-
ing, excessive lash or erratic action. With gun pointing
forward, elevate it through its entire range with hand
controls to check for indication of binding, excessive
lash or erratic action.
13 Leaks (Engine Oil, Fuel and Water). After stopping
vehicle, look in engine compartment, under vehicle, in
fighting and driving compartments for fuel, oil or
coolant leaks. Examine all fuel and oil lines and radiator
hose and connections for leaks.
15 15 Track Tension (Final Road Test), Inspect for satis-
factory track adjustment. On vehicles equipped with
vertical volute springs, there should not be more than
3/4-inch nor less than 1/2-inch sag at inspection window
in sand shield. On vehicles equipped with horizontal
volute springs, there should be no sag between drive
sprockets and forward suspension wheels and between
idler wheels and rear suspension wheels. CAUTION:
On vehicles equipped with horizontal volute springs, do
not adjust track tension too tight. To determine proper
tension, place a wood block 3/4 inch thick and 2 inches
wide between the track and each dual support roller.
Tighten the track until the track just clears the single
support rollers.
16 16 Fuel Pump, Vacuum and Pressure Test.
VACUUM TEST. Disconnect the fuel line which leads
from the fuel pump to the fuel filter and attach a
vacuum gage to the inlet of the fuel pump. Start the
101
TM 9-759
39
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
MAINTENAlNCE engine and run at a speed uA approximately 700 revolu-

00-Hour Hour tions per minute. The pump will build up a vacuum
which should advance until it reads at least 10 inches.
Stop the engine and observe the vacuum gage (the hand
should fall back slowly). A fast rate of fall indicates a
poor fuel pump outlet valve connection, loose cover
screws, leaky diaphragm or loose connection.
PRESSURE TEST. Disconnect the fuel line which leads
to the front carburetor and attach a pressure gage to the
outlet of the fuel pump. Start the engine and run at a
speed of approximately 700 revolutions per minute. Ob-
serve the reading of the pressure gage, which should
be between 41/2 and 6 pounds.
17 17 Crankcase (Leaks. Level). Examine the crankcase for
indications of oil leaks and see if the oil is up to the
correct level.
18 18 Side Armor (Fenders, Guards, Paint and Markings,
Tow Shackles, Pintle andl Horn). Examine vehicle fo4
damage to side armor, fenders, sand shields, and guards
from shell fire or collision; check for broken welds. Look
for rust or bright spots in paint that might cause re-
flections. See that all vehicle markings are legible.
Examine towing shackles and pintle for good condition
and secure mountings. Test horn for operation and tone.
19 19 Bottom (Armor, Escape Hatches, Inspection Plates
andl Drain Plugs). Inspect hull bottom for damage.
See that bottom escape hatch latch operates properly
and is adequately lubricated, and see that all drain
plugs are tight. Apply a few drops of oil to escape hatch
latches. CAUTION: Do not fully open bottom escape
hatch latches during inspection.
20 20 Final Drive. Inspect housings for good condition and
leakage; check lubricant level. See that all assembly
and mounting bolts are secure. NOTE: If change of
lubricant is due, drain and refill with specified oil at this
time (pars. 28-30).
20 TIGHTEN. Tighten all external assembly and mounting
bolts securely.
21 21 ':Track (Blocks. Connectors and Wedges). Inspectj
tracks to see that these items are in good condition, cor-
rectly assembled and secure. Pay particular attention
to loose connectors, bottomed wedges and dead blocks.
On vehicles equipped with vertical volute springs,
102
TM 9.759
39
MAINTENANCE tighten wedge nuts; on vehicles equipped with horizontal

100-Hour Hour volute springs, see that bushing pin lock pins are present
and secure.
21 '::NOTE: Whenever the tracks are disconnected and
removed from the sprockets, support rollers, and idlers,
or at each third 100-hour maintenance service, the re-
lated items 22 and 25, marked by an asterisk (;:) on the
Preventive Maintenance Service Work Sheet W.D.,
A.G.O. Form No. 462, should be inspected as described
below in the asterisk-marked (:') procedures. On the
regular 50- to 100-hour maintenance services, the track
should not be removed unless repairs are needed.
CAUTION: Whenever tracks are removed for repairor
replacement, do not reinstall tracks until the services
followed by the (:::) in items 22 and 25 have been com-
pleted.
22 22 Idler (Wheels, Arms, Eccentrics, Serration Plates,
Adjustment, Nuts and Springs). Inspect these items to
see that they are in good condition, correctly assembled,
secure, and that grease is not leaking excessively from
wheel bearing seals. Be sure adjusting nuts and adjust-
ing pin nut are secure. Tighten all assembly and mount-
ing bolts and nuts securely.
22 :::NOTE: In addition to the above, at ec:h third 100-
hour maintenance service or wherever the tracks are
removed from the idlers, check the idler hub bearings
for looseness or end play. Spin the idler wheels and
listen for any unusual noise that might indicate a dam-
aged, excessively worn or inadequately lubricated
bearing.
23 23 Bogie (Levers, Arms, Links, Gudgeons, Collars and

Guides, Volute Springs and Seats, Frames and Wear-
ing Plates). Inspect to see that these items are in good
condition, correctly assembled and secure, and that
gudgeons, collars and guides, and wearing plates are not
excessively worn. Note whether volute springs have
taken a permanent set. On vehicles equipped with verti-
cal volute spring suspension (two or more coils resting
on seat) and on vehicles equipped with horizontal
volute springs, the measurement between spring seats
must not be less than approximately 91/2 inches. This
condition or measurement will be considered a standard
for replacement.
103
TM 9.759
39
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
MAINTENANCE
OO-Hour 5BHour
23 TIGHTEN. Tighten all assembly and mounting nuts or

screws securely.
24 24 Wheels (Tires, Rollers and Skids). Inspect these
items for good condition, correct assembly and secure
mounting. Pay particular attention to see that tire rub-
ber has not separated from wheel and roller rims, and
that tires are not cut, torn or excessively worn. Inspect
for excessive lubricant leaks from bearings.
24 TIGHTEN. Jack up bogie wheels (par. 136 b) and ex-
amine bearings for looseness and end play. Spin wheels
and listen for any unusual noise. Tighten assembly and
and mounting bolts securely.
25 25 Sprockets (Hubs, Teeth and Nuts). Inspect sprockets
to see that they are in good condition, correctly assemr
bled and mounting bolts are secure. Inspect sprocke.
teeth for excessive wear and shaft flange gaskets or oil
seals for excessive leaks. If sprocket teeth are exces-
sively worn, sprockets should be replaced or reversed.
Tighten assembly and mounting bolts securely. NOTE:
Whenever the tracks are removed, the above operation
should be performed before the tracks are reinstalled.
25 ::"NOTE: In addition to the above, at each third 100-
hour operation, or whenever the track is disconnected
and removed from the sprocket, check the sprocket hub
bearings for looseness and end play. Check the sprocket
teeth for excessive wear and see that sprockets are se-
cured to hubs and that hub to final drive bolts are
secure. After performing the above, reinstall the tracks
and connect them securely.
26 26 Track Tension. On vehicles equipped with vertical
volute spring suspension, there should not be more than
3/4-inch nor less than 1/2-inch sag at inspection window
in sand shield or halfway between the two rear support
rollers. On vehicles equipped with horizontal volute
spring suspension, there should be no sag between the
drive sprockets and the forward suspension whee., and
between the idler wheels and the rear suspension wheelsi
Adjust track tension to these standards and lock se-
curely. CAUTION: On vehicles equipped with hori-
zontal volute spring suspension, do not adjust tracks too
tight. To determine proper tension, place a wood block
1r -
TM 9.759
39
MAINTENANCE 3/4 inch thick and 2 inches wide between the track and
00-Hou0Hour each dual support roller. Tighten the track until the
track just clears the single support rollers.
27 27 Top Armor (Turret, Deck. Paint and Markings

Grilles,;-Hatches, Latches and Antenna Mast). In-
spect these items to see that they are in 'good condition
I and secure. See that turret hatch traverses properly,
that hatches, grille, hatch hinges and latches operate
freely. Note whether they are excessively worn, ade-
quately lubricated, and that grilles are not obstructed.
Examine paint for rust spots or polished surfaces that
may cause reflections and see that vehicle markings are
legible.
28 28 Caps and Gaskets (Fuel Tanks and Radiator). Ob-
serve whether they are in good condition, whether the
caps lock securely on the filler necks and that their
vents are open.
30 30 Engine Removal (When Required). Remove engine

on 100-hour maintenance service, only if inspections
made in items 6, 9, 13, and 14 and a check of oil con-
sumption indicated definite need. CAUTION: Be sure
the magnetos are grounded when removing engine.
30 l CLEAN. Clean exterior of engine and dry thoroughly,
taking care to keep'dry-cleaning solvent away from
electrical wiring, terminal boxes, and equipment.
32 SPARK PLUGS. Remove all spark plugs and examine

them for cracks or broken insulators, excessive carbon
deposits and burned electrodes. Unserviceable plugs
and those having gaps in excess of 0.030 inch must be
replaced. NOTE: Perform item 33 before reinstalling
plugs.
33 COMPRESSION TEST. While spark plugs are removed,

test compression of each cylinder and record reading
on back of Form 462. Throttle must be opened during
,compression test. Normal compression at cranking
speed is 155 to 180 pounds. The allowable amount of
variation between cylinders is 15 pounds.
34 34 Generator and Cranking Motor. Inspect these items
for good condition and security of mounting; make sure
wiring connections are secure. Inspect generator drive
belts to see that they are in good condition and adjusted
to 1/2 to 3/4-inch finger-pressure deflection. See that all
105
TM 9-759
39
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
MAINTENANCE radio noise suppression shielding, condensers and bond-

00-Hour 0-Hou 1 ing straps are securely connected.
34 SERVE. Remove generator commutator inspection
cover and examine commutator for good condition. See
that brushes are free in brush holders, clean, and not ex-
cessively worn; that brush connections are secure and
that wires are not broken or chafing. Clean commutator
end of generator by blowing out with compressed air.
Tighten cranking motor and generator mounting bolts
securely.
37 37 Magnetos. Inspect magnetos for good condition and
security of mounting and note whether there is evidence
of oil leaks at mounting pad gaskets. Remove breaker
point inspection covers to see that points are not pitted,
are clean and well alined with mating surfaces, and are
engaging squarely.
37 ADJUST. Adjust magneto breaker point gaps to 0.0163
inch (par. 66 c (3)).
67 i Ignition Timing. Check and set ignition timing (par.
67).
38 38 Ignition Wiring and Conduits. Inspect these items for
good condition, cleanliness, correct assembly, tight con-
nections, security of mountings, and for chafing against
other engine parts. See that all radio noise suppression
shielding from magnetos to spark plugs and instrument
panel is in good condition, clean, properly and securely
mounted and supported. Clean all exposed ignition
wiring with a dry cloth. NOTE: Do not disturb con-
nections unless they are actually loose.
42 I 42 Breather Caps and Ventilators. See that they are in
good condition, correctly assembled and secure and that
ventilator tubes are open.
42 42 CLEAN AND SERVE. Remove the cleaner element from
the breather cap and clean elements and body in dry-
cleaning solvent; dry, dip the element in engine oil, drain
off excess oil and reinstall them securely. See Lubrica-
tion Order, paragraph 28. (
43 .43 Air Cleaners (Carburetor). Inspect air cleaner part
to see if they are in good condition. Clean the reservoirs
and elements in dry-cleaning solvent and drain. Fill
reservoirs to correct level with used or new engine oil.
See Lubrication Order, paragraph 28. Reassemble
106
TM 9-759
39
AINTENANCE cleaners, making certain all gaskets are in good condi-

t0Hour -Hour tion and in place. Give special attention when mounting
to see that cleaners are pressed firmly in place against
air horn seals and cleaners are securely fastened.
44 44 Carburetor (Linkage, Governor and Primer). In-
spect these units for good condition, correct assembly
and security of mounting. See that carburetors do not
leak, that governor linkage is not excessively worn and
operates freely. Remove the fuel level checking plug
on each carburetor to determine if the fuel in the
carburetor float chamber is at the correct level (par.
72 d ). Adjust the carburetor idle fuel mixture (par.
72 b). See that governor is properly sealed. Make sure
that lines of priming system are in good condition, se-
cure and not leaking.
45 45 Manifolds. Inspect to see that all manifolds, manifold
gaskets and connections are securely fastened, correctly
assembled and not leaking.
45 i l TIGHTEN. Tighten all loose assembly and flange nuts.
46 46 i Cylinder (Heads and Gaskets). Inspect externally for
compression or coolant leaks around gasket joints, studs
and connections. CAUTION: Cylinder head stud nuts
should not be tightened unless there is a definite indica-
tion of looseness or leaks. If tightening is necessary, a
torque-wrench must be used and nuts tightened in
proper sequence (par. 58 c (3)).
48 48 Clutch Assembly. Examine visible parts of clutch hous-
ing for loose mounting and cracks. Examine all linkage
for presence of cotter pins and return spring. Pedal
free travel must be approximately 2 7/ inches on ve-
hicles that are equipped with clutch boosters and
approximately at 3 inches on vehicles not equipped with
boosters. See paragraph 110 d.
48 On engines that are removed only, disassemble clutch,

clean parts thoroughly and inspect for excessive wear
or damage. If any part is unserviceable, report con-
dition to higher echelon.
49 49 Water Pump (Fans and Shrouds). Observe whether
these items are in good condition, correctly assembled
and secure. See that water pump does not leak. Note
particularly whether there is end play or bearing loose-
ness in water pump or fans. Check to see that fan
107
TM 9-759
39
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
MAINTENANCE blades and shrouds are properly alined and do not

00-Horw -Hour interfere.
50 50 Accessory Drives (Belts, Pulleys, Shafts and Coup-

lings). See that these items are in good condition,
correctly assembled and secure. Pay particular attention
to see whether or not drive belts and pulleys are well
alined and not excessively worn. Check to see that fan
accessory drive universals are in good condition and
operating properly.
50 ADJUST. Adjust fan and generator drive belts to have
1/2 to 3/4-inch deflection under finger pressure, halfway
between pulleys. See that adjusting locks are securely
fastened.
51 51 Engine Compartment (Bulkhead and Control Link-
age). Check to see that engine compartment, including
bulkhead, is in good condition and clean, and that con-
trol linkage in engine compartment is in good conditior
and securely connected and mounted.
51 CLEAN. Clean engine compartment thoroughly. When-
ever engine is removed, clean out all fuel and oil drip-
pings, dirt and refuse, wipe out the engine compart-
ment with cloths soaked in dry-cleaning solvent, and
dry thoroughly.
53 53 Fuel (Tanks, Lines and Pump). Inspect to see that
these items (where visible) are in good condition, cor-
rectly assembled, securely mounted and not leaking.
53 TIGHTEN. Tighten accessible fuel line support clips
securely.
54 54 Engine Oil Filter. Remove filter element from housing
and clean out all solids collected in filter sunmp. if
element is serviceable, reinstall and test operation of
filter (par. 61 h).
56 56 Transmission Oil Cooler. Inspect core and lines of
cooler to see that they are in good condition, secure
and not leaking. Clean out insects and trash from in
and around core air passage.
57 57 Exhaust Pipes. Inspect to see that these items are in
good condition and securely assembled and mounted. d
57 TIGHTEN. Tighten all mounting bolts and connections
securely.
58 58 Engine Mounting. Observe all accessible mountings
and radio bond straps to see that they are in good con-
dition and secure.
1nf8
TM 9-759
39
lNTENANCE
100-Hour 50-Hou
58 TIGHTEN. Tighten all mounting bolts and bond straps

securely. When engine is removed, tighten all engine
mounting and support assembly bolts securely.
60 60 Fire Extinguisher System (Tanks, Valves, Lines,
Nozzles and Mountings). Inspect lines, connections
and cylinders of both fixed and portable fire extin-
guishers for good condition, secure mounting and full
charge. Full charge may be observed by presence of
intact wire seals but can be positively determined by
weighing. Examine control cables of fixed extinguishers
to see that they are in good condition and free to
operate at a moment's notice. See that all lines and
nozzles are in good condition, securely mounted and
connected. with nozzles properly aimed and not clogged.
60 TIGHTEN. Tighten all assembly and mounting bolts
securely.
61 61 Engine Installation (Mountings. Lines and Fittings,
Wiring. Control Linkage and Oil Supply). If engine
was removed for repair or replacement, reinstall at
this time (par. 64). Tighten mountings and bond straps
securely and connect all fuel and oil lines and control
linkage correctly. Be sure oil supply is adequate. See
that all wiring is properly connected and coolant lines
are not leaking.
62 I 62 Radiator (Core. Mlountings, Hose and Antifreeze
Record). Examine above items to see that they are in
good condition, properly assembled and securely
mounted. See that core air passages are free of all
obstructions and not bent. Check all hose and pipe
connections and filler cap for leaks. If antifreeze is
used, check its value and record on Form INo. 462;
add as needed to prevent freezing. Clean out all trash
from radiator core passages. If inspection indicates
cleaning is necessary and always when antifreeze is
installed or removed, proceed only according to para-
graph 83 and current directives regarding proper pro-
cedures, cleaner, neutralizer and inhibitor. Refill radi-
ator with proper coolant. allowing room for expansion.
On radiators which are removed, perform this inspection
partly while removed from the vehicle and partly after
replacement, as necessary to make the complete in-
spection properly.
3~--~,50.S v109s:
TM 9.759
39
TANK. MEDIUM, M4A3
MAINTENANCE
00-HO Hour50-Hour
62 SERVE. Reinstall removed radiator. Tighten all mount-
ings and hose or tubing connections securely. Fill the
cooling system, adding antifreeze or inhibitor as re-
quired and recheck the cooling system for leaks.
63 63 Batteries (Cables, Hold-Downs, Carrier and Gravity).
Inspect battery case for cracks and leaks. Clean top
of batteries and inspect terminals, bolts, post straps and
hold-downs to see that they are in good condition. Test
specific gravity and record on space provided on back
of Work Sheet W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 462. Gravity
readings below 1,225 indicate batteries need recharging
or replacement.
63 Perform high rate discharge test according to instructions
for a condition test which accompanies test instruma
Cell variation should not be more than 30 perc_
NOTE: Specific gravity must be above 1.225 to m
a test.
63 Clean batteries and carrier, repaint carrier if corroded.
Clean cables, terminals, bolts, posts and grease lightly.
Inspect bolts and nuts to see that they are in good con-
dition and grease lightly. Tighten terminals and hold-
downs carefully to avoid damage to battery.
63 63 SERVE. Add clean water to bring electrolyte 1/2 inch
above plates.
64 64 Accelerator (Linkage). Examine accelerator and con-
necting linkage to see that it is in good condition, opens
both carburetor throttles properly, is securely connected
and operates freely. NOTE: Open fuel valves and close
master battery switch at this time.
64 ADJUST. Adjust throttle control linkage (par. 77).
65 65 Cranking Motor (Primer Instruments). Start engine
and observe if primer operation and action of cranking
motor is satisfactory. Note particularly whether cranking
motor drive engages and operates properly without un-
usual noise, whether it has adequate cranking speed,
whether engine starts readily. As engine starts, see
all instruments operate properly and particularly, th
oil pressure and ammeter indications are satisfactory.
66 66 Leaks (Engine Oil, Fuel and Water). While engine
is running, inspect within the engine compartment for
110
TM 9-759
39
RINTENANCE water leaks from the cooling system; for oil leaks from
X00-Hour-Ho engine or lines and any leaks from the fuel system.
68 68 Regulator Units (Connections, Bond Straps and

Filters). Inspect generator regulators to see if they are
in good condition, securely connected and mounted.
See that radio suppression bond straps and capacitors
are in good condition, securely connected and mounted.
69 69 Engine Idle. Adjust the idle of the engine as outlined
in paragraph 72 c.
70 70 Throttle Synchronization. Inspect throttle linkage
connections and adjustment on both carburetors to see
that they are in good condition and properly adjusted
(par. 77 b). See that the engine idles with throttle closed
and responds properly when opened. Allow engine to
idle 3 to 4 minutes to cool properly before stopping.
71 71 Fighting Compartment (Paint, Seats, Safety Straps,
Crash Pads. Stowage, Ammunition Boxes, Clips and
Racks). Inspect to see that these items are in good
condition and securely assembled and mounted. See that
fighting compartment is clean, that paint is in satisfac-
tory condition, and that adjusting mechanism of seats
operates properly and is adequately lubricated. Pay
particular attention to see that all dividers and shell
pads are present and properly installed in ammunition
boxes and racks, and that clips have sufficient tension
to hold shells securely.
71 On vehicles so equipped, see that solution in wet stowage
ammunition containers is visible at filler plugs and that
all plugs are present and secure. If additional solution is
required, see paragraph 138 h (2) for correct mixture.
72 72 Turret and Locks. Inspect to see that these items are
in good condition and securely assembled and mounted
and that lock operates properly and turret traverses
easily when lock is released.
73 73 Periscopes. Examine periscope prisms and windows to
see that they are in good condition, clean and secure in
holders. Make sure that holders are securely mounted.
See that lever and locking devices operate freely and
are not excessively worn and that their traversing and
elevating devices are free and not excessively worn.
Examine spare periscopes and their stowage boxes to
see that they are in good condition, clean and secure.
111
TM 9.759
39
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
MAINTENANCE CAUTION: Prisms should be cleaned only with a soft

MOOHoui Hour cloth or brush.
74 74 Clutch Pedal (Free Travel, Linkage and Return
Spring). Inspect to see that these items are in good
condition, securely assembled and mounted, well lubri-
cated, and not excessively worn. Be sure return spring
will bring pedal to full released position. Examine clutch
booster linkage, spring and mountings, to see that they
are in good condition, operate properly and are securely
mounted. Clutch pedal free travel must be maintained
at 27/8 inches on all vehicles equipped with a clutch
booster and at approximately 3 inches if not equipped
with a clutch booster. See paragraph 110 d.
75 75 Brakes (Steering, Parking Levers, Latches and Link-
age). Check released position of steering levers. Levers
are correctly positioned when horizontal distance from
face of brake drum housing cover to front edge of levi
is 7 to 71/2 inches. Pull back on both steering bral
levers and observe whether they meet resistance slightly
before the vertical position. Apply the brakes with
parking brake latch on, and observe whether levers re-
main in the applied position. Examine linkage connec-
tions, ratchets and pawls for security and good condition.
75 I TIGHTEN. Tighten all assembly and mounting nuts and
screws securely.
77 77 Final Drive and Breather. Examine accessible part of
the final drive case in driver's compartment to see that
it is in good condition, that all mounting and assembly
bolts or cap screws are secure, and that there are no
leaks. Inspect breathers to see that they are in good
condition, secure and not clogged.
77 CLEAN AND TIGHTEN. Remove breatners and clean
thoroughly. Tighten all external assembly and mounting
bolts and screws securely.
80 80 Transmission Control. Inspect to see that transmis-
sion control lever operates properly, is in good condition,
correctly assembled, securely connected and not ex-
cessively worn
81 81 Propeller Shaft (LI-Joints, Alinement and Flange
Inspect propeller shaft to see that it is in good conditiol
that it is correctly assembled and securely mounted,
and that universal joints are properly alined and not
excessively worn.
112
TM 9-759
39
100-Hour 50-Hour
81 TIGHTEN. Tighten universal joint assembly and com-

panion flange bolts securely.
84 84 Comlpass and Lamp. Examine compass for good con-
dition and secure mounting, and' see'that compass lamp
is properly aimed. Test compass, and if adjustment is
found to be necessary, report to designated individual
in authority.
85 85 Lamps and Switches (Hlead. Tail, Blackout and In-
ternal). Test to see that switches and lamps operate
properly. Inspect all lights for good condition. security,
for broken lenses or discolored reflectors.
85 ADJUST. Adjust headlamp beams.
86 86 ! Miring (Junction and Terminal Blocks, Boxes, Cir-
cuit Breakers andl Buttons). Inspect all of these units
to see that they are in good condition, securely mounted
and connected. Inspect all exposed wiring and con-
duits for looseness or damage and see that they are
well supported and securely connected. Be sure radio
noise suppression. capacitators, clips and bond straps
are in good condition, clean and securely mounted or
connected.
87 Collector Ring (Brushes. Heads. Cylinder and Cover).
With master battery switch off, remove collector ring
(slip ring) cover and examine to see that above listed
items are in good condition and clean and whether
brushes contact cylinder evenly under normal spring
tension. See that leads are securely connected and not
chafing. Be sure cover is reinstalled securely and
that bonding strap is in good condition and securely
connected.
88 88 Radio Bonding (Suppressors. Filters, Condensers
and Shielding). See that all units not covered in the
foregoing specific procedures are in good condition,
securely mounted and connected. Be sure all addi-
tional noise suppression bond straps and internal-
external toothed washers listed in paragraph 152 are
inspected for looseness or damage, and see that con-
tact surfaces are clean. NOTE: If objectionable radio
noise from the vehicle has been reported, make test in
accordance with paragraph54 c. If cleaning and tighten-
ing of mountings and connections, and replacement of
113
TM 9.759
39
TANK, MEDIUM. M4A3
MAINTENANCE defective radio suppression units does not eliminate

1 Now- WHouH the trouble, the radio operator will report the condition
to the designated individual in authority.
89 89 Engine (Crankcase, Fan and Housing, Cylinder,
Shroud, Mountings andl Exhaust Pipe). Inspect to
see that these items are in good condition and securely
mounted. See that there are no leaks in exhaust line
or around gaskets, and that shroud damper operates
freely. See that radio noise suppression bond straps are
in good condition, securely mounted and connected.
90 90 Spark Plug. Remove and inspect spark plug for broken
insulator or burned electrodes; gap must be 0.025 inch.
Replace unserviceable plug, using new gasket. See
that spark plug radio noise suppressor is in good con-
dition and securely connected.
91 91 Magneto (Points, Wiring and Shield). Inspect
see that these items are in good condition, correU
assembled, and securely mounted. Make sure the in-
terior of magneto and rotor arm are in good condition
and clean, and that breaker points are clean and not
uneven or pitted. When so equipped, see that radio
noise suppression capacitor is in good condition, securely
mounted and connected.
91 ADJUST. Breaker points must be properly alined, not
pitted and the gap adjusted to 0.020 inch with points
fully opened.
92 92 Carburetor Air Cleaner. Inspect to see that air cleaner
is in good condition, securely mounted and not leaking.
92 CLEAN. Remove air cleaner element, clean in cleaning
solvent and dry thoroughly. Dip element in engine
oil, drain and reassemble.
93 93 Fuel (Filter, Line. Tank, and Cap). Examine to see
that these items are in good condition, secure, and not
leaking. Close fuel tank shut-off valve and clean fuel
filter sediment bowl and screen; reinstall, using new
gasket, if necessary. Open fuel supply valve and check
for leaks.
94 94 *Generator (Commutator, Brushes, Control Box, i
Wiring). Remove brush head cover plate, and examl
commutator to see that it is in good condition, clean
and not excessively worn. See that brushes are clean,
free in their holders, properly spring-loaded, and not
excessively worn, and that radio noise suppression con-
114
TM 9.759
39
densers on brush holding plate are in good condition

TENANCE
-Hou 50-Hour and securely connected. Inspect control box and but-
tons, ammeter and wiring to see that they are in good
condition, correctly assembled and connected and secure.
94 CLEAN. At each third 100-hour service, clean com-
mutator by placing a strip of flint paper 2/0 (not emery)
over a block of wood of correct size; with engine run-
ning, press flint paper against commutator until it is clean.
Blow out dust with compressed air.
95 95 Operation (Engine. Generator, Ammeter, and Leaks).
Start engine, observing whether it starts easily and
runs at normal speed. Listen for any unusual noise.
See that generator output is 50 amperes. Examine fuel
system for leaks. NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with
heater unit and duct, be sure that heater operates and
the duct is in good condition, clean and secure. Check
operation of heat damper.
125 125 Bow Gun (Mounts). See that mount is in good condi-
tion, clean, well-lubricated, and secure. Elevate and
traverse gun through its entire range to see if mount
operates without binding or looseness, and that firing
control operates properly.
l125 TIGHTEN. Tighten all assembly nuts and screws
securely.
126 126 Gun: 75-mm. 76-nim antd 105-mm Howitzer (Mount,
Traversing and Elevating Mechanism and Firing
Controls). Inspect to see that these items are in good
condition, clean, well-lubricated, correctly and securely
assembled, and not excessively worn. Check to see that
manual and hydraulic traversing controls are in good
condition and secure; paying particular attention to
wiring, switches, and connections. Operate each firing
control, both manual and electric, to see that they func-
tion properly. Operate hand elevating controls through
entire range to see that they function properly. Traverse
turret by hand to see that there is no binding and that
turret can be turned through its entire 360-degree range.
See whether the brake is effective when hand control
brake latch is released. Inspect power traversing system,
including motor pump, reservoir, wiring, and operating
controls, to see that they operate properly, are in good
condition, correctly assembled, secure, and are not ex-
cessively worn. See that radio noise suppression units
115
TM 9-759
39
TANK, MEDIUM. M4A3
MAINTENANCE are in goou condition and securely connected. Examine

OO0-Hou Hour hydraulic system for leaks and oil reservoir for proper
level of oil; add oil if required. Tighten all assembly and
mounting bolts and screws securely.
126 TIGHTEN. Tighten gun mounts securely.
127 127 Stabilizer and Recoil Control. Inspect stabilizer con-
trol unit, gear box, connecting oil lines, cylinder and
piston, wiring And control box to see that they are in
good condition, secure, correctly assembled and con-
nected and not leaking oil. Make an operating test of
the stabilizer by pressing gun breach. If gun returns to
aimed position without excessive vibration or hunting,
system is satisfactory. If hunting occurs, adjust stiffness
control knob; right to stiffen, left to loosen. Defects in
system should be referred to ordnance personnel for
attention. Check recoil cylinders to see that they are
in good condition and not leaking. NOTE: Recjj
operating tests must be made under firing condition l
accordance with instructions in parts V, VI and
(Armament).
127 TIGHTEN. Tighten all mounting and assembly nuts and
screws securely.
128 128 A.A. (;un and Bondl Thrower (.Mounts, Traversing
and Elevating Mechanism). Inspect to see that these
items are in good condition, clean, secure, and ade-
quately lubricated. Make sure that mechanism operates
freely.
128 TIGHTEN. Tighten all assembly and mounting bolts
securely.
129 129 Spare, Gun, Barrels and Parts. See that all items are
present, in good condition, and properly stowed.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

130 130 Tools (Vehicle and Pioneer). Check standard vehicle
tools against stowage lists to see that they are pioneer
tools and present, in good condition, and properly
stowed or mounted. Any tools mounted on outside of
vehicle, having bright or polished surfaces, should be
painted or otherwise treated to prevent glare or re l
tions. Tools with cutting edges should be sharp,
edges should be protected.
131 131 Equipment. Check special equipment items against
vehicle stowage lists (pars. 6 through 11) to see if they
116
TM 9.759
39
CE are all present, in serviceable condition and properly

00-Hou -Howu stowed or mounted.
132 132 Spare Track Blocks. Inspect to see if these items are
all present, in good condition, and properly stowed or
mounted. . - -
133 133 Spare Oil Supply (Recoil, Hydraulic and Engine).
Check to see that supply of listed spare oil is present
and properly stowed. This supply should be maintained
at all times.
134 134 Decontaminator. Examine to see that decontaminator
is in good condition, secure and fully charged. Make
latter check by removing filler plug.
135 135 Fire Extinguishers (Portable). Inspect to see that ex-
tinguishers are fully charged, in good condition, and
securely mounted and seal on valve head is intact.
Replace with a fully charged extinguisher, if weight is
not up to specifications (par. 7 b).
136 136 Publications and Form No. 26. Check to see whether
vehicle manuals, Lubrication Order, Accident-Report
placement Record W.D., A.G.O. Form No. 478 are pres-

ent, legible, and properly stowed.
137 137 Vehicle Luhrication. If due, lubricate in accordance
with Lubrication Order, Section IX, and current lubri-
cation directives, using only clean lubricant and omitting
items that have had special lubrication during this
service. Replace damaged or missing fittings, vents,
flexible lines or plugs.
138 138 Modification (Work Orders Completed). Inspect

vehicle to determine that all Modification Work Orders
have been completed, and entered on W.D., A.G.O.
Form No. 478. Enter any replacement of major unit
assembly made at time of this service.
139 139 Final Road Test. Make a final road test, rechecking
items 2 to 15 inclusive. Recheck transmission and dif-
ferential to see that lubricant is at correct level, and
that there are no leaks. Confine this road test to mini-
mum distance necessary to make satisfactory observa-
tions. While testing vehicle, operate it in a normal
manner. NOTE: Correct any deficiencies found during
final road test.
117
TM 9-759
40-41
TANK. MEDIUM, M4A3
Section XIII
TROUBLE SHOOTING
40. INTRODUCTION.
a. General. This section contains trouble shooting information
and tests for the entire vehicle which can help determine the
causes of some of the troubles that may develop in the vehicle.
Under each unit or system are listed symptoms of the troubles
which are most prevalent. Where a symptom may be caused by
more than one condition, simple tests are described that will
locate the trouble in a particular unit or system, or eliminate a
particular unit or system from further consideration.
b. Electrical Wiring. The wires in the electrical circuits used in

the wet stowage and the 105-mm howitzer vehicles are of the
same color (natural color). The wires can be identified byo
number attached to each wire. The wires in the electrical circa
used in the 75-mm dry stowage vehicle are of different colovr
The wires can be identified by the color of wire. A further descrip-
tion of the wiring is covered in paragraph 101.
41. ENGINE.
a. Engine Will Not Crank. Check the starting system (par. 44).
Remove the spark plugs and crank the engine with the cranking
motor to check for accumulation of water in the cylinders (hydro-
static lock). If the engine can be cranked with the spark plugs
removed, and cannot be cranked with the spark plugs in place,
this will indicate a water leak into the cylinders. If the engine
cannot be cranked with the spark plugs removed, it will indicate
that a reciprocating part in the engine has seized. In either case
notify higher authority.
b. Engine Cranks But Will Not Start.

(1) PRELIMINARY INSTRUCTIONS. If the engine is hot, hold
the foot throttle open and crank the engine; this will clear away
any vapor lock which may be present. If the engine is extremely
cold, see paragraph 25.
(2) CHECK FUEL SYSTEM. Check to see that the fuel shuti
valves are open (figs. 9 and 10). Remove the outlet fuel line fro
the fuel pump, and, with the ignition switch in the "OFF" positio
crank the engine with the cranking motor. If a free flow of fuel
is not evident, fuel is not reaching the carburetor. See paragraph
45 a.
118
TM 9.759
41
TROUBLE SHOOTING
'W3) CHECK IGNITION SYSTEM. Turn the ignition switch on.

Remove a wire from a spark plug, and hold the wire terminal
approximately one-quarter inch from the cylinder head. Crank the
engine. If a spark does not jump the one-quarter inch gap, the
ignition system is at fault. See paragraph 42.
c. Engine Backfires But Will Not Start. Check to see that
the spark plug wires are attached to the magneto distributor
plates in their proper firing order (fig. 33). Check ignition timing
(par. 67).
d. Engine Will Not Develop Full Power. If the engine does
not develop full power, follow Preventive Maintenance procedure
(par. 39).
e. Engine Misfires. If the engine misfires, follow Preventive
Maintenance procedure (par. 39).
f. Engine Runs Unevenly, and Black Smoke Is Emitted From
Exhaust. Check fuel system (par. 45 h).
g. Engine Runs Unevenly and Backfires Through the Carbu-
retor After It Is Warmed Up. Check to see that the spark plug
Yes are attached to the magneto distributor plate on the mag-
s in their proper firing order (fig. 33). Check ignition timing
oir. 67). If the ignition is found to be satisfactory, it can be
assumed that the fuel mixture is too lean. Refer to paragraph 72 h.
h. Engine Overheats. If the engine compartment doors are
equipped with shutters, make sure they are open. Check for low
water in the cooling system, and refill with coolant if required.
Adjust the fan belts if loose (par. 86 h). If the air flow through
the radiator is restricted, clean the radiator fins and air passages.
Check the ignition timing, and retime if required (par. 67). If the
engine continues to overheat, replace the thermostat (par. 88).
i. Excessive Oil Consumption. Examine the oil in the engine,
and if the viscosity of the oil is found to be low, refill with specified
grade. Inspect the engine for external oil leaks. Tighten any oil
line connections found leaking. Tighten or replace gaskets as re-
quired, or notify higher authority. If the engine continues to use
oil after making the above inspection or replacements, it may be
assumed the pistons or piston rings, or the intake valve guides are
worn or damaged, in which case notify higher authority.
j. Low or No Oil Pressure. Check the oil supply in the engine
and replenish it with specified grade if required (see Lubrication,
r 29 d (8)). If the oil in the engine has become overdiluted,
lust be replaced with the grade specified.
_W~~~ ~~119
TM 9.759
41
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
#16 BL-R] CIRCUIT BRAKE PLATE ASS'Y #16 BL-RX
asW #16
t TO Fr -/#8 B6m INSTRUMENT
|RONT TERM BOXA/ ME E oX,

BT
TERM. #16WSWTCM G B16
R
CENTER#16 ----
Jz W B
#8
TRBACENTER
-B I'w--- TO TEMINAL
OIL PRESSUREGAGE
LOW OIL PRESSURE GA

"
SIGNAL LIGHT /
INSTRUMENT PANEL -- Ol
"
· .~,j A~ J TRANS. OIL TRANSMISSION
TO #8 B
S TEMP. GAGE (TRANS. UNIT)
FRONT #16 G -/BTERY MASTER FRONT TERM. BOX
TERM. #16 W #1 1TCH
6 BL-R@TO TRANSMISSION
BOX /// b
'_ TEMP. GAGE (TRANS. UNIT)-
~ . X- '"- - ~'' ,!' BATTERIES
BATTERY BOX TERM. BAR
d#8 B TO ERM. B # #6 CENTER TERM. BOX

IN BATTERY BOX B
TO REAR #16W (11 /

TERM. BOX #16G #16 G TO CENTER
// WWHI
' J----~ ;,--m~.j~ J~16 TERM. BOX
REAR TERM. BOX E N T B

OIL PRESSURE GAGE 3
(ENGINE
UNIT) j/#16 G iTO OIL PRESSURE GAGE
LOW OIL PRESSURE /
GAGE (ENGINE UNIT)
(ENGINE UNIT) TO LOW OIL PRESSUREGAGE
(ENGINE UNIT)
-KEY -
#8, #16, ETC. WIRE SIZE
B ..... BLACK
G ... GREEN
W . . WHITE
BL .. BLUE WITH RED TR.
, ,ETC . N"UMBERSIN TERM. BOXES
RA PD 329461
Figure 30-Oil Pressure Gage, Low Oil Pressure Signal, and

Transmission Oil Temperature Gage Circuits
(75-mm Dry Stowage Vehiclesl
120
TM 9-759
41
TROUBLE SHOOTING
CIRCUIT BREAKER #61 REAR TERMINAL BOX

/62 TO REAR TERMINAL BOX
#40 MAIN FEED WIRES TO
~R E
_ER/ MASTER SWITCH BOX
O#10
TO + BATTERY
LOW OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL TERMINAL
OIL PRESSURE GAGE
INSTRUMENT PANEL
MASTER SWITCH BOX
#40 MAIN FEED WIRE TO CIRCUIT BREAKER

TERMINAL PLATE IN INSTRUMENT PANEL
BATTERIES ) #62 TO LOW OIL PRESSURE

1. SIGNAL (ENGINE UNIT)
#62 TO LOW OIL
Ia.h\ I~ J(INSTRUMENT PANEL UNIT)
~'GN NIT) #61 TO OIL PRESSURE GAGE

(INSTRUMENT GNEL UNIT)
REAR TERMINAL BOX
/LOW OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL

a s } t (ENGINE UNIT)
- KEY -
/#10-WIRE............ O-GAGE
#40-W IRE .. .......... 12-GAGE
OIL PRESSURE GAGE #60-WIRE ............ 16GAGE
(ENGINE UNIT) #61 -WIRE ........... .16-GAGE
#62-WIRE ............ 16-GAGE
RA PD 329462
ire
31-Oil Pressure Gage and Low Oil r'ressure Signal Circuit
bmm Wet Stowage, 76-mm, and 105-mm Howitzer Vehiclesl
121
TM 9-759
41-43
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
k. Abnormal Engine Noise. The following procedure for

locating abnormal engine noise applies only if the condition of the
engine permits its being run. Set the engine speed at approximately
600 revolutions per minute, and place a neon-type spark tester on
one of the spark plug terminals. The neon light will flash with
every other revolution of the engine. If the noise occurs twice for
each flash, the source is at some point driven by the crankshaft,
such as pistons, rings, pins, connecting rod bearings, or main bear-
ings. A loose main bearing knock is usually a dull thud, more notice-
able on a hard pull or quick acceleration. If the noise occurs once
for each flash, the source is at some point driven by the camshaft,
such as valves, push rods, etc. NOTE: Camshaft backlash noise
below 500 revolutions per minute is not to be considered abnormal.
42. IGNITION SYSTEM (fig. 32).

a. No Spark Delivered to Spark Plugs in Either Right
or Left Bank. If no spark is obtained from a magneto un4
the test outlined in paragraph 41 h (3), remove the ignition sw
wire (ground wire) from whichever magneto does not deliver
spark. Crank the engine with the cranking motor. If a satisfactory
spark is obtained with the ignition switch wire removed, it will indi-
cate that the ignition switch is faulty, or that the ignition wire ex-
tending from the magneto to the switch is short-circuited. Replace
the ignition switch or wire, whichever is at fault. If no spark is
obtained from this test, the magneto on the side being tested is at
fault. Replace magneto (par. 66 b).
b. No Spark or Unsatisfactory Spark Obtained at Some Spark
Plug Wires, and Satisfactory Spark at Other Wires. Examine all
spark plug wires on the side of the engine being tested. Any
wires found chafed, or with faulty insulation, must be replaced. If
the spark plug wires are in good condition, it can be assumed the
distributor plate in the magneto is at fault. Replace the magneto
(par. 66 b).
c. Intermittent Spark at Each Spark Plug Wire. If an inter-
mittent spark is obtained from each of the spark plug wires, it indi-
cates that the magneto on the side of the engine being tested is
at fault. Replace the magneto (par. 66 h).
43. BATTERIES AND GENERATING SYSTEM (figs. 34 and

a. Batteries Run Down. Excessive use of electrical access
must be avoided when the generator is not operating. Be sure
battery master and radio master switch (figs. 7 and 14) are not
left on when the vehicle is not in use. Replace the discharged
batteries with fully charged units. Disconnect the cable from the
122
TM 9-759
43
TROUBLE SHOOTING
MAGNETO SWITCH
INSTRUMENT PANEL
' 77 TO RIGHT MAGNETO
("t~~ |I 76 TO LEFT
.,,~8~
ENGINE EMERGENCY I MAGNETO
STOP SWITCH USED
ON LATE
MODELS-
77 TO TERMINAL "R"
REAR TERMINAL BOX ii 4iiiui ON MAGNETO SWITCH
# 76 TO TERMINAL
"L" ON MAGNETO
SWITCH IN PANEL
H. MAGNETO
IL
.H, MAGNETO
RA PD 329435
Figure 32-lgnition System

123
TM 9.759
43
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
LEFT-HAND MAGNETO
I --- 2
~RED
4-BLUE
$ ~lM4
GRENYELLOW
GRE LEFT-HAND BANK
.RED UBL GREEN YELLOW
FRONT
TO IGNITION
SWITCH
RED WE GREE YELLOW
RED RIGHT-HAND BANK

GREEN FIRING ORDER
I / \ tiR-2L-3R-1L-4R-3L-2R-4L
__ 4 YELLOW
BWE
RIGHT-HAND MAGNETO
RA PD 27428
Figure 33-lgnitio n Wiring Diagram
positive terminal of the forward battery. Turn the battery and radio
master switches on, and contact the battery cable against the posi-
tive post of the battery. If a flash is seen from this test, it will
indicate that there is a shorted or grounded wire in the electrical
circuits, or that the cut-out points in the generator regulator are
stuck together. Refer to subparagraph d( (2) below for generator
regulator test. If the generator regulator is found satisfactory, it can
be assumed the wiring is at fault. Notify higher authority.
h. Batteries Use Excessive Water. See subparagraph f below.
c. Ammeter Does Not Show Charge. If the ammeter failsd
show a charge, turn on all lights and observe whether a dischargel
shown. If no discharge is observed, connect a new ammeter to the
leads in the instrument panel. If a reading is obtained, the ammeter
is faulty and must be replaced (par. 92 a). If no reading is observed,
proceed with the next test (subpar. d below).
124
TM 9-759
43
TROUBLE SHOOTING
FRONT TERMINAL BOX
~
·° ~ ~/ .J'""~ INSTRUMENT PANEL
/AMMETER\ vBATTERY MASTER SWITCH
AUXILIARY GENERATOR
CENTER TERMINAL BOX
, BATTERY BOX TERMINAL BAR

AND AMMETER SHUNT
AUXILIARY GENERATOR REGULATOR

GENERATOR REGULATORS
L.H. GENERATOR m /
R.H. GENERATOR ---
#14 Y FROM FIELD TERMINAL ON GENERATOR TO TERMINAL

MARKED "FIELD" ON GENERATOR REGULATOR
#8 B FROM ARMATURE TERMINAL ON GENERATOR TO

TERMINAL MARKED "ARM" ON GENERATOR REGULATOR
#14 Y FROM FIELD TERMINAL ON GENERATOR TO TERMINAL

MARKED "FIELD" ON GENERATOR REGULATOR
#8 B FROM ARMATURE TERMINAL ON GENERATOR TO

TERMINAL MARKED "ARM" ON GENERATOR REGULATOR
RA PD 329449
Figure 34-Generating System 175-mm Dry Stowage Vehicles)
(d. Generator or Generators Do Not Charge the Batteries.

(1) TEST GENERATOR. If equipped with two generators, check
one generator at a time. Remove the field wire from the generator
not being tested. Remove the armature and battery wire from the
'"ARM" and "BAT" terminals of the generator, regulator for the
erator being tested, and connect an ammeter between them. Re-
e the field wire from the field terminal of the regulator. Start
s1::,5,4,,-48 -- , 125
TM 9.759
43
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
#14 C)TO AMMETER IN PANEL
#14 T-B®(TO AMMETER IN PANEL
\ \ ] _ l0 C)O O 0oil
1411
\
1,^ \ 8 9 I0 11 12 is
FRONT TERMINAL BOX
#14 T-B)TO CENTER TERMINAL BOX
#14 C()TO CENTER TERMINAL BOX
#14 C(TO
I z 3 4 5s 17 FRONT TERMINAL
,9 ,0 z12 13 4 BOX
CENTER TERMINAL BOX16 1 18 19
#14 C&(TO AMMETER SHUNT #14 T-B2 TO FRONT

IN BATTERY BOX
#14 T-B')AMMETER SHUNT IN BATTERY BOX
KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS
C--CHROME
T-B-TAN WITH BLACK TRACER
#14-WIRE SIZE
¢©( TERMINAL BOX NUMBERS
RA PD 329 5U
Figure 35-Terminal Box Connections for Generating System

(75-mm Dry Stowage Vehicles)
126
TM 9-759
43
TROUBLE SHOOTING
AMMETER
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BATTERY
MASTER SWITCH
MASTER SWITCH BOX GENERATOR

RE GUATREGULATOR
~26 WIRE 14 GAGE
. ~ t 2 2 ) TO FIELD
AUXILIARY GENERATOR 27 WIR 6

REGULATOR GAGE TO
ARMATURE
GENERATOR
BA T T ER IE S
REAR TERMINAL BOX
BATTERY HEATER COIL BATTERY HEATER SWITCH
RA PD 32943S
Figure 36--Generating System (75-mm Wet Stowage, 76-mm, and
105-mm Howitzer Vehiclesl
the engine and while it is running at idle speed, touch the free end
of the field wire to the armature wire. Increase the speed of the
engine, and note the charging rate. CAUTION: Do not increase
the charge above 50 amperes. If the charging rate increases as the
engine is speeded up, the generator is operating normally. Reconnect
the wires to the generator regulator. If the charging rate does not
jcrease, the generator is at fault and must be replaced (par. 102 c).
127
TM 9.759
43
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
GENERATOR CIRCUIT
BREAKER RESET BUTTON
BATTERY MASTER
SWITCH
#39 TO-TERMINAL
AMMETER SHUNT - I ON AMMETER IN
INSTRUMENT PANEL
#25 TO BAT. TERMINAL ON

GENERATOR REGULATOR
#49 TO HEATER SWITCH TERMINAL #38 TO TERMINAL ON

IN REAR TERMINAL BOX AMMETER IN INSTRUMENT PANSl
MASTER SWITCH BOX
BATTERY HEATER
PILOT LIGHT
BATTERY HEATER
SWITCH --- ,q#49 TO MASTER
SWITCH BOX
#32 TO AUXILIARY
GENERATOR CONTROL BOX - #29 TO BAT. TERMINAL ON
- KEY - AUXILIARY GENERATOR REGULATOR
#25-WIRE ......... 6-GAGE #35 TO BATTERY HEATER COIL
#29-WIRE .......... 6-GAGE
#32-WIRE ............ 8-GAGE REAR TERMINAL BOX
#35-WIRE ............ 8-GAGE
#38-WIRE ............ 14-GAGE
#39-WIRE .... : ....... 14-GAGE
#49-WIRE .......... 6-GAGE
RA PD 329443
Figure 37-Terminal Box Connections for Generating System

175-mm Wet Stowage, 76-mm, and 105-mm Howitzer Vehicles)
128
TM 9-759
43-44
TROUBLE SHOOTING
2) TEST GENERATOR REGULATOR. If equipped with two gen-

erators, be sure the regulator being tested is in series with the
generator circuit being tested. Start the engine and run it at ap-
proximately 800 revolutions per minute, observe the ammeter on
the instrument panel. If no charging rate is indicated, connect the
terminal marked "BAT". and the terminal marked "ARM" together
with a jumper wire, and watch tne ammeter. If a reading is ob-
tained, the cut-out unit of the regulator is at fault. Replace the
generator regulator (par. 104 b1). If no reading is obtained, connect
the battery and field terminals together with the jumper wire. If a
reading is now obtained, the generator regulator is at fault. Replace
the generator regulator (par. 104 h).
e. Low Charging Rate When Batteries Are Low in Charge.
Operate the engine at a speed of 2,500 revolutions per minute. If
the charging rate increases to maximum charging rate (50 amperes)
then gradually decreases as the battery becomes charged, the gen-
erating system is functioning normally. If the charging rate does not
increase to maximum, the generator regulator is at fault. Replace
Ierate
the generator regulator (par. 104 h).
f. High Charging Rate When Batteries Are Fully Charged.
the engine at a speed of 2,500 revolutions per minute. If,
r the generator has replaced the current used by the cranking
tor, and the batteries are known to be fully charged, the am-
meter shows a charge in excess of 15 amperes, it can be assumed
that the voltage setting of the generator regulator is too high.
Replace the generator regulator (par. 104 I>). NOTE: If the bat-
teries gas freely and use water excessively) this also is an indication
of too high charging rate.
44. STARTING SYSTEM.

a. Engine Fails to Turn Over When the Starting Switch is
Pressed.
(1) TEST BATTERIES. Test the state of charge of the batteries
(par. 39). If the batteries are low in charge, they must be re-
charged or replaced. Make certain the battery terminals are clean
and tight.
(2) TEST CRANKING MOTOR. With a jumper wire made from
a piece of battery cable, contact the two terminals on the cranking
motor relay (the terminals to which the heavy cables are attached).
If the cranking motor fails to run, replace the cranking motor (par.
105 h). If the cranking motor does run in this test, proceed with
test in step (3) below.
(3) TEST CRANKING MOTOR RELAY, STARTING SWITCH AND
ARTING SWITCH WIRE. Use a jumper wire and contact it between
129
TM 9.759
44
TANK. MEDIUM, M4A3
#14 W-B(iTO STARTER BUTTON INSTRUMENT PANEL
#8 B22)TO CIRCUIT BREAKER PLATE ASSEMBLY
FRONT TERMINAL BOX
#8 B FRONT TERMINAL BOX

2iTO
#14 W.B(gTO CENTER TERMINAL BOX UTTON
CIRCUIT BREAKER PLATE ASSEMBLY

/ INSTRUMENT PANEL
#8 B©TO FRONT TERMINAL BOX
#14 W-B®TO FRONT TERMINAL BOX
BATTERIES
#14 W-B@TO CRANKING MOTOR RELAY

#8 B®TO BATTERY BOX TERMINAL BAR
CRANKING MOTOR
- KEY -
B--BLACK WIRE
W-B-WHITE WITH BLACK TRACER
#B, 16-WIRE SIZE
@ ( ETC.-TERMINAL BOX NUMBERS
RA PD 329448
Figure 38-Starting System (75-mm Dry Stowage Vehiclesl

12n
TM 9-759
44
TROUBLE SHOOTING
TO CRANKING MOTOR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AY IN MASTER SWITCH BOXPANEL
STARTER SWITCH
MASTER SWITCH BOX BATTERY MASTER SWITCH
# 10 TO BAlTERY
TERMINAL
( 16
BA'ERIES TO REAR
# 18 TO STARTER SWI
IN INSTRUMENT PANEL
CRANKING MOTOR RELAY
# 17 TO CRANKING
MOTOR RELAY
REAR TERMINAL BOX
~ 16 TO CRANKING
,, [ MOTOR RELAY IN
MASTER SWITCH BOX
CRANKING MOTOR
16 TO CRANKING MOTOR
-KEY-
#10 WIRE ............ 0 GAGE
#16 WIRE.. ... 0......
GAGE
#17 WIRE ...... 0 GAGE
J#18 WIRE .......... 1...6GAGE RA PD 329444
ijgure 39-Starting System (75-mm Wet Stowage, 76-mm. and

105-mm Howitzer Vehicles)
131
TM 9-759
44-45
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
the "hot" terminal on the relay and the small terminal at the bot-
tom of the relay to which the small wire (figs. 38 and 39) is at-
tached. If the relay clicks and the cranking motor cranks the engine,
the trouble is in the starting switch or the starting switch wiring.
Replace the starting switch or the faulty wiring, whichever is at
fault. If the cranking motor does not crank the engine in this test,
it will indicate that the cranking motor is at fault. Replace the
relay (par. 106 h).
45. FUEL SYSTEM.

a. Fuel Not Reaching the Carburetor. Make sure the fuel
shut-off valves (figs. 9 and 10) are open and that there is a suf-
ficient fuel supply in the tanks. Clean the fuel filter (on dry stowage
vehicles only) (par. 80 a (3)). Remove the outlet fuel line from
the fuel pump, and with the ignition switch off, crank the engine
with the cranking motor. If a free flow of fuel is not evident, replace
the fuel pump (par. 79 b). If a free flow of fuel is obtained in t
above test, the fuel system up to the carburetor is satisfactory.
the trouble still exists, replace the carburetor (par. 72 e and f).
1. Engine Runs Unevenly, and Black Smoke Is Emitted From
Exhaust. Check the fuel pump pressure (par. 39). If the pressure
is too high, replace the fuel pump (par. 79 b). If the pump pressure
is satisfactory, run the engine at idle speed, remove the fuel level
inspection plug from each carburetor (fig. 89), and observe the fuel
level in the carburetors. If the fuel runs from the inspection hole
on either carburetor, the fuel level is too high in that carburetor.
Replace the carburetor (par. 72 e and f).
c. Fuel Mixture Too Lean. Run the engine at idle speed, and
remove the fuel level inspection plug from each carburetor (fig. 89).
If the fuel level is below the bottom threads of this hole, the float
level is too low, due to incorrect carburetor float setting, or a restric-
tion in the fuel lines or the fuel filter. Remove any restriction to a
free flow of fuel. Check the fuel pump pressure (par. 39). If the
pressure is low, replace the fuel pump (par. 79 b). If this does not
correct the low level, replace the carburetor (par. 72 e and f).
d. Engine Slows Down But Does Not Stop When Fuel Cut-off
Button Is Pressed. Press the fuel cut-off circuit breaker button at
the top of the instrument panel. On earlier vehicles where the d
gasser wires are not shielded at the carburetors, make sure that
plug connector at each degasser is tight. Start the engine and tA
the ignition switch to the "R" position which will cause the engine
to run on the right bank of cylinders. Press the fuel cut-off button.
Turn the ignition switch to the "L" position and press the fuel cut-off
button. The bank of cylinders which continue to fire after the fuel
132
TM 9.759
45
TROUBLE SHOOTING
4 CZ >z Zle
oz0
uz LLJ- <
-
0
I- ',':2
UJZ Z -LY
= 2-L=
0'~~~~~ ~~~~...rI
~
0 ~-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~4
LL~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~L L
133
z~~~~~~~~L Zz
z Z Z-
CZ ed-Zr
iZ ( a
o u-i
3E
ut.
Z U.
QV C W
0:) o r.
o p:~c
o o~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ E
>I~~~~~~~~~~~~~I
Z~~~~~~~~~~~~~L~~~~L
r 'Y~~~~~~~~o~ Lu
Z
CL> -
- cc 0 ( P
40~~~~
I.- 0 ~~ 0< c
uJ ~ ~ ~ ~ I
3;u,
133<
CL~~~u
k ,,-
§ v ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a~~~Z u-Z
p <~~~a
I~~~~~~
~~~( 3~~~~3
~~~~~~.4-
TM 9.759
45
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
z
Z _
C U
< z
Jz z L a
0o O o
Q~u0
E
E
I-.,
~ ~~~ ~
134rn ~ ~ &
C 4 CDv
<. . 0 z 0 U
cr v, =oc~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~L
'" ~~~~~~~~4 ~~~~~~~~"

L4 ~ ~ ~ ~ =~~~C
u 0 YD u
z
I 2
TM 9-759
45
TROUBLE SHOOTING
" TO FUEL
#8 #16 B-R) TANK
16 B-R TO FRONT TERMINAL BOX #1 6T( SELECTORC
_ Jl-#16
T . _~CIRCUIT BREAKER IN PANEL
PLATE ASSEMBLY
I #8 B TO CIRCUIT
el; l ,BREAKERPLATE
i,. ' .ASSEMBLY IN PANEL FRONT
',. "u.-~p-j .... '----, ~ ,J ' FRONT
INSTRUMENT PANEL i - /18 BO TERMINAL BOX
B/® - #16 B-R TO CENTER

#8 B TO FRONT 16T TERMINAL BOX
#16 B-R TERMINAL # T
#16T \\ BOX FRONT TERMINAL BOX
\ al // INSTRUMENT PANEL
CENTER BATTERY MASTER SWITCH

TERMINAL BOX
BATTERIES
-' - ''~"'-- /TO CENTER 16T

it ~~'-TERMINAL BOX #16 B-RO
_:: 1 !r Ii BATTERY BOX

, l lTERMINAL
BAR
B@TO TERMINAL CENTER TERMINAL
BAR IN BATTERY BOX BOX REAR
#16B-R© e TERMINAL BOX
'#16T 16 B-R O16T/O R.H

HORIZONTAL
TO REAR i FUEL TANK GAGE HORIZONTAL
TERM BOX / FUEL TANK GAGE
R.H. HORIZONTAL
L.H. HORIZONTAL REAR TERMINAL BOX FUEL TANK GAGE
FUEL TANK GAGE
-KEY -
B-BLACK WIRE
B-R-BLACK WITH RED TRACER
T-TAN WIRE
R-B--RED WITH BLACK TRACER
W-R-WHITE WITH RED TRACER
7,8 ETC.-TERMINAL BOX NUMBERS
#8, 16-WIRE SIZE RA PD 329464
Figure 42-Fuel Gage Circuit (75-mm Dry Stowage Vehicles)

135
TM 9-759
45
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
INSTRUMENT CIRCUIT BREAKER

/ 71 TO REAR TERMINAL BOX
FUEL TANK nu,6 *i 70 TO REAR
SWITCH~ H---- -- t 7 TL TERMINAL BOX
FUEL GAGE Il-J I ~r , 40 TO MASTER

F GITCH BOX
4 10 TO BATTERY TERMINAL
INSTRUMENT PANEL 40 TO
\0~ BREAKER
INSTRUMENT
PANEL
TANK "TE NIN
TO R.H.
' 70 TO TERMINAL '~~LiLj ] ~ FUEL GAGE
I FUEL TANK
o GAGE
FUEL (TANK UNIT)
FUEL GAGE (TANK UNIT)
- KEY-
#10-WIRE ..... 0-CAG.ER
EINAL
#40-WIRE ......... 2-GAGE
#70-WIRE .......... 16-GAGE
#71-W IRE . ........... 16-GAGE
RA PD 329465
Figure 43-Fuel Gage Circuit 175-mm Wet Stowage, 76-mm, and
136
TM 9-759
45-46
TROUBLE SHOOTING
W-off button is pressed will show that either one of the degassers
on the side of the engine is defective. To determine which one of
the two suspected degassers is at fault, close the idling adjusting
screw in the rear carburetor on the side which supplies fuel to
whichever bank of cylinders continue to fire after the fuel cut-off
button is pressed. Run the engine and if the engine stops when the
fuel cut-off button is pressed, the defective degasser is in the rear
carburetor. If the engine does not stop when the fuel cut-off button
is pressed, the defective degasser is in the front carburetor. Replace
the degasser (par. 73 h)).
e. Pressing the Fuel Cut-off Button Has No Effect on Engine.
Press the fuel cut-off circuit breaker button at the top of the instru-
ment panel. If the circuit breaker will not stay in contact, check for
grounded wire in the degasser circuit. Remove the fuel cut-off button
from the instrument panel. Start the engine and connect the two
wires running to the button together. If engine stops, the fuel cut-off
button is defective.
46. COOLING SYSTEM.

a. General Instructions. Difficulties in the cooling system are
;ally reflected in loss of coolant from the system and overheating.
,en overheating is evident and the cooling system inspection pro-
dure in subparagraph d below fails to locate the cause, follow
instructions as outlined in paragraph 41 h.
h). Engine Overheats. Refer to paragraph 41 h.
c. Engine Runs Too Cold. Replace the thermostat (par. 88).
d. Loss of Coolant.
(1)INSPECT HOSE CONNECTIONS AND EXTERNAL GASKETS. In-
spect all hose and hose connections, and tighten or replace hose.
Inspect for leakage at drain plug (fig. 78) and tighten or replace if
required. Inspect external gaskets for leaks, and replace any gaskets
found leaking.
(2) INSPECT WATER PUMP. If water is leaking from the drilled
hole at the bottom of the water pump, it indicates that the pump
shaft seal is leaking. Replace the water pump (par. 85 c and d().
(3) INSPECT PRESSURE FILLER CAP. With the engine at nor-
mal operating temperature, loosen the pressure filler cap at the top
of the expansion tank (fig. 100) by turning the cap counterclockwise
to the first notch, and listen for pressure escaping from the cooling
system. If the pressure is audible, the filler cap is functioning properly.
ino pressure is escaping, the filler cap or gasket is at fault. Replace
upper and lower gaskets, run the engine until it is again at
137
TM 9.759
46
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
RADIATOR '(UPPER) WATER CONNECTION

RADIATOR VENT
TEMPERATURE GAGE ENGINE UNIT / PIPE
FAN SHROUD EXPANSION TANK

FAN
FAN BELTS
PRESSURE FILLER CAP
EXPANSION TANK
OVERFLOW PIPE
BOIL GAGE--E
ENGINE UNIT
WATER PUMP CONNECTION
TO CYLINDER BLOCK
WATER LEVEL
(4) INSPC R R Ca te RADIATOR (LOWER)

WATER CONNECTION
WATER PUMP
FAN BELTS
RADIATOR VENT PIPE
FAN
~RADIAOXFAN SHROUD
RA PD 329238
Figure 44-Cooling System
operating temperature, and repeatthe repeat.

test. If the
the new gaskets failed
to correct the condition, replace the filler cap.
(4) INSPECT RADIATOR. Clean the exterior of the radiator core,
remove all grease, dirt, and insects. Inspect the radiator for leaks.
If it is found leaking, replace the radiator (par. 84 h and c).
(5) INSPECT FOR INTERNAL WATER LEAKS. If the cool
system still loses coolant, drain the oil from the engine oil pan an
observe whether there is water in the oil. If an abnormal amount of
water is found in the oil, it will indicate an internal water leak in
the engine. Notify higher authority. Remove all spark plugs, and,
138
TM 9.759
46
TROUBLE SHOOTING
/8 B)TO CIRCUIT BREAKERPLATEASS'Y IN PANEL

A16 G-R 3TO WATER BOIL SIGNAL IN PANEL
.#16 R-W(TO WATER TEMPERATURE GAGE IN PANEL
#16 BL.(TO FUEL CUT-OFF BUTTON.IN PANEL,
, = ~ ~ ,~ FRONT TERMINALBOX
., : h \ | 16~#BL. FUEL CUT-OFF BUTTON IN

/ FRONT TERMINAL BOX
INSTRUMENT PANEL
#16 R-W WATER TEMPERATURE
j16 BL®.//
C TERM. BOX
TO CENTER RTOFRON
TERM. BOX B#8B 21
_. IL .
#16 G-R
TO 8 B(B) ATTERY
#16 GR / MASTERSWITCH I ',->
CENTER
CENTERTERM. BOX 8 B CIRCUITBREAKERPLATE

BOX 16 L-.
BOlO: 16:'X CEN .ASS'Y ,,' //- TO FRONT TERM. BOX
', j 7 j '- #16 G-R WATER BOIL SIGNAL

TO FRONT TERM. BOX
I 4 BATTERIES
BATTERYBOX TERMINALBAR
i#88 BTO TERMINALEAR
IN BATTERYBOX
#A6 R-W
TO REAR #16 BL. \
TERM.BOX #16 GR
FUEL CUT-OFF (DEGASSERI
WATER TEMPERATURE GAGE (RADIATOR UNIT)

WATER BOIL GAGE (RADIATOR UNIT)
,} #16 G-R © { TO CENTER
, #16 BL.( TERM. BOX
REAR TERMINALBOX - #16 R-W)
16 BL.(TO FUELCUT-OFF
UNITS (DEGASSERS)
-KEY- ~ | #16 R-W(TO WATER TEMPERATURE

B
......... ACK | GAGE (RADIATOR UNIT)
BL R WITH
BLUE T #16 G-R ( TO WATER BOIL SIGNAL
(RAIATOR UNIT)
R-W ........ RED WITH WHITE TR.
GR .. GREEN WITH RED TR.
#8, #16, ETC. WIRE SIZE
( ........ NUMBERS IN TERMINALBOXES
RA PD 329463
Fuel Cut-off
ipure 45-Water Temperature Gage, Boil Signal, and
(75-mm Dry Stowage Vehicles)
139
TM 9.759
46
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
INSTRUMENTS CIRCUIT BREAKER FUEL CUT-OFF CIRCUIT BREAKER

ENGINE TEMPERATURE GAGE | / #64 TO REAR TERMINAL BOX
20 TO REAR TERMINAL BOX
#62 TO REAR
TERMINAL BOX
FUEL CUT- |#, e40 TO MASTER
OFF SWITCH ,__SWITCH BOX
HIGH WATER
TEMPERATURE
AND LOW
OIL SIGNAL
INSTRUMENT PANEL 0
#10 TO + BATTERY TERMINAL
MASTER SWITCH BOX
# I40 TO
CIRCUIT
BATTERIES BEK
64ETO ENGINE f 20 TO FUEL CUT-

|.Iiiiiiil GAGE
/TEMPERATURE O OFF (DEGASSERS)
.ljJJjjJ//IN
INSTRUMENT PANEL
'62 TO HIGH WATER
TEMPERATURE SIGNAL
IN INSTRUMENT PANELi
REAR TERMINAL BOX----.
4#20 TO FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH

HIGH WATER IN INSTRUMENT PANEL
TEMPERATURE GAGE 62 TO HIGH WATER
(RADIATOR
UNIT) ATURE GAGE (RADIATOR UNIT)
#64 TO WATER TEMPERATURE
GAGE (RADIATOR UNIT)
FUEL CUT-OFF
(DEGASSERS) -KEY-
#10 WIRE ........ .... 0 GAGE
L#20 WIRE ... ......... 14 GAGE
WATER TEMPERATURE GAGE (RADIATOR UNIT #21 WIRE .... .... 16 GAGE
#40-WRE ............ 12 GAG
#62 WIRE ..... 16 GAS
#64 WIRE ............ 16 GA
RA PD 329437
Figure 46-Water Temperature Gage, Boil Signal, and Fuel Cut-off

{75-mm Wet Stowage, 76-mm, and 105-mm Howitzer Vehiclesl
140
TM 9-759
46-47
TROUBLE SHOOTING
h the ignition switch off, crank the engine with the cranking motor,
d observe if water is evident at the spark plug holes. If water is
evident, it can be assumed the cylinder head gaskets are leaking.
Replace the cylinder head gaskets (par. 58 b and c).
47. LIGHTS.
a. No Lamps Will Light and No Electrical Units Will Operate.
(1) PRELIMINARY TEST. Turn the battery master switch on.
Push all the circuit breaker reset buttons located on the instrument
panel (figs. 12 and 13). Test the state of charge of the batteries. If
the batteries are discharged, they must be recharged or replaced. Clean
and tighten the battery terminals securely. If the lamps still fail
to light, press the starting switch. If the cranking motor fails to turn,
test the battery master switch (step (2) below). If the cranking
motor turns, omit test step (2) below and proceed with step (3)
below.
(2) TEST BATTERY MASTER SWITCH (figs. 7 and 14). Remove
the cover from the battery master switch box. Turn the light switch
on. Use a jumper wire, and contact across the terminals of the
battery master switch (24-volt switch). If the lamps now light,
place the battery master switch.
3) TEST CIRCUIT BREAKER. Disassemble the instrument panel
tars. 90 h) or 91 b). Turn the light switch on. Use a jumper wire
and contact across the terminals on the circuit breaker marked
"LIGHTS." If the lamps now light, the circuit breaker is at fault, and
must be replaced. If the circuit breaker fails to stay in contact (kicks
out) check the light circuit for grounded or shorted wires. If the
lamps still fail to light, proceed with step (4) below.
(4) TEST MAIN FEED WIRES TO INSTRUMENT PANEL. Turn the
instrument light switch on. If the instrument panel lights come on,
the main feed wire circuit is complete. Proceed with the test in step
(5) below. If the panel lights do not come on and the lamps are
known not to be burned out, it will indicate that the current is not
being delivered to the instrument panel.
(a) Wet Stowage and 105-mm Howitzer Vehicles. On wet
stowage and 105-mm howitzer vehicles, remove the instrument panel
and check the connections where the two No. 40 wires are attached
to the bus bar on the circuit breaker (figs. 101 and 102). Remove
the cover from the battery master switch box and check the terminal
of the two No. 40 wires. If this circuit is still unsatisfactory and
there is no indication of damage to the conduits which carry these
wires, proceed with the test in step (5) below.
(b) Dry Stowage 75-mm Vehicles. On dry stowage vehicles with
-mm gun, remove the instrument panel and check the connection
a.... ..-- 10 141
TM 9-759
47
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
HEADLIGHT AND MARKER LIGHT
BLACKOUT DRIVING LIGHT, COMPARTMENT LIGHT

SIREN ag
INSTRUMENT PANEL FRONT TERMINAL BOX

00
COMPARTMENT LIGHT
// SIREN
SWITCH STOP LIGHT SWITCHES
CENTER TERMINAL BOXb BATTERIES
TERMINAL BAR
REAR TERMINAL BOX
SERVICE STOP, SERVICE TAIL

AND BLACKOUT TAILLIGHT BLACKOUT TAIL AND BLACKOUT STOP LIGHT
RA PD 32944
Figure 47-Lights and Siren Circuit (75-mm Dry Stowage

Vehicles I
142
TM 9-759
47
TROUBLE SHOOTING
#i6 0-8 TO(D

#16o JO-
#16 R G TO \
|#16 R TOt)-\\ rMAIN LIGHTSWITCH
FRONT B TO BI4
B.O. DRIVESWITCH
TERMINAL CIRCUITBREAKERS
BOX yf88 T
#14 BL TO
#14 G-W
#146G B TOL
BOX
INSTRUMENT
PANEL
#16 O(DTO #2 O o o °
TERMINAL
ON #16 O-B TO# 00 0 00
LIGHTSWITCH #16 R.G #4 TO #3
#16 R®(YTO #4 JE l#14G-W(TO COMPARTMENT
LIGHT
#14 B(TO CIRCUITBREAKER IN PANEL ,14 G-WOTO COMPASS LIGHT
08 BOTO CIRCUITBREAKER AND COMPARTMENT LIGHT
TO PLATEASSEMBLY
IN PANEL #j16 O-BtI)TO R.H.HEADLIGHT
#14 BL-B1 TO SERVICE AND / , / 16 OOTO R.H.MARKERUGHT
B.O. LIGHTSWITCH I ,14 B (aTO STOPLIGHTSWITCH
#14G-W(DTO CIRCUIT 4 BL-B TO STOPLIGHTSWITCH
BREAKER
IN PANEL FRONTTERMINAL
BOX #14 Y-BL(OTO SIRENSWITCH
#14 Y-BL6(TO CIRCUITBREAKER CNTERTERMINAL
BOX #14 Y.-B(TO SIRENSWITCH
#16 O-B@TO B.O
B
RESISTORIN PANEL16
SIREN #1 -Ba TO FRONT
#14 -BTO SIREN // 6 O-BG TERMINALBOX
#16 O-.BTO L.H.HEADLIGHT
-- 16 R )
B
G-B(TO B.O. DRIVELIGHT- . -
6 OXiTO L.H.MARKERLIGHT- 16
' Z.16 #-T R()
/ TO REAR
CENTER,#/16 O(-BTO- 16 R-G
- TOERMINAL
BOX
TERMINAL #16 R-GOTO ,
". ' 16
BOX #16 R®TO ' : \ 16
#8 BJTO BATTERY #61 O-Bi TERMIO
CENTER
BOX TERMINAL BOX
# R-G TERMIALBOX
T B16
#16 OOTO BO. LH. T6 O®T B.O. R.H. TAILLIGHT

#16 O-B0TO SERVICE TAILLIGHT
#16 R®TO B.O. STOPLIGHT
#16 R-GOTO SERVICE
STOPLIGHT REARTERMINALBOX
KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS
B-BLACK WIRE
B-R-BLACK WITH REDTRACER
B-L-BLUE WITH BLACKTRACER
O-ORANGE
G-W-GREEN WITH WHITETRACER
Y-BL-YELLOW WITHBLUETRACER
R-G-RED WITH GREEN TRACER
G-BL-GREEN WITHBLUETRACER
O-B-ORANGE WITH BLACKTRACER
Y-B-YELLOW WITH BLACKTRACER
#8, #16,ETC.--WIRE SIZE
() ETC.-TERMINAL NUMBERS IN BOX
RA PD 329529
iLgure 48-Instrument Panel and Terminal Box Connections for

Lights and Siren Circuit (75-mm Dry Stowage Vehiclesl
143
TM 9.759
47
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
BLACKOUT DRIVING LIGHT

HEADLIGHT AND MARKER LIGHT BLACKOUT RESISTER
HORN OR SIREN \ /,MAIN LIGHT SWITCH

COMPASS \ \- HEADLIGHT AND
MARKER LIGHT
PANEL LIGHT SWITCH . MARKER LIGHT
INSTRUMENT PANEL/ ....
COMPARTMENT LIGHT HORN OR SIREN SWITCH

i A-a, *t BLOWER
COMPARTMENT LIGHT
G- \ CIRCUIT BREAKERS
COMPARTMENT / *, BATTERY MASTER SWITCH
LIGHT \ MASTER SWITCH BOX
BATTERIES-" LX'
- '- REAR
_.': TERMINAL BOX
SERVICE TAIL AND

BLACKOUT TAILLIGHT
BLACKOUT TAILLIGHT
RA PD 329436
Figure 49-Lights, Blower, and Horn or Siren Circuit 175-mm Wet

Stowage, 76-mm, and 105-mm Howitzer VehiclesJ
144
TM 9-759
47
TROUBLE SHOOTING
4 TO B.O. MARKER LIGHTS HORN OR SIREN CIRCUIT BREAKER
A C C E SSO RY
58 TO HORN OR SIREN SWITCH | CIRCUIT BREAKER
,J ~ ~ I ~ ~I ~LIGHTS CIRCUIT BREAKER
|MAIN LIGHT .BHT | I / PANEL LIGHT SWITCH
lSWITCH /-BOP | l / #42 TO REAR
TERMINAL BOX
#45 TO REAR
TERMINAL BOX
HT BAT ., ) #53
' TO
COMPASS LIGHT
lPANEL LIGHTS 1#40 FEED WIRES TO

MASTER SWITCH BOX
INSTRUMENT PANEL
#41 TO HEADLIGHTS #10 TO + BATTERY TERMINAL
CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR COMPARTMENT
#47 TO B.O. . ~-fT~ ~s 19d LIGHTS AND BLOWER
DRIVING LIGHTS
BATTERY X'~ /Jv #53
TO COMPASS
MASTER SWITCH #55 TO COMPARTMENT LIGHT
#57 TO COMPARTMENT LIGHT

86 TO BLOWER
#53 TO PANEL LIGHT SWITCH
MASTER SWITCH BOX

#40 FEEDWIRE TO CIRCUIT BREAKER
PLATE IN INSTRUMENT PANEL
#42 TO SERVICE 1 AKEY

TAIL LIGHT #40 WIRE. 0 GAGE
,#41 WIRE.. 14 GAGE

#42 WIRE... 16 GAGE
#44 WIRE ...14 GAGE
#45 WIRE... 16 GAGE
REAR TERMINAL #47 WIRE... 14 GAGE
#53 WIRE. 18BGAGE
-
#45 TO RIGHT AND #55 WIRE 18 GAGE
LEFT B.O. TAIL LIGHT 7#57 WIRE... 18 GAGE
#58 WIRE..14 GAGE
#45 TO B H T TERMINAL ON LIGHT SWITCH I #86 WIRE... 14 GAGE
#42 TO H T TERMINAL ON LIGHT SWITCH
REAR TERMINAL BOX RA PD 329442
Figure 50-Instrument Panel and Terminal Box Connections for

Lights, Blower, and Horn or Siren Circuit 175-mm Wet
Stowage, 76-mm, and 105-mm Howitzer Vehiclesl
145
TM 9.759
47
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
SPOT LIGHT
UTILITY OUTLET
COMPARTMENT LIGHT
COMPARTMENT LIGHTS -ADAPTER CIRCUIT BREAKERS

TENL FOR SPOTLIGHT /
OMA
SPOTLIGHT REEL TURRET

a CONTROL
BOX
COLLECTOR RING
RA PD 329441
Figure 51-Turret Lights and Blower Circuit 176-mm Vehicles)
where the No. 8 gage black wire is attached to the bus bar on the
circuit breakers, (fig. 101). Remove the cover from the battery box,
and check the terminal where this No. 8 gage black wire is attached
to the terminal bar. If this circuit is still unsatisfactory and there is
no indication of damage to the conduit in which this wire is carri
proceed with test in step (5) below. q
(5) TEST AMMETER SHUNT FOR LOOSE CONNECTIONS. Remove
the cover from the battery master switch box and tighten any con-
nections found loose on the ammeter shunt and terminal bar (fig. 37).
146
TM 9.759
47
TROUBLE SHOOTING
#134 TO FRONT COMPARTMENT LIGHT

AND SPOTLIGHT
CIRCUIT BREAKERS CKET
121 TO REAR COMPARTMENT

LIGHT, BLOWER AND SPOT-
LIGHT REEL
# 100 TO COLLECTOR RING
-KEY -
#100-WIRE ......... 2-GAGE
#121-WIRE .......... 16-GAGE
#134-WIRE .......... 16-GAGE
RA PO 329458
Figure 52-Terminal Box Connections for Turret Lights and

Blower Circuit 176-mm Vehicles)
On the dry stowage vehicle with the 75-mm gun, the ammeter shunt
is located in the battery box (fig. 113).
b. Instrument Panel Lamps Light But No Other Lamps Will
Light. Remove the instrument panel and test the circuit breaker
marked "LIGHTS" (subpar. a (3) above). On wet stowage and 105-
sn howitzer vehicles, examine the wire marked "50" which extends
m the circuit breaker marked "LIGHTS" to the terminal marked
147
TM 9-759
47
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
O tij))~ SPOT LIGHT
BLOWER
COMPARTMENT LIGHT
ADAPTER FOR SPOTLIGHT
TURRET CONTROL BOX
CJo ~ ~SPOTLIGHT
REEL
COLLECTOR RING
RA PD 329439
Figure 53-Turret Lights and Blower Circuit 175-mm Wet

Stowage Vehicles)
148
TM 9-759
47
TROUBLE SHOOTING
#121 TO SPOT LIGHT REEL
#121 TO UTILITY SOCKET
#123 TO BLOWER
AND
COMPARTMENT LIGHT
CIRCUIT BREAKER
P0 TO COLLECTOR RING
KEY
#100 - WIRE ...... .. 2-GAGE
#121 -WIRE ..........
16-GAGE
#123 - WIRE ....... .16-GAGE
#122 - WIRE ......... 16-GAGE
RA PD 329459
Figure 54-Terminal Box Connections for Turret Lights and

Blower Circuit (75-mm Wet Stowage Vehicles)
"BAT" on the light switch (fig. 102). If this wire is in good condition
and the terminals are tight, it may be assumed that the light switch
is at fault and it must be replaced. On dry stowage vehicles with
75-mm gun, remove the instrument panel and test the circuit breaker
marked "LIGHTS" (subpar. a (3) above). Examine the black with
blue tracer wire which extends from the circuit breaker marked
"LIGHTS" to the terminal marked "SS" on the light switch. If this
wire is in good condition and the terminals are tight, it may be
assumed that the light switch is at fault and must be replaced.
c. Indliiidual Lamps Do Not Light. Check any lamps burned
,gut and replace (pars. 98 and 99). Check for loose connections at
149
TM 9-759
47
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
SPOT LIGHT
COMPARTMENT LIGHT
COMPARTMENT L.GHT
COMPARTMENT LIGHT
BLOWER
BLOWER SWITCH
TURRET CONTROL BOX
SPOTLIGHT ADAPTER
RADIO TERMINAL BOX
COLLECTOR RING
RA PD 329440
Figure 55-Turret Lights and Blower Circuit 1105-mm Howitzer

Vehicles
150
TM 9-759
47
TROUBLE SHOOTING
CIRCUIT BREAKER BUTTONS

#123 TO BLOWER MOTOR
AND COMPARTMENT LIGHT
#122 TO
COMPARTMENT
X1 ~I'J~~~t
|LIGHTS AND
UTILITY OUTLET
121 TO REEL
#100 TO COLLECTOR RING
- KEY-
#100-WIRE ......... 2-GAGE
#121-WIRE .......... 18-GAGE
#122-WIRE ........ 14-GAGE
#123-WIRE .......... 14-GAGE
RA PD 329456
igure 56-Terminal Box Connections for Turret Lights and
Blower Circuit 1105-mm Howitzer Vehicles)
lights, and tighten connections. Check for damaged wires to the

individual unit giving trouble. If the lamp still fails to light, replace
the light switch.
d. One or More Lamps Burn Out Repeatedly. Most lamp
failures are due to vibration when the vehicle is operated over rough
terrain. These failures occur more frequently in 12- and 24-volt
systems than they do in a 6-volt system, due to the smaller lamp
filament used with higher voltages. Clean and tighten all connec-
tions, including the battery cable connections, and replace all broken
ground straps (bond straps). If the generator has replaced the cur-
rent used in starting the engine, the batteries are known to be fully
charged, and the ammeter shows a charge in excess of 15 amperes,
it can be assumed that the voltage setting of the generator regulator
is too high. Replace the generator regulator.
e. Short Circuits or Grounded Wires (Circuit Breaker Marked
"LIGHTS" Kicks Out). Turn the light switch to the blackout
marker light position. If the circuit breaker kicks out, it indicates
that the shorted or grounded wire is in the blackout marker light or
eblackout taillight wires. Turn the light switch to the headlight
;ition. If the circuit breaker kicks out, it indicates that the shorted
151
TM 9.759
47
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
SPOT LIGHT
COMPARTMENT LIGHT
SPOTLIGHT ADAPTER
TURRET CONTROL BOX
REEL
COLLECTOR RING
RA PD 329451
Figure 57-Turret Light Circuit (75-mm Dry Stowage Vehicles)

152
TM 9.759
47-48
TROUBLE SHOOTING
#18 GAGE-RED TO
COMPARTMENT LIGHT
/#14 GAGE-GREEN TO
SPOT LIGHT OUTLET
l t9 R#16 GAGE-BLUE
TO REEL
CIRCUIT BREAKER
CIRCUIT BREAKER 0 CIRCUIT BREAKER

RESET BUTTON
#2 GAGE-BLACK TO COLLECTOR RING

RA PD 329460
Jgure 58-Terminal Box Connections for Turret Light Circuit

175-mm Dry Stowage Vehicles)
or grounded wire is in the circuit to the service headlights, or in the

service taillight wires. Replace or repair the damaged wires. If the
damage to the wires is caused by a damaged conduit, replace the
damaged section of the conduit.
48. HORN OR SIREN.

a. Horn or Siren Will Not Sound.
(1) PRELIMINARY STEPS. Be sure the horn or siren circuit
breaker reset button is pushed in. Turn the instrument panel light
switch on. If the panel lights come on, it will indicate that current
is being delivered to the instrument panel and to the horn or siren
circuit breaker. Remove the horn or siren from its mounting bracket,
and clean the base free from paint or corrosion to establish a good
ground contact for the horn or siren. Reinstall the horn or siren. If
the horn or siren fails to sound after establishing a good ground, pro-
ceed with the next test.
(2) TEST HORN OR SIREN BUTTON. Remove the cover from the
Lp or siren button box and contact a jumper wire across the con-
153
TM 9.759
48
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
a d
w~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.J.a
.9 00
wo ~~~ ~ ~~
· TPO q~~~~~
4-
' 4 I-
L -4
e-
I
z ~
w ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ i
Zw t~~~~~~e
m Y m~~~~~~~~w~
gj B 154 Ps ~
154
TM 9.759
48
TROUBLE SHOOTING
E -,
2 ~~~~~~~~~'·
0wi .0
IC
~oo S
~155~ ~S
is °
gs;15:3~9 9° g 4
TM 9-759
48-51
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
tacts inside the box. If the horn or siren now sounds, the button as-
sembly is at fault and must be replaced. If the horn or siren does
not sound, replace the horn or siren.
49. CLUTCH.
a. Clutch Drag. If the gears clash when shifting into first or
reverse gears, or if the vehicle has a tendency to roll when the clutch
is disengaged, adjust the clutch (par. 110 e). If adjusting the clutch
does not correct the trouble, replace the clutch disk or pressure plate,
whichever is required (par. 110 h).
b. Pedal Pressure Too Stiff. If the pedal pressure is too stiff,
lubricate the clutch linkage. If lubricating the clutch linkage does not
correct the stiffness of the clutch pedal, if equipped with a clutch
booster spring, adjust the spring (par. 110 g (2) ). If the spring is
broken, replace it (par. 110 g). If stiffness still prevails on vehicles
with or without the booster, adjust the linkage (par. 110 f).
c. Clutch Slips. If the clutch slips, adjust the clutch as outlin , 4
in paragraph 110 d. If the clutch continues to slip after being ad-
justed, replace the clutch disk or pressure plate, whichever is required
(par. 110 h).
d. Clutch Grabs. If the clutch grabs or chatters, replace the
clutch disk or pressure plate, whichever is required (par. 110 h).
50. PROPELLER SHAFT.

a. Backlash. If the universal joint trunnion bearings are worn
or damaged, notify higher authority. Tighten the universal joint
flange bolts if they are loose.
b. Propeller Shaft Vibration. If the universal joints are worn
or damaged, notify higher authority. Tighten the universal joint
flange bolts if they are loose.
51. POWER TRAIN (TRANSMISSION, DIFFERENTIAL, AND

FINAL DRIVE).
a. Lubricant Leakage. Tighten the filler plug and drain plugs.
Check the flexible hose and cooler tube connections, and tighten
if necessary. Notify higher authority if they are damaged. Chec
the final drive housing cover gasket and tighten the cap screws,
replace the gasket if damaged. Check the brake and transmissiol
inspection covers. Tighten the cap screws, or replace the gaskets if
damaged. Check the input and output shaft oil seals or gaskets.
Notify higher authority if these oil seals or gaskets are damaged.
156
TM 9.759
51-52
TROUBLE SHOOTING
. One Side of Track Will Not Move (Engine Running and

Transmission in Gear). Check for broken final drive shaft on
compensating shaft. If the final drive shaft is broken, replace the
final drive unit. Check the final drive shaft gear or compensating gear
for stripped teeth. If either gear has stripped teeth, replace the final
drive unit. Check for broken final drive assembly parts. If any parts
are damaged or brokefi',:notify higher authority.
c. Hard Shifting (Severe Gear Clash). Hard shifting can be
caused by incorrect clutch linkage adjustment (par. 110 f). Check
for clutch drag (par. 110 e). Check the transmission gearshift lever
for binds. Clean and lubricate gearshift lever. If the above correc-
tion does not correct hard shifting, the transmission has worn or
damaged parts. Notify higher authority.
d. Backlash. Backlash is caused by worn or damaged final
drive or transmission. Notify higher authority.
e. Poor Steering. Adjust the steering brakes (par. 116). Re-
move the brake inspection cover, and replace the brake lining if it is
worn (par. 115).
HYDRAULIC TRAVERSING SYSTEM.

General. Before investigating troubles in vehicles equipped
with hydraulic turret traversing mechanism, place the turret trav-
ersing shifter lever in the down position. and traverse the turret
by hand to make sure the turret will rotate smoothly in both direc-
tions.
1). Turret Fails to Turn.
(1) ELECTRIC MOTOR FAILS TO RUN. Push the turret circuit
breaker reset button. Replace or tighten any loose or broken
wires. Test the battery. Recharge or replace the batteries if they
are low in charge. If the motor is burned out, replace it. (A burned-
out motor can be detected by smell or burned wires.)
(2) PUMP INOPERATIVE BUT MOTOR RUNS. If the motor shaft
to pump coupling is broken, replace the coupling. If the coupling is
not broken, the pump is at fault and must be replaced.
(3) PUMP RUNS BUT TURRET DOES NOT OPERATE. Move the
traverse shift lever to the hydraulic traversing position. Release the
turret lock. Fill the reservoir to the proper level. If the batteries are
low, recharge or replace them. If the high-pressure relief valve is
sticking, or has a broken spring, clean it or replace the spring. If
the control handle is not turning the eccentric, tighten the control
Handle set screw. Remove the inspection plate. If the shaft is
wken, replace it. Clean the turret ring gear and race, if required.
3:,550 0--4.---.1. 1 157
TM 9-759
52
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
If the control cam pistons are sticking, remove the inspection plate
and clean the assembly. If the pistons are still sticking, replace the
pump. If the hydraulic motor shaft turns, replace the motor.
c. Turret Will Traverse in One Direction Only. Clean or re-

place the gear box, if required. If the back-up slide block piston
is stuck, clean or replace the pump. Remove the two plugs and
examine the check valves on the pump. Clean or replace the
check valves.
d. Turret Creeps in One Direction. If the turret creeps in one

direction, with the vehicle level, adjust the control eccentric shaft.
e. Turret Moves With Control Handle in Neutral. If the pilot

valve plunger is stuck, clean or replace pump. Reset the position
of the pump control eccentric shaft, if required. If the control cam
pistons are stuck, free them up or replace the pump.
4
f. Turret Turns Excessively on a Slope.
(1) PUMP SUCKING AIR. Fill the reservoir to proper le
Tighten the gear pump suction tube connection if required. If the
trouble is still not corrected, replace the pump.
(2) HIGH-PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE STICKING. If the return line
is hot, clean or replace the high-pressure relief valve.
g. Unsteady or Sluggish Turret Operation. Fill the reservoir

to proper level. Recharge or replace the batteries, if required. Trav-
erse the turret manually to check the ring gear and pinion for binds.
Clean any foreign matter in the turret ring gear. Reset the clearance
between the ring gear and pinion, if required. Tighten any loose
wire connections. Remove the relief valve caps. If the relief valves
are sticking, clean or replace the valves. If the pinion shaft is broken
or has a sheared key, replace the unit. Tighten all loose gear pump
suction tube connections. If trouble is not corrected, replace the
pump.
h. Slow Traverse in One Direction. If the back-up slide block

piston and spring is stuck or broken, clean or replace the piston or
spring. Clean and free-up the check valves if leaking. Readjust the
eccentric control shaft adjustment, if necessary.
i. Oil Leaks From Pump to Motor. Replace worn shaft oi

seals or damaged gaskets, if necessary. Tighten or replace loose t
connections, if necessary.
j. Abnormal Noise in Pump Motor or Adapter. Fill oil reser-
voir to proper level. If this does not correct the fault, the parts are
excessively worn or damaged. Replace the units.
158
TM 9.759
53.54
TROUBLE SHOOTING
TRACKS AND SUSPENSION.

a. Bogie Wheel Tire Wear. Replace any bent, broken or miss-
ing track connectors. Replace dead track shoes (pars. 125 or 133).
Remove any mud or stones from between the end connectors. Re-
place the bogie wheel arm if the gudgeon bushing is excessively worn.
h. Volute SpringBreakage. Replace worngudgeons, if neces-
sary. If three or more inner coils of both springs, in any suspension,
rest upon the lower spring seat, the volute springs are weak. Replace
the volute spring. When replacing volute springs in any suspension,
replace both springs regardless of the condition of the other spring.
Replace broken or cracked spring seats.
c. Thrown Tracks. Adjust track tension, if necessary (pars. 125 d
or 133 d). Tighten the idler wheel bracket bolts, if necessary. Clean
out rocks which might have wedged between the idler and track.
If the idler shaft is loose on the bracket, lock the idler adjustment.
d. Inoperative Track Support Rollers. Clean any mud from
between the support roller and track. Raise the track off the sup-
port roller, and rotate the roller. If the roller does not turn, replace
it (pars. 127, 128, or 135). Lubricate the rollers, if necessary.
Ye. Inoperative Idler 'Wheel. Disconnect the track at the idler
el (par. 125 h), and rotate the idler wheel. If the idler wheel
Wes not turn freely, lubricate, or replace it (pars. 126 or 134).
54. RADIO SUPPRESSION SYSTEM.

a. Preliminary Instructions. When radio interference is ex-
perienced, the vehicle should be moved to an open space away from
high-tension power lines, machinery which causes electrical dis-
turbances, buildings, and other radio-equipped vehicles, before at-
tempting to make tests for determining the cause for interference.
b. Radio Reception Satisfactory When Vehicle Is Not in

Motion, and Becomes Noisy When Engine Is Started.
(1) TEST GENERATING SYSTEM FOR INTERFERENCE. Remove the
generator field wire (figs. 117 and 118) and run the engine. On
vehicles equipped with two generators, remove the field wire from
both generators. If radio interference has been reduced or eliminated,
it indicates that the generating system is causing interference. Re-
place the generator regulator (par. 104 h), and run the engine at a
speed of approximately 1,000 revolutions per minute, after the re-
placement. If the generator regulator is not at fault, replace the
condensers in the radio terminal box (fig. 185) and run the engine.
ithe condensers in the generating system are not at fault, test all
159
TM 9.759
54.55
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
units and conduits in the generating system for a good ground. To

make this test, use a jumper wire with handles containing prods
which will penetrate through painted surfaces. Run the engine at
a speed where the interference is at its maximum, and contact the
jumper wire between a good ground and the generator housing,
generator regulator housing, or terminal boxes, and conduits in the
generating circuit. If interference has been improved or eliminated
by any of these tests, see if bonding straps are in good condition,
and have a good ground contact on the units on which bonding
straps are used. Replace the internal-external toothed washers on
units grounded by this type of washer (par. 152 h (4)).
c. Radio Interference When Vehicle Is Not in Motion and
Engine Is Not Running. The most probable cause for interference
under this condition is that units or component parts of the hull
do not have a good ground contact with the main part of the hull.
To test, use a long jumper wire with a handle containing a prod
which will penetrate painted surfaces. Attach the other end of td
jumper wire to the ground terminal of the battery, and contel
the prod on all units of the vehicle, all conduits and terminal boxe,
and each component part of the hull, also fenders and dust shields.
If improvement is obtained in the radio reception by making con-
tact with the jumper wire at any of these points, the unit or part
must be grounded to the part to which it is attached. These parts
are grounded by means of bonding straps and 'or internal-external
washers. (See paragraph 152.h (4) for bonding strap installation
and for internal-external toothed washer installation.)
d. Radio Interference When Vehicle Is in Motion, and No
Interference Under Other Conditions. The most probable cause
for interference will be poor ground contact in some unit or com-
ponent part of the vehicle due to vibration in the vehicle under oper-
ating conditions. Make test, as outlined in subparagraph c above,
while the vehicle is in motion.
Section XIV
ENGINE DESCRIPTION. DATA AND MAINTENANCE
IN VEHICLE
55. DESCRIPTION AND DATA.
a. Description (figs. 61 through 65). This vehicle is powered
with a 60-degree V, 8-cylinder, 4-cycle, valve-in-head, liquid-cooled
Ford tank engine. The cylinder block and crankcase are cast integral
of aluminum, with steel dry-type sleeves in cylinder bores. The
160
TM 9.759
55
ENGINE DESCRIPTION, DATA AND MAINTENANCE IN VEHICLE
a C' z
CL w Z C
0 ,_ < L Z z
0 z
~' ~
~'= 0 o : ji"··
x: ZXZ U ,I'-7 < _ U
*SLx
;_u ,, u < ,::.e

2 m
"'"u v m : '
00: ,,. . ,
lF
rrv yt R! Sr .
:,x''~~~
; ~ ~~ * ' ~~~~.
?~ 7 -
'~~~~~~~~ 1 ~~ ~ t2i, ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

!
, L~ v,
q < z1 i, C~L w,
i v 3 ie|s
°° I ° I / c 8 t'-T_~ ~O~~~~0
1~~~~~~~~~zck
! i
- e:1 z z 0= 161~~~~~~~~0
m ad
1&1
TM 9.759
55
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
U., 0 ,o
27u
 o
7O , u .
<
IILUJ
X I 1 CO (3 ,a
CL z
z o 3
U -- , F- a F-
162:~ 0
- 0
W °. U Z F
F- i.F-
3 162or z<
ZwZ .,_
<
LUQ co " 0 0
D
cu
>
<
m
>
> LY
pL " O 4
D~~z
LU W <u ~ LU ~ Z_
0
1~~~~~~~~~~~~4C
Z z
z 4 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~,
;4Y ql~
0~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
' p:,i:t'
:?,':~~~~'
In W~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I
LU . ~c:j
L ,
I ..-
~~~~Jov Io
o
Z ~ ~ ,f 0 6.~1n a~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~a
IL LU
-' -
LU -Y
'' '
=U ·
z 163) 0z: U
Z uZ
_L u., ' z LU
Z Z
163
TM 9.759
55
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
O,
0o o
! L
UJ
5 o <° Z C
D< >
co
0''
L?~-
Lu
{
D z
o0
' <
:~D zz· 0 ;
0
0 P < <: .- 0 >Z U
wzz
0
164
TM 9-759
55
LNGINE DESCRIPTION, DATA AND MAINTENANCE IN VEHIC E
V-
0
LU o
~It *s z o
II
V
p:Z Z Z
r ~I u oO o
Co Z Z 0 w
a- X
<
< 00< 0
Ck:I I
ocu U
<~U MI
Z t"4
0 1
d A,
165
TM 9-759
55
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
water jackets extend the full length of the cylinders. Four overhead
camshafts are used, one exhaust and one intake, for each bank of
cylinders. There are two exhaust and two intake valves in each
cylinder. Two 4-cylinder magnetos are used. These are located
at the rear of the engine, one mounted at each end of a cross
shaft driven by gears. The water pump (fig. 64) is driven from the
end of the crankshaft. Two accessory drive housings, located on
the side walls of the engine compartment, are each driven through
an accessory drive shaft and universal joints by the accessory drive
gears in the engine. Two pusher-type fans are driven through double
V-type belts by the accessory drives.
b. Location and Mountings. The engine is mounted at the rear

of the vehicle, and is supported by four brackets. The two front
brackets are mounted on the engine compartment bulkhead. The
two rear brackets are mounted on the engine compartment floor
Rubber mounts are used between the brackets and the engine.
c. Definition of Terms. The flywheel end of the engine will

referred to as the "front" of the engine, as the engine is mounted
in the vehicle with the flywheel forward. The terms "right" and
"left" are used with reference to the engine as viewed from the rear
looking toward the front of the vehicle.
d. Tabulated Data. The following data include the general

information and engine characteristics which are frequently required
for reference:
General:
Make and type ............... .Ford V-type, 8-cylinder,
liquid-cooled, tank
engine
M odel ............. .......... ....... ..... ..... GAA
Over-all dimensions (including clutch):
Length ........ . 59.02 in.
Width ........... ... 33.25 in.
Height ... ... .... .......... 47.78 in.
Weight (without accessories) ........ ..... 1,470 lb
Weight (with accessories) .................. 2,350 lb
Net horsepower at 2,600 rpm . .. .............. 500
Net torque at 2,100 rpm . ......... 950 ft ,o
Number of cylinders ... ............. .......... 8
Bore ..... ......... 5.4 in.
Stroke ........ ... .............. .......... ...... 6 in.
Piston displacement ....... ............. 1,100 cu in.
Compression ratio ............................ 7.5 to 1
TM 9.759
55.56
Direction of rotation (viewed from rear of engine):

Crankshaft ............................. .......... . Clockwise
Cranking motor .............................. Counterclockwise
Magnetos:
Right-hand rotor ........ Clockwise
Left-hand rotor ........... Counterclockwise
Accessory speeds:
Fan .......... 1.4 crankshaft
speed
Magneto rotors ............... 1/2 crankshaft
speed
Magnetos:
Make ............... .. ......... ........................ Bosch
Model:
Right-hand MJF4A-308, MJF4B-314, or
MJF4B-316
Left-hand .... MJF4A-307, MJF4B-3 11, or
MJF4B-315
Breaker point gap . 0.014 in. to 0.016 in.
Spark plug gap:
New ...... ......... 0.011 in. to 0.014 in.
Service maximum limit ............... 0.030 in.
Valve clearance (nonadjustable) 0.025 in. to 0.030 in.
Carburetor-make and model
(2 used) ...... .......... Bendix-Stromberg
!NA-Y5G
Numbering of cylinders from rear to front:
Right bank ......... . ...... 1-2-3-4
Left bank .... ........ 1-2-3-4
Firing order: . l-R, 2-L, 3-R, 1-L, 4-R, 3-L, 2-R, 4-L
56. INTAKE AND EXHAUST MANIFOLDS.

a. Intake. The intake manifolds are cast integral with the cyl-
inder heads, and are open at each end. Carburetor adapters are
installed between the carburetors and the intake manifolds. These
adapters are likewise connected to the exhaust manifolds which
permit the exhaust gases to heat the fuel air mixture as it comes
from the carburetors. These adapters each contain two butterfly
valves operated by the engine speed governor.
b. Exhaust.
(1) DESCRIPTION (figs. 61 and 62). Two exhaust manifolds are
used, one attached to each cylinder head. The end of each mani-
fold is attached to the carburetor adapter housing by means of a
,nnecting pipe.
167
TM 9-759
56-57
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
(2) REMOVAL. Open the engine compartment doors. Remove

the lock wire and the three cap screws from the upper flange. Re-
move the lock wire and the three bolts from the lower flange of the
heater pipes which connect the ends of the exhaust manifold to the
carburetor adapter housings. Remove the six bolts at the center
flange of the exhaust pipe. Remove the lock wire and 16 brass nuts
securing the manifold to the cylinder head, and remove the mani-
fold. The above procedure applies to either the right or left manifold.
(3) INSTALLATION. Place new gaskets (B258270) and the
manifold in position, and secure the manifold to the cylinder head
with 16 brass nuts. Replace the six bolts at the center flange of
the exhaust pipe. Install new gaskets at both ends of the heater
pipe, and fasten the ends to the manifold with three bolts. Fasten
each of the heater pipes to the carburetor adapter housings with
three cap screws. Close and fasten the engine compartment doors.
57. ENGINE MOUNTS. 4

a. Description (fig. 66)). The four engine mounts, used to
support the engine, provide flexible rubber installation between the
engine and its mounting brackets.
h. Front Engine Mount Removal (right or left side). Remove

the engine compartment floor plate (par. 63 d). Place a jack under
the front of the engine oil pan, using a wood block between the oil
pan and jack. Raise the engine high enough to take the weight off
the engine front mounts. Remove the four bolts which hold the
mount to the support bracket. Two of these bolts are accessible
through the inspection opening in the bulkhead, and two through the
engine floor plate opening. Remove the long bolt which holds the
halves of the mount together (fig. 66). Remove the four nuts
which hold the upper bracket portion of the mount to the clutch
housing. The two rear nuts are accessible through the engine
floor plate opening, and the two front nuts through the inspection
opening in the bulkhead.
c. Engine Front Mount Installation. Position the upper bracket

portion of the mount on the clutch housing, and secure it with
four nuts. Fasten the mount to the support bracket with four bolts,
remove the jack and install the engine compartment floor plate. i
d. Engine Rear Mount Removal (right or left side). Follc

the steps in subparagraph h above, except place the jack under the
rear of the engine oil pan. Remove the four bolts which hold the
mount to the support bracket. Remove the four nuts which hold
the mount to the engine, and remove the mount.
168
TM 9-759
57
~ o
u-I I -I I I I L I u] I
U U Z oI K G LU
"
C m u I: m L ' ' " 'a : Z a- '
41
E
U-,
O r~00 ~ ~
-I a.
Pt~~,
o f C~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~A
159c
u g~
TM 9-759
57-58
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
e. Engine Rear Mount Installation. Secure the mount to the

engine with four nuts, and to the support bracket with four bolts.
Remove the jack, and install the floor plate (par. 64 b).
58. CYLINDER HEAD GASKETS.

a. Removal.
(1) PRELIMINARY STEPS. Remove the engine compartment floor
plate (par. 63 d). Open the engine compartment rear door (par.
63 c). Place a large pan under the engine compartment floor plate
opening. Remove the lock wire and drain plug from the bottom
of the water pump (fig. 64) and. allow the water to drain. Remove
the cap screws that hold the engine compartment doors closed, and
open the doors. Remove the cap screws that hold the engine com-
partment front cover plate to the hull, and remove the plate.
(2) REMOVE AIR CLEANERS. Air cleaners on vehicles having
the air cleaners in the engine compartment are to be removed (pal
76 b). 4
(3) REMOVE WATER MANIFOLDS (figs. 61 and 62). Loosen the
hose clamps on the hose that connect the water manifold and
radiator, and remove the hose. Loosen the clamps on the hose that
connect the water manifold and the expansion tank, and remove the
hose. Remove the four nuts and flat washers that hold each water
manifold to the cylinder head, and remove the manifolds.
(4) REMOVE JUNCTION Box (fig. 77). If a junction box is
mounted on the left-hand cylinder head, it must be removed. To
remove the junction box, unscrew the collar on each of the plug
connectors and pull the two plugs out of the junction box. Remove
the two screws that hold the conduit bracket to the upper part of
the junction box. Remove the four nuts that hold the junction box
to the camshaft housing, and lay the box to one side where it 'will
not interfere when removing the camshaft housing or cylinder head.
(5) REMOVE FUEL PUMP AND DISCONNECT FUEL LINES. Close
all of the fuel shut-off valves. Disconnect the three fuel lines at
the fuel pump. Remove the two nuts and flat washers that secure
the pump to the camshaft housing. Slide the fuel pump off the
studs. Disconnect the primer line at the connection.
(6) REMOVE THROTTLE AND GOVERNOR CONTROLS. Discon-
nect the throttle rod at each carburetor. Disconnect the throtp
rod at the lever control bracket mounted on the engine comp
ment bulkhead. Remove the two nuts and flat washers that hol
the throttle rod bracket assembly to the cylinder head, and remove
the assembly. Disconnect the governor control rod at each car-
buretor adapter, and remove the rod.
170
TM 9-759
58
7) REMOVE EXPANSION TANK (fig. 77). Disconnect the two

.rflow lines at the expansion tank. Remove the four cap screws
that secure the expansion tank to the bulkhead, and remove the tank.
(8) REMOVE CARBURETORS (fig. 63). Disconnect the degasser
electrical connections 'at each carburetor. Remove the four nuts
that secure each carburetor to the adapter housings. Lift the air
intake manifold and carburetors as an assembly from the engine.
(9) REMOVE GOVERNOR (rig. 64). Remove the cotter pin from
the ball joint connection on the governor arm, unscrew the ball seat
plug from the ball connection on the governor arm, and disconnect
the connecting link. Remove the six nuts which hold the governor
to the camshaft housing and remove the governor.
(10) REMOVE TACHOMETER DRIVE UNIT (fig. 64). If the ta-
chometer drive assembly is mounted in the camshaft housing, it must
be removed. To remove the tachometer drive unit, remove the
four nuts from the mounting flange and pull the assembly and driving
quill from the camshaft housing.
(11) REMOVE SPARK PLUGS, WIRES AND CONDUIT ASSEMBLY.
Remove the 10 nuts from each cover over the spark plugs, and re-
move the covers. With special wrench (41-W-3336-300), unscrew
e spark plug terminal nuts from the spark plugs (fig. 88). Remove
four nuts holding each conduit to the camshaft housing and
the wire and conduit from the housing. Remove the spark plugs
with special wrench (41-W-3336-300) (fig. 88).
(12) REMOVE CAMSHAFT HOUSINGS. Remove all nuts from the
top and lower edge of each camshaft housing and remove the hous-
ings from the cylinder heads. CAUTION: Lift the housings evenly
so that the long studs will not be bent.
(13) CHECK PUSH ROD CLEARANCE. Before removing the cam-
shafts, check the push rod clearance. The proper clearance is 0.025
inch to 0.030 inch, taken between the top of the push rod and the
heel of the cam. Use a feeler gage for checking the clearance. Make
a record of the clearances. If any are found that are not within
the recommended limits, notify higher authority.
(14) REMOVE CAMSHAFTS. Remove the two nuts from each
bearing cap and remove the caps from the camshaft bearings. Re-
move the four nuts holding the camshaft support to the cylinder
head. NOTE: Nuts from the bearing caps and the supports must
be loosened evenly to prevent undue strain on the camshafts due
to the valve spring pressure. Remove the snap ring at the top of the
camshaft drive worm gear on each block, and lift the upper drive
shaft from the gear (fig. 67). Lift the camshaft from the cylinder
Wtads. The intake and exhaust camshafts and the rear support are
171
TM 9.759
58
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
CM <.
I
A < VD
(U
,I,,^A. -- A _ (>
X V en F < <
> > V
I"
I I gI17
o4~ o
TM 9.759
58
be removed as an assembly (fig. 70). Lift the camshaft bear-

s from the studs.
(15) SECURE PUSH RODS. Secure the push rods in the guides
with tape, or wire so as not to disturb them when removing the
cylinder head, as they must be kept with the push rod guide to
which they were originally fitted.
(16) REMOVE CARBURETOR HEATER PIPES AND ADAPTER Hous-
INGS (fig. 64). Remove the lock wire and three cap screws from
the upper flange and the lock wire and the three nuts from the
lower flange of each pipe and remove the four heater pipes which
connect the exhaust pipe to the carburetor adapter. Remove the
six nuts securing each of the adapters to the cylinder heads and
remove the adapter housings. A special offset wrench (41-W-639-
850) is provided for removing the nuts on each side which are lo-
cated behind the heater pipe flanges.
(17) REMOVE CYLINDER HEADS. Remove the 18 nuts secur-
ing each cylinder head to the cylinder block. Use special wrench
(41-W-866-200) for removing the long cylinder head nuts. The
long nuts are the eight nuts on each head which have the camshaft
bearing studs screwed into them. Use special wrench (41-W-866-
250) for the balance of the cylinder head nuts (short nuts). Lift
heads from the cylinder block and remove the head gaskets.
(18) CLEAN CARBON. Clean the carbon from the heads and
each cylinder block.
Is. Installation.
(1) INSTALL CYLINDER HEAD GASKETS (fig. 68). Place a new
metal gasket (G104-15-93841) on the top of each cylinder sleeve,
then install the cylinder head gasket (D-66347 left, or D-66346 right)
in place on the cylinder block. NOTE: Early production engines
use an individual rubber seal at each water and oil tube instead of
a conventional-type cylinder head gasket. When cylinder heads are
removed for any reason, the conventional cylinder head gasket must
be installed, and all the rubber seals on the water and oil tubes
must be omitted. The two large rubber seals at the extreme rear
end of the cylinder block (fig. 68) on these early engines are to
be used with this late type gasket.
(2) INSTALL CYLINDER HEADS. With a man at each end of
the head, place the head over the studs and lower it evenly on the
cylinder block. Care must be used when putting the head over the
studs so as not to mar or damage the bottom face of the head.
(3) TIGHTEN CYLINDER HEADS. Place a washer and nut on
each cylinder head stud. Eight long nuts (G104-17-14643) are
Used on the two center rows of studs, and 10 short nuts (G104-17-
1 I:.,55, i-4.N--- -Il2 173

TM 9-759
58
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
A D A D A D A D A D A
E B D A CD A C D A CD A C D B
A-WATER TUBES C-METAL CYLINDER GASKETS E-RUBBER SEALS

B-OIL TUBES D-CORE PLUGS
SUB A-TOP OF CYLINDER HEAD
TORQUE WRENC
r--- , , - .- " .
," , 4 \
DOWELS OIL TUBE CYLINDER HEAD NUT WRENCH

SUB B-TIGHTENING CYLINDER HEAD NUTS WITH TORQUE
WRENCH (41 -W-3630)
RA PD 341206
Figure 68-Cyliqder Head Installation
174
TM 9.759
58
!AMSHAFT BEARING
STUD
- . R A PD 340957
Figure 69-Camshaft Bearing Studs
14642) are used on the outer rows of studs. The center row of
nuts over which the camshaft bearings set are longer than the balance
of the nuts so as to accommodate the studs for the camshaft bear-
s. On all early production engines, do not install these long nuts
Irting
hout first removing the camshaft bearing studs from the nuts.
with engine number 9783, these cylinder head nuts are
swedged on the threads of the camshaft bearing studs, and are not
to be removed from the studs. Use cylinder head nut wrench
(41-W-866-200) to tighten the long nuts, and use wrench 41-W-866-
250) for tightening the short nuts. These wrenches are to be used
in connection with torque wrench (41-W-3630). Tighten each nut
to 60 foot-pounds tension, starting with a centrally located nut and
working alternately each way (fig. 68).
(4) INSTALL CAMSHAFT BEARING STUDS. Install a stud in each
of the eight long cylinder head nuts. This operation is not required
on later engines having the cylinder head nut swedged on the
threads of the stud as described in step (3) above.
(5) RELEASE PUSH RODS. Remove the holding tape or wire
from the push rods.
(6) INSTALL CAMSHAFT BEARINGS. The camshaft bearings and
bearing caps are numbered from 1 to 8 for each cylinder head. A
corresponding number is stamped on the cylinder head at each bear-
ing location. Place the eight bearings in position on the cylinder
head to correspond with the number stamped on the cylinder head.
Make certain that the bearings set firmly on the cylinder head.
175
TM 9.759
58
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
CAMSHAFT AND GEAR ASSEMBLY
/ _
'-'
A-INSTALLING CAMSHAFT AND GEAR ASSEMBLIES
TURNINGC, TOOL
,, I.IRPE-CION OF OT Ti,
/ '/ iNTA KE CAmSH.F:
I - / i \
EXHAUST CAMSHAFT
B-SEI7ING CAMSHAFT TIMING WITH CAMSHAFT WRENCH
(41 -W-2964-300)
RA PD 341205
Figure 70-Camshaft Gear Installation

I *YI
TM 9-759
58
GINE DESCRIPTION, DATA AND MAINTENANCE IN VEHICLE
7) INSTALL CAMSHAFTS AND GEAR ASSEMBLIES (fig. 70).

NOTE: The camshaft and gear assemblies consist of the intake and
exhaust camshafts, the camshaft gears, and the rear support. The
assemblies are right- and left-hand. and can be identified by the
markings etched on the camshafts. Place each assembly in the cam-
shaft bearings, and the rear support over the studs. Put each cam-
shaft bearing cap on the bearing carrying a corresponding number,
making sure the number on the cap is on the: same side as the
number on the bearing. Put a flat washer and self-locking nut (boot
nut) on each stud and tighten all nuts evenly so as not to spring
the camshafts as a result of the valve spring pressure. Use a torque
wrench, and tighten the nuts to 16 foot-pounds.
(8) TIME CAMSHAFTS.
(a) Time Right-hand Camshaft (fig. 72). Remove the flywheel

inspection plate on the top left side of the flywheel housing. Remove
the circular plate from the right-hand magneto (fig. 83). Turn the
engine in direction of rotation until the arrow in the window of the
distributor plate of the right-hand magneto is pointing to the terminal
to which the No. 1 spark plug wire (red wire) is attached, then con-
tinue to turn one complete engine revolution until the flywheel mark
NTAKE OPEN R.H." is at the pointer on the flywheel housing. In-
the camshaft turning wrench (41-W-2964-300) in the top of
worm gear and turn the camshafts in direction of rotation (the
arrows in figure 70 show the direction of rotation) until No. 1 intake
valve is just starting to open. The direction of rotation of the
right- and left-hand intake camshafts is the same as the direction
of rotation of the camshaft. The valve opening point can be deter-
mined by placing the thumb and forefinger on No. 1 intake valve
push rod. Turn the camshaft slowly (fig. 70) and at the same time
rotate No. 1 push rod. When the turning of the push rod becomes
difficult, it is an indication that the valve has just started to open.
With the flywheel still setting at the mark "INTAKE OPEN R.H.,"
insert the upper camshaft drive shaft (fig. 71). When inserting the
upper camshaft drive shaft, it may be necessary to try it in several
positions until the splines on each end of the shaft line up, at which
time it will drop in place freely.
(b) Recheck Timing. Turn the flywheel backward approxi-
mately 30 degrees, then turn it in the direction of rotation until the
timing mark "INTAKE OPEN R.H." (fig. 72) again appears at the
pointer. No. 1 intake valve should have just started to open. If not,
repeat the procedure outlined in step (1) above more carefully.
(c) Time Left-hand Camshafts. Turn the flywheel 300 degrees
five-sixths of a turn) in the direction of rotation until the mark
TAKE OPEN L.H." on the flywheel appears at the pointer From
177
TM 9.759
58
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
CAMSHAFT DRIVE SHAFT
A PD 2a81411
Figure 71-Inserting Camshaft Drive Shaft lUpper)
this point, the procedure for timing the left-hand camshaft is the
same as described for the right-hand camshafts. The opening of the
No. 1 intake valve is used when establishing the timing of the cam-
shafts on the left side also.
(d) Install Snap Ring. Install a snap ring in the top of each
camshaft worm gear to hold the upper camshaft drive shaft in place.
(9) INSTALL CARBURETOR ADAPTER HOUSINGS (fig. 64). Install
the carburetor adapter housings on each end of the cylinder heads,
using new gaskets (G104-15-93833). The rear housing differs from
the front in that it has two holes in the throttle plate lever. Secure each
housing to the cylinder heads with six safety nuts and flat washers.
Use box offset wrench (41-W-639-850) for tightening the nuts located
behind the heater flanges.
(10) INSTALL CARBURETOR ADAPTER HEATER PIPE (fig. 64)
NOTE: Four heater pipes are used and are connected between the
carburetor adapter housings and the exhaust manifolds. The four
pipes vary in length and shape, therefore, they must be tried in place
when selected for installation. Use a new gasket (A-244721) an.
attach the lower end of one carburetor heater pipe to the exha
manifold, using three brass nuts and flat washers. Lock the nuts wi
wire. Use a new gasket (No. G104-16-93837) and attach the upper
end of the carburetor adapter housing with cap screws, and lock the
cap screws with wire. Repeat the above procedure for the other three
carburetor heater pipes.
178
TM 9-759
s8
GINE DESCRIPTION, DATA AND MAINTENANCE IN VEHICLE
RA PD 28039
Figure 72-Flywheel Timing Marks for Camshaft Timing
(11) INSTALL CAMSHAFT HOUSINGS (fig. 62). Use new inner

gaskets (G104-15-93812) and outer gaskets (G104-15-93810) (right)
or (G104-15-93811) .(left) on the top of both cylinder heads. Place
the housing over the studs and secure it with 1/4-inch safety nuts. Use
copper washers (G104-15-93742) under all nuts on the top of the
housings, and steel flat washers under the remainder of the nuts. The
spark plugs and the spark plug wires are to be installed later, there-
fore, the spark plug covers must not be secured to the housings at this
time. CAUTION: Corks should be inserted in the spark plug holes
to prevent dirt or other foreign material from falling into the cylinders.
(12) INSTALL WATER OUTLET MANIFOLDS (fig. 62). NOTE:
The manifolds are right and left; however, it is possible to install them
- the wrong side of the engine. For proper installation, the mani-
s should tilt toward the camshaft housings. Use new gaskets
179
TM 9-759
58
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
(G104-15-93880) and secure the manifolds to the cylinder heads

with safety nuts.
(13) INSTALL SPARK PLUGS, WIRES AND CONDUIT ASSEMBLIES
(fig. 88). Insert the four spark plug wires through the hole in the
top of the camshaft housing and secure the conduit mounting flanges
to the housing with four safety nuts. This same procedure applies
for both of the assemblies. Install the spark plugs in the cylinder
head with the special wrench (41-W-3336-300). Use socket spark
plug wrench (41-W-3336-300) for tightening the spark plug wire
terminals on the spark plugs. Place the camshaft housing cover and
gasket (G104-15-93813) on the camshaft housing and install the
washers (G104-15-93742) and nuts.
(14) INSTALL FUEL PUMP (fig. 62). Attach the fuel pump over
the studs on the left-hand camshaft housing, and secure it with two
safety nuts and flat washers.
(15) INSTALL CARBURETORS (fig. 62). Place the carbure
spacers, carburetors and air intake manifold on the engine. Sec
each carburetor to the carburetor adapters with four safety nuts an
flat washers. Connect the degasser wires to the degassers.
(16) CONNECT FUEL LINES. Connect the two carburetor fuel
lines and fuel inlet line to the fuel pump.
(17) INSTALL THROTTLE ROD ASSEMBLY (fig. 92). Install the
center bracket on the studs at the top center of the right-hand cylinder
head and secure it to the cylinder head with two safety nuts. Both
throttle rods which attach to the throttle plate arm of the carburetors
must be adjusted to 165s, inches long (measure from the center of the
ball to the center of the pin hole at the other end of the rod). Attach
the ball joint stud to the carburetor arm and lock the ball stud with
a lock nut. Attach the other end of the rods to the arm at the center
bracket with a clevis pin. Secure the clevis pins with cotter pins.
Hook the spring as shown in figure 92.
(18) INSTALL GOVERNOR (fig. 64). Use a new gasket on the
mounting flange of the governor and place the governor over the
studs at the rear end of the right camshaft housing. (It may be neces-
sary to turn the governor shaft slightly in order to line up the splines
on the shaft with the splines in the camshaft.) Secure the governor
to the housing with six safety nuts and flat washers. Adjust the con-
necting link between the governor arm and the arm on the carid
retor adapter so the throttle plates are wide open when the engi1
it at a standstill. Attach the link to the throttle plate arm and the
governor arm and lock the ball joints with cotter pins. Adjust the
length of the engine speed governor throttle rod (fig. 92) so that
the throttle arms in both the front and rear adapters are against the
180
TM 9.759
58-59
v s. After the proper length is attained, connect the rods to the

swith clevis pins and secure with cotter pins.
(19) INSTALL TACHOMETER DRIVE UNIT (fig. 64). If the tach-
ometer drive unit was removed from the camshaft cover, use a new
gasket and install the assembly over the studs at the rear end of the
left-hand camshaft housing. (It may be necessary to turn the tach-
ometer shaft slightly s6'the splines on the quill will engage with the
splines in the end of the camshaft.) Secure the tachometer drive as-
sembly to the housing with four safety nuts.
(20) INSTALL EXPANSION TANK (fig. 77). Position the expan-
sion tank on the bulkhead and install the four cap screws and lock
washers.
(21) INSTALL HOSE (fig. 77). Install the hose that connects the
water manifolds and radiator and tighten the hose clamps. Install
the hose that connects the water manifolds and expansion tank and
tighten the hose clamps.
(22) INSTALL JUNCTION Box (fig. 77). If the junction box was
removed from the left-hand camshaft cover, secure it to the cover with
four safety nuts. Connect the small conduit bracket at the top under
side of the box with two screws. Connect the two large conduits to the
junction box.
b
23) FINAL STEPS (fig. 64). Install the drain plug and lock
we in the water pump. Install the coolant in the cooling system.
Make sure the expansion tank cap gasket No. A-248397 is present and
is not damaged. Install the cap. Remove the oil filler pipe cap No.
A-296548 and install the specified grade of oil. Replace the cap. Close
the engine compartment rear door and install the three cap screws.
Install the engine compartment floor plate (par. 64 p). Install the
engine compartment front cover. Close and fasten the engine com-
partment doors.
59. OIL PAN.

a. Description (fig. 73). The engine oil pan is an aluminum
casting and the assembly includes an oil screen secured to the bottom
of the pan, an oil pressure regulator, and an oil relief valve, all of
which are accessible only when the pan is removed from the engine.
Two oil baffles are provided in the oil pan to hold the oil at the bot-
tom of the pan when the vehicle is operated on steep inclines. A
disk-type oil filter (hydraulically operated by means of the engine oil
pressure) is located in the oil pan. The filter is accessible for removal
from the outside of the pan.
lb. Removal.
(1) PRELIMINARY STEPS. Remove the engine compartment floor
bate (par. 63 d). Open the engine compartment rear door
181
TM 9.759
59
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
OIL RELIEF VALVE-_
OIL PRESSURE
REGULATOR VALVE
'~/ , .tOIL
SCREEN
ASSEMBLY
jl '
'.-.."..~ ~ iRA PD 2785;
Figure 73-Engine Oil Pan Assembly
CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL -,
RA PD 28143
Figure 74--Crankshaft Oil Seal

182
TM 9.759
59.60
. 63 c). Place a pan with an 8-gallon capacity or better under the

pan drain plug and remove the plug (G104-17-40482).
(2) REMOVE OIL PUMP (fig. 64). Remove the four nuts holding
the oil pump to the oil pan and remove the pump. It may be necessary
to tap the body of the pump lightly to release it from the gasket
and the driving quill. .,
(3) REMOVE OIL PAN. Remove the 28 nuts'holding the pan to
the cylinder block and remove the pan. Remove the gasket and
crankshaft oil seal.
c. Installation.
(1) INSTALL CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL (fig. 74). The crankshaft
oil seal included in oil pan gasket set (A-414701) must be soaked in
engine oil for approximately two hours before installation. Press
the seal firmly into the groove in the oil pan. The ends of the seal
must extend above the machined surface of the oil pan on equal
height on each side as shown in figure 74.
(2) INSTALL OIL PAN (fig. 63). Insert a rubber seal (G104-17-
82946) on the oil tube. Place the oil pan gaskets in position on the
cylinder block. Install the oil pan and secure it to the cylinder
iLock with 28 safety nuts with flat washers.
3) INSTALL OIL PUMP (fig. 64). Use a new gasket and place
pump over the studs. The engine may have to be turned over
slowly so the spline on the pump shaft will line up with the splines
in the accessory gear worm gear shaft. Secure the pump to the oil
pan with four safety nuts.
(4) FINAL STEPS. With the oil pan drain plug gasket (G-104-15-
93843) in place on the plug, install and tighten the oil pan drain
plug. Install 8 gallons of specified grade oil. Install the engine com-
partment floor .plate (par. 64 p). Close the engine compartment
rear door (par. 64 q).
60. OIL PLIMP.

a. Description (fig. 64). The oil pump is a gear-type pump,
mounted at the rear of the oil pan. It is driven by the lower cam-
shaft worm gears by means of a splined quill connecting the pump
shaft with the left-hand worm gear.
b. Removal. Remove the engine compartment floor plate
(par. 63 d). Place a pan with at least an 8-gallon capacity under
the oil pan drain plug, and remove the plug. Remove the four nuts
holding the oil pump to the oil pan, and remove the pump. It may
be necessary to tap the body of the pump lightly to release it from
sIe gasket and the driving quill.
183
TM 9.759
60-61
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
c. Installation. Use a new gasket, and place the pump over the
studs. The engine may have to be turned over slowly so that the
splines on the pump shaft will line up with the splines in the acces-
sory gear worm gear shaft. Secure the pump to the oil pan with
four safety nuts. Install the engine compartment floor plate (par.
64 p). Install 8 gallons of the specified grade oil.
61. OIL FILTER.

a. Description (fig. 75). The oil filter consists of a stack of
wheel-shaped disks, separated from each other by spoked spacer
pieces, and is mounted on a rotatable spindle. Located adjacent to
this stack of disks and spacers is a stack of cleaner blades mounted
on a rod in such manner that each cleaner blade enters the space
between adjacent disks. Solids, too large to pass between the disks,
remain on the outer surface until such time as the disks are rotated
past the cleaner blades. Accumulated solids are removed from the
surface by the combing action of the cleaner blades, and collect
MANUAL TURNING NUT
MANUAL TURNING NUT REVERSED
RA P. 329512
Figure 75--il Filter

184
TM 9-759
IGINE 61
DESCRIPTION, DATA AND MAINTENANCE IN VEHICLE
sump around the filter. The filter disks are rotated by a hydraulic
motor operated by oil pressure from the engine. The oil filter is
located on the right side of the oil pan at the rear, accessible
through the engine compartment rear door.
h. Operation Check. To check the operation of the filter,
remove the manual turning nut, turn end for end, and 'reinstall on
the shaft from which it was removed (fig. 75). Run the engine at
speed which shows an oil pressure of approximately 30 pounds. The
manual turning nut will rotate very slowly if the filter is operating.
Mark the nut and check position of this mark, after the engine has
been running for 5 minutes, to see if it has rotated. After the check
is made, reinstall the manual turning nut in the original position,
and secure it with lock wire. If the filter nut fails to turn, remove
the unit from the engine for examination or replacement.
c. Removal (fig. 75). Remove the engine compartment floor
plate (par. 63 (d). Remove the six nuts from the mounting flange
of the oil filter, and remove the oil filter (G104-15-82930) from the
engine oil pan.
<l. Installation. Use a new oil filter gasket (G104-15-93840)
and set it in place so that the oil hole in the gasket lines up with
the drilled oil hole in the oil pan. Insert the oil filter in the opening
COVER
FILTER
BREATHER
TIMING SLOT O 2539

'# 1 .... RA PD 27539
Figure 76--Crankcase Breather

185
TM 9.759
61-63
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
provided in the oil pan. Secure the filter to the oil pan withq
safety nuts. Install the engine compartment floor plate (par. 64 p).
62. CRANKCASE BREATHER.

a. Description (fig. 76). The crankcase breather is located
directly above the water pump, accessible either from above or
through the engine compartment rear door.
b. Service Filter Element (fig. 76). To remove the filter ele-
ment (B-258269) for cleaning, release the two holding clips, and
lift off the cover. Lift off the filter element. The filter should be
cleaned by washing it in dry-cleaning solvent. Blow out with com-
pressed air, and when dry, dip in seasonal grade engine oil. Reinstall
the filter element and the cover.
Section XV
ENGINE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
63. REMOVAL.
a. Turn Battery Master Switch Off. j
b. Remove Covers From Engine Compartment. Raise b
engine compartment doors. Remove the seven cap screws which
hold the rear cover plate to the top of the hull, and lift it from the
hull with a chain fall or hoist. Remove the 10 cap screws which
hold the front cover to the top of the hull and lift the cover from
the hull.
c. Open Rear Door of the Engine Compartment. Remove the
three cap screws which hold the door closed, and open the door.
Raise the radiator air baffle, and latch it in raised position. If the
vehicle is not equipped with an air baffle latch, raise the air baffle,
then open the door and leave the air baffle rest on the door.
d. Remove Engine Compartment Floor Plate. Remove the
lock wires from the cap screw heads which hold the floor plate to
the hull. Remove the cap screws, leaving one at each corner of the
floor plate. Place a jack at the center of the plate, and remove the
remaining cap screws, then lower the floor plate with a jack.
e. Drain Cooling System (fig. 78). Remove the drain plug at
the bottom of the water pump and drain the cooling system.
f. Drain Engine Oil. Remove the drain plug at the bottom of
the engine oil pan, and drain the oil (a container holding 8 gallons
or more is required).
186
TM 9.759
63
In
uj z
o V
U ac o zt I_
rrw
C 0. _ V.z
zu U~ ;Y 3 <3< ° oZ u
Ck. 8,. < 0
<a~~~~~ <~~~~o
.0
X = * < - < z U U Z Z'
:'
187
0 wo
TM 9.759
63
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
WATER PUMP WATER PUMP HOSE ACCESSORY DRIVE UNIVERSAL J.
ENGINE OIL BAYONET GAGE /Oi11 FILTER OIL FILLER C

DRAIN PLUG OIL FILLER PIPE
RA PD 329220
Figure 78-Early Engine Viewed Through Rear Door
g. Remove Oil Filler Pipe (fig. 78). If the oil filler pipe is
located at the rear of the engine, remove the three nuts which hold
the oil filler pipe to the engine cil pan. Remove the filler pipe.
h. Remove W'ater Pump and Radiator Expansion Tank.
Remove the four nuts that secure the water pump to the engine.
Disconnect the water pump hose from the water pump. Remove
the water pump. Remove the cooling system expansion tank and
hose. Remove miscellaneous electrical connections. Loosen the
two knurled nuts at the two conduits leading to the junction box
at the left side of the engine (fig. 77). Pull the two conduit plugs
out of the sockets. Disconnect the temperature gage wires at the
upper connection at the radiator end. Disconnect the cranking motor
cable at the cranking motor. Disconnect the oil pressure gage con-
nection at the right rear end of the engine oil pan. Disconnect the
ground wire (running from each magneto to the ignition switch) at
each magneto, then with two short lengths of wire, ground thgo
188
TM 9.759
63
Wminal of each magneto to the cover retainer screws. This will

prevent the possibility of the engine starting in the event it is turned
over. Disconnect the wire from the oil float level gage (engine unit)
at the right-hand side of the oil pan if vehicle is equipped with engine
oil level gage.
i. Remove Inlet-:'Iand' Outlet Connections From Radiator
(fig. 77). Loosen the clamps and remove the two top radiator hose.
Remove the four cap screws from the radiator upper and lower water
connections. Remove the connections, including the thermostat and
gasket.
j. Remove Fan Belts (fig. 77). Loosen the four bolts securing
each accessory drive housing to the hull. Raise the housings to
provide slack for the belts, and remove the belts.
k. Remove Fan and Shroud Assemblies and Accessory Shafts
(fig. 77). Remove the six bolts holding each fan shroud in place.
Remove the fan and shroud assembly from the engine compartment.
Remove the four bolts from the flange of the universal joint at each
end of the accessory drive shaft. Remove the accessory shafts.
i. Dis'connect Fire Extinguisher Nozzles. Remove the pipe
OInections from the upper fire extinguisher nozzle on the right- and
-hand sides of the engine compartment. Remove the two cap
ews from each fire extinguisher nozzle bracket. Remove the nozzle
and brackets.
m. Disconnect Fuel and Primer Lines. Turn off all of the fuel
shut-off valves (figs. 9 and 10). Disconnect the fuel line from the
fuel pump. Disconnect the primer line at the left side of the
bulkhead.
n. Disconnect Throttle Rod. Disconnect and remove the
throttle control rod running from the throttle cross shaft on the
bulkhead to the throttle control bracket in the center of the engine.
o. Remove Air Cleaners and Tubes. Remove the two air
cleaners and tubes (par. 76 h). If the air cleaners are located in
the fighting compartment, do not remove them, just remove the air
cleaner tubes.
p. Disconnect Rear Universal Joint and Clutch Throw-out
Clevis. Remove the canvas cover and the eight bolts which connect
the universal joint to the clutch shaft flange. Remove the clevis pin
from the clutch release arm.
q. Remove Exhaust Pipes and Disconnect Engine Mounts
om Support Brackets. Remove the six bolts that secure the
aust pipes to the exhaust manifolds on each side of the engine.
35541sv0no .To189
TM 9-759
63-64
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
Remove the exhaust pipes. Remove the four bolts from both
gine rear support brackets, and the two rear bolts from both en
front support brackets. Remove the plates from the clutch housing
cover which are directly in front of the engine front support brackets,
then remove the two front bolts from both support brackets (fig. 80).
r. Remove Engine From Hull. (fig. 79). Attach an engine sling
(41-S-3831) to'the four lifting eyes on the engine (fig. 79). Remove
the engine from the hull with a chain fall or hoist. Figure 4 shows
adjustable lifting sling, and the position of the engine for removal. It
will be necessary to adjust the sling to tilt the engine to obtain a
clearance at the clutch housing and magnetos. After the engine is
removed, make sure that both magnetos are grounded, to eliminate
the possibility of the engine starting if it should be turned over while
out of the vehicle.
s. Remove Exhaust Pipes From Rear of Hull. Remove the
five bolts from both the external exhaust pipes on the rear of the
hull, and remove the exhaust pipes.
64. INSTALLATION.
a. Set Engine in Hull. If a new or replacement engine is to
be installed, the water pump assembly and the oil filler pipe
to be removed from the engine before attempting the installam
Remove the short lengths of wire from each magneto ground.
tach the engine lifting sling (41-S-3831) to the four lifting eyes on
the engine (fig. 78). Attach a chain fall or hoist, raise the engine,
and adjust the lifting sling to tilt the engine to approximately the
angle shown in figure 79. Enter the engine into the hull with the front
end pointing to the left-hand front corner of the engine compartment.
Lower the engine into place, adjusting the lifting sling as necessary
to obtain clearance at the clutch housing and magnetos. Line up
the bolt holes in the engine mounts and supports.
h. Install Exhaust Pipes and Connect Engine Mounts. Using
new bolts and gaskets, assemble the exhaust pipe to the exhaust
manifold on each side of the engine. Using new packing, install the
five bolts securing each external exhaust pipe to the rear of the
hull. Install the four bolts securing the engine mounts to both the
engine rear support brackets, and the two rear bolts in both engine
front support brackets. Install the two front bolts in both front
support brackets, working through the opening in the clutch hous-
ing cover on the bulkhead in the fighting compartment (fig. 80).
c. Connect Rear Universal Joint and Clutch Throw-out Clevis.
Install the eight bolts which connect the universal joint to the clutch
shaft flange. Install the clevis pin which connects the clutch rea
190
TM 9.759
64
ENGINE LIFTING SLING

4\- _| USE CRANK TO
fAn~ ~TILT ENGINE
LIFTING EYES RA PD 329514
Figure 79-Engine Lifting Sling

arm to the clutch release clevis. Adjust the clutch (par. 110). In-
stall the canvas around the clutch housing.
d. Install Air Cleaners. If the air cleaners were removed, in-
stall the two air cleaners and tubes (par. 76 b).
e. Connect Throttle Rod. Connect the throttle rod which runs
from the throttle cross shaft on the bulkhead to the throttle control
bracket at the center of the engine. Adjust the linkage (par. 77 b),
if required.
f. Connect Fuel and Primer Lines. Connect the fuel line to the
fuel pump. Connect the primer line at the left side of the forward
,arburetor, and the primer lines running to each intake manifold.
191
TM 9.759
64
TANK, MEDIUM, M IA3
STORAGE COMPARTMENT PROPELLER SHAFT COLLECTOR FILLER PL *

HINGED DOORS FRONT COVER RING COVER PLATE
g . Cner. I nl th
g. Connect Fire Extin isher Nozzle. Install the upper fire
extinguisher nozzles and brackets on both sides of the engine com-

partment. Connect the fire extinguisher pipes to the nozzles.
h. Install Fan and Shroud Assemblies and Accessory Shafts
19RA
(fig. 77). Place fan and shroud assemblies in position PDin 329252
front of
the radiator. Place a new felt gasket between shroud and holding
plate. Place a rubber bushing and collar in the mounting holes and
install six bolts, securing each fan shroud to the hull plate. Place the
right and left accessory drive shaft in position, and install the four
bolts in the flanges of the universal joint at each end of the accessory
drive shafts.
192
TM 9.759
64
a.· Install Fan Belts. Loosen the four bolts securing each acces-
sory drive housing to the hull. Raise the housings to provide slack
for the belts. Install the belts and adjust them to the proper
tension (par. 86 b).
j. Install Inlet and Outlet Connections to Radiator (fig. 77).
Install the radiator upper and lower water connections including
the thermostat and gaskets on the radiator. Install the two top radi-
ator hose, and tighten the clamps.
k. Connect Miscellaneous Electrical Connections. Connect
the oil pressure gage connection at the right rear end of the engine
oil pan. Connect the cranking motor cable to the cranking motor.
Install the two conduits to the junction box on the left side of the
engine. Connect the temperature gage and oil signal wires to the
engine units. If equipped with engine oil level gage, connect the
wire to the gage engine unit located on the right-hand side of the
engine oil pan.
i. Install Water Pump and Radiator Expansion Tank. Install
the water pump with gaskets on the four studs on the engine, and
secure it with four fiber insert nuts. Install the two hose running
-m the water pump to the radiator lower water connection, and
Wlten the hose clamps. Install the expansion tank (par. 89 c).
m. Fill Cooling System. Install the drain plug in the water
pump (fig. 78), and fill the cooling system to the level of the pet-
cock in the radiator upper water connection (fig. 99).
n. Install Oil Filler Pipe. Install the oil filler pipe, and secure
it with three fiber insert nuts.
o. Fill Engine Oil Fan With Oil. Flush out engines which have
been rebuilt. Fill the oil pan with 6 or 8 gallons of SAE 10 engine
oil. Run the engine for 15 minutes at 1,000 revolutions per minute,
then drain the SAE 10 oil (flushing oil) from the oil pan, and install
the drain plug in the oil pan. Remove the oil filter from the oil pan,
and clean the filter element by washing it in dry-cleaning solvent.
Turn the element by means of the manual turning nut, while clean-
ing, until all foreign material has been :emoved. When thoroughly
clean, allow to dry. NOTE: Do not blow compressed air on the ele-
ment. Reinstall the filter in the oil pan and refill with 8 gallons of
seasonal grade engine oil.
p. Install Engine Floor Plate. Place a jack at the center of
the floor plate, and raise the plate against the bottom of the hull.
stall a cap screw at each corner of the plate. Remove the jack,
tall the remaining cap screws, and secure with locking wir-_.
193
TM 9.759
64
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3 C
q. Close and Fasten Rear Door of Engine Compartm

Raise the air baffle, and close the engine compartment rear door.
Install and tighten the three cap screws securing the door to the
rear of the hull.
r. Set Carburetor Adjustment.

(1) IDLE FUEL ADJUSTMENT. As shown in figure 89, idle fuel
adjustments are provided on each carburetor. The idle fuel ad-
justments on these carburetors are extremely uniform, and can be
adjusted with the engine hot or cold. Make the adjustment with
the engine stopped. Turn each idle adjusting screw clockwise until
it seats lightly, then turn out one-quarter turn from its closed
position. A short (stub) screwdriver will be required for making
this adjustment on the forward carburetor.
(2) IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT (fig. 89). Start engine and allow
it to run until it reaches normal operating temperature (135 ° F). On
the 75-mm dry stowage vehicles, back off the idle speed adjustment
at each carburetor until the engine speed is below 500 revolutions
per minute. Set the idle speed adjustment at one of the carburetors
until the engine speed is 500 revolutions per minute. Set the idle
speed adjustment at the other carburetor until the speed just star
to increase, then back off the adjustment slightly.
s. Adjust Throttle Linkage.

( 1) HAND THROTTLE. Check the hand throttle button free move-
ment, and adjust if required. The hand throttle must have '/s-inch
free movement before the carburetor throttle plates start to open.
Loosen the two bolts which hold the cover over the throttle cross
shaft, and remove the cover. Remove the clevis pin from the hand
brake clevis on the rear of the hand brake rod, and adjust the clevis
so that the throttle button has approximately 1/s-inch free movement.
Install the clevis pin in the brake rod clevis.
(2) FOOT THROTTLE. The foot throttle pedal must also have a
slight free movement before the carburetor throttle plates start to
open. If not, adjust the foot throttle and the throttle linkage on the
engine as outlined in paragraph 77.
t. Check Instruments and Gages. Start the engine and run it at
various speeds, observing all instruments and gages on the instrument
panel. If any of the gages or instruments show an abnormal read-
ing, the cause must be determined and the condition corrected.
u. Check Engine for Water and Oil Leaks. With the engine
running, check all water connections for leaks. Inspect all engi
gaskets for external water or oil leaks.
194 _
TM 9.759
64-65
IGNITION SYSTEM
Drive Vehicle. Drive the vehicle, and observe clutch action.

ust the clutch if necessary (par. 110). Observe the engine per-
formance in general.
w. Set Governor (fig. 64). Start the engine and run it until it
reaches normal operating temperature (135 ° F). Increase the
speed of the engine, and adjust the throttle governor to control top
speed of the engine at :2,800 revolutions per minute without load.
Turn the adjusting nut on the governor clockwise to increase the
speed, or counterclockwise to decrease the speed. After the proper
adjustment has been obtained, place a seal on the adjustment nut.
x. Install Covers on Engine Compartment (fig. 24). With a
chain or hoist, place the front cover on the engine compartment,
and install the cap screws. With a chain fall or hoist, place the
rear cover in position, and install the cap screws while the doors
are open. Close and fasten the engine compartment doors.
Section XVI
IGNITION SYSTEM
65. DESCRIPTION AND DATA.
li. Description. The ignition system consists of two magnetos,
raft-type spark plugs, and the necessary connecting high-tension
wires. The ignition is turned off when the magnetos are grounded
by means of the ignition switch on the instrument panel If at any
time the ground wires running from the magnetos to the ignition
switch were broken, the ignition could not be turned off with the
ignition switch. On the other hand, if these wires become shorted,
it would be impossible to turn the ignition on with the ignition
switch. The numbering of the cylinders and the firing order are
shown in figure 33.
b. Data.
Magneto:
Make Bosch
Model:
Right-hand .... MJF4A-308, MJF4B-314
or MJF4B-316
Left-hand MJF4A-307, MJF4B-311
or MJF4B-315
Breaker point gap 0.014 to 0.016 in.
Direction of rotation:
Right-hand rotor .. .. ... Clockwise
Left-hand rotor ... Counterclockwise
Rotor speed .1/2 crankshaft speed
_W~~~~ ~~195
TM 9-759
65-66
TANK, MEDIUM, IW4A3
Numbering of cylinders from rear to front: K

Right bank .. 1-2-
Left bank . . .... ........ . ...... .... .1-2-34
Firing order ...... ..... ... 1R, 2L, 3R, 1L, 4R, 3L, 2R, 4L
Spark advance (range 600 to 1,400 rpm) ........... Automatic
Spark plugs (type) .... Champion C88-S
Spark plug gap:
Manufacturing limit . 0.011 to 0.014 in.
Service maximum limit . ............ 0.030 in.
66. MAGNETOS.
a. Description. Two magnetos (C-124412-B) (left) and
(C-124412-A) (right) are used, one firing the cylinders in the right
bank, and the other firing the cylinders in the left bank. Right and
left throughout this book is determined when looking at the engine
from the rear of the vehicle, looking toward the front. The automatic
spark advance governor is a part of the engine and is not a part of
the magnetos. One governor assembly advances the spark of both
magnetos together.
b. Magneto Replacement.
(1) PRELIMINARY INSTRUCTIONS. Before removing either
neto, observe the position of the rotor arrow in the center of
distributor plate (fig. 83). If the engine has not been cranked d
ing the time the magnetos are off the engine, the replacement
magneto is installed with its arrow pointing in this same direction.
Then the only ignition timing required will be to adjust the magnetos
by means of the adjusting slots in the magneto mounting flange as
outlined in paragraph 67 c. If the engine has been cranked while the
magnetos are off the engine and the timing is lost, a major timing
adjustment will be required (par. 67 d).
(2) OPEN ENGINE COMPARTMENT DOORS. Open the doors over
the engine compartment. Open the engine compartment rear door.
(3) REMOVAL (EITHER MAGNETO). Remove the four screws
securing the breaker point inspection cover, and remove the cover.
Remove the four screws securing the magneto circular plate and
remove the plate. Remove the ground wire terminal screw. Un-
screw the hexagon nut securing the ground wire conduit to the mag-
neto housing. Remove the ground wire and conduit from the
magneto. Remove the four screws securing the four ignition (high-
tension) wires to the magneto distributor plate and lift the wire
terminals out of the recesses. Unscrew the knurled nut securing the
ignition wire conduit to the magneto, and remove the conduit and
wires from the magneto. Remove the lock wire and upper
196
TM 9.759
66
IGNITION SYSTEM
O er nuts securing the magneto to the engine and remove the

magneto.
(4) INSTALLATION (EITHER MAGNETO). If the engine has not
been turned over while the magnetos were removed, the magnetos
must be installed with the rotor arrow (fig. 83) pointing to the same
terminal as when removed. If the engine has been turned while the
magnetos are off the engine, proceed as outlined in paragraph 67
following. Place a new gasket (G104-15-93816) and the magneto in
position and enter the groove in the magneto drive flange over the
tang on the magneto drive shaft flange. Shift the magneto so that
the studs are in the center of the adjusting slots of the magneto
mounting flange. Install the upper and lower nuts to secure' the
magneto to the engine. Install the ignition wire conduit to the
magneto and connect the four ignition wires to the proper terminals
(fig. 83). Attach the ground wire conduit to the magneto and the
ground wire to the magneto ground wire terminal. Install the
circular plate and the breaker point inspection cover. Check the
timing as outlined in paragraph 67. and shift the magneto in the
adjusting slots if necessary.
. c. Breaker Point Replacement.

1) REMOVAL. Remove the magneto as outlined in subpara-
h hI above. Remove the four screws and lock washers from the
aker inspection plate (lower plate), and remove the plate and
gasket. Disconnect the ground wire from the breaker cap. Re-
move the two screws and lock washers that secure the breaker cap
to the distributor plate, and remove the breaker cap and gasket.
Remove the cap screw and lock washer that hold the breaker arm
spring to the breaker plate. Remove the cotter pin and flat washer
that hold the breaker arm to the breaker plate. Lift the breaker
arm off the breaker plate. Remove the adjustable bracket lock
screw (fig. 84) from the breaker point bracket assembly. Lift the
breaker point bracket assembly from the breaker plate.
(2) INSTALLATION. Slip the breaker point bracket assembly
(fig. 83) into the slots in the breaker plate provided for it. When
the holes are alined, fasten to the breaker plate with a screw and
lock washer (fig. 84), making sure the grounding wire is also fastened
with the screw to the plate. Screw the breaker spring screw and lock
washer (fig. 84) part way into the breaker lever, holding bracket
with an open-end wrench. Apply a liberal film of engine oil on the
breaker arm stud, and slip the breaker arm (fig. 84) over it. Place
the spring attached to the arm behind the breaker arm bracket, so
that the slot in the spring fits over the breaker arm spring fastening
screw. This item was previously screwed part way into the breaker
holding bracket. At this time the contact point of the breaker
197
TM 9-759
66-67
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
arm should be flush against the contact point in the breaker O

bracket. Slip the washer over post and fasten with cotter pin.
Adjust the breaker points as outlined in step (3) below. Place a
new gasket and the breaker cap on the distributor plate and secure
them to the distributor plate with two screws and lock washers.
Connect the ground wire to the breaker cap. Install the breaker
inspection plate and gasket on the magneto housing. Install the
magneto as outlined in subparagraph l) above.
(3) BREAKER POINT ADJUSTMENT. The magnetos must be re-
moved from the engine before attempting to adjust the breaker points.
Breaker points are adjusted to an opening of from 0.014 to 0.018 inch
when the breaker arm fiber rubbing block rests on the high point
of the cam. Adjust the breaker point bracket (fig. 83) by means of
the eccentric adjusting screw (fig. 84) until the correct gap is obtained.
Lock the bracket with the adjustable bracket lock screw (fig. 84).
Contact points must be free from oil and grease and in proper aline-
ment, so that the surfaces of both contacts meet squarely.
67. IGNITION TIMING( AND SPARK ADVANCE GOVERNOR.

a. Flywheel Timing Mark Data. The flywheel marks on
present production engines are 10 degrees before top dead cen _
mark, and are stamped "SPARK SETTING R.H." for setting
timing on the right-hand cylinders, and "SPARK SETTING L.W
for the left-hand cylinders (fig. 85). Early production engine timing
marks are only 5 degrees before the top dead center mark, and are
stamped "SPARK RETARD R.H.' for setting the timing on the
right-hand cylinders, and "SPARK RETARD L.H." for the left-hand
cylinders. When setting the spark timing on early-production en-
gines, the timing should be set 5 degrees in advance of the "SPARK
RETARD" mark. Measure 7/8 inch ahead of these marks (equivalent
to 5 degrees) and scribe a mark on the flywheel. After this line
has been scribed on the flywheel, ignore the marking "SPARK
RETARD," and set the flywheel with the scribed mark at the
pointer when timing engines with the early-type flywheel mark-
ings. In the following instructions, this scribed line will be con-
sidered as the "SPARK SETTING" mark on these early engines.
h. Procedure for Checking Tiniing and Governor Advance.

(1) PRELIMINARY STEPS. Open the doors over the engine com-
partment. Remove the four screws from the flywheel inspection
plate on the top left side of the flywheel housing, and remove the
plate. Make certain the ignition switch is off, then turn the engine
by hand (fig. 81) until one of the "SPARK SETTING" timing marks
is opposite the timing pointer in the opening in the flywheel hous
O
198 W
TM 9-759
67
IGNITION SYSTEM
ACCESSORY SHAFT UNIVERSAL JOINT
.- as '
TURNING BAR RA PD 329240
Figure 81-Turning Engine by Hand
from which the plate has been removed (fig. 85). Draw a line
across the face of the flywheel at this mark with chalk. Turn the
engine until the other "SPARK SETTING" timing mark appears,
and draw a line at this mark with chalk. NOTE: See instructions
about earlier-type engines in regard to timing mark.
(2) CONNECT TIMING LIGHT. Remove the nuts from the spark
plug covers on each side of the engine, and remove the covers. Re-
move the spark plug wire from No, 1 spark plug in the right bank
to check right-hand magneto (use No. 1 spark plug in the left-
hand bank to check the left-hand magneto). To a short piece of
high-tension wire, attach the connector and terminal as shown
figure 86. Insert this wire in No. 1 spark plug. Attach the high-
199
TM 9.759
67
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
OPENING IN FLYWHEEL HOUSING

I SPARK SETTING MARK R. H.
NEON TYPE TIMING LIGHT

RA PD 330845
Figure 82-Timing Light (41-L-14401
tension lead (large wire) of the timing light to the terminal of N

spark plug wire, and also to the connector of the short piece of wire
just inserted in the spark plug. Connect one end of a 12-foot length
of insulated wire to any terminal or battery post where 24 volts are
available, attach the other end to the positive (red) low-tension
lead of the timing light. Connect the other low-tension lead to any
convenient ground.
(3) USE OF TIMING LIGHT. Start the engine, and allow it to
warm up. Set the engine idling speed at approximately 500 revolu-
tions per minute. Hold the timing light over the opening in the
flywheel housing so that it can flash on the chalked timing marks
(fig. 82). If the chalked "SPARK SETTING" mark on the fly-
wheel appears at the left of the pointer, the timing is advanced.
If the mark appears to the right of the pointer, the timing is re-
tarded. If adjustment is required to correct the timing, refer to
step (4) below. Repeat the above procedure for the other magneto.
(4) CHECK MAGNETO SPARK ADVANCE. With the timing light
still connected, start the engine, increase its speed, and observe the
mark on the flywheel. The governor will start to advance the
spark when the engine speed reaches 600 revolutions per minute,
and the spark will be fully advanced when the engine speed reach
200
TM 9-759
67
IGNITION SYSTEM
53 z
X .. -~ z :-5 z0 0 < :E
0 zo
0. . a .. 0
0
0
FRAUZ~~ <w
z 4.
-IC
zz
u 3 > 0
o
CK C
X o M
-: 5 3: *:
201a
201
TM 9.759
67
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
ADJUSTABLE BRACKET LOCK SCREW BREAKER ON HIGH POINT OF CAM
ECCENTRIC ADJUSTING SCREW/ 0016 INCH
CAP SCREW HOLDING LOWER TIMING SLOT

BREAKER ARM SPRING REMOVE TO LIFT OFF BREAKER ARM
RA PD 329601 _
Figure 84-Magneto Breaker Point Assemby

1,400 revolutions per minute. The chalked timing mark should
move to the left of the pointer as the speed of the engine increases,
until the spark timing reaches maximum advance, at which time the
chalked flywheel mark will be approximately 25/8 inches to the left
of the pointer. If the timing mark does not change its position
in relation to the pointer when the engine speed is increased, the
spark governor is faulty, and should be replaced. Notify higher
authority.
c. Minor Timing Adjustment. Remove the lock wire and
loosen the upper and lower holding nuts on one magneto. Move
the magneto in the adjusting slots toward the front (flywheel end
of the engine) to advance the timing or toward the rear to retard the
timing. Recheck the timing with the timing light as outlined in step
(4) above. After the correct timing has been obtained, tighten
the magneto holding nuts and secure them with locking wire.
Follow the same procedure in adjusting the timing on the other
magneto. Connect the wires to the spark plugs and install the
spark plug cover plates. If the correct timing cannot be obtained
in the range provided at adjusting slots on the magnetos, it will
be necessary to reset the timing by resetting the magneto dri
shaft (subpar. d below).
202
TM 9-759
67
IGNITION SYSTEM
SPARK SETTING
INTAKE OPEN R.H.
RA PD 28184
Figure 85-Flywheel Timing Marks
d. Major Timing .Adjustment.

(1) GENERAL. A major timing adjustment consists of resetting
the magneto drive shaft and is required when the correct timing
cannot be obtained by the range provided by the adjusting slots in
the magneto mounting flange.
(2) SET ENGINE FLYWHEEL MARK AT POINTER. Turn the en-
gine in direction of rotation until the No. 1 piston on the right-
hand side is on its compression stroke (use a compression gage in
No. 1 cylinder spark plug hole to determine the compression stroke)
and the "SPARK SETTING R.H." mark or the scribed mark
(subpar. h1 (1) above) on the flywheel is at the pointer (fig. 85).
(3) SET TIMING. Remove the left-hand magneto (par. 66).
Loosen the two nuts (do not remove the nuts) which secure the
right-hand magneto to the engine. Loosen the nut which secures
the left-hand drive flange (C, fig. 87) on the magneto drive shaft
d separate the drive flange from the serrations on the magneto
203
TM 9-759
67
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
TERMINAL CONNECTOR
HIGH-TENSION WIRE
TIMING LIGHT
HIGH TENSION WIRE
SPARK PLUG CAP
-SPARK PLUG
NO. I SPARK PLUG WIRE
RA POD2804
Figure 86-Timing Light Connections
drive gear (D, fig. 87). Remove the magneto drive gear inspecti
cover and gasket. Remove the circular cover and the breaW
cover from each magneto. Turn the right-hand magneto by mead
of the driving flange on the left end of the shaft until the arrow
in the rotor window (fig. 83) points to the terminal to which
No. 1 red wire is attached. NOTE: A lobe of the breaker cam
will be approaching the rubbing block on the breaker arm when
the magneto is set in this position. Also note the arrow showing
the direction of the breaker cam as shown in figure 83. Separate
the breaker points in the right-hand magneto and place a narrow
strip of cellophane between the points. Turn the magneto back-
ward slightly to make sure the points are closed. Exert a slight
pull on the cellophane with the fingers while the magneto is being
turned slowly in direction of rotation. The cellophane will release
the instant the points start to separate. The nut securing the
left-hand driving flange (C, fig. 87) to the magneto drive shaft
(H, fig. 87) must then be tightened while the magneto is setting in
this position.
(4) RECHECK TIMING OF THE RIGHT-HAND MAGNETO. Again
place a strip of cellophane between the points on the right-hand
magneto. Turn the flywheel backward approximately one-quarter
of a revolution, then turn it in direction of rotation until the cello-
204 l
TM 9.759
67
IGNITION SYSTEM
* B C D E F
IG I
A-NUT E-GASKETS
B-WASHER F-INSPECTION COVER
C-MAGNETO DRIVE FLANGE G-KEY
D--MAGNETO DRIVE GEAR H-MAGNETO DRIVE SHAFT
RA PD 28183
Figure 87-Magneto Driven Gear and Magneto Drive Shaft

Disassembled
phane releases by a slight pull on the cellophane with the fingers.

The reason for turning the engine backward before bringing it up
to the timing mark is to compensate for the backlash in the mag-
neto drive mechanism. Note whether the timing mark on the fly-
wheel is opposite the pointer. If a minor correction is necessary,
tilt the magneto forward or backward, whichever is required. Tilting
the magneto toward the front of the engine advances the spark,
tilting it toward the rear of the engine retards the spark. In
case a major correction is to be made, it will be necessary to again
loosen the nut securing the left-hand driving flange (C, fig. 87) to
permit moving the shaft forward or backward. Tighten the nut,
and recheck the timing. NOTE: One serration on the flange and
the driven gear is equal to 5 degrees at the flywheel.
(5) INSTALL LEFT-HAND MAGNETO AND SET TIMING. Turn
the flywheel in the direction of rotation 300 degrees (% of a turn)
C-Jointer.
until the "SPARK SETTING L.H." mark appears opposite the
Turn the magneto until the arrow in the rotor window
• 550 :O--48--14 205
TM 9-759
67-68
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
(fig. 83) points to the terminal to which No. 1 red wire is attach
NOTE: A lobe of the breaker cam will be approaching the rub
bing block on the breaker arm when the magneto is set in this
position. Also note the arrow showing the direction of the breaker
cam as shown in figure 83. Install the magneto (par. 66) and
tilt the magneto so that the mounting studs are approximately
midway in the slots of the magneto mounting flange. Separate the
breaker points in the left-hand magneto and place a narrow strip of
cellophane between the points. Turn the flywheel backward approxi-
mately one-quarter revolution, then turn in direction of rotation
until the cellophane releases with a slight pull on the cellophane with
the fingers and note whether the timing mark on the flywheel is at
the pointer. The reason for turning the engine backward before
bringing it up to the timing mark is to compensate for the backlash
in the magneto drive mechanism. Any correction in the timing for
the left-hand magneto can be made by tilting the magneto forward
or backward. NOTE: After the timing is set, clean the breaker point
to remove any dirt, corrosion, or fragments of the cellophane which
may have scuffed while the opening of the points was being checked.
(6) LOCK MAGNETOS IN PLACE. After both magnetos have been
properly set in the mounting slots and the correct timing established,
tighten the mounting nuts and lock with wire. Install the magnet
drive gear inspection cover and gasket (G104-15-93807).
68. SPARK PLUGS.

a. Description. The spark plugs used are the aircraft-type,
Champion C88-S, and are radio shielded. The spark gap between
the electrodes of the spark plug when new should be 0.011 inch to
0.014 inch. Do not attempt to adjust the spark gap. Replace the
plugs when the gap increases to 0.030 inch.
h. Replacement. To remove the spark plugs (G104-17-40555),
remove the cover plates over the spark plug compartment. Remove
the retainer nuts with the wrench (41-W-3336-300) (fig. 88) and
lift the wires from the spark plugs. Remove the spark plugs with the
wrench (41-W-3336-300) (fig. 88). Check the gap of each spark plug
with a round gage to make sure the spark gap is within the limits
outlined above. To install the spark plugs, insert the plugs with
gaskets (G104-15-93805) in the spark plug holes, and tighten each
spark plug moderately (25 to 30 foot-pounds) with the wrench
(41-W-3336-300) (fig. 88). The threads on the outside of the inserts
and the inside of the cylinder head are left-hand threads, whereas
the spark plugs have right-hand threads. Excessive tightening of the
spark plug would screw the insert out of the head if it were not
doweled to the head. However, the dowel being of a small diame
206
"p -
TM 9-759
68-69
IGNITION SYSTEM
A - REMOVING SPARK PLUG TERMINAL B-REMOVING SPARK PLUG. USING

NUT, USING WRENCH (41-W-3336-300) WRENCH (41-W-3336-300)
RA PD 341207
Figure 88-Removing Spark Plug Terminal Nut and Spark Plug
and the insert and cylinder head made of relatively soft material, the
threads are susceptible to damage from improper installation of the
plug. Insert the spark plug wire terminals (G170-03-98804) in the
U.h
N ark plugs and tighten the spark plug wire retainers moderately
the special wrench (41-W-3336-300) (fig. 88).
69. SPARK PL!U(; WIRES AND CONDUITS.

a. General (fig. 33). The wires leading from the magneto to the
spark plugs may be identified for both the right and left-hand mag-
neto by colors marked on the wires as follows: No. 1-red; No. 2-
blue; No. 3-green; and No. 4-yellow. Spark plug wires having
cracked or damaged insulation must be replaced, as such wires may
cause misfiring. If the flexible ignition conduit becomes damaged or
frayed, it also must be replaced to avoid chafing of the spark plug
wires.
1>. Spark Plug Wire Removal. To remove one or more spark
plug wires, remove the spark plug cover plates. Remove the circular
plate covering the spark plug wire terminals on the magneto (fig. 83).
Remove the fitting and retainer nut from the spark plugs of the wires
to be changed (par. 68 b), and disconnect .the terminals at the other
end of the wires from the magneto. Attach a strong cord to the ter-
minal at the magneto end of the wire, and pull the wire out of the
conduit. Leave the cord in the conduit, as it is used later to pull
a new wire through the conduit.
c. Spark Pling Wire Installation. Attach the cord described in
paragraph lh above, and pull a new wire through the conduit. At-
IV_~~~~ ~207
TM 9-759
69-72
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
tach the spark plug retainer nut and fitting to the end of the O
and install the wire to the spark plug. Attach the other end of the
wire to the proper terminal on the magneto (fig. 83).
d. Flexible Conduit Replacement. To remove the flexible con-
duit, unscrew the knurled nut at each end. Disconnect the spark
plug wires from the magneto, and slip conduit from the wires. In-
stall the flexible conduit, using new gaskets at each end of the
flexible conduit, and attach the spark plug wires to the correct
terminals in the magneto (fig. 83).
70. IGNITION SWITCH.

a. The operation of the ignition switch is described in paragraph
15 e. The ignition switch (G109-05-04369) can be removed after
the instrument panel has been disassembled as outlined in para-
graphs 90 b or 91 h.
Section XVII
FUEL, AIR INTAKE AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
71. DESCRIPTION.
a. The fuel and air intake system consists of two carburet
equipped with degassers, two air cleaners, a fuel pump, four fuel taW
with fuel supply lines, two fuel filters, one on some vehicles) and a
priming pump with supply lines to the intake manifolds. The total
capacity of the fuel tanks is approximately 175 gallons. The ex-
haust system consists of two exhaust pipes, one attached to each
manifold on the engine and running through the rear wall of the
engine compartment, and two external pipes bolted to the rear wall
of the engine compartment.
72. CARBURETORS.
a. Description (fig. 89). Two Stromberg Model NA-Y5G carbu-
retors (G104-15-31735) are used, mounted on carburetor adapters
connecting the two intake manifolds at each end. The carburetors
are dual (double-barrel) downdraft type. Each carburetor has two
floats connected by one lever and operating on one needle valve. A
separate main metering and idling system is provided for each
barrel. Each barrel is equipped with a degasser (par. 73). An ac-
celerating pump, which operates with the throttle, provides an extra
quantity of fuel for rapid acceleration. The throttle linkage is arranged
so that the forward carburetor remains closed until the rear car-
buretor is approximately half open (par. 77).
h. Idle Fuel Adjustment (fig. 89). Two idle fuel adjustm
screws are provided on each carburetor, one for each barrel.
208 W
TM 9-759
72
FUEt LEVELCHECKING PLUG
'IE FUEL
\ DRAIN PLUG
\ w i _ DEG-SSERS
l'DLE SPEED ADJUST:VENT RA PD 27408
Figure 89-Carburetor'
idle fuel adjustments on these carburetors are extremely uniform.

and can be adjusted when either cold or hot. Make the idle fuel
adjustments with the engine stopped. Turn each idle fuel adjusting
screw in (clockwise) until it seats lightly, then turn it out one-
quarter turn from the closed position. A stub (short) screwdriver
will be required for making this adjustment on the forward carburetor.
c. Idle Speed Adjustment (fig. 89).
(1) WET STOWAGE AND 105-MM HOWITZER VEHICLES. Start the
engine and run it until it reaches normal operating temperature.
Disconnect the high idle link at the clutch cross shaft. Back off
the idle speed adjustment at each carburetor until the engine idle
speed is below 375 revolutions per minute. Set the idle speed ad-
justment at one of the carburetors until the engine idle speed is
5 revolutions per minute. Set the idle speed adjustment at the
er carburetor until the engine speed just starts to increase, then
209
TM 9-759
72
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
back off the adjustment slightly. Reconnect the high idle link
the clutch cross shaft, and adjust the link length until the engine id
at 800 revolutions per minute with the clutch pedal in the fully
returned position.
(2) 75-MM DRY STOWAGE VEHICLES. Start the engine and run
until it reaches normal operating temperature. Then set idl;ng speed
to 500 revolutions per minute by means of adjusting screw (fig. 89).
d1. Fuel Level Check. Each carburetor is provided with fuel level
checking plugs (fig. 89), one at the front of the carburetor, and one
at the rear. To check the fuel level, remove the lock wire and the
plug from the inspection hole in the front side of the rear carburetor,
or the rear side of the forward carburetor. Start the engine and run
it at idling speed. The fuel should be visible at the bottom of the
threads of the inspection hole. If fuel is not visible, the fuel level is
too low. If the fuel runs out of the inspection hole, the level is too
high. In either case the carburetor should be replaced (subpars. e
and f below).
e. Removal (Either Carburetor). Open the engine compart-
ment doors. Loosen the clamps at the two carburetor air intake mani-
fold tubes and remove the tubes from the manifold. Remove the
nuts at the top of each carburetor which attach the carburetor
intake manifold to the carburetors. Remove the manifold. Disc_
nect the carburetor fuel feed line at the fuel pump. Disconnect W
degasser electrical connections on the carburetor. Disconnect the
throttle rod from the ball joint at the carburetor. Disconnect
the carburetor control spring (G104-17-89655) (fig. 92). Remove
the four carburetors base nuts holding the carburetor to the adapter
and remove the carburetor and gasket. Remove the fuel line from
the carburetor.
f. Installation (Either Carburetor). Place a new gasket
(A-296609-A) and carburetor on the adapter studs. Install the four
nuts to secure the carburetor to the adapter. Connect the degasser
wires. Connect the carburetor fuel line to the carburetor and the fuel
pump. Connect the throttle rod to the ball joint (G104-21-15852)
on the carburetor. Place the air intake manifold on the carburetors,
with the short end to the front carburetor (fig. 90), and install the
nuts. NOTE: On air intake manifolds without elbows for the air
intake hose, the air intake manifold can be installed on the car-
buretor in a reversed position with the result that the air cleaner
hose will be too short, even though it may be possible to install them.
With the air cleaner hose too short, the flexing of the engine on its
mounts will cause the hose to become disconnected, thereby losing
the benefits of the air cleaner. Place the two air cleaner hoses
over the manifold connections, and tighten the clamps. Close O
engine compartment doors and install the cap screws.
210
TM 9.759
73
FUEL, AIR INTAKE ANP EXHAUST SYSTEMS
eLONG
END - --- SHORT END
REAR CARBURETOR FRONT CARBURETOR

AIR INTAKE MANIFOLD
RA PD 3294S7
Figure 90-Air Intake Manifold Installation
73. DEGASSERS (fig. 89).

a. Description. Each barrel of both carburetors is equipped with
Wvacuum-operated degasser with an electrical control for positive
shut-off of the idle fuel mixture when stopping the engine. All fuel
flowing through the idle discharge holes passes through the degasser
needle valve seat. The purpose of the degasser is to shut off the
idle fuel supply when high manifold vacuum is present during de-
celeration, to prevent flame and backfire through the exhaust. The
electric fuel cut-off portion of the degasser works independently of
the vacuum-operated portion, although it is in the same assembly,
and operates the same needle valve. A solenoid built into each
degasser closes the needle valve when the fuel cut-off button on the
instrument panel is pressed. The purpose of the fuel cut-off is to
shut off the idle fuel mixture just before stopping the engine, to
prevent the fuel from reaching the cylinders, and to prevent the
engine from continuing to run on preignition after the ignition
switch has been turned off.
hI. Replacement. To remove the degasser, open the engine com-
partment doors. Remove the two screws from the conduit shield cap
and remove the cap. Pull the degasser wire out of its terminal socket.
Remove the lock wire and the three screws which hold the degasser
to the carburetor, and remove the degasser. To install the degasser,
lace it in position on the carburetor, and install the three screws to
ure it to the carburetor. Install the lock wire in the screw-. Con-
W_~~~~~~211
TM 9.759
73-75
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
nect the degasser wire and install the conduit shield cap. Close@
engine compartment doors and install the cap screws.
74. CARBURETOR ADAPTERS.

a. Description (fig. 64). A carburetor adapter is connected to
each end of the intake manifolds. These adapters are also connected
to the exhaust manifolds by heater pipes which provide heat for
the fuel air mixture as it comes from the carburetors. These adapters
each contain two throttle plates operated by the engine speed
governor.
hi. Replacement. Open the engine compartment doors. Remove
the heater pipe (fig. 64). Remove the carburetor (par. 72 e). Dis-
connect the clevis at the end of the governor throttle rod. When
removing the rear adapter, disconnect the ball joint at the governor
arm. Remove the six nuts which hold the adapter to the manifold.
Remove the adapter. To install the carburetor adapter, place it in
position on the intake manifold studs, and install the six nuts to
secure it to the manifold. Install the carburetor on the carburetor
adapter as outlined in paragraph 72 f. When installing the rear
adapter, connect the ball joint at the governor arm. Connect the
clevis at the end of the governor throttle rod.
75. GOVERNOR.
a. Description. The speed of the engine is regulated and limited
by the use of additional dual throttle plates, located in each of the
carburetor adapters directly under each carburetor. These car-
buretor adapter throttle plates are connected by a rod, which in turn
is connected to the governor located at the rear of the right-hand
camshaft housing and is driven by the right-hand intake camshaft.
With the engine idling, these governor-actuated throttles are in the
wide-open position. As the engine speed is increased, the action of
the governor partially closes the throttles, thus limiting the maxi-
mum engine speed to approximately 2,600 revolutions per minute
under full load. All maintenance on the governor must be referred
to ordnance maintenance personnel.
h. Link Adjustment. The governor throttle connecting link
should be adjusted by means of the clevis on the forward end so
that with the engine stopped, both throttle levers are against the
stop on both carburetor adapters (fig. 92).
c. Removal. Remove the cotter pin from the governor link at
the governor. Loosen the governor link lock screw and disconnect
the link from the governor. Remove the six nuts that hold
governor to the accessory cover and remove the governor. m
212
TM 9-759
75-76
.
L
GAGE
AIR CLEANER DUCT
AIR INTAKE TUBE S
FUEL GAGE
AIR CLEANER DUCT
AIR CLEANER CUP AIR CLEANERS AIR CLEANER CUP

RA PD 329241
Figure 91-Air Cleaners
1. Installation. Install a new gasket on the governor. Hold the

ernor in place on the camshaft cover and install the six nuts.
"onnect the governor link to the governor arm and tighten the
governor link lock screw, then back off the screw one-half turn. Install
a cotter pin in the governor link. Adjust the governor throttle con-
necting link as outlined in subparagraph h above.
76. AIR CLEANERS.

a. Description (figs. 9 and 91). Two air cleaners of the oil-bath
type, mounted on the bulkhead, rre either located in the engine com-
partment or in the fighting compartment. If the air cleaners are
located in the engine compartment, an air cleaner duct assembly
is provided for each air cleaner. These ducts lead into the fighting
compartment (fig. 77). A control handle is located at each duct
opening into the fighting compartment. When the handle is pushed
in, the air is drawn into the air cleaner from the fighting compart-
ment. When the handle is pulled out, the air is drawn from the
engine compartment. Two air cleaner inspection doors, located in
the fighting compartment at either side of the bulkhead (fig. 10),
are provided for the servicing of the air cleaner. If the air cleaners
are installed in the fighting compartment, air ducts or inspection
ors are not necessary.
o 213
TM 9-759
76.77
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
b. Replacement. O
(1) AIR CLEANERS EQUIPPED WITH AIR DUCTS. Remove the
six cap screws which secure the air duct to the top of the air
cleaner, and remove the duct. Loosen the clamps at each end of
the carburetor intake to air cleaner tube, and remove the tube. Re-
move the four cap screws which hold the mounting band, and remove
the cleaner. To install the air cleaner, place it in position on the
bracket. Place the mounting band in position, and secure it to the
bracket with four cap screws. Install the air intake tube on the
carburetor air intake manifold and the air cleaner connections.
Place the air duct on the top of the air cleaner, and in the opening
in the bulkhead, and secure it to the cleaner with six cap screws.
(2) AIR CLEANERS WITHOUT AIR DUCTS. Turn the turret until
the door in the turret exposes the air cleaner. Disconnect the air
cleaner tube. Loosen the three wing nuts that secure the cup to the
cleaner and remove the cup. Remove the four mounting bracket
cap screws and remove the air cleaner. To install the air cleaner,
secure the air cleaner and bracket to the bulkhead with four cap
screws. Install the cup on the air cleaner and tighten the three
wing nuts.
77. THROTTLE CONTROLS.
a. General. The carburetor throttle control linkage, as sh E
in figure 92, is arranged so that the throttle plates of the rear co
buretor open to approximately half-throttle before the forward car-
buretor throttle plates start to open. The rate of opening of the
throttle plates in the forward carburetor is approximately twice as
fast as for the rear carburetor, with the result that both reach the
wide-open point together.
b. Adjustment (fig. 92). Screw the ball and socket joint onto
each throttle control rod until a length of 165/8 inches, measured
from the center of the ball to the center of the pin hole at the
other end of the rod, is obtained. Adjust the length of the rod con-
necting the lever at the center bracket to the cross shaft on the bulk-
head to attain a length of 22 inches, measuring it from the end
of one ball joint to the end of the ball joint at the other end of
the rod. After all control rods are connected, adjust the stop on the
inner end of the center bracket cross shaft so that the rear car-
buretor will start to open with a slight movement of the throttle rod.
c. Hand Throttle.
(1) DESCRIPTION. The hand throttle mounted on the final drive
housing is connected to the carburetor control through rods and two
cross shafts. One cross shaft is located at the rear of the driver's seat,
and one on the front side of the bulkhead. The rear of the thr e
214 _
TM 9-759
77
0~~~~~~~~~~~~ U
OC
I I!1111· I~II iii a.1

//~
/c~~~ - ~-
/ O at
o. -- 0 V)
~- 3~~~~~~~ (b
7
Wz
c0
01
0 W
0 W -,
=~~~~~~~~
wz a -o
0 1o z
W or - 4'
~o~ 0~~~ z/0
'>. N
0 0 a -)W
W~ Z 0L
z~~~~~
> ~~ ~ ~ >
oL~
z 0 0a 0
U. o 0o 0
~
W z z ~ ~ W
cr
W co: 0- z
WI
0 ~ u0
cream
j U
-i 0 cr0.CC-
0 3 I
~~~
~ U) ~ ~ U
215~~~~~
-A -Co V
4 > 4 Zn a.
41 L.A-
JZ0 D
215
TM 9-759
77
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
cable is connected to the foot throttle through a slip conne(l*

which allows either the foot or hand throttle to be operated i
1endently of the other.
(2) REMOVAL. Loosen the lock nut at the bottom of the hand
throttle bracket, and remove the cable and conduit from the bracket
Remove the four bolts which hnld driver's seat bracket to the floor
plate. Remove the seat. Remove the screws from the driver's com-
partment floor plate and remove the plate. Loosen the two bolts
which hold the cover over the throttle linkage at the throttle cross
shaft, and remove the cover. Remove the nut from the hand throttle
conduit where it is attached to the hull floor. Remove the clevis pin
from the clevis at the rear end of the throttle rod, and remove the
conduit, cable, and rod.
(3) INSTALLATION. Place the conduit, cable, and rod in position
on the hull floor, and secure it with a nut. Adjust the clevis on the
hand throttle rod so that there is i/8-inch free movement in the
throttle button. Install the clevis pin to connect the clevis to the
cross shaft lever. Place the floor plate in position, and secure it
to the floor with screws. Place the cover over the throttle linkage at
the cross shaft, and secure it with two bolts. Place the driver's seat
in position, and secure it to the floor plate with four bolts. Place
the cable and conduit through the hand throttle bracket, and sec
it with the lock nut.
i
W
(4) ADJUSTMENT. Loosen the two bolts which hold the cover
over the throttle linkage at the throttle cross shaft, and remove the
cover. Remove the clevis pin from the hand brake clevis on the rear
of the hand brake rod and adjust the clevis so that the throttle
button has approximately 11s-inch free movement. Install clevis pin
in brake rod clevis.
:. Foot Throttle.
(1) DESCRIPTION. The foot throttle pedal is connected to the
carburetor control through the same rods and two cross shafts which
are used by the hand throttle.
(2) REMOVAL. Remove the screws from the front section of the
driver's compartment floor plate, and remove the plate. Remove
the clevis pin and the retracting spring from the clevis connecting
the pedal to the throttle rod. Remove the lock wire and bolt from
the bracket at the base of the throttle pedal, and remove the pedal.
(3) INSTALLATION. To install the foot throttle pedal, place it
in position, and install the bolt in the bracket at the base of the
pedal. Secure the bolt with lock wire. Connect the retracting spring
to the foot pedal. Install the clevis pin in the clevis and foot
216
"" TM 9-759
77-80
onnect the foot throttle pedal to the throttle rod. Install the
s in the front section of the floor plate to secure it to the hull
· or Adjust the linkage as outlined in paragraph 77.
e. Governor Throttle Control. The operation of the governor,
which controls and limits the engine speed through additional
throttles in the carburetor adapters, is described in paragraph 74 a.
Adjustment of governor throttle connecting link. is outlined in para-
graph 75 ),.
78. PRIMING PiUMP.

a. Description. The use and operation of the priming pump,
located on the front bow or on the instrument panel in the driver's
compartment, is described in paragraph 13 f.
h. Replacement. If the priming pump is mounted on the instru-
ment panel, the instrument panel must be disassembled (pars. 90 b
or 91 h) before the priming pump can be removed. Disconnect the
inlet and outlet fuel lines at the priming pump. Remove the knob
from the priming pump, and remove the large packing nut. Remove
the lock nut which secures the priming pump to the bracket, and
remove the pump. To install the pump, place it in position on
the bracket, and install the lock nut. Install the packing nut and
__ob. Connect the inlet and outlet fuel lines to the priming pump.
W.- FUEL PUMP.

a. Description. The fuel pump is of the conventional diaphragm
type, and is mounted on the left-hand camshaft cover. The pump is
driven by the left intake camshaft. The pump maintains from 4 /2
to 6 pounds fuel pressure to the carburetors.
hI. Replacement. Close all of the fuel shut-off valves. Dis-
connect the fuel inlet line connection at the pump. Disconnect the
outlet fuel line (A-381632-A) at the pump. Remove the two nuts
and washers which secure the pump to the camshaft cover and re-
move the fuel pump (G104-17-45835). To install the fuel pump,
place it in position on the camshaft cover with a new gasket (G104-
15-93832) and install the two flat washers and nuts. Connect the
inlet and outlet fuel line connections to the pump. Open the fuel
shut-off valves.
80. FUEL FILTERS.

a. Main Tank.
(1) DESCRIPTION (figs. 93 and 94). Two different type fuel
filters are used on M4A3 vehicles. One type is a disk-type filter
incorporated in each vertical tank. This type of filter requires no
217
TM 9.759
80
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
PRIMER LINE SHUT-OFF VALVE
LEFT-HAND VERTICAL TANK FUEL FILTER RA PD 329239
Figure 93-Fuel Filter Incorporated in Fuel Tank
servicing between engine overhaul periods, therefore, no drain is

provided in this type of filter. The other type of fuel filter con-
sists of a stack-type disk element and a metal filter bowl mounted
on the left fire wall in the engine compartment. Inlet and outlet
passages are marked "IN" and "OUT." The filtering element con-
sists of a large number of filter disks (0.020 inch thick) stacked
and squeezed together.
(2) DRAINAGE. To drain the metal bowl-type filter, close all
fuel shut-off valves and remove the drain plug at the bottom of
the metal bowl to remove accumulated dirt and water.
(3) FILTER ELEMENT REMOVAL AND CLEANING (fig. 94). Re-
move the center stud at the top of the filter. Clean the bowl and wash
the filter element (AC-5570090) in dry-cleaning solvent. Care must
be taken to prevent bending or distorting the disks. Do not scr
218 _
t~
TM 9-759
so80
STUD
;\ I GASKET
GASKET
FILTERELEMENT
BOWL
DRAIN PLUG
RA PD 329602
Figure 94-Fuel Filter Mounted on Fire Wall
scrub, or attempt to disassemble the filter element, replace the ele-

ment if it cannot be cleaned satisfactorily. Insert the gasket and
install the filter element and bowl. If the gasket is damaged, replace it.
b. Auxiliary Generator Fuel Tank (figs. 20 and 21).
(1) DESCRIPTION. A fuel filter of the glass bowl type is pro-
vided for the auxiliary generator. On some models two fuel shut-off
valves are provided, one at the fuel tank and one at the filter. On
other models the fuel filter is mounted to the fuel tank, and only one
fuel shut-off valve is provided.
(2) CLEANING. To clean this filter, shut off the fuel valve at the
fuel tank. Unscrew the nut at the bottom of the bowl. Move the
bail wire to one side and remove the bowl. Clean the bowl and
stall it.
219
TM 9.759
81
TANK, MEDIUM. M4A3
DRAIN PLUGS FOR VERTICAL FUEL TANKS

RA PD 3292
Figure 9--Drain Plugs for Vertical Fuel Tanks (75-mm Dry

Stowage and All Main Tanks, 75-mm Wet Stowage,
76-mm, and 105-mm Howitzer Vehicles)
81. FUEL TANKS.
a. Description (figs. 40 and 41). Four fuel tanks are provided,
two vertical and two horizontal. The tanks are located in the engine
compartment and are enclosed by means of a steel fire wall. The
total fuel capacity is 168 gallons. On some vehicles two fuel shut-off
valves are provided, one for each vertical tank; on other models a
fuel shut-off valve is provided for each of the four tanks. Vehicles
that are equipped with four fuel shut-off valves have a drain plug in
each of the four tanks (figs. 95 and 96). Vehicles having only two
fuel shut-off valves have a drain plug in each vertical tank only
(fig. 95).
h. Drainage.
(1) DRAIN HORIZONTAL TANKS. Remove two screws from the
round plate on the bottom of the sponson shelf (fig. 96) and loosen
the third screw. Swing the round plate out of the way as shown
in figure 96. Take out the drain plug, using 'i,;-inch socket hb t
screw wrench.
220
TM 9.759
81
FUEL, AIR INTAKE .AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
DRAIN PLUG
Figure 96-Droin Plug for Horizontal Tank 175-mm Dry Stowage

Vehicles)
(2) DRAIN VERTICAL TANKS. Remove plug in bottom of engine
compartment floor opposite center of rear bogie wheel assembly,
right and left (fig. 95), using a socket head set screw 1-inch wrench.
move tank plugs, using 5').,;-inch socket head set screw wrench.
Either Horizontal Tank Replacement (75-mm Dry Stow-
age).
(1) REMOVAL. Remove vertical fuel tank as outlined in sub-
paragraph e below. Drain the tank as outlined in subparagraph
h (1) above. Remove auxiliary generator muffler and tail pipe. This
applies to removal of left tank only. Disconnect the outlet fuel hose
at the fuel pump. Remove fuel hose from the fuel filter. Remove the
two cap screws securing the fuel filter. Remove the fuel filter inlet
connection and remove the filter. Disconnect fire extinguisher pipe
and nozzle from engine compartment side wall and remove discharge
nozzles from their brackets. Disconnect the fuel line. Remove the fan
shroud (par. 86 (l). Remove the upper half of the vertical fuel tank
wall. Take out the 12 cap screws and remove one nut which secures
the wall to the hull on each side. Remove the upper half of the hori-
zontal fuel tank wall. Take out the four cap screws and remove the
four nuts which secure the wall to the hull on each side. Remove nut
and bolt from the fuel tank. Remove the fuel tank filler cap. Remove
the fuel level gage wire after tank is pulled part way out. Lift the
tank from the vehicle.
(2) INSTALLATION. Place the fuel tank about halfway on the
sponson and connect the fuel gage wire to the fuel gage unit. Place
fuel tank in position on the sponson and install the nut and bolt
a: 3550 o(-48--15 221
TM 9-759
81
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
in each of the two fuel tank hold-down straps. Install the filler co
Hold the upper half of the fuel tank fire wall in position and install
the four nuts and cap screws. Hold the upper half of the vertical fuel
tank fire wall in position and install the 12 cap screws and nuts which
secure the wall to the hull. Install the fan shroud (par. 86 d). Con-
nect the fuel line to the fuel tank. Install the fire extinguisher nozzles.
Install the fuel filter and connect the fuel lines to the filter and fuel
pump. Install the auxiliary generator tail pipe and muffler (par.
160 b (1) (b)). Install the vertical fuel tank as outlined in subpara-
graph e (2) below.
d. Horizontal Fuel Tank Replacement (Wet Stowage and

105-mm Howitzer).
(1) REMOVAL. Remove the engine as outlined in paragraph 63.
Drain the fuel tanks as outlined in subparagraph h) (2) above. Re-
move the air cleaners (par. 76 1) (1)). Disconnect the wire from the
fuel gage unit on the vertical fuel tank filler pipe. Remove the two
cap screws that hold the fuel gage wire conduit to the fire wall and
lay the conduit to one side. Unscrew the filler neck from the vertical
fuel tank. Loosen the clamps and remove the flexible fuel line that
connects the vertical and horizontal fuel tanks. Remove the six cap
screws from the vertical fuel tank cover and remove the cover. R
move the two cap screws that secure the electrical conduit to tI
fire wall. Disconnect the taillight wires at the connector plug and la '
the conduit to one side. Remove the fan shroud (par. 86 d). Remove
the cap screws that hold the horizontal fire wall to the hull and remove
the wall. Remove the nine screws from the horizontal fuel tank filler
neck grommet retainer and remove the retainer and gaskets. Remove
the six screws from the filler neck and remove the filler neck. Remove
the bolt from each hold-down strap and remove the fuel tank.
(2) INSTALLATION. Place the fuel tank in position on the spon-
son and install a bolt in each hold-down strap. Place the filler pipe
gasket on the fuel tank with the wide side of the gasket in line with
the wide side of the fuel tank flange. Place the filler pipe on the fuel
tank in position so that the top of the filler pipe will be at the same
angle as the hull plate. Install the six filler pipe screws. Place the
inner (threaded) grommets on the retainer on the filler pipe. Place
the inner and outer grommets on the filler pipe making sure the holes
in the grommets and retainer are in line. Install the outer retainer
and nine cap screws. Install the fan shroud (par. 86 d). Hold the
fire wall in position and install the cap screws to secure it to the
hull. Connect the taillight wires at the plug unit above the fuel tank.
Install the vertical fuel tank cover and cap screws. Install the flexible
fuel line that connects the vertical and horizontal fuel tanks. Inst
222
TM 9-759
81
tighten the filler neck in the vertical fuel tank. Secure the fuel
gage wire conduit to the fire wall with two cap screws. Connect the
fuel gage wire to the fuel gage unit. Install the air cleaners (par.
76 h (1)). Install the engine (par. 64).
e. Either Vertic;a! Fuel Tank Replacement (75-mm Dry

Stowage). '
(1) REMOVAL. Open the engine compartment doors. Remove
the engine compartment front plate. Drain vertical fuel tank as out-
lined in subparagraph h (2) above. Remove the engine compartment
floor plate. Disconnect the outlet pipe connection at the bottom of
the tank and unscrew the pipe fitting from the vertical fuel tank.
Remove the cap screws from the upper half of the vertical fuel tank
fire wall and remove the wall. Loosen the set screws on the fuel tank
hold-down bracket at the top of the fuel tank. Remove the three cap
screws and guide bracket from the side of the vertical tank. Remove
air cleaner assembly (par. 76 h (2)). Remove the fire extinguisher
fittings, if removing left-hand vertical tank. Remove the three cap
screws which hold the hold-down bracket to the bulkhead and remove
.nsect
the bracket. Lift the fuel tank from the vehicle.
(2) INSTALLATION. Lower the fuel tank into position in the vehicle.
the fuel line to the fuel tank. Install the guide bracket at
side of the fuel tank with three cap screws. Secure the hold-
down bracket to the bulkhead with three cap screws. Install the fire
extinguisher fittings if they were removed. Place the hold-down bar
in position on the tank and tighten and lock the set screws. Hold
the upper half of the fire wall in position and install the cap screws.
Install the air cleaners. Install the engine compartment front plate.
Close the engine compartment doors.
f. Vertical Fuel Tank Replacement (Wet Stowage and 105-mm

Howitzer).
(1) REMOVAL. Drain the fuel tanks as outlined in subparagraph
b (2) above. Open the engine compartment doors. Remove the
engine compartment front plate. Remove the air cleaner. Disconnect
the fuel gage wire. Remove the gage clamp and unscrew the fuel
gage and tube from the tank. Remove the cap screws from the
vertical fuel tank cover and remove the cover. Remove the flexible
line that connects the horizontal and vertical fuel tanks. Disconnect
the fuel line and fuel shut-off linkage from the fuel filter. Remove
the cap screws that secure the filter to the tank and remove the
filter. Remove the cap screws that secure the vertical fuel tank fire
lt to the hull and remove the fire wall. Lift the tank from the vehicle.
W~~~~~~~223
TM 9-759
81-82
TANK. MEDIUM, M4A3
(2) INSTALLATION. Position the fuel tank in the vehicle. l

the fire wall in place and install the cap screws. Slide the
wooden bumpers in place between the fuel tank and hull. Install the
fuel filter in the fuel tank, using a new gasket. Connect the fuel
line and fuel shut-off control to the fuel filter. Install the vertical
fuel tank cover on the fire wall and hull. Screw the fuel gage and
tube into the vertical tank. Install the clamp on the tube. Connect
the wire to the gage. Install the conduit hold-down clips. Install the
engine compartment front plate. Close the engine compartment doors.
g. Auxiliary Generator Fuel Tank Replacement.

(1) WET STOWAGE AND 105-MM HOWITZER VEHICLES. Remove
the auxiliary generator (par. 160). Remove the filler neck retainers
and grommet. Drain the fuel tank. Remove the six cap screws that
secure the fuel tank to the hull and remove the tank. To install the
tank, hold it in place and install the six cap screws to secure it to the
hull. Install the auxiliary generator (par. 160). Install the filler neck
grommet and retainers.
(2) 75-MM DRY STOWAGE VEHICLES. Remove the filler neck
grommet and retainers. Turn the shut-off valve on the fuel filter to
the "OFF" position and disconnect the fuel line at the filter. Remqi
the air cleaner (par. 76 b (2)). Remove the four cap screws tW
secure the fuel tank bracket to the hull and remove the bracket and
fuel tank. To install the tank, hold it and the bracket in place and
install the four cap screws in the bracket. Connect the fuel line to
the filter. Install the air cleaner (par. 76 h (2)). Install the grommet
and retainers on the filler neck.
82. EXHAUST PIPE REPLACEMENT.

a. Removal. To remove either the right or the left-hand exhaust
pipe, remove the six bolts that secure the exhaust pipe to the exhaust
manifold on the engine. Loosen the nut on the clamp bolt at the
exhaust pipe at rear of engine compartment. Remove the exhaust
pipe. Remove the five bolts from the external exhaust pipe on rear
of hull, and remove the pipe.
b. Installation. To install the exhaust pipe, use new bolts, nuts,
and gaskets and assemble the exhaust pipe to the exhaust manifold.
Using new packing, install the five bolts securing the external exhaust
pipe to the rear of the hull.
224
TM 9-759
83-84
COOLING SYSTEM
ed and then fill the system completely. Stop the engine when
e cooling system is completely full. Examine the entire cooling
system for leaks. This is important because the cleaning solution
uncovers leaks which already exist but are plugged with rust or
corrosion. Leaks that cannot be corrected by using arm should be
reported immediately to ordnance maintenance personnel.
i. Coolant Service.
(1) When servicing the vehicle for summer, fill the system
nearly full with clean water. Add corrosion inhibitor compound in
the proportion of one container of inhibitor to each 4 gallons of
cooling system capacity. Then complete filling the system with water.
(2) When servicing for winter, fill the system about one-quarter
full of clean water. Add sufficient compound, antifreeze (ethylene
glycol type) for protection against the lowest anticipated temper-
ature (par. 25). Add water until the system is nearly full, then run
the engine until the normal operating temperature is reached. Then
add sufficient water to fill the system to the proper level, as out-
lined in paragraph 83 d.
84. RADIATOR.
a. Description. The radiator is of the tube-and-fin cross-flow

, using flat horizontal tubes. The hot water flows through the
tubes to which are attached thin vertical copper fins. Air forced
between these fins by the fans carries the heat away, thus cooling
the water.
h. Removal.
(1) PRELIMINARY WORK. Open the engine compartment doors.
Remove the cap screws which secure the engine compartment rear
cover plate to the hull, and lift the cover from the hull with a chain
fall or hoist. Remove the four bolts which secure the radiator hold-
down plate to the fan shrouds, and remove the plate. Remove the
plug at the bottom of the water pump (fig. 78), and drain the cooling
system. Loosen the hose clamps, and remove the radiator upper hose
(A-244756) and radiator to water pump hose (A-244726-B).
(2) REMOVE RADIATOR UPPER AND LOWER WATER CONNEC-
TIONs. Remove the four cap screws from the upper radiator connec-
tion and the four cap screws from the lower water connections, and
remove the connections.
(3) REMOVE UPPER AND LOWER RADIATOR BAFFLES, AND
DISCONNECT VENT PIPES. Remove one bolt on each end which holds
the lower air baffle, and remove the baffle. CAUTION: The air
ffle can be rested on top of the engine compartment rear door to
W 227
TM 9.759
84
TANK. MEDIUM, M4A3
RADIATOR LIFTING
•5 ~SLING
RADIATOR
RA PD 341201
Figure 97-Removing Radiator With Lifting Sling (41-S-3832-86)
take some of the weight off the bolts; however, to remove the baffle
requires two men, one at each end to hold baffle up as bolts are r
moved, so that it can be lowered gradually. Remove one bolt at em
side of the upper radiator air baffle located at the top rear of tolY
radiator, and remove through the opening below baffle. Disconnect
the vent pipe, and remove the nipple from the radiator top tank
on each side.
(4) kEMOVE RADIATOR (fig. 97). Connect radiator lifting hook
and carefully pull out the radiator, using a chain fall or hoist.
c. Installation.
(1) PLACE RADIATOR IN POSITION. Connect the lifting hook
(fig. 97) to the radiator, and lower it carefully into place.
(2) CONNECT VENT PIPES AND INSTALL UPPER AND LOWER
RADIATOR BAFFLES. Install the vent pipe nipple on each side of the
radiator, and connect the radiator vent pipes, one to each nipple.
Place the upper radiator baffle in position, and secure it to the hull
with a bolt at each end. Place the lower radiator baffle in position,
and secure it to the hull with a bolt at each end.
(3) INSTALL RADIATOR UPPER AND LOWER WATER CONNEC-
TIONS. Place the lower water connection in position and, using a
new gasket, secure it to the radiator with four cap screws. Connect
the upper water connection (A-244758), using a new gasket
(A-244722).
228
TM 9.759
83
Section XVIII
COOLING SYSTEM
83. COOLING SYSTEM (fig. 44).
a. General Description. The engine is cooled by circulation
of water through the water jackets which extend the full length of
the cylinder bores. Water is pumped from the radiator through the
engine and back into the radiator by means of a centrifugal water
pump (par. 85).
h. Cooling System Seal. The entire cooling system is sealed
by means of a pressure filler cap (B-197409) which remains cooled
until a pressure of 12 pounds is reached. This results in raising the
boiling point of the water, thus reducing loss of water or antifreeze.
An expansion tank permits steam or antifreeze vapors to condense
and return to the cooling system, further reducing the loss of water
or antifreeze.
c. Capacity. The capacity of the entire cooling system is 14
gallons.
d. Servicing. Always use clear water, preferably rain or soft
water, if possible. Do not put cold water into the system when the
mine is hot. The radiator and cooling system should be drained,
inTed, and refilled with clean water, and corrosion inhibitor should
WEdded (par. 39) at each 1,000-mile inspection. A drain plug is
provided at the bottom of the water pump (fig. 78). The expansion
tank is provided with a drain plug (fig. 100). On the earlier model
engines a drain plug is located on each side of the engine directly
opposite the engine rear mounts. On the later engines the drain
plugs are located approximately 6 inches ahead of the engine rear
mounts. On the later model vehicles a petcock is provided in the
radiator outlet housing (fig. 99) for checking the water level in
the cooling system. NOTE: Do not fill above this point.
e. Cleaning.
(1) Run the engine until the temperature is within operating
range. Stop the engine, remove the expansion tank cap, and drain
the system by removing the drain plug (A-411672) in the bottom
of water pump and the two drain plugs, one on each side of the
cylinder block. If necessary, use a wire to keep open any drain hole
which tends to become clogged.
(2) Allow the engine to cool. Install the drain plugs and pour
water slowly into the expansion tank until the system is approxi-
mately half full, then run the engine at idling speed. Add the clean-
ing compound in the proportion of one container of cleaner to every
allons of cooling system capacity. Then complete filling the sys-
with water. Never mix the water and the cleaning compound
225
TM 9-759
83
TANK. MEDIUM, M4A3
before putting them into the system. CAUTION: Do not spill

solution on skin, clothing or painted portions of the vehicle.
(3) Replace the expansion tank cap and run the engine at fast
idling speed until the coolant reaches a temperature above 180 ° F,
but not over 200 ° F. Do not drive the vehicle. Constantly check the
level in the cooling system.
(4) Stop the engine after it has run for 30 minutes, or until
the temperature reaches at least 180 ° F, but not over 200 ° F. Then
remove the expansion tank cap and the three drain plugs, and drain
the system completely.
f. Neutralizing.
(1) Allow the engine to cool. Install the three plugs and pour
water slowly into the expansion tank until the system is approxi-
mately half full, then run the engine at idling speed. Add the neu-
tralizer compound in the proportion of one container of neutralizer
to every 4 gallons of cooling system capacity. Then fill the system
with water.
(2) Let the engine idle for at least 5 minutes at normal operating
temperature. Then stop the engine.
(3) Drain the system completely by removing the expansion
tank cap and removing the three drain plugs.
g. Flushing.
(1) Allow the engine to cool. Install the three dra.n plugs.
Pour water slowly into the expansion tank until the system is ap-
proximately half full, then run the engine at idling speed and fill
the system completely.
(2) Run the engine until the coolant is heated to the normal
operating temperature.
(3) Drain the system by removing the expansion tank and re-
moving the three drain plugs. Repeat the flushing operation until
the drain water is clear.
(4) Again allow the engine to cool, and then clean all sediment
from the expansion tank. Blow insects and dirt from radiator core
air passages with compressed air, blowing from the front of the
radiator. Use water if necessary to soften obstructions.
(5) Flush the expansion tank by filling it with water and then
draining completely.
h. Leaks. After completing the flushing operation, make cer-

tain that the engine has been allowed to cool again. Install the
three drain plugs. Pour water slowly into the expansion tank until
the system is approximately half full, then run the engine at id
226
TM 9.759
84-86
COOLING SYSTEM
_ (4) FINAL ASSEMBLY. Install the radiator to water pump hose

and the radiator upper hose, and tighten the clamps. Install the
radiator hold-down plate with four bolts through the plate and fan
shrouds. Place the engine compartment rear cover plate in position
with a hoist, and secure it to the hull with cap screws. Install the
drain plug in the bottom of the water pump, and fill the cooling
system. Close the engine compartment doors. Close the rear door
of engine compartment, and secure it with three cap screws.
85. WATER PUMP.

a. Description (fig. 78). The water pump (G104-17-45830)
is of the centrifugal type, driven by a splined shaft from the rear
of the crankshaft.
h. Lubrication. The water pump is lubricated from the engine,
and as a permanent water seal is used, no attention is required.
C. Removal. Open the rear door of the engine compartment.
Remove the plug at the bottom of the water pump (fig. 78), and
'Remove
drain the cooling system. Loosen the hose clamps, and remove the
hose running from the radiator lower connection to the water pump.
the four nuts which hold the water pump to the crank-
_se, two at the center connection, and two at the water connection
the left, then remove the pump.
dl. Installation. Using a new outlet gasket (A-296663-A) and
a new inner gasket (A-296490), place the water pump in position
over the four studs on the crankcase, and install the four nuts
and washers. Install the two hose running from the water pump to
the radiator lower connection, and tighten the clamps. Install the
drain plug in the bottom of the water pump, and fill the cooling
system. Close the rear door of the engine compartment, and se-
cure it with three cap screws.
86. FANS.
a. Description. Two 26-inch diameter, six-blade blower or
pusher-type fans are used. They are mounted in the front of the
radiator. The fans draw air in through the openings in the engine
compartment doors (or from the fighting compartment), and force
the air out through the radiator and air baffles back of the radiator.
Each fan is driven by two matched V-belts (B-197369) (fig. 98)
from pulleys on the accessory drive housings (mounted on the sides
of the hull toward the rear of the engine compartment).
b. Fan Belt Replacement or Adjustment (fig. 98). Replace-
ent or adjustment of the fan belts is accomplished by moving the
W 229
TM 9.759
86
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
1 INCH FAN BELTS
ACCESSOR DRIVEHOUING
ACCESOYDRI \ IV J
ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING ACCESSORY DRIVE SHAFT, UNIVERSAL JOINT

RA PD 329236
Figure 98-Fan Belt Adjustment
accessory drive housing up or down in slots provided for this pur-

pose, after loosening the four nuts which secure the housing to the
engine compartment sides. The belts are correctly adjusted when
approximately 1-inch movement can be obtained with the fingers at
a point midway between the fan and accessory drive pulleys (fig. 98).
NOTE: When replacement of belts is made, always replace both belts
running on the same pulleys.
e. Fan Bearing Lubrication. The fan bearings are packed
when assembled, and should require no further lubrication between
overhaul periods.
d. Fan and Shroud Assembly Replacement. To remove the
fans and shrouds, open the engine compartment doors, and remove
the engine compartment rear cover plate. It is not necessary to re-
move the engine compartment doors. Loosen and remove the fan
belts (subpar. b above). Remove the two bolts and four cap screws
from each fan shroud, and remove the assemblies. To install the fan
and shroud assembly, place them in position and secure them to e
230
TM 9-759
86-88
COOLING SYSTEM
Wull with four cap screws and two bolts. Install the fan belts (subpar.
h above). Install the engine compartment rear cover plate. Close the
engine compartment doors.
87. ACCESSORY DRIVES.

a. Descril)tion. .'The accessory drives are located on the right
and left walls of the engine compartment to the rear of the engine.
These accessory drives contain bevel gears running in engine oil
which transmit the power from the engine accessory shafts to drive
the fans. 'The accessory drives are provided with bayonet-type oil
level gages, which are a part of the filler plugs.
h. Replacement. Remove the accessory drive shaft (par.
112 c). Loosen the four nuts securing the accessory drive housing
to the engine compartment side wall, and lift the assembly so that the
fan belts can be removed from the pulleys. Take off the nuts, and
remove the accessory drive assembly from the hull. The above pro-
cedure applies to either the right or left accessory drive. To install
the accessory drive assembly, place it in position over the studs in the
hull, and install the nuts on the studs loosely. Install the fan belts,
and lower the assembly to adjust the belts. Tighten the nuts to secure
e accessory drive assembly to the side wall. Install the accessory
ive shaft.
88. THERMOSTAT.
a. Description (fig. 99). The thermostat located in the inlet
opening of the radiator is of the by-pass bellows type, and is non-
adjustable. This thermostat prevents the circulation of water in the
radiator until the engine reaches normal operating temperature. The
thermostat starts to open at 140 0 F.
b. Removal. Open the engine compartment doors. Remove
the drain plug at the bottom of the water pump (fig. 78), and drain
out enough water (approximately 2 gallons) to bring the level below
the thermostat. Remove the four cap screws from the radiator upper
water connections. Loosen the hose clamps from both radiator upper
hose at the engine, and at the thermostat housing. Remove the hose.
Remove the water connection and the thermostat from the radiator
(fig. 99).
c. Installation. Place the thermostat, with a new gasket, in
position in the radiator upper connection. Place the radiator upper
connection in position with a new gasket, and secure it to the radiator
with four cap screws. Install the drain plug in the bottom of the
water pump, and add coolant in the cooling system to the proper
vel. Close the engine compartment doors.
W 231
TM 9.759
89
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
BOIL GAGE ENGINE UNIT

TEMPERATURE GAGE ENGINE UNIT
RADIATOR INLET HOUSING
THERMOSTAT
WATER LEVEL PET COCK GASKET GASKET
RA PD 335173
Fiqure 99-Thermostat
89. EXPANSION TANK. 0
a. Description (fig. 100). The expansion tank, located on the
bulkhead at the front of the engine, catches the water or steam that
may be forced out of the cooling system. When a sufficient pressure
(12 lb) is built up in the cooling system due to expansion of the
coolant, the pressure valve in the filler cap opens, and the excess
water or steam goes into the expansion tank. As the engine cools, a
vacuum is formed in the sealed cooling system, drawing water back
into the cooling system through a vacuum valve in the pressure
cap (fig. 100).
b. Removal. Open the engine compartment doors. Open the
water level petcock (fig. 99), and drain out water to the level of the
petcock. Close the petcock. Loosen the clamp on the left-hand air
cleaner tube at the air intake manifold, and remove the tube from
the manifold. Remove the two cap screws from the fire extinguisher
bracket which hold it to the bulkhead at the left of the expansion
tank. Unscrew the fire extinguisher nut from the pipe. Remove the
fire extinguisher nozzle and bracket. Loosen the hose clamps at the
bottom of the expansion tank, and remove the hose from the tank.
Remove the four cap screws which hold the expansion tank bracke
to the bulkhead. Lower the expansion tank until it rests on tne
232 _
TM 9-759
89
COOLING SYSTEM
EXPANSION TANK RADIATOR VENT PIPES

OVERFLOW PIPE
PRESSURE FILLER CAP
PRESSURE VALVE \
VACUUM VALVE /
GASKET
DRAIN PLUG
EXPANSION
TANK EXPANSION TANK OVERFLOW
FILLER NECK AND RETURN PIPE
RA PD 329235
Figure 100-Radiator Filler and Expansion Tank
buretor air intake manifold. Disconnect the radiator vent pipes on

either side of the filler neck, working through the filler cap hole in
the engine compartment front plate. Remove the expansion tank.
c. Installation. Place the expansion tank and bracket assembly

in position, with the tank resting on the carburetor air intake mani-
fold. Connect the radiator vent pipes, working through the filler cap
hole in the engine compartment front plate. Secure the expansion
tank and bracket assembly to the bulkhead with the four cap screws.
Install the hose at the bottom of the expansion tank, and tighten the
clamps. Connect the fire extinguisher nozzle to the pipe, and secure
the fire extinguisher nozzle and bracket tothe bulkhead with two cap
screws. Install the left-hand air cleaner tube on the carburetor air
intake manifold, and tighten the clamp. Close engine compartment
doors.
d. Expansion Tank Drainage. To drain the expansion tank,

_'move the drain plug on the right side of the tank (fig. 100).
233
TM 9.759
90-91
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
Section XIX i
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INSTRUMENTS
90. INSTRUMENT PANEL (EARLY TYPE).

a. Description (fig. 13). The early type instrument panel is
provided with a primer pump. The wiring for the instruments runs
from the instruments directly to the terminal boxes and to the
battery box.
b. Disassembly. Turn the battery master switch off. Discon-
nect the two primer pump lines at the top of the instrument panel.
Loosen the knurled nut which holds the speedometer trip reset
conduit to the clip at the bottom of the panel and remove the con-
duit. Remove the six screws which hold the panel to the case and
separate the panel from the case. Disconnect the tachometer and
speedometer drive cables. The panel may now be laid face down on
the sponson to remove any of the wires, instruments, or devices
as required.
c. Assembly. Connect the tachometer and speedometer drive
cable to the tachometer and speedometer heads. Hold the panel in
place on the case and install the six screws in the panel. Connej
the speedometer trip reset conduit to the clip at the bottom of t/
panel. Connect the two primer lines to the fittings at the top of to_
instrument panel.
91. INSTRUMENT PANEL (LATER TYPE).

a. Description. The late-type instrument panels are provided
with plug connectors which permit the wiring to be disconnected at
the rear of the instrument panel. The plug-type connectors enable
easy removal of the instrument panel from the vehicle.
h. Disassembly. Disconnect the tachometer and speedometer
drive cables from the tachometer and speedometer heads at the rear
of the panel. Remove the six equally spaced screws on the outer
edge of the instrument panel. Separate the two halves of the panel
to gain access to the instruments.
c. Assembly. Hold the two halves of the instrument panel
together and install the six equally spaced screws in the panel. Con-
nect the speedometer and tachometer drive cables to the speedometer
and tachometer heads at the rear of the panel.
d. Replacement.
( 1) REMOVAL. Disconnect the speedometer and tachometer drive
cables from the speedometer and t--hometer heads at the rear
234
TM 9.759
91-92
*e panel. Unscrew the three plug connector collars and pull the
ree plug connectors from their sockets. Remove the three nuts
and washers that secure the panel to the brackets and remove the
panel.
(2) INSTALLATION. Hold the instrument panel in position on
the brackets and install the three nuts and washers. Install the three
plug connectors in their proper sockets and tighten the three plug
connector collars. Connect the speedometer and tachometer drive
cables to the speedometer and tachometer heads at the rear of the
panel.
92. INSTRUMENTS.
a. Panel Unit Replacement. To remove any instruments,
switches, or devices, disassemble the instrument panel as outlined in
paragraphs 90 b or 91 b. Remove the hold-down screws from the
instrument and disconnect the wires. Lift the instrument from the
panel. To install the instrument, connect the wires to the instrument
and install the instrument in the panel. Assemble the instrument
.
panel as outlined in paragraphs 90 c or 91 c.
b. Sending Unit Replacement.
(1) SPEEDOMETER OR TACHOMETER DRIVE CABLE. Disconnect
e tachometer drive cable as outlined in paragraphs 90 b or 91 b.
"ull the cable (G104-17-89553) from the housing. If the cable is
broken and a portion remains in the housing, disconnect the housing
from the drive unit on the transmission (later-type vehicles) or from
the drive unit on the engine (early-type vehicles). Pull the remaining
portion of the drive cable from the housing and connect the housing
to the drive unit from which it was removed. Lubricate the new
drive cable and push it in the housing, and at the same time twist
the cable to permit an easy entry. Connect the drive cable housing
to the instrument panel as outlined in paragraphs 90 c or 91 c.
(2) WATER TEMPERATURE GAGE (ENGINE UNIT). Remove the
shield from the water temperature gage (A-297237) (engine unit)
(fig. 99). Disconnect the wire. Unscrew the unit from the radiator
inlet housing. To install the temperature gage (engine unit), screw it
into the radiator inlet housing. Connect the wire to the unit. Install
the shield on the unit.
(3) HIGH WATER TEMPERATURE OR BOIL SIGNAL GAGE (EN-
GINE UNIT). Remove the shield from the high water temperature
gage or boil signal (A-345789-A) (engine unit) (fig. 99). Disconnect
the wire from the unit and unscrew the unit from the radiator inlet
housing. To install the high water temperature or boil signal (engine
unit) screw it into the radiator inlet connection. Connect the wire
the unit and install the shield.
W - 235
TM 9.759
92
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
Ya f > 0
~~.
u.,u_~~
aa~~~~~~~~~
236I~ 0
>sA~~~~~~~I,
"· I~~I~r. it/ I 1
CU lX
23l
236
TM 9.759
92
z r
V
LU o
,,
u v _ < III
Isz--I °
u a : CK O _
<w > Z
o < tx-_ <le
C U0 a e OK
l l l l l i l l l l i I-l l
d.6= DY
V) u v v G
D LU
S13550 11 0-4S 23
TM 9.759
92
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
z u
- 0
\ZZi o
0
E
i o °
28 "
Ln
' m
238~~~~~~~~
238 8
TM 9.759
92
* o
I - L J7
UI U(
Z , Vu
_ 0£~ tE 0
0 0, oZ
0
_< Z 0 Z U u
O Z UL
3o
X II I I
_ Z _ D E - R
_
SIZO W V239
TM 9.759
92
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
(4) OIL PRESSURE GAGE (ENGINE UNIT).

(a) Early-type Vehicles. The oil pressure gage (A-297238) and
the low oil pressure gage (engine units) are mounted side by side,
just inside and to the right of the engine compartment rear door.
The pressure unit can be identified from the low oil pressure unit
as it is mounted vertically. To remove the unit, remove the shield
from the unit and disconnect the wire. Unscrew the unit from the
bracket. To install, attach the unit to the bracket. Connect the wire
to the unit and install the shield.
(b) Later-type Vehicles. The oil pressure gage on the later-type
vehicles is the unit located on the right-hand side of the engine
below the exhaust manifold and nearest to the fighting compartment
bulkhead. To remove the unit, remove the shield and disconnect the
wire from the unit. Unscrew the unit from the engine. To install the
unit, screw it into the engine. Connect the wire to the unit and
install the shield.
(5) Low OIL PRESSURE GAGE (ENGINE UNIT).
(a) Early-type Vehicles. To replace the unit, follow the same
procedure as outlined in step (4) (a) above. The low oil pressure
gage (engine unit) (248045) and the pressure gage are moun
side by side, just inside and to the right of the engine comparti
rear door. The low oil pressure unit can be identified from_
pressure unit as it is mounted horizontally.
(b) Later-type Vehicles. The low oil pressure gage (engine
unit) on later-type vehicles is located on the right-hand side of the
engine below the exhaust manifold and to the rear of the oil pressure
unit. To replace the low oil pressure gage (engine unit) follow the
procedure as outlined in step (4) (b) above.
(6) OIL LEVEL GAGE. Tanks of current production are not
equipped with oil level gages. If, on an older vehicle, the engine unit
or gage becomes inoperative, disconnect it as follows:
(a) Disconnect the battery wire from the oil pressure gage to the
oil level gage on the instrument panel. Remove and discard the wire.
(b) Leave the oil level instrument panel gage mounted on the
instrument panel, and paint the face of the gage the same color as
the instrument panel.
(c) Remove from the engine oil pan oil level sending unit, the
two screws which hold the two halves of shielding together.
(d) Disconnect the wire from the terminal on the sending unit,
and the terminal box. Discard wires, shields, and screws.
240
TM 9.759
93-95
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
_ COMPASS.
a. A compass is located on the left sponson in the driver's com-
partment. A light is incorporated in the compass which is connected
in series with the instrument panel lights.
Section XX
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
94. DESCRIPTION.
a. A 24-volt electrical system is used in all M4A3 vehicles. The
instrument panel wiring diagram is shown in figures 101 and 102.
The wiring of the hull is shown in figures 103 and 104. The wiring
of the turret is shown in figures 105 through 108. The electrical
current is brought to the turret through a collector ring (figs. 105
through 108). An auxiliary generator, equipped with a small 2-cycle
engine, is provided to supply extra electrical power and aid in
charging the batteries.
-* BATTERIES.
a. Description (figs. 113 and 114). Two 12-volt storage bat-
teries (500908) are located either on the left sponson in the fighting
compartment or under the turret platform. The batteries are connected
in series, and provide 24-volt current by a direct and separate con-
nection between the batteries and the battery master switch. A
separate connection for the rear battery, only to the radio master
switch, provides 12-volt current for the radio equipment. On later
vehicles, a socket, located directly under the master switches, is
provided for plugging in a booster battery.
b). Replacement. Turn off both the battery and radio master
switches. Disconnect the battery cables at the batteries and remove
the hold-down bolts and hold-down brackets, remove the batteries.
To install the batteries, place them in the battery compartment.
Install the battery hold-down brackets and bolts, and connect the
battery cables.
c. Battery Heater Unit (fig. 121).
(1) DESCRIPTION. The battery heater unit is located on the
left sponson, directly under the auxiliary generator fuel tank. Earlier
models are not equipped with this unit. The battery heater unit is
Lnnected in series with the auxiliary generator and is used to heat
batteries for cold weather starting (par. 25 d).
W 241
TM 9-759
95
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
FRONT TERMINAL BOX

COMPARTMENT LIGHT
BLACKOUT DRIVING LIGHT LIGHT
AND MARKER LIGHT
SIREN -* ) COMPARTMENT LIGHT
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BATTERY .-, ,/ /
RADIO
MASTER SWITCH /SIREN SWITCH T IADO
CENTER TERMINAL BOX BATTERIES TERMINAL BOX
AUXILIARY GENERATOR TRANSMISSION OIL
I, \~ S,;\
'TEMPERATURE GAGE
STOP LIGHT SWITCH
', RADIO MASTER SWITCH
AUXILIARY GENERATOR
REGULATOR GENERATOR REGULATOR
GENERATOR j- CRANKING MOTOR
FUEL GAGE - '? ....
(TANK UNIT) (DEGA
- i'.' . Y AFUEL CUT-OFF (DEGASO
isf / \SGENERATOR
'' '· MAGNETOS .
2:' -.-FUEL GAGE (TANK UNIT)
WATER BOIL SIGNAL

(RADIATOR UNIT)
WATER TEMPERATURE GAGE
(RADIATOR UNIT \ BLACKOUT TAIL AND BLACKOUT STOP LIGHT
REAR TERMINAL BOX
OIL PRESSURE GAGE

LOW OIL PRESSURE GAGE
SERVICE STOP, SERVICE TAIL AND BLACKOUT TAILLIGHT
RA PD 329313
Figure 103-Hull Electrical System 175-mm Dry Stowage Vehi@

242
TM 9-759
95
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
BLACKOUT DRIVING LIGHT

SIREN - BLACKOUT DRIVING

LIGHT RESISTOR
COMPASS
SIREN SWITCH
INSTRUMENT PANEL
COMPARTMENT LIGHT MARKER LIGHTND
BLOWER
MASTER SWITCH BOX g o k [ 2 BATTERY MASTER SWITCH
GENERATOR
REGULATOR
RADIO MASTER SWITCH
BATTERIES
COMPARTMENT SOCKET
LIGHT
E
AUXILIARY X ~ ~ f
'
WER BOTERMINAL
BOX
GENERATOR
REGULATOR ENGINE EMERGENCY
O I GENERATOR BATTERY HEAT SWITCH

_COIL ~./j , REAR TERMINAL BOX
i / /, LOW OILPRESSURE
JUNCTION BOX// GAGE (ENGINE UNIT)
FUEL GAGE (TANK UNIT PRESSURE GAGE
(ENGINE UNIT)
WATER TEMPERATURE I
AND BOIL SIGNAL
BLACKOUT TAILLIGHT
MAGNETOR
RA PO 329315
104-Hull Electrical System 175-mm Wet Stowage. 16-mm,

and 105-mm Howitzer Vehicles)
243
TM 9.759
95
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3 i
SPOT LIGHT
COMPARTMENT LIGHT
UTILITY OUTLET
CAL. .30 CMPARTMENT

GUN SOLENOID LIGHTS
BLOWER
TURRET
105-MM.
GUN SOLENOID ]
TIMING RELAY
FOOT FIRING SWITCHES
SPOT-
COLLECTOR RING LIGHT
REEL
RADIO TERMINAL BOX
RA PD 329394-
Figure 105 Turret Electrical System 105-mm Howitzer Vehi

244
TM 9-759
95
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SPOT LIGHT
UTILITY OUTLET
BLOWER STABILIZER CONTROL BOX
COMPARTMENT LIGHT
CAL. .30 FIRING SOLENOID

TIMING RELAY DISENA
RECOIL SWITCH S
75-MM. ELECTRICAL
HAND FIRING
F75-MM. FIRING SOLENOID ADAPTER FO g

TURRET MOTOR - [l
TURRET CONTROL BOREEL
75.MM. FOOT FIRING SWITCH SPOTLIGHT REEL
CAL. .30 FOOT FIRING SWITCH i, STABILIZER
RADIO TERMINAL BOX

COLLECTOR RING
RA PD 32931&
Figure 106-Turref Electrical System 175-mm Wet Stowage

Vehicles I
245
TM 9.759
95
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
SPOTLIGHT
UTILITY OUTLET
/COMPARTMENT LIGHTS
COMPARTMENTLIGHTS J ADAPTER FOR SPOTLIGHT
SPOTLIGHT REEL
ANTI BACKLASH
SWITCH
TURRET CON-
ABLO ER MM ELETROL
BOX
RECOIL SWITCH .
.30 CAL HAND RING TRIGGER

SOLENOID
76-MM. FIRING
SOLENOID
GYRO STABILIZER
TIMING RELAY
STABILIZER PUMP MOTOR
RADIO T OIL PUMP

HAND FIRINIZER
STABILIZER OIL PUMP
COLLECTOR RING
RA PD 329S92
Figure 107--Turret Electrical System 176-mm Vehiclesl

246
TM 9.759
95-96
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SPOT LIGHT
GUN STABILIZER CONTROL BOX
COMPARTMENT LIGHT
RECOIL SWITCH
SWITCH
SPOTLIGHT ADAPTER
75-MM.
CAL..30 FIRING FIRING
SOLENOID SOLENOID TURRET
CONTROL
TURRET MOTORBOX
GYRO STABILIZER
REEL

RADIO TERMINAL BOX
COLLECTOR RING=
RA PD 329314
Figure 108-Turret Electrical System 175-mm Dry Stowage

Vehicles)
(2) REPLACEMENT. Remove the six screws holding the unit in

the heater compartment. Remove the wire connections from the
terminal posts and remove the unit (fig. 121). To install the coil,
place it in position and connect the two wires to the coil and fasten
the coil to the sponson with the six screws.
96. MASTER SWITCHES.
a. Battery Master Switch (figs. 113 and 115). The battery
master switch (G103-17-93680) is located either to the left of the
er on the left sponson, or on top of the battery box under the
_W~~~ ~~247
TM 9.759
96
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
#18-BLACK
TO GYRO
TO DISENGAGING SWITCH
TOGYRO#18-RED
#18-YELLOW \#18-BLACK TO STABILIZER
'"O \ SWITCH IN TURRET CONTROL BOX
T Y#18-GREO #18-RED TO DISENGAGING SWITCH
TO GYRO
#18-RED
TO GYRO
GUN
~BOX .. / jE8-YELLOW
1
I ,= }r_( . a; {1
' . . j+! TO PUMP
TO PUMP
#18-WHITE TO X.. #18-WHITE TO PUMP

RECOIL SWITCH / I-= STIFFNESS RHEOSTAT
RECOIL RHEOSTAT RESISTER WARNING LIGHT RESISTER
STABILIZER SWITCH
SWITCHTCH \
FIRING SWITCH
GUN FIRING #18-BLACK TO GUN STABILIZER CONTROL
Bo
GUN
.5 MFD CONDENSER
GUN FIRING #14-BLUE TO .30-CAL.
WARNING LIGHT ' n n < GUN SOLENOID
CRt
REAED #1 #14-GRAY TO 75-MM.
/_. '~.~T._1/
#2-GAGEBLACK RGUN SOLENOID
TURRET
MOTOR SWITCH
TURRET MOTOR
STABILIZERM 4 TURRET CONTROL BOX

CIRCUIT BREAKER
GBLACK FOOT IRING SWITCH
GUN FIRING
#2-GAGE-BLACK FOOT WIRING SWITCH
TO COLLECTOR RING \ #14-RED FEED WIRE TO FOOT

GUN FIRING SWITCH
~ KEY -
|#14, #18, ETC.-WIRE SIZE
RA PD 329516
Figure 109--Gun Firing Circuit 175-mm Dry Stowage Vehi*

248
TM 9.759
96
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
#131 YELLOW /131 YELLOW

TO GYRO TO OIL PUMP
#128 RED \ #128 RED TO
TO GYRO \| DISENGAGE SWITCH
TO2 YELW\_X % #127 RED TO

DISENGAGE SWITCH
#129 BLACK TO
RECOIL SWITCH
#130 YELLOW TO
RECOIL SWITCH #,-/126BLACK TO
STABILIZER SWITCH
#132 GREEN / I I IN TURRET
TC GYRO -1 ^ ll 3 aX
'nC,\-a d / I CONTROL BOX
TC
~'~;.e'f~
. -- '~ --
~..~Z' / ,// II-.,130 YELLOW
RECOIL RHEOSTAT e O OIL PUMP
INSIDE OF COVER/ oSTIFFNESS RHEOSTAT

#1,26 TO STABILIZER CONTROL BOX
GUN FIRING SWITCH - M
STABILIZER SWITCH MFD CONDENSER
FIRING#UN
W/118 TO TIMER RELAY
NFIRING WARNING _#117 to 75-MM SOLENOID
117 TO HAND 130 TO .30-CAL. SOLENOID
FIRING SWITCH
#119 TO HAND
CIRCUIT BREAKER
TURRET MOTOR SWITCH

V#116 TO FOOT FIRING
SWITCH .30 CAL.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS[ #120 TO FOOT FIRING
SWITCH 75-MM.
#100 TO COLLECTOR RING '-- R#114
TO FOOT FIRING
i112 TO TURRET MOTOR SWITCHES
- KEY -
#100-WIRE ....... 2...
2-GAGE .#126-WIRE ........... 18-GAGE
#112-WIRE ....... 2-GAGE #1 27-WIRE ......... 1 8-GAGE
#114-WIRE ............ 14-GAGE #128-WIRE .......... 18-GAGE
#116-WIRE ... . .14-GAGE #129-WIRE ...... 18-GAGE
#1 17-WIRE
..... ....... 14-GAGE #130-WIRE . ..... I 4-GAGE
#11 8-WIRE ........ 18-GAGE /#131-WIRE .......... 18-GAGE
#1 19-WIRE ........... 4-GAGE /#132-WIRE ......... 8-GAGE
#1 20-WIRE ..... 1.4-GAGE
RA PD 329S17
O re 110--Gun Firing Circuit 175-mm Wet Stowage Vehicles)

249
TM 9.759
96
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3 O
I °F
I
W
= ~ o 0
II 0 cc
= c g
< < O VL
uu Q C a = JZ Z ur .U
00 00 0 0L ~
co _ o o/
°°c2
000000 z-u,z<
Y,,0 0
\'\V
4
1 ix
11
[~~~~~~~-
0000~~~~~~~~~~
< °°-MZZ m\>yA

Zy ° °
0000
nl neru La~
I - \z-E o
r9
Z ~~ ~
_/~~Z IU
,-250 at~ ~
-,-
<) o IIIV)OP
o o z T ° °-*-D-. V
I.
UV~~~eo0
0~~ 0 0) 0 000m Y
In '~-o zz z _~~~~~ _ W
.< o o
tccuOO~~~25 0,, 0 04
C. F.- ~,o. W~
0 W~~$
TM 9-759
96
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
O N FIRING WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT BREAKER

#1 18 TO 105-MM GUN
FIRING SOLENOID
#120 TO 30 CAL.
# 20 TO 30 CAL FOGUN FIRING
0CA.GUN FIRING
IG SOLENOID
SWITCH
R1 16 TO 105-MM
GUN RELAY
COLR/ #100 TO COLLECTOR RING

/ 114 FEED WIRE TO FOOT FIRING SWITCH
igr/ #116 TO105 GUN FOOT FIRING SWITCH
#120 TO 30 CAL. FOOT FIRING SWITCH
j 0 CAL. GUN FIRING SOLENOID
105 GUN FIRING

TIMING RELAY SOLENOID
105 GUN
FIRING SWITCH
.30-CAL. GUN
FIRING SWITCH
-KEY -
#1 14-WIRE....1 4-GAGE
#116-WIRE....1 8-GAGE
I#118'WIRE ... 14-GAGE
#120-WIRE .. .14-GAGE
COLLECTOR RING
RA PD 329511
gure 112--Gun Firing Circuif 1105-mm Howifzer Vehicles)

251
TM 9.759
96
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
BATTERY MASTER SWIT

BATTERY BOX
AUXIUARY GENERATOR REGULATOR RADIO MASTER SWITCH
L.H. GENERATOR REGULATOR BATTERIES

R. H. GENERATOR REGULATOR
RA PD 329519
Figure 113-Batteries on Floor (Early Vehicles)
turret platform. When this switch is "OFF," all electrical power is

shut off at the battery (with the exception of the power used by the
radio, which is controlled by a separate radio master switch).
b. Radio Master Switch (figs. 113 and 115). The radio master
switch is located either below or alongside the battery master switch.
This switch is on when the knob is all the way in. To turn the
switch off, pull b/4
the knob out inch and turn it so that the knob
stays out.
c. Replacement (Either Switch). Disconnect the positive (+)

battery terminal at the battery. Remove the four screws from the
master switch box cover, and remove the cover. Remove the cable
and wire connections from the switch. Remove the screws holding
the switch to the switch box, and remove the switch. To install either
switch in the master switch box, fasten the switch to the box with
four screws. Attach the cables and wire connections to the swit
Secure the cover to the switch box with four screws.
252
TM 9-759
97
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
BATIERIES RA PD 329230
Figure 114-Batteries on Sponson (Later Vehicles)
97. HEADIUGHTS.
a. General. The front slope of the vehicle mounts either two
service headlight and blackout marker light combinations (G104-16-
11515), or one blackout headlight (G104-16-11516), all of which
are controlled by the light switch on the instrument panel. When
changing from one type to the other, pull out the headlight lock
(fig. 7) and turn it 1,/4turn. The light assembly can then be lifted out.
When neither the service headlights nor the blackout headlight are
used, be sure to insert the plug provided for this purpose into the
socket to protect the terminals. A wiring diagram of the light circuit
is shown in figures 47 and 49.
Ih. Serv-ice Headlighllts.
(1) DESCRIPTION. The service headlights are used when there
is a possibility that illumination ahead can be used with safety, and
permit immediate change to blackout marker lights. The service
headlight reflectors. however, can pick up and reflect back other
ts, and under certain condition" the service headlights should
551::,,)--4 -- 17 253
TM 9.759
97
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3

CIRCUIT BREAKER
RESET BUTTON S GENERATOR REGULA1W
b
RADIO MASTER CRANKING MOTOR RELAY

SWITCH BOOSTER BATTERY OUTLET RA PD 329246
Figure 115-Location of Master Switches (Later Vehiclesl
be removed. The service headlight uses a sealed beam, 24-volt,

single-filament lamp. The blackout marker light, mounted on top
of the service headlight, uses a single-contact, 24-volt, bayonet-base,
3-candlepower lamp.
(2) SERVICE HEADLIGHT LAMP-UNIT REPLACEMENT. Remove
the headlight from the vehicle. Remove the screw that holds the lens
frame to the body of the headlight and remove the frame. Discon-
nect the sealed beam lamp-unit (G104-18-19407), and lift it out of
the headlight body. To install the lamp-unit, connect the wires and
install the lamp and lens frame on the headlamp body.
254
TM 9.759
97-99
. (3)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
BLACKOUT MARKER LAMP REPLACEMENT. Remove the

headlight from the vehicle. Remove the screw that holds the lens
frame to the headlight body, and remove the frame. Press the lamp
(M001-02-13295) in and turn it slightly counterclockwise, then pull
the lamp out of the socket. To install the lamp, press into the socket,
and turn it clockwise. Install the lens frame on the blackout marker
light body. . :
c. Blackout Headllight.
(1) DESCRIPTION. The blackout headlight throws a thin flat
beam of light that cannot be seen from high above, yet provides
enough illumination to permit the driver to avoid most obstacles.
The lamp is of the sealed-beam type with only a narrow strip of the
lens exposed, and a hood at the top. The lamp is 6-volt, 10-candle-
power. A resistor is included in series in the circuit that permits this
6-volt lamp to be used in a 24-volt system.
(2) BLACKOUT HEADLIGHT LAMP-UNIT REPLACEMENT. Remove
the screw that holds the lens frame to the blackout headlight body,
and remove the frame. Unhook the six wire retainers with a screw-
driver. Lift the lamp-unit (M001-01-07347) from the blackout
headlight body, and disconnect the wires. To install the lamp-unit,
_onnect the wires and place the lamp in the blackout headlight body.
tall the six wire retainers and the lens frame.
TAILLIGHTS.
a. Description. Two taillights and bracket assemblies (G104-
16-71650) (left) and (G104-16-71649) (right) are mounted on the
rear of the vehicle, one on each side. The lamps in the two taillights
are operated by the light switch on the instrument panel. Each tail-
light consists of two sealed-beam units, having pronged-type electrical
connections to the filaments. The two sealed-beam units for each
light are held in place by a frame, attached to the metal housing or
body of the light with a screw. The taillights have two filaments
each. One is used for service under ordinary conditions, and the
other for blackout driving. Earlier models were equipped with a stop
light, operated by switches connected to the steering levers.
1h. Taillight Sealed Beam Lamp-l nit Replacement. Turn the
battery master switch off. Remove the screw attaching the lens
frame to the body of the taillight, and remove the frame. Pull the
lamp-unit (G104-18-19404) straight out to remove it. To install the
lamp-unit, push it in the socket. and install the lens frame.
99. UTILITY SOCKET1S.

a. Description. Several utility sockets without switches are
rovided to provide an electrical outlet to operate windshield wiper,
pection lamp, etc. While no switches are provided for these
255
TM 9.759
99-101
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
sockets, they are in series with the battery master switch which
be turned on before current is available. The following is only a
general procedure for replacing defective sockets. A wiring diagram
of the turret light circuit is shown in figures 51 and 53.
1b. Replacement.
(1) Turn off battery master switch.
(2) Remove or loosen whatever is necessary to gain access to the
rear side of the socket.'
(3) Remove taps from wires leading to socket.
(4) Disconnect and tag wires.
(5) Remove lock nut from socket and remove socket.
100. COMPARTMENT LIGIHTS.

a. General. Compartment lights are provided on the ceiling
in the turret and in the driver and assistant driver's compartment.
Each light is provided with its own toggle switch. However, the
lights are in series with the battery master switch which must be
"ON" before the lights can be turned on. These lights are equipped
with a 24-volt. 3-candlepower, bayonet base lamp. A wiring diagram
of the hull light circuit is shown in figures 47 and 49. The tur
light circuit is shown in figures 50 and 51.
1. Removal.
(1) Remove the two screws that hold the bezel in place and
remove the bezel and lens.
(2) Push the lamp (M001-02-13295) in. turn it slightly counter-
clockwise, and withdraw the lamp.
c. Installation. Fasten the lamp in the socket. Install the bezel

and lens in place. Install the two screws holding the bezel and lens.
101. CONDI TIT AND CABLES.

a. Description. Two objectives are achieved by the use of
flexible and rigid metal conduit and junction boxes over the high-
and low-tension automotive wire used in these vehicles. The conduit
protects the insulation of the wire against wear and abrasion, and
it is oil- and waterproof. Radio interference is cut to a minimum be-
cause the conduit and junction box provide a continuous grounded
circuit over the entire wiring system.
hl. Replacement.
(1) CONDUIT REPLACEMENT. Dented or cracked conduits, or
conduits with damaged couplings, must be replaced. Flexible O
c256
TM 9-759
101.102
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
_ SPOTLIGHT HANDLE
SPOTLIGHT
HANDLE VENTILATING FAN MOTOR
COMPARTMENT LIGHT VENTILATING FAN SWITCH
1blN
UTILITY SOCKET RA PD 329520
Figure 116-Typical Compartment Light
tions of a conduit which have become frayed must be replaced. The

main conduits are made up in sections and, in most cases, they can be
replaced without disturbing undamaged sections.
(2) WIRE REPLACEMENT. In most cases, replacement of wires
can be made without the necessity of removing the conduit from the
vehicle. Remove the terminals from the defective wire, solder a piece
of fish wire, longer than the conduit, to the end of the wire to be
replaced. Pull the defective wire out of the conduit, pulling the fish
wire in through the conduit at the same time. Cut a new piece of
wire the same color and size as the one removed. Solder one end of
the new wire to the fish wire. Rub wires with soapstone, to make
pulling easier and to prevent jamming. Pull the fish wire back
through the conduit, pulling the new wire or wires in place.
102. (;ENER A,1OR!R.

a. I)eseriltion. On the early models, two generators
(D-524488-D) are used. Each of the generators are mounted on an
accessory drive housing on each side of the engine compartment. On
the later models, one generator is used and is bracket mounted on
rear of the transmission. This type of generator is belt driven
257
TM 9-759
102
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
r.
0
O
ACCESSORY DRIVE HOUSING GENERATOR TERMINAL BOX

GENERATOR RA PD 329,
Figure 117-Generators (75-mm Dry Stowage Vehiclesl)
from the propeller shaft as shown in figure 119. Each generator has a
30-volt, 50 ampere capacity and is equipped with a generator regu-
lator for current control. A radio interference filter is provided for
each generator. This filter is located in, and is a part of each genera-
tor regulator. A separate wiring diagram covering the generator system
is covered in figures 34 and 36.
,1. Belt Adjustment. The generator belts No. B-298181 are
adjusted correctly when they have '/2-inch maximum movement
midway between pulleys. To adjust the belts, loosen the lock nut on
the generator belt adjustment bolt (fig. 118). Turn the bolt counter-
clockwise to loosen the belts, and clockwise to tighten the belts.
Tighten the lock nut after the adjustment is made.
C. C,enerator Rel)lacement.
(1) REMOVAL. Remove the cover from the generator terminal
box (fig. 118). Disconnect the field and armature terminals, on later
models disconnect the ground wire at the generator. Remove the
screws holding the terminal box to the generator and lift off the
terminal box, wires, and conduit. Remove the bolts holding the
generator to the mounting bracket or accessory drive housing and
remove the generator.
258
TM 9.759
102-103
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
- GENERATOR DRIVE BELT

ADJUSTMENT BOLT GENERATOR ARMATURE WIRE
iII_
FIELD WIRE GROUND WIRE

RA PD 329244
Figure 118--Generator Belt Adjustment and Generator Terminal

Box ILater Vehicles)
(2) INSTALLATION. Install the generator on the mounting

bracket or accessory drive housing. Install the 'generator terminal
box, conduit and wires to the generator. Connect the field and
armature leads to the generator, on later models connect the ground
wire to the generator. Install the terminal box cover. On the later
models, adjust the drive belt to one-half inch free play.
103. CIRCUIT BREAKERS.

a. Description. All circuits in the vehicle are protected by
circuit breakers, thus eliminating fuses. On the early vehicles, the
generator circuit breaker is located in the terminal box of each gen-
erator. On the later vehicles, a circuit breaker is located in the master
itch box. The instrument panel has a number of circuit breaker
ylttons (figs. 101 and 102) which control the fuel cut-off circuit,
259
TM 9.759
103-104
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
GENERATOR DRIVE BEI.

GROUND WIRE GENERATOR
PROPELLER SHAFT GENERATOR DRIVE BELT FRONT UNIVERSAL JOINT

ADJUSTMENT BOLT
RA PD 329243
Figure 119-Generator and Drive Belts As Viewed From Escape

Door in Hull Floor (Later Vehiclesl
light circuit, accessory circuit, and instrument circuit. The turret

circuit breakers are located in the turret switch box (figs. 105 through
108), and control the firing solenoids, compartment lights, utility
plug, hydraulic pump motor, and radio circuit.
h. Replacement. The circuit breakers are accessible for replace-
ment after the cover or panel on which they are mounted is removed.
104. GENERATOR REGULATOR.

a. Description. A generator regulator (M001-70-00061)
provided for each generator. The generator regulator (fig. 120) i
260
TM 9-759
104
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
AUXILIARY GENERATOR
AXLREGULATOR RIGHT-HAND GENERATOR REGULATOR
RA PD 27413
LEFT-HAND GENERATOR REGULATOR
ure 120-Generator Regulators 175-mm Dry Stowage Vehicles)
RA PD 329528
Figure 121-Battery Heater Unit

the three-unit type which includes a voltage regulator, current limi-
tator, and a reverse-current relay or cut-out.
(1) The voltage regulator unit maintains the output of the
erator at a constant predetermined voltage of 30 volts.
261
TM 9-759
104-105
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
(2) The current limitator automatically varies the output of 4

generator in accordance with the state of charge of the battery a
the amount of current being used throughout the vehicle. Thus the
proper charge is delivered to the battery at all times without danger
of overcharging. The current limitator unit limits the maximum
current output of the generator to 50 amperes.
(3) The reverse current relay or cutout prevents the battery
from discharging through the generator when the generator is at rest
or when it is not developing its normal voltage.
(4) Vehicles of early manufacture were equipped with Autolite
generator regulators marked "VAD4105A." When these become un-
serviceable, they should be replaced with VAD4106B or VAD4106C.
These two are equal electrically but VAD4106C is waterproof
whereas VAD4106B is not.
I). Rellacemient. To remove the generator regulator, disconnect

the battery ground cable at the battery. Disconnect all wires from
the regulator teminals. Remove the conduit connection and wires
from the regulator. Remove the four screws holding the regulator to
the vehicle and remove the regulator. To install the regulator, fasten
the regulator to the vehicle with the four screws. Install the conduit
and wires to the regulator. Connect the wires to the terminals. Ir
stall the terminal box cover. Connect the battery ground cable.
105. CRANKING MOTOR.

a. Description. A 24-volt cranking motor (G104-17-91851) is
mounted on the right-hand side of the flywheel housing. Its power is
transmitted to the engine through an automatic drive. When the
starter switch on the instrument panel is closed, a relay switch, lo-
cated in the battery master switch box (figs. 115 and 122), closes the
electrical circuit of the cranking motor. Rotation of the cranking
motor shaft causes the pinion of the automatic drive to advance and
mesh with the flywheel ring gear. After the engine starts and the
flywheel speed exceeds that of the cranking motor, the pinion releases
from the flywheel automatically. The cranking motor bearings do
not require lubricating. A wiring diagram of the starting circuit is
shown in figures 38 and 39.
!). Replacement. Turn off the battery master switch. Discon-

nect the cable from the cranking motor. Remove the engine com-
partment floor plate. Remove the two nuts and one bolt which hold
the cranking motor to the crankcase flange and remove the cranking
motor. To install the cranking motor to the crankcase flange, install
the two nuts and one bolt to fasten the cranking motor to thr crank-
262
TM 9-759
105-106
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
RADIO MASTER SWITCH

AMMETER SHUNT WIRE TO STARTER BUTTON
ATTERY MASTER SWITCH
RESETBUTTON FOR GUN SOLENOID
CIRCUIT BREAKER
GUN SOLENOID CIRCUIT BREAKER , . ,
RL.Ye
Y TO MASTER SWITCH CABLE CRANKING MOTOR RELAY

CABLE TO CRANKING MOTOR RA PD 329521
Figure 122-Cranking Motor Relay (Early Vehicles)
case flange. Connect the cable to the cranking motor. Install the
engine compartment floor plate.
106. CRANKING MOTOR RELAY.

a. Description. The entire circuit from the battery to the crank-
ing motor requires heavy cables, due to the large amount of current
used. In order to avoid running the heavy cables to the instrument
panel, a relay is installed in the cranking motor circuit. This relay
closes manually when the starter switch on the instrument panel is
closed. The cranking motor relay (figs. 115 and 122) is mounted in
the battery master switch box.
h. Replacement. Disconnect the ground cable at the battery,
remove the master switch box cover. Disconnect the cables and
wires from the cranking motor relay. Remove the screws holding the
relay to the master switch box and remove the relay. To install the
cranking motor relay in the master switch box, connect the cables
and wires to the relay in their proper places. Install the master
Pitch box cover. Connect the ground cable to the battery.
O 263
TM 9-759
107-108
TANK. MEDIUM, M4A3
107. HORN OR SIREN.

a. Description. A horn or siren is mounted on the left front side
of the front slope of the hull (figs. 2 through 5), and is operated by
a horn button mounted on the right-hand steering lever (fig. 7). In
earlier models the button is operated by the left foot and is bracket
mounted above the clutch pedal. The horn or siren circuit is shown
in figures 47 and 49.
h. Horn or Siren Button Replacement. Turn off the battery
master switch. Remove the four screws from the siren button cover
and remove the cover. Remove the two screws holding the switch
wires and bend the wires back. Remove the screw that holds the
switch to the siren button housing and remove the switch. In earlier
models, remove the two screws holding the switch to the bracket. To
install horn or siren button, position the siren button switch in the
switch housing and install the screw in the top of the switch. Connect
the two wires to the switch and install the cover and four screws.
c. Horn or Siren Replacement. Disconnect the conduit coupling
on the inside of the hull leading from the horn or siren, and remove
the wire from the bullet connection. Remove the two cap screws that
secure the horn or siren to the hull. Remove the conduit connectio_
on the outside of the hull and lift off the horn or siren. To inst e
position the horn on siren to the hull with two cap screws. Insert W
wire from the horn or siren through the coupling in the hull and fasten
the coupling in the hull and fasten the coupling on the outside of the
vehicle. Attach the bullet connection to the horn or siren wire on the
inside of the hull. Fasten both ends of the bullet connection together
and connect conduit couplings.
108. WINDSHIELD WIPER.

a. Description. The driver's compartment windshield wiper
(fig. 123) is of the electric type, mounted on the windshield frame
above the glass. It is turned on and off by the upper of the two toggle
switches, located on the lower left-hand corner of the windshield
frame. An extension from the windshield wiper motor, when plugged
into a utility outlet on the instrument panel, furnishes the current.
h. Replacement. Unhook the wiper blade and remove the hold-
ing screw just above the wiper arm hinge. Pry the wiper arm off the
shaft. Unscrew the nut on the center of the shaft and remove the nut
and collar. Remove the nut from the upper shaft. Remove the rub-
ber washer and the retainer. Remove the two bolts and nuts on each
side of the wiper body on the inside of the frame. Disconnect _
264 _
TM 9-759
108-109
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
.OO D WINDSHIELD WIPER
Adm WING NUT
DEFROSTER
RESISTANCE
WIPER SWITCH WIRES
DEFROSTER
SWITCH --
RA PD 27402
.eews Figure 123-Windshield Wiper
from the wiper motor and remove the motor. To install the
per motor in the frame, install the two bolts and nuts. Install the
locking nut, rubber washer and retainer. Slide the wiper arm hinge
on the end of the motor shaft and tighten the screw in the center of
the hinge. Install the wiper blade.
109. DEFROSTER.
a. Description. The defroster is of the electric type, consisting

of resistance wire placed between the double glass of the windshield.
The defroster is turned on and off by one of the two toggle switches
located either in the lower left-hand corner of the windshield frame,
or above the windshield.
h. Replacement. Disconnect the two wires from the windshield

wiper motor. Remove the screws from the front of the windshield
frame and lift out the windshield glasses, defroster, and switches. Re-
move the defroster element. To install the defroster, place it between
the windshield glasses. Install the assembly in the frame. Install the
front frame and the screws. Connect the wires to the windshield
wiper motor.
265
TM 9-759
110
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
Section XXI 0
CLUTCH, PROPELLER SHAFTS, AND UNIVERSAL
JOINTS
I 10. CLI 1' H.

a. D)escription (fig. 126). The clutch is of the double-disk type,
and is composed of three major units-the pressure plate assembly,
the center plate, and the two driven plates or disks. The two driven
plates have friction facing riveted on each side. The release fork and
the release levers are mounted on needle roller bearings. On the
later model vehicles a clutch booster is provided to reduce the stiff-
ness in the clutch pedal (figs. 124 and 125).
I,. Pedal Stroke Adjustment (fig. 127). Set the pedal stroke
adjusting stop screw so that the highest point of the clutch pedal pad
is 15,14 inches (plus or minus %'8 in.) from the hull floor.
c. Clutch Pedal Rod Adjustment (fig. 127). Check the length
of the rod running from the clutch pedal to the cross shaft dimension
(A, fig. 127) and readjust its length if necessary. This rod shoulc
be 183i4 inches long, measured frorr. he center of one clevis pin hci
to the other. This measurement applies to wet stowage and 105-rl_
howitzer vehicles; on dry stowage 75-mm vehicles this rod should be
15 1.'4 inches long. If this length is not held to the above measure-
ments, the angle of the levers on the cross shaft will be changed, and
this will affect the operation of the clutch pedal.
dl. Free Travel of Clutch Pedal Adjustment. The free travel
of the clutch pedal is determined by the clearance between the clutch
release bearing and the clutch release fork. Clearance must exist
between these parts at all times, otherwise, the clutch will slip and
burn out. (Driving with the foot on the clutch pedal takes up this
clearance with the same result.) As the clutch disk facings become
worn, the pedal free travel decreases. If the vehicle is not equipped
with a clutch booster and the free travel of the pedal drops to less
than 2V/2 inches measured at the pedal pad, it must be adjusted to
3 inches. If the vehicle is equipped with a clutch booster, the free
travel of the pedal must be maintained at 27/8 inches at all times.
The adjustment is made by lengthening or shortening the rod con-
necting the clutch cross shaft to the front end of this rod (fig. 127).
Backing off the adjusting screw increases, and screwing in the adjust-
ing screw decreases the free play of the pedal. If the correct free play
cannot be obtained by this adjustment, the clutch plates are worn
and must be replaced. 266
266 _
TM 9-759
110
CLUTCH, PROPELLER SHAFTS, AND UNIVERSAL JOINTS
ADJUSTMENT BOLT ADJUSTMENT BOLT LOCK NUT
SLIDING BRACKET SET SCRFWS COVER

RA PD 329432
Figure 124-Clutch Booster (75-mm Dry Stowage Vehiclesl
e. Adjustment If the Clutch Drags.

(1) GENERAL. If, after holding the pedal all the way down for
a few seconds, the gears clash when shifting into first or reverse gear,
the clutch is dragging. NOTE: There is a tendency for the clutch
driven shaft to turn over slowly when clutch is released. This is nor-
mal, and will not cause any noticeable clashing. Check the pedal
stroke adjustment (subpar. h above), and the free travel of pedal
adjustment (subpar. d above). If these adjustments are satisfactory,
check the adjustment of the three center drive plate travel limit
screws (fig. 129).
(2) PRELIMINARY STEPS. Remove the inspection plate from the
cover over the left side of the clutch housing (accessible from the
fighting compartment). Make sure the engine ignition switch is off.
urn the engine until one of the center drive plate limit screws ap
wars at the opening, as shown in figure 129.
267
TM 9.759
110
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
ADJUSTMENT BOLT
ADJUSTMENT BOLT LOCK NUT ROLLER WASHERS
BOOSTER SPRING ROLLER RA PD 32943
Figure 125-Clutch Booster (75-mm Wet Stowage, 76-mm, and

(3) CENTER DRIVE PLATE TRAVEL LIMIT ADJUSTMENT (fig.

129). With a screwdriver, turn the center drive plate travel limit ad-
justing screw in (clockwise) until it bottoms lightly, then turn it back
four notches (counterclockwise). Repeat the above procedure for the
two remaining adjusting screws. If this adjustment fails to correct the
trouble, repeat the adjustment, backing off the screws five notches
instead of four. If still unsatisfactory, it is probable that the center
plate is binding on the flywheel drive lugs, the pilot bearing in the
flywheel is binding, the clutch disk splined hubs are too tight on the
clutch shaft, or that the driven plates are warped, any one of which
will require the removal of the clutch (subpar. h below).
f. Adjustment If the Pedal Pressure Is Too Stiff. Check the

length of the clutch pedal to clutch cross shaft rod (measuring from
the center of one clevis hole to the other), and if incorrect, adjust to
approximately 183/4 inches on wet stowage and 105-mm howitzer
vehicles, and 151/4 inches on 75-mm dry stowage vehicles. If vehiclo
equipped with a clutch booster, replace the booster spring if
268
TM 9-759
110
LUTCH, PROPELLER SHAFTS, AND UNIVERSAL JOINTS
CENTER DRIVE PLATE CLUTCH DRIVEN

TRAVEL LIMIT PLATES (DISKS)
ADJUSTING SCREW 3 LONG END OF
CLUTCH h e ~ HUB TOWARD

~qk / mJ.FLYWHEEL
PRESSURE
CLUTCH
COVER
DRIVING LUG
SLOTS
CENTER DRIVE
CENTER DRIVE PLATE

INSTALL WITH LONG END OF _ RETRACTING SPRING
HUB AWAY FROM FLYWHEEL (3) TOWARD FLYWHEEL
RA PD 330842
Figure 126-Clutch
broken or weak or adjust the booster (subpar. g below). Make sure
that the linkage is not binding from lack of lubrication. Check the
positions of the levers at inner or outer end of clutch cross shaft to
make certain that they are not at too forward an angle. The index
mark on the right end lever of the cross shaft should be vertical at the
end of the clutch pedal free play. The other levers on the cross shaft
will be vertical in this pedal position.
g. Clutch Booster Replacement.
(1) REMOVAL. Boosters equipped with covers have the sliding
bracket set screws on top of the booster frame (fig. 124), boosters
without covers will have the sliding bracket below the frame (fig. 125).
Remove the two screws that secure the cover to the frame and re-
move the cover. Loosen the two cap screws that hold the adjustable
bracket to the booster frame. Loosen the adjustment bolt lock nut.
ck off the adjustment bolt until the spring is in a released position.
rWmove the booster spring and washers.
81:550 ()-4----18 269
TM 9-759
110
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
N 7-MM.DRY STORAGE VEHICLES ON WET STORAGE AND I05-MM.

|/~ ON
RY
' 75 MM. \ STHOWTZER VEHICLES
151iT(P e.\IS ADJUST CLUTCH

\~ .~. \ I_ leaf"y I PEDAL FREE
TRAVEL AT THIS
PEDAL STROKE ADJUSTMENT STOP SCREW
RA PD 329522
Figure 127-Clutch Pedal Linkage
CLUTCH RELEASE BEARING
ENGINE LIFTING EYE ,"
FRONT ENGINE
MOUNT
CLUTCH RELEASE FORK
THIS END OF CLUTCH SHAFT RUNS IN CLUTCH

PILOT BEARING IN CRANKSHAFT
RA PD 329523
Figure 128--Clutch Housing

(2) INSTALLATION. Place the booster spring in position between
the two rollers. Slide a washer between each roller and the booster
spring. Turn the adjusting bolt clockwise until 3/4 of the adjust /
bolt is entered into the frame. Tighten the adjustment bolt lockW
270
TM 9-759
110
pCLUTCH, PROPELLER SHAFTS, AND UNIVERSAL JOINTS
wghten the two bracket screws. Hold the cover in place and install
the two screws.
h. Clutch Replacement.
(1) REMOVAL. Remove the engine as outlined in paragraph 63.
Place the engine on a stand so that the front end will be supported
after the clutch housing is removed. Remove the cranking motor.
Remove the clutch housing (fig. 128) by removing the 12 flange nuts.
To hold the clutch springs compressed while the clutch pressure
plate is removed, use six 3/s-inch, 16-thread 1 /2-inch long cap screws,
screwing them into the holes in the pressure plate assembly until the
heads just bottom (fig. 130). Install the clutch pilot tool (41-T-
3083-75) to keep the clutch disk splines in alinement, and also to
prevent the clutch disks from falling. Remove the lock wire from
the 18 cap screws holding the pressure plate to the flywheel, and re-
move the cap screws and pressure plate. Remove the center drive
plate from the driving lugs in the flywheel.
(2) INSTALLATION.
a) Preliminary Steps. See that the friction surface of the fly-
l is smooth and clean. Any deposits on the friction surface must
Wsanded down, and the surface cleaned with dry-cleaning solvent.
If the clutch shaft pilot bearing is in good condition, repack it with
a high-melting point grease.
(b) Install Clutch Disks and Center Drive Plate. Place one
driven member (disk) in place with the long end of the hub toward
the flywheel (fig. 126). Insert the center drive plate with the re-
tractor spring (fig. 126) toward the flywheel, making sure the driving
lug slots fit freely on the driving lugs in the flywheel. Install the
center drive plate on the flywheel lugs. This will place the retractor
springs in line with the three openings in the flywheel nearest the
three dowel pins in the flywheel rim, and bring the springs in line
with the three adjusting screws in the pressure plate assembly. Using
the clutch pilot tool (41-T-3083-75) (fig. 130), slip it through the
splined hub of the disk and into the clutch shaft pilot bearing. Re-
move the handle from the pilot tool. Slip the second disk on the pilot
with the long end of its hub away from the flywheel. This alines both
driven members with each other and with the clutch shaft pilot bear-
ing, while the pressure plate assembly is being attached.
(c) Install the Clutch Pressure Plate. Install the clutch pressure
e assembly so that the dowel holes line up, and install the 18 cap
_W~~~~ ~~271
TM 9-759
110
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
CENTER DRIVE PLATE TRAVEL

LIMIT ADJUSTING SCREW
CLUTCH PRESSURE PLATE
CLUTCH HOUSING
RA PD 329524
Figure 129--nspection Plate Removed From Left Side of Clutch

Housing
screws which hold it to the flywheel. Wire the cap screws to prev
loosening. Start the wire at the cap screw nearest the clutch center
drive plate travel limit adjusting screw, and lock it with the next
nearest cap screw. Proceed with the next two until they all have
been locked together in pairs. Remove the six 3/s-inch cap screws
used to hold the pressure plate compressed (fig. 130).
(d) Adjust Center Drive Plate Travel Limit. Adjust the three
center drive plate travel limit adjusting screws (fig. 129) with a
screwdriver by turning clockwise until they bottom lightly, then turn
back four notches.
(e) Install Clutch Housing. Remove the clutch pilot tool. Install
the clutch housing. Install the cranking motor. Install the engine in
the vehicle (par. 64).
i. Clutch Release Bearing or Fork Replacement (fig. 128).

(1) REMOVAL. Remove the engine (par. 63). Remove the
clutch housing (subpar. h above). Disconnect the two springs which
hold the release bearing and fork in contact. Slide the release bea '
272
TM 9.759
110
NOTE RELATION OF RETRACTING SPRING TO DOWEL

BEFORE REMOVING CENTER,DRIVE PLATE
CLUTCH DISK SPLINES , ,.:. CLUTCH PRESSURE

CLUTCH_
s P,,LOI ~PLATE DOWEL (3)
CLUTCH
COVER '
. CENTER DRIVE PLATE

RETRACTING SPRING (3)
USE SIX /8-1NCH / 18 CAP SCREWS

BOLTS TO COMPRESS HOLD PRESSURE
CLUTCH SPRINGS CENTER DRIVE PLATE TO FLYWHEEL
LIMIT ADJUSTING SCREW (3)
RA PD 330850
Figure 130-Clutch With Clutch Housing Removed
off the hub. To remove the clutch fork, remove one lock ring on either
end of the shaft running through the clutch fork, and slide the shaft
out of the housing. Remove the fork from the housing.
(2) INSTALLATION (fig. 128). Place the clutch release fork in
the housing, and insert the clutch release shaft through the needle
roller bearings and fork. Place the snap ring retainer in the housing
at each end of the shaft. Slip the hub and bearing assembly over the
hub of the bearing retainer, and hook the two springs to the clutch
ase fork and the hub of the release bearing.
273
TM 9.759
110
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
By
C1
474 e
41I
~ur Zn y Z O Un
274 0
TM 9.759
111
WO PROPELLER SHAFTS AND UNIVERSAL JOINTS.

a. Propeller Shafts.
(1) DESCRIPTION (fig. 131). The. propeller shaft transmits
power from the engine in the rear of the vehicle to the transmission at
the front of the vehicle.
(2) REMOVAL. Remove the engine from the vehicle (par. 63).
Remove the escape hatch from the floor plate. If working on a 75-mm
dry stowage vehicle remove the eight cap screws and front universal
joint. Working through the opening in the floor plate, unscrew the
grease seal retainer at the front universal slip joint (fig. 131). Pull
the propeller shaft to the rear out of the "tunnel" (the front end of
the shaft will pull out of the slip joint in the front universal joint,
leaving the front universal on the transmission). If working on wet
stowage or 105-mm vehicles, loosen the generator belt adjustment
(par. 102 b). Remove the nuts from the front universal, and remove
the universal.
_3) INSTALLATION. Remove the front universal from the pro-

_ 'r shaft, and install it on the transmission. Slip the propeller
Wt in between the ammunition racks, and connect the front uni-
versal joint to the propeller shaft at the splined slip joint. Arrow
marks are placed on both the front and rear universal joints, and on
the propeller shaft. These arrows must be lined up before assembly
of the universal joint to the propeller shaft. This is to establish that
the front and rear universal joint yokes are in alinement to prevent
propeller shaft vibration. Screw the grease seal retainer cap (fig. 131)
on the front universal joint, making sure that the cork ring and the
snap ring washers are not damaged. If working on a 75-mm dry
stowage vehicle, install the front universal joint cover. If working on
wet stowage or 105-mm howitzer vehicles, adjust the generator belts
(par. 102 b). Reinstall the engine (par. 64), and bolt the rear uni-
versal joint to the clutch flange. Depress the clutch, and turn the pro-
peller shaft to install all the bolts.
h. Propeller Shaft Universal Joints.

(1) DESCRIPTION. Two universal joints are used with the pro-
peller shaft, one at each end. The front one is connected to the shaft
ugh a splined slip joint. The yoke for the rear universal joint is
o 275
TM 9-759
111
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
part of the shaft. Four needle roller bearings are used in eachW
versal joint. The bearings and the seals in the universal joints are the
parts most likely to wear out. Excessive bearing wear is indicated by
propeller shaft vibration. When vibration develops, notify higher
authority before the universal joints require replacement. Universal
joint bearings can be replaced by ordnance maintenance personnel
without removing the universal joints, if the need is detected in time.
thus saving the removal of the engine.
(2) PROPELLER SHAFT UNIVERSAL JOINT BEARING REPLACE-
MENT.
(a) Removal (fig. 131). To remove the bearings in the pro-

peller shaft universal joint front or rear, remove the escape hatch at
the forward end of the hull floor, if working on wet stowage or
105-mm howitzer vehicles. (This is necessary in order to work on
the forward universal joint.) If working on a 75-mm dry stowage
vehicle, remove the universal joint covers. Hold the clutch pedal
down, and have the transmission in neutral to free the propeller shaft,
turn the shaft until the universal joint lubrication fitting is accessibla
Remove the fitting. Remove the universal joint bearing cover
by bending down the locking ears and removing the bolts.
down the clutch pedal, and turn the propeller shaft one-half turn.
Remove the opposite bearing cover which now faces up. Using a
brass or copper drift, tap the bearing down until the trunnion forces
the bottom bearing to drop out. Hold the clutch pedal down, and
turn propeller shaft one-half turn. Drive the universal joint trunnion
down, using a brass or copper drift, until the other bearing is forced
out of the yoke. Follow the same procedure to remove the other
two bearings.
(b) Installation. Examine the cork seal and retainer of each
bearing, and replace it if necessary. Place the trunnion in the yoke,
and push it through the yoke so that the bearing can be set in place
on the trunnion, then drive the bearing lightly into the yoke on the
propeller shaft until the bearing is flush. Assemble the cover plate to
the slot in the bearing, and line up the bolt holes in the cover with
the holes in the yoke. Install the two cap screws and lock plate. Turn
the universal joint, and enter the opposite bearing on the trunnion.
Drive the bearing lightly into the yoke. Line up the slot in the be
ing and the cover, and install the cover. Bend up one ear of the
276
TM 9-759
111-112
UTCH, PROPELLER SHAFTS, AND UNIVERSAL JOINTS
RA PD 329526
Figure 132-Accessory Drive Shaft
plate against each of the cap screw heads (at each plate). Repeat
the procedure for the other two bearings. If working on a 75-mm
dry stowage vehicle, install the universal joint covers.
112. ACCESSORY DRIVE SHAFTS AND UNIVERSAL JOINTS.

a. Accessory Drive Shafts (fig. 132). The accessory drive shafts
provide a connection between the driving flange on the accessory
gear assembly at the rear of the engine and the flange on the acces-
sory drive housing, one on each side of the engine. To remove the
shaft, remove the four bolts from each flange.
b. Accessory Shaft Universal Joint (fig. 132). Two universal
joints are used on each shaft, one at each end. Four needle roller
bearings are provided in each universal joint. Accessory drive shafts
are supplied as an assembly with the universals in place.
c. Replacement. Disconnect the accessory drive shaft at the
ccessory drive housing. Disconnect the shaft at the engine and re-
ve the accessory shaft. To install the accessory shaft. connect the
ft to the engine and then to the accessory drive housing.
277
TM 9-759
113
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
Section XXII
POWER TRAIN ASSEMBLY
113. DESCRIPTION.
a. Power Train (fig. 133). The power train assembly conskits of
the transmission, differential, and final drives.
h. Transmission (fig. 133). The transmission has five forward
speeds and one reverse speed. The second, third, fourth, and fifth
gears are synchronized. The first and reverse gears are in constant
mesh, and are engaged by a sliding clutch.
c. Final Drive Assembly (fig. 133). There are two basic designs
of final drive housings; namely, the three-piece and one-piece types,
both of which are built with either the single-anchor or the double-
anchor brake. The new one-piece final drive housing with sharp con-
tour is made only with the double-anchor brake. This makes a total
of five different brake final drive combinations, all of which are inter-
changeable as complete units; that is, a one-piece final drive assembly
may be installed in place of a three-piece unit, and a final drive as-
sembly equipped with double-anchor brakes may be installed in place
of one equipped with single-anchor brakes, provided the proper lever
and linkage system is used. Before attempting to install a differ
type final drive assembly from the one with which the vehicle
originally equipped, pertinent TM's and SNL's should be consulteW
determine whether any change in the linkage is required. Steering
levers (figs. 135 and 137), with lugs both at front and rear on lower
end for attaching control rods, may be used with either single- or
double-anchor brakes. To avoid confusion, a final drive assembly,
with the same type brake and linkage system as that originally in-
stalled in the vehicle, should be used whenever possible.
d. Final Drive Assembly Lubrication Oil Cooler. Oil flows
from the differential through a tube to the sump in the bottom of the
transmission housing, where it is drawn into the pump and forced out
the left side of the transmission through a tube to the oil cooler as-
sembly located on the fighting compartment side of the bulkhead.
The oil enters at the bottom of the cooler, flows upward through a
by-pass tube to the outlet connection at the top of the cooler, and
returns through a tube to the final drive assembly. When the oil
reaches a temperature of 100°F, the by-pass valve closes, causing the
oil to flow upward through the oil cooler tubes. Air drawn through
the cooler by the engine fans reduces the temperature of the oil, then
it is returned to the final drive assembly to lubricate the gears in the
transmission, differential, and final reduction assemblies.
e. Final Drive Assembly Serial Number. The serial number
of the final drive assembly is stamped on a plate mounted or]
differential case directly over the transmission.
278
TM 9-759
113
- z -
II ,1 0 Z o
O,
n I- LU
O
H ' Q Z DU D
Q0
\' _I -
=
V, 0Z
E
tI
I 0=
° 0 Z
U i, a ,, LW Z -0
oU. .. ' I
IJ) 4 -- i .
ujY F O
279
zIm IL co J> Z'
cz _ LI-r -.- LL coc
LU j O
.-- I >. LU
,) t"-). t, , V
uw~~~~~27
TM 9.759
113
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
GEARSHIFT LEVER ,' -
LUBRICATION..
FITTING
GEARSHIFT LEVER SHAFT- FULCRUM YOKE
i-INSTALL GEARSHIFT LEVER SHAFT
_ i,(1-FULCRUM LINK
---- _FULCRUM LINK BOLT
2-INSTALL FULCRUM LINK BOLT
G-EARS- FULCRUM YOKE
LEVER BO'L
_~~ Z J FULCRUM BOLT
3-INSTALL FULCRUM BOLT RA PD 312480
Figure 134--Georshiff Lever Installation

280 0
TM 9.759
114-115
GEARSHIFT LEVER REPLACEMENT.

a. Remove the gearshift lever yoke bolt, fulcrum link bolt, and
the lever shaft, then lift off the gearshift lever (fig. 134). To install
the gearshift lever wipe the surface of the shaft clean and cover the
-earing surfaces, bolts, and shafts with engine oil. Position lever on
left side of the transmission, install gearshift lever shaft, fulcrum
link bolt, and fulcrum yoke bolt. Push the shaft in, and screw the nut
on inner end of the shaft. Apply lubricant gun to lubricating fitting,
and move gearshift lever back and forth while forcing the lubricant
into the fitting. Tighten the nuts so that the linkage moves freely
without excessive play, and install the cotter pins.
115. STEERING BRAKE SHOES.

a. General. There are two basic designs of steering brakes used
on medium tanks of the M4A3 series, namely the single- and double-
anclor types.
h. Single-anchor Type.
(1) DESCRIPTION. The single-anchor brake is a three-shoe, ex-
, ternal contracting, differential steering brake operating in oil (fig.

.. The brake actuating shaft serves the dual purpose of tightening
hoes on the drum for the application of the brake, and as an
or for the shoes to take the torque reaction of the system. The
single-anchor brake can be readily identified by the adjusting hole
screw plugs near the top center of each brake drum housing cover as
shown in figure 142. Note that the brake control rods are attached
to the rear lug at the lower end of the steering levers and that, as the
steering levers are pulled back, the control rods and brake actuating
shaft levers are pulled downward.
(2) REMOVAL.
(a) Drain Oil From the Steering Brake Housings. The drain
plugs (G-103-05-01680) are located at the bottom of the right and
left final drive housings accessible from the front of the vehicle.
(b) Disconnect Steering Rod From Brake Shaft Arm. Remove
the cotter pin from the clevis pin, and remove clevis pin connecting
steering rod and brake shaft arm.
(c) Remove Inspection Plate. Take out bolts holding inspec-
tion plate to steering brake housing and remove the plate.
.
(d) Remove Brake Shoes. Back the center adjustment beneath
shoes all the way off. Remove the cotter pin that passes through the
center lobe of the cam and link pin. Remove the brake adjusting nut,
rod forward through cam and remove washer and spring. For-
end of brake shoes will now be free. Insert screwdriver into
281
TM 9-759
115
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
z <
a
o I 11o~~~
, g
-_
qo°P
o8 . 0 L~~~8
k k o
0-
I · ,,, ,
41
282 0
TM 9-759
115
.lar POWER TRAIN ASSLMBLY
groove in inside end of pin connecting lower end of cam

and link, pry with screwdriver and slide pin out of inside end of cam.
Brake shoes are now free, and can be pulled out of housing from be-
neath brake drum. Attach long heavy wire to the brake shoes, then
pull the brake shoes beneath the drum, allowing the wire to follow
around the drum. It may be necessary to use a 4- or 5-foo* bar to
lift shoes over centering 'bolt. Repeat process' to remove shoes in
other housing.
(3) INSTALLATION.
(a) Install Brake Shoe Assembly. Check to see that the center-
ing adjustment is in place in steering brake housing, and if not, install
the centering bolt and nut. Attach a heavy wire to the rod end of the
brake shoe assembly. Pull the brake shoe around the brake drum.
Lift link end of shoe assembly into place, engage link and cam and
slip pin connecting link and cam into place from inside of cam, being
sure that end of pin with annular groove is on inside. Turn pin to
aline cotter pin holes in pin and cam, insert cotter pin and split ends
of pin. Reach over drum, slide spring and washer onto rod, slide rod
through pin in upper end of brake cam and screw brake adjusting
nut on rod. Adjust centering bolt to give 0.005-inch clearance between
bottom of drum and brake lining. Adjust brake adjusting nut to give
-- ance of 31 ' 16 inches between rear surface of upper pin and face
pection hole with rear end of brake arm at top of its travel. The
rke arm should be set on serrated brake shaft to give a distance of
7/8 inch from top rear end of arm to level of top of brake housing.
(b) Install Inspection Plate. Inspect to see that gasket is in
good condition and if not, replace. Hold a new gasket and inspection
plate into place and fasten with bolts.
(c) Connect Steering Rod and Brake Shaft Arm. Aline holes in
brake shaft arm and steering rod, insert clevis pin and secure in place
with cotter pin.
(d) Replace Oil in Housings. Follow directions on lubrication in
paragraph 29 d (9).
(e) Adjust Steering Brake Nut. Adjust steering brake nut with-
out removing inspection plate as outlined in paragraph 116 h.
c. Double-anchor Type.
(1) DESCRIPTION. The double-anchor brake is a three-shoe, ex-
ternal contracting, differential steering brake operating in oil (figs.
136 and 137). Two fixed-anchors transfer the brake torque reaction
directly to the brake housing instead of to the brake operating lever
system as on the single-anchor brake. As a result, the self-energizing
Fict reduces the hand effort necessary for a given turn. The double-
r brake can be readily identified by the reverse anchor adjusting
283
TM 9.759
115
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
z V) Ckz
Z 5o 30
u u 0
. .- Z0 z r -
I'"' 4, II: aZ a' O oQg

~ 0~~~~ 8'~ ,
W IZ Z ZZ cr~~~~~~~~~Q
z ~
o.~_~_ a . o s Co
~zr.~~~~~~~~~~~
-;p7 Z
z ELul Lu
-Z
V) .,J ul o
a . ZZ > -
Z m
-r' ,~- '

co
~~~~~~~~~~~m
LO t, 0 -
~ -~~:zz --
ck: I 0
m X: V)
a~~~~~~~~~~~
~~~~/ u' \
Om ~-r
- I,¢
c
uj 0
0O~~~
crg~~~~g
V~~~~ 284
0 g >'
zc3e z .
>o >
¢r2
TM 9.759
115
! z E
~ vm Z oc,
s r DI >
z0 o , C
00
§A;
'_o
</Eos z, >
' aV z 0
O
0 z .
,o
7 .0 I _ W -o
Z m 0~~~~~~~~~
o o >, o z YI, YZI Z Zo
" C P~~~~~~~~~~~~~
< < u° <D]^

z H ~ 3
o
ulI~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1 1 --4 -"--I
,
n
285 .
00
,~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ZLu
L / o >r.
0 P0 - >~~~~~~~
&U,,~,,
(, 8 _ =°
° >t < ,z, U ZO UO Z Z _o t- =
9,))
0 0 Z
<n< o o L o~~~~~~~~>
0 o %L
z 0
L. -, ---
Z z Y)~ Y 0~CY
0 Lu D3 Y V Ln
55 0 285z
o ~ (0~~
TM 9-759
115
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
nut near the top center of each brake drum housing cover, as sho@
in figure 136. Note that the brake control rods are heavier than on
the single-anchor brake and are attached to the front lug at the
lower end of the steering levers. The control rods and brake actuating
shaft levers are pushed upward instead of being pulled downward, as
on the single-anchor brake.
(2) REMOVAL.
(a) Drain Final Drive Housing. Remove the two plugs on the
bottom of'the final drive housing, and drain out the lubricant.
(b) Disconnect Steering Brake Linkage. Remove the two clevis
pins at the top of the steering brake control rods.
(c) Remove Reverse Anchor Jam Nut, Adjusting Nut, and Hous-
ing Cover (figs. 136 and 137). Remove the lock wire and unscrew
the jam nut, adjusting nut, and adjusting nut seat from the reverse
anchor rod. Remove the steering brake housing cover attaching cap
screws, and lift off the cover.
(d) Remove Reverse Anchor Spring and Seal (figs. 136 and 137).
Loosen the reverse anchor thrust bolt lock nut, loosen the thrust bolt,
and lift out the rod.
(e) Lower Brake Shoe Guide (fig. 136). Reach through to
opening in the brake housing below the shoe, and loosen the gui
shoe lock nut (located directly below center of shoe). Screw the guidno
screw down into the bottom of the housing.
(f) Disconnect Shoe Adjusting Linkage (fig. 136). Unscrew the
nut from the adjusting rod, and remove the adjusting clip. Push the
rod back until free of the lever. Lift out the spring and washers, and
allow the shoe and lever to fall forward. Remove the brake shaft
swivel pin from the lever.
(g) Remove Steering Brake Shoe Adjusting Lever (fig. 137).
Remove the cotter pin and the hinge pin between shoe and lever. Ro-
tate the brake shaft lever upward, and swing the lower end of the
brake shoe lever in toward the brake drum to allow the upper hinge
pin to clear the brake drum housing. Remove the cotter pin; and pull
out the hinge pin at the top of adjusting lever. Remove the lever.
(h) Remove Steering Brake Shaft Lever and Brake Shoes (figs.
136 and 137). Unscrew the steering brake lever clamp screw and
remove it. Punch-mark the lever and the shaft for proper assembly.
Drive the lever off the shaft. Remove the three cap screws which
attach the brake shaft bearing plate to the housing, and pull out the
plate and shaft until inner end of the shaft clears the inner bearing.
Tilt the inner end of the steering brake shaft upward to allow the
bearing plate to pass the final drive carrier plate nuts. Hold t
TM 9.759
115
_/ BRAKE DRUM
. BRAKE SHOE ASSEMBLY
BRAKE SHOE GUIDE
;ii i-cc RA PD 312484
ure 138-Installing Brake Shoe in Housing IDouble-anchor

Typel
bearing plate against the final drive housing flange, and move the
shaft back into the inner bearing. Lift out the bearing plate. Rotate
the shaft, and pull the shaft out of the inner bearing. Drop the inner
end of the shaft, and remove the shaft and the link through the large
opening. Pull the brake shoes and adjusting rod assembly from the
housing over the top of the brake drum.
(3) INSTALLATION.
(a) Locate Brake Shoe Guide (figs. 136 and 137). If the brake
shoe guide was not removed from the housing when the brake shoe
was removed, do not alter its location. If the guide has been re-
moved, however, screw it into the opening in the bottom of the hous-
ing with the lock nut in place on the guide.
(b) Install Brake Shoe in Housing (fig. 138). Slide the end of
the shoe over the top of the brake drum, and allow it to fall down
back of the drum until it contacts the guide. Reach through the
housing opening, and pull shoe into place around the brake drum
with the steering brake shoe adjusting rod at the top.
(c) Install the Brake Shaft and Bearing Plate (fig. 139). Insert
splined end of the shaft through the brake housing opening and
287
TM 9-759
115
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
BRAKE SHAFT-- BRAKE SHAFT 0
BRAKE SHAFT BEARING PLATE RA PD 312485
Figure 139-Installing Brake Shaft and Bearing Plate i
out through the hole in the side of the housing. Rotate the shaft, and
raise it until the inner end can be started into the inner bearing.
Position the outer bearing plate on the splined end of the shaft, and
slide the shaft out into the bearing plate. Tilt the inner end of the
shaft upward, and move the bearing plate onto the shaft to clear
the differential carrier plate nuts. Move the plate and shaft inward
into the inner bearing. Install the bearing plate attaching cap screws.
Aline the punch marks on the steering brake shaft and the steering
brake shaft lever, and secure in place with the clamp cap screw.
(d) Install Brake Lever Assembly (fig. 140). 'Aline the holes in
the brake shaft link and lever, and insert the hinge pin. Secure with
a cotter pin. Lift the lower brake shoe and aline the holes in the lower
end of the lever assembly with the holes in the brake shoe, insert the
hinge pin, and secure with a cotter pin.
(e) Assemble Adjusting Rod, Adjusting Washers, and Spring
(fig. 141). Insert the brake shaft swivel pin in the lever assembly,
and aline the hole with the adjusting rod. Pull the rod through the
brake shaft pin hole and install washers. spring, and adjusting nut.
(f) Adjust Brake Shoe Guide (fig. 136). Lift the brake shoe up
shoes are in the approximate normal operating position. Apply br_
288
TM 9-759
115
_ BRAKE SHAFT TO LEVER LINK BRAKE SHOE PIN, LONG
,//
LEVER BRAKE SHOE ASSEMBLY

ADJUSTING ROD LEVER PIN
RA PD 312486
Figure 140-Installing Brake Lever Assembly
to tighten shoes against the drum, and move the lower shoe until the
connecting pin is over the guide. Reach through the lower part of the
opening under the brake shoe, and turn the guide up until it is in
light but firm contact with the brake shoe, then turn down 1/4 to '/3
turn to obtain correct clearance between the shoe and guide. This
clearance should be 0.020 inch, which will maintain adequate mini-
mum clearance between the drum and lining. Tighten lock nut and
release the brake.
(g) Install Steering Brake Reverse Anchor, Spring, Seal, and Re-
tainers (figs. 136 and 137). Install reverse anchor spring, reverse
anchor to cover seal retainer, and seal. Install the reverse anchor with
the hook over the short brake shoe pin, and hold in place by tightening
reverse anchor thrust bolt fingertight.
(h) Install Final Drive Housing Cover. Using a new gasket, in-.
stall cover by lifting up on adjusting rod nut, and apply the brake.
This will allow the top of the shoe to rest on the cover pedestal.
CAUTION: Make sure that reverse anchor spring, reverse anchor to
cover seal retainer, and seal are in place before entering reverse
hor in the hole in the cover. Tighten the cover cap screws.
289
TM 9.759
115.116
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
ADJUSTING ROD -.
BRAKE SHAFT PIN
ADJUSTING ROD SPRING
ADJUSTING ROD SPRING WASHERS RA PD 312487
Figure 141-Installing Adjusting Rod Spring and Washers
(i) Install Reverse Anchor Nut Seat, Adjusting Nut, and Jam
Nut (figs. 136 and 137). Install reverse ancho4 nut seat on reverse
anchor with flat side toward the cover. Install adjusting and jam nuts.
(j) Check Linkage Adjustment (figs. 143 and 144).
(k) Adjust Brakes (par. 116 b).
(I) Connect Steering Brake Linkage. Position the right and left
steering brake control rods with the clevis over the end of the steering
brake cross shaft lever, insert the clevis pins, and secure with cotter
pins.
(m) Fill the Final Drive Housing with Lubricant.
116. STEERING BRAKE ADJUSTMENT.

a. Minor Adjustments. Minor adjustments are made to com-
pensate for normal lining wear when it is known that the external
linkage is properly adjusted. Steering brakes should be adjusted for
lining wear whenever steering levers must be pulled beyond' the
vertical position when making a normal turn (figs. 143 and 144e
Check steering lever free travel daily
290
TM 9.759
116
HORIZONTAL MOUNTING FLANGE

916-in REVERSE ANCHOR
-
9/6-1r, ,- THRUST BOLT
I ,I· i- ; BRAKE CROSS SHAFT LEVER,

t' / 4 12-in.-,' LEFT
! LOCK WIRE
BRAKE SHAFT JAM NUT

LEVER, LEFT REVERSE ANCHOR
V4'1 v STEERING BRAKE HOUSING
REVERSE ANCHOR _k COVER
SEAL
SEAL ;WRENCH
REVERSE ANCHOR
ADJUSTING NUT _3
't.: COVER ATTACHING SCREW
,-*-,, t. a,.' RA PD 312488
Figure 142-Adjusting Steering Brake
h. Adjustment (Both Types).

(1) Remove right and left control rod upper yoke pins (figs.
135 and 137).
(2) Remove adjusting hole cover plates or screw plugs from both
brake drum housing covers (figs. 135 and 137).
(3) Turn adjusting rod nut clockwise, using a 1 /s-inch deep
socket wrench (fig. 142), one notch at a time, until steering lever
free travel is reduced to between 4 and 51/2 inches before the brake
lining is felt to contact the drum (figs. 143 and 144). Insert control
rod yoke pins to check steering lever free travel. Steering levers must
be parallel when both are pulled back with equal effort. Two types
of adjusting rod nuts have been used on both single-anchor and double-
anchor brakes.
(4) The first type is a long, hexagon nut with deep notch in
one end which seats against the trunnion pin, keeping the nut from
working loose. Always disconnect control rods when adjusting this
type nut, as the depth of the notch will not allow the band to be
taken up without damaging the nut and the trunnion pin.
# (5) The second type nut is a long, hexagon nut, which is held
rom working loose by a spring clip engaging opposite sides of the
tThis type nut can be adjusted by ,--turn increments distinguish-
291
TM 9-759
116
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
ADJUSTBRAKESWHEN LEVERS MUSTBE PULLED

FOR MAKING NORMALTURN.
BACKOF VERTICAL
Flil A TO 5½' MINIMUM FREE TRAVEL
3I / 1 PIECEFINALDRIVE
e0~~~~~ i; X4' 3 PIECE FINALDRIVE
0 STEERING
LEVER
STOP SCREW _
RA PD 336228
Figure 143-Single-anchor Brake Steering Lever and Brake

Actuating Shaft Positions
able by "clicks," whereas the first type nut can be adjusted only by
1/2-turn increments. CAUTION: Free travel of steering levers must
be at least 4 inches in order to provide mirunmum allowable clearance
between brake lining and drum when steering levers are in full re-
leased position. Extreme care must be exercised not to get the brake
band too tight, as insufficient clearance will result in excessive heat-
ing and damage to the lining by glazing.
(6) Secure control rod yoke pins with cotter pins.
(7) . Replace adjusting hole cover plates or screw plugs. Be_
that gasket is in good condition.
292
TM 9-759
116
ADJUSTBRAKESWHEN LEVERSMUSTBE PULLED

BACKOF VERTICAL
FORMAKING NORMAL TURN.
, 4-545 ' MINIMUM FREETRAVEL
ri
I' 7
STEERINGLEVER O
0 o
RA PD 336229
Figure 144-Double-anchor Brake Steering Lever Positions
c. Major Adjustments.
(1) GENERAL. Major adjustments are made to properly position
the external linkage relative to the brake actuating shaft, to obtain
maximum leverage from the external linkage after other adjustments
are properly made. Major adjustments are make at time of final drive
installation or at any time when doubt exists as to correctness of
external linkage adjustment. Brake adjustment will be checked upon
receipt of a vehicle, and a major adjustment or portion thereof made
if required. Once external linkage is properly adjusted, it should not
be disturbed.
(2 ) SINGLE-ANCHOR BRAKE ADJTTqTMENT.
293
TM 9.759
116
TANK. MEDIUM, MWA3
CLUAMP
SCREW
Y' 6e
REFERENCE MARKS
A PD 33&230
Figure 14--Single-anchor Brake, One-piece Final Drive

Brake Lever Positions
(a) Check released position of steering levers. Levers are cor-

rectly positioned when horizontal distance from face of brake drum
housing cover to front edge of lever is 7 to 71/2 inches as shown in
figures 143 and 144. In this position, tops of levers will be approxi-
mately 9 to 91/2 inches ahead of vertical. If levers are not correctly
positioned and parallel to each other, disconnect control rod upper
yoke pins, and adjust stop screws at lower end of levers (figs. 143
and 144). Steering levers must be properly positioned, because if they
are too far forward, the driver may be-injured as a result of striking
his face against the front of the hatch opening during cross-countr
operation.
294
TM 9.759
116
REFERENCEMARKS
_0 fl RA PD 31214
Figure 146-Single-anchor Brake, Three-piece Final Drive Brake

Lever Positions
(b) Remove adjusting hole screw plugs as cover plates, from both
brake housing covers.
(c) Check position of cross shaft levers and brake actuating shaft
levers with reference to top of final drive housing (figs. 145, 146, and
147). If levers are improperly positioned, adjust length of control
rods as required to locate levers correctly. Back off adjusting rod
nut to secure the desired position for the levers. For maximum lever-
Wge, levers should be positioned as closely as possible to dimensions
ven in figures 145, 146, and 147. However, accurate measurement
295
TM 9-759
116
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
aREFERENCE
MARKS
0
RA PD 31823S
Figure 147-Single-anchor Brake, Three-piece Final Drive Brake

Lever Positions
of these dimensions is rather difficult, and slight deviation is permis-

sible since steering effort will not be noticeably affected.
(d) Check alinement of reference marks on both ends of cross
shaft and on ends of right and left brake actuating shafts with marks
on respective levers (figs. 145, 146, and 147). In case a lever is not
properly installed, remove clamp screw, and slide the lever off the
serrated shaft, then reinstall the lever on the shaft with reference
marks in alinement, and replace clamp screw. In the absence of
reference marks on ends of cross shafts and brake actuating shafts
on single-anchor brakes, proceed as follows:
296 0
TM 9-759
116
7t, /i
REFMENCE ARKS
RA PD 31821&
Figure 148-Double-anchor Brake, One-piece Final Drive Brake

Lever Positions
(e) With cross shaft and brake actuating shaft levers attached to
control rods, check location of brake actuating shaft trunnion pin by
measuring the distance from the outer face of the adjusting hole
flange on the brake drum housing cover to the nearest surface of the
trunnion pin against which the adjusting rod nut seats. This dimen-
sion should be approximately 3· 1;,; inches on the one-piece final drive
housing and 41/4 inches on the three-piece final drive housing.
(f) If brake actuating shaft is improperly located, remove clamp
ew, and slide lever off serrated shaft. Reinstall lever in proper
297
TM 9.759
116
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
O /EFERENCE MARKS
Q O
RA PD 318127
Figure 149-Double-anchor Brake, Three-piece

Final Drive Broke Lever Positions
relationship to the actuating shaft, and replace clamp screw. Mark

ends of levers and shafts with cold chisel for future reference.
(g) There are three different right-hand linkage arrangements
used with a single-anchor brake as illustrated in figures 145, 146, and
147. In some cases, levers may be found installed backward as indi-
cated by dotted lines in figures 145 and 146. If there is any doubt of
the correct position of these levers, remove and reinstall correctly.
(h) Follow through minor adjustment procedure (par. 116 b).
(3) DOUBLE-ANCHOR BRAKE ADJUSTMENT. O
298 0
TM 9.759
116
_(a) Follow through steps (1) through (7) of single-anchor brake

adjustment procedure in subparagraph b above, referring to figures
148 and 149 instead of figures 145, 146, and 147
(b) Check reverse anchor adjustment by prying reverse anchor
nut away from brake drum housing cover. Reverse anchor end play
should be approximately !l,; inch. If end play is -. rrect, follow
through subparagraphs (c), (d), and (e) below.
(c) Loosen reverse anchor lock nut, and reverse anchor thrust
bolt lock nut.
(d) To adjust reverse anchor, tighten reverse anchor adjusting
nut tight, and back off 1½/2 turns. Tighten lock nut. Pry reverse
anchor lock nut away from brake drum housing cover. End play of
reverse anchor should be approximately /1,,; inch to 1/8 inch.
(e) To adjust reverse anchor thrust bolt, tighten bolt until it
bottoms on the reverse anchor, then back off one turn and tighten
lock nut.
(4) RECENTERING BRAKE BAND (SINGLE- AND DOUBLE-ANCHOR
BRAKES)
.e(a) The brake adjustment procedure as outlined in paragraph

116 c shortens the band to take up lining wear, but does not recenter
band to restore approximately equal clearance all the way around
u m. Band support clearance will be checked and adjusted at each
oil change interval, that is, every 3,000 miles or sooner if oil is changed
before that time.
d. Adjustment of Band Support Screw (Both Types).

(1) Drain oil from final drive housing. Remove brake drum
housing cover plates. On double-anchor brake, it is necessary to
remove reverse anchor lock nut, reverse anchor adjusting nut, and
adjusting nut seat before removing cover plates.
(2) Apply brake to hold band snugly against drum.
(3) Loosen brake shoe support screw lock nut, and turn support
screw until it is in light but firm contact with the band. Turn support
screw down until clearance betwelen band and support is 0.010 inch.
Tighten lock nut and release brake.
(4) Replace brake drum housing cover. On double-anchor brake,
lift up adjusting nut to insure that band will rest on cover pedestal
(fig. 137). Check to be sure that reverse anchor spring, reverse
anchor seal retainer, and seal are in place before entering reverse
anchor in the hole in the cover. Replace reverse anchor adjusting nut
seat, adjusting nut, and lock nut after brake housing cover is in-
stalled.
(S5) Refill final drive to prescribed level with proper grade of oil.
299
TM 9-759
116-118
TANK. MEDIUM, M4A3
(6) Follow through major and minor brake adjustment p

cedures.
117. STEERING BRAKE CONTROL LEVERS.

a. Removal.
(1) REMOVE DRIVER'S SEAT AND PARKING BRAKE QUADRANT.
Remove the bolts and nuts which secure the driver's seat to its base,
and lift out the seat.
(2) REMOVE THE FLOOR PLATE. Remove the fillister-head cap
screws and lift floor plate from its supports.
(3) REMOVE STEERING BRAKE CONTROL LEVERS (fig. 137). Re-
move the three clips and two nuts which hold the horn wire conduit
and horn button to the right-hand steering lever if located on the
steering brake. Remove the horn wire and button from steering lever.
Remove the clevis pins connecting the steering brake control rods to
the steering brake control levers. Remove the cotter pin at the left
end of steering brake control lever shaft. Drive the shaft out toward
the transmission, being sure that the spacers between the levers and
at either end of the shaft are not lost.
(4) CHECK ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING BRAKE CONTROL LEVER
STOP SCREWS (fig. 137). Loosen lock nut, and adjust the stop scri
to 13/4 inches from the face of the bracket to the face of the scrW
head.
1i. Installation.
(1) INSTALL STEERING BRAKE CONTROL LEVERS (fig. 137).
Place one spacer on the lever shaft and aline the right lever with hole
in bracket, and insert the shaft through the bracket and lever just
far enough to allow the spacer and the other lever to be installed on
the shaft. Position the left lever, aline the hole with the shaft, and
drive the shaft through the lever and bracket. Install the outer spacer
on the shaft, and cotter pin in end of the shaft. Install the clevis
pins connecting the steering brake control rods to the steering brake
control levers. Place horn wire conduit and horn button in position
on the right-hand steering lever, and secure to the lever with three
clips and two nuts.
(2) INSTALL FLOOR PLATE AND DRIVER'S SEAT. Position the
floor plate on the supports, install the fillister-head screws, and tighten
securely. Place the driver's seat on its base, and attach with bolts
and nuts.
118. DRIVE SPROCKET AND HUB.

a. Description. Each drive sprocket assembly is made up of t
sprockets bolted to a hub. The hub is bolted to the flange end of
300
TM 9.759
118-119
Wable, drive
1 shaft flange. The sprockets and or hubs are interchange-
and may be transposed from right to left final drive shafts when
the teeth have been appreciably worn.
h. Remove al.
(1) DISCONNECT TRACK. See paragraphs 125 h or 133 a.
(2) REMOVE SPROCKET AND HUB ASSEMBLY. Remove the nuts
which attach the hub to the final drive shaft, and remove the dowel
washers. Drive off the sprocket and hub assembly. Remove the cap
screws which attach the sprockets to the hub, and lift off the sprockets.
c. Installation.
(1) INSTALL SPROCKET AND HUB ASSEMBLY. Position sprocket
on hub, aline holes, install the cap screws and tighten. Lift sprocket
and hub assembly into p6sition on final drive shaft studs. Install the
dowel washers and nuts, rotating the tightening of the nuts evenly
around the hub.
(2) CONNECT TRACK. See paragraphs 125 c or 133 h.
(3) ADJUST TRACK TENSION. See paragraphs 125 d or 133 d
(2).
9. FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLIES.

Removal (fig. 133).
(1) DRAIN OIL. Remove the two plugs from the bottom of the
final drive housing, and drain the oil.
(2) DISCONNECT TRACK. See paragraphs 125 11or 133 a.
(3) REMOVE DRIVE SPROCKET AND HUB. See paragraph 118!.
(4) REMOVE FRONT FENDERS. See paragraph 138 c.
(5) REMOVE FINAL REDUCTION ASSEMBLY. SupportC the final
reduction assembly with hoist or other means, and remove the cap
screws which attach the cover to the final drive housing. Use a small
pinch bar to pry the unit away from the housing, and continue to
manipulate the unit until it is free of the compensating shaft splines.
h. Installation.
(1) INSTALL FINAL REDUCTION ASSEMBLY. Remove all traces
of torn gaskets from the mounting faces of the final drive cover and
housing, and cover the surfaces with sealing compound. Position new
gasket on housing, and aline all the holes. Lift final reduction assem-
bly into place with a hoist, or by other means, and assemble to the
final drive housing, rotating the final drive shaft slowly to right and
left until the compensating pinion meshes on the compensating shaft
splines. Slide the assembly into place over the locating dowels.
(2) INSTALL ATTACHING CAP SCREWS. Install all of the cap
ews and lock washers except the three for the front fender directly
l:T1355U,0 0) 4 -----24) 301
TM 9-759
119-121
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
over the center of the final drive cover. Tighten evenly aroun*
unit. Fill the final drive assembly with lubricant.
(3) INSTALL FRONT FENDER. See paragraph 138 c.
(4) INSTALL DRIVE SPROCKET AND HUB ASSEMBLY. See para-
graph 118 c.
(5) CONNECT TRACK. See paragraphs 125 c or 133 lb.
(6) ADJUST TRACK TENSION. See paragraphs 125 dl or 133 dl (2).
120. PARKING BRAKE MECIIANISM.

a. Description. The later-type parking brake consists of two
quadrants, one attached to each steering lever. A kick pedal pro-
vided with springs and pawls is mounted ahead of the quadrants.
When the kick pedal is in the lowered position; contact is made with
the quadrants on the steering brake control levers, holding them 'n
any set position. The earlier type is a transmission-type parking brake,
and is located at the rear of the transmission.
h. Parking Brake Replacement (Transmission Type).
(1) REMOVAL. Remove eight cap screws from universal joint
front cover and remove the cover. Remove the cotter pin and washer
from the parking brake lever shaft and remove the shaft and levy
Remove the seven bolts which hold the parking brake housi
the transmission. Pull the housing off the brake shoe spline and
move the housing. Remove the brake shoe cone.
(2) INSTALLATION. Install the brake shoe cone, and place the
housing over the brake shoe spline and install the seven bolts. Select
a position on brake shoe spline so that brake shaft spacer will mesh
into recess in spline. Install the parking brake lever shaft and install
the washer and cotter pin. Install the front universal joint cover.
121. TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER REPLACEMENT.

a. Removal. Disconnect the inlet and outlet line from the top
and bottom of the cooler. Unscrew the cooler guard to hull attaching
cap screws, and lift the guard up and into the turret basket. Remove
the cooler to bracket attaching bolts at each corner and lift out the
cooler.
l>. Installation. Position the oil cooler in the brackets, and in-
stall mounting bolts and nuts. Place the cooler guard in position
over the cooler, and install cap screws. Screw the oil tube connec-
tors into the top and bottom connections of the cooler. Fill the
transmission and final drive assembly with lubricant (par. 29 ol (9) ).
operate the engine with clutch engaged, and inspect cooler and
connections for leaks.
302
TM 9.759
122
.
POWER TRAIN ASSEMBLY REMOVAL.

a. General Information. The using arm is authorized to remove
and install a transmission and final drive assembly. However, the
replacement of this assembly with another assembly must not be
done by the using arm unless authorization is received from ord-
nance personnel. Removal of the power train assembly from the tank
is a major operation that will require several hours. Because of
its size and weight (8,800 lb), a fixture (41-F-2997-220) and
wrecker are necessary to remove the assembly.
b. Disconnect Tracks on Both Sides. See paragraphs 125 b
or 133 a.
c. Drain Oil From Transmission and Final Drive Assembly.
Remove the three drain plugs, one under each final drive housing,
and one in the transmission housing. The plugs are magnetized.
Clean thoroughly and install.
d. Remove Front Fenders and Sand Shields (Both Sides).
Turn the bayonet-type attaching pins one-quarter turn until each
pin alines with the slot in the hull, and lift off the shields. Remove
the front fender attaching bolts and cap screws, and remove the
.ders.
_ Remove Final Drive Sprocket and Hub Assemblies. See

graph 118 h.
f. Disconnect Front Universal Joint and Generator Drive Pul-
ley. Turn off the radio and battery master switch. If the generator is
located to the rear of the transmission, loosen the lock nut on the
adjusting bolt, and turn the bolt counterclockwise to relieve the
tension on the drive belts. Remove the cap screws from the gen-
erator drive belt cover, and remove the cover. Remove the generator
drive pulley bolt nuts. Remove the drive belts, and slide the pulley
toward the rear. Remove the universal joint to transmission input
shaft flange bolts. Remove the thumb screw from the generator
junction box cover, and remove the cover. Disconnect the two gen-
erator wires in the junction box. Disconnect the knurled nut on
the conduit leading from the junction box. Remove conduit and wires
from the junction box.
g. Disconnect Speedometer and Tachometer Cables. Unscrew
the knurled nut which secures the speedometer cable housing
(G104-17-89553) to the adapter at the upper right rear of trans-
mission, and separate cable and housing from the adapter. If the
.
tachometer cable (G104-17-89553) is connected to the transmission,
disconnect the tachometer cable located on the top left rear of the
smission in the same manner.
303
TM 9-759
122
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
II. Disconnect T'ransnlission to Cooler Oil Tubes. Unscrew

the flexible oil hose connectors at the transmission, and separate the
oil hoses (A-345752-F) and A-3457526) from the connection. Un-
screw the connections to oil lines, from left side of transmission.
i. Remove Hatch Hood and Periscope Stowage Rack. Remove
the bolts at the front and rear of the stowage rack, and remove the
rack from the transmission.
j. Remove Horn Button Condulit from Power Train. Remove
the horn wire conduit or the siren button from the power train
assembly.
k. Disconnect Steering Brake Linkage, Hand Throttle, and
Primer Pump. Remove the two clevis pins at the top of the steering
brake control rods. Loosen the lock nut on hand throttle bracket,
and lay hand throttle and cable to one side. Remove primer line
clip on power train and disconnect the primer lines near the bot-
tom of the left side of the transmission. Remove the four cap
screws which hold the primer pump bracket to the power train,
and remove the primer pump and bracket assembly. Remove the
hand throttle and primer pump bracket.
i. .Disconnect .Machine Gun M)ount Spring Bracket and F
alle Fire Extinguisher Bracket. Remove the two attaching _
screws from the spring anchor bracket. Remove the countersunk
head screws attaching the portable fire extinguisher bracket to the
floor, and remove the bracket.
ll. Remove Steering Brake Cross Shaft .. ssemhlv. Disconnect
the right end of the steering brake cross shaft lever from the steering
brake control rod. Remove the screws which secure the cross shaft
brackets, and lift the cross shaft assembly off the final drive housing.
n. Remove Front Wire Conduit Clamps. Remove the screws
which secure the front conduit clamps to the hull, to allow access
to nuts which hold the final drive assembly to the hull.
o. Remove Power Train Assembly (fig. 150). Hold the nuts
inside the hull, and remove the two lower bolts (one on each side)
from the side of the hull on the outside. Insert the two small alining
pins of special fixture (41-F-2997-220) in the holes. Attach a chain
to the two towing devises in the front of the vehicle. Back a
wrecker up to the front of the vehicle, hitch the winch cable to the
chain, and take up the slack. Remove all the bolts which secure the
power train to the hull. Slack off the winch cable until the top of
the power train is tilted away from the hull far enough for the
fixture (41-F-2997-220) to be installed. Bolt the fixture to them
ter top edge of the power train (fig. 150). Hitch the wr W
304
TM 9-759
122
LIFTING EYE
,,.t''' e
ALINING PIN
ALINING PIN ALINING PIN
Figure 150-Removing Power Train Assembly Using Special

Fixture 141-F-2997-220)
0\~ ~~305
TM 9-759
122-123
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
boom cable to the fixture, drive out the alining pins, and caW
guiding the assembly from inside the tank, remove it carefully. Slack
off on the winch cable as the assembly is pulled from the tank, to
allow clearance at the gearshift fulcrum and the oil tubes.
123. POWER TRAIN ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION.

a. Install Power Train Assembly (fig. 150). Place the two long
spacer shims in position in each side of the hull with sealing com-
pound, and insert two bolts through the hull so the threaded ends
of the bolts enter the shims far enough to prevent them from falling
out of place. Apply sealing compound to other contacting surfaces.
Attach the lifting fixture (41-F-2997-220), chain, and wrecker to
power train. Move the wrecker, with the assembly suspended, to
the hull opening, and aline the assembly with the hull. Back the
wrecker slowly toward the hull, lowering the boom cable until the
power train is tipped forward slightly at the top, and carefully guide
the lower side into the hull opening. Insert the two small alining
pins in the lower holes (one on each side), making sure the pins
pass through the hull and the power train holes. Suspend the weight
of the power train from the winch cable which is hitched to the
towing clevises. Slack off the boom winch cable, and remove
lifting eye. Tilt the power train back until the top edge is _
into the hull. Insert the two large alining pins of special liftin/_
ture (41-F-2997-220) through holes along the top edge of the hull
in order to aline the holes.
hI. Install Attaching Bolts. NOTE: It may be necessary to ream
some of the holes slightly to install the bolts. Install bolts across the
top left end with heads outside. Install bolt at the lower left end with
the head outside. Install the next upper four bolts, with heads in-
side the hull and the nuts outside. Then install the remaining bolts
at the left end from the outside. Install the remaining bolts from
the outside of the hull. Hold bolts or nuts on the inside, and tighten
the outside.
c. Install Front Wire Conduit. Position the front wire conduit
along the front hull slope just above the final drive housing attaching
bolts and nuts, and attach the clamps to the hull.
d. Install Brake Cross Shaft Assembly. Position the cross shaft
assembly on the top of the final drive housing, insert the cap screws
with lock washers through the brackets, and tighten securely. Con-
nect the steering brake control rod to the right side of the steering
brake cross shaft, and secure with a cotter pin. Position machine
gun mount spring on the seat, and attach the lower bracket to
bearing cap.
306
TM 9-759
123
. POWER TRAIN ASSEMBLY
Install Horn Button Conduit. Attach the horn switch or the

siren button conduit to the power train assembly.
f. Install Stowage Rack. Set the rack in position, and secure it
to the transmission at the front and rear with bolts.
g. Connect Steering Brake ,:,ontrol Lever Linkage. r.sition
the right and left steering ' brake control rods with the clevis over the
end of the steering brake cross shaft lever, insert the clevis pins, and
install the cotter pins.
h. Connect Transmission Oil Cooler Tubes. Screw the two
oil line connections into the openings at the left side of the transmis-
sion. Aline and tighten securely. Attach oil tubes to connections,
and tighten securely.
i. Install Hand Throttle and Primer Pump Assembly Bracket.
Place the bracket and primer pump assembly in position on the left
side of the power train, insert the cap screws and lock washers, and
tighten securely. Connect the primer lines near the bottom of the
left side of the transmission. Secure primer lines to power train
with a clip. Place hand throttle in position in bracket, and tighten
lock nut.
_ Connect Speedometer Cahle, Tachometer Cable and Port-
Fire Extinguisher Bracket. Place end of speedometer cable in
w ,ing in the adapter at the right rear side of transmission, and
screw the knurled nut onto adapter securely. Connect the tachome-
ter cable in the same manner if not connected to the engine. Posi-
tion the portable fire extinguisher bracket with the clamp away from
the transmission, and attach the bracket to the floor.
k. Connect Front Universal Joint.
i. Adjust Generator Drive Belts. If the generator mounting is
located to the rear of the transmission, lower it until the belts can
be depressed one-half inch, and tighten the adjusting arm bolt.
m. Fill Transmission and Final Drive Assembly With Lubri.
cant.
n. Install Front Fenders. Remove the three fender attaching
cap screws at the top of the final drive cover. Position fender on
hull and final drive housing, install the cap screws and bolts, and
tighten securely.
o. Install Final Drive Sprocket and Huh Assemblies. See
paragraph 118 c (1).
p. Connect Tracks. See paragraphs 125 c or 133 b.
Adjust Track Tension. See paragraphs 125 d or 133 d (2).
W 307
TM 9.759
124
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
Section XXIII
HORIZONTAL VOLUTE SPRING, SUSPENSION
AND TRACKS
124. DESCRIPTION.
a. Tracks (fig. 151). Two individually driven tracks propel the
vehicle forward and backward. The drive sprockets at the front end
of the vehicle pull the tracks from the rear and lay them down in
front of the advancing suspension wheels. An adjustable idler with
dual wheels for each track is mounted at the rear of the hull for
adjusting the tension of the tracks. The track is 23 inches wide
with a center guide that minimizes the possibility of throwing the
track. The upper portion of each track is supported on two dual
rollers and three single rollers, all of which are rubber-tired and
fitted with adjustable tapered roller bearings.
hi. Suspension Assemblies (fig. 159). The vehicle is supported
on six suspension assemblies bolted to the hull. Each suspension
has four rubber-tired wheels, one pair mounted on each suspen-
sion arm. The wheels are of the demountable type that can be
removed from the hubs and installed without disturbing the ad-
justable tapered roller bearings or any part of the suspension
tracks. The tires are mounted directly to the wheels. The sus_
sion wheel support arms are connected to the suspension by rubb
bushed pins. Two horizontal volute springs in each suspension are
held in position by spring seats that rests on spring seat pins. The
spring seats are free to swivel on the seat pins, allowing the volute
spring to compress in true alinement without distortion.
C. Shock Absorbers (fig. 159). A telescopic type, hydraulic shock
absorber is connected between the support arms on each of the
suspensions. The shock absorbers reduce the pitching action of the
vehicle by stabilizing the vertical movement of the suspension wheels
when passing over rough terrain.
d. Data.
Width of track . . ...... 23 in.
Weight of track (with 79 shoes) .. ...... 3,500 lb
Ground contact area of track (approx) ... 7,000 sq in.
Ground pressure (pounds per sq in.) .. 10.2
Length of springs (new). .14 in.
Diameter of suspension wheel ... 201/2 in.
Diameter of idler wheels .. .............. 22 in.
Diameter of dual track roller .... . .....131/2 in.
Diameter of single track roller . .. ..... 10 in.
Number of lubricant fittings .......... .... 36
308_
TM 9-759
'ORIZONTAL 124
VOLUTE SPRING, SUSPENSION AND TRACKS
12E~~~~~~ _
A. ^~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.
0
: C
30O
in~~~~o
3,0
'-
30~ ~~9
TM 9.759
125
TANK., MEDIUM, M4A3
TRACK SHOE--,
.
PINS . . LCLOCK
~
BU- H'IN P aRA PD 313254
Figure 152-Track Shoe Disassembled
125. TRACKS.
a Description (fig. 151). Only one pin is used in each_
Rubber bushings are bonded to a steel track shoe bushing tube._
tube and bushings are pressed into the track shoe. The tubes have
two keys that engage the two keyways milled in the track shoe bush-
ing pin. The pin is held in position in the shoe by four pins with
flat tapered sides that engage depressions machined in the shoe pin.
b. Removal (fig. 153). Place the vehicle on level terrain so
that it can be moved as required. Release the track tension at the
idler adjustment (subpar. d (2) below). Disconnect the track be-
tween the front suspension wheel and the sprocket. (If the track has
been thrown, disconnect the track underneath either the idler or the
sprocket, depending on which end of the track has the least twist.)
Install the track connecting fixtures. Drive out the lock pins that
retain the track shoe bushing pin from the guide side of track shoe.
Drive out the shoe bushing pin. Lay the top half of the track on the
ground to the front or rear of the vehicle, depending on which end
of the track has been disconnected.
c. Installation.
(1) INSTALL TRACK. If a new track is to be installed, lay it
in front of and in alinement with the old track. If a thrown track is
to be installed, dig a trench deep enough for the end of the track so
that the suspension wheel can roll cElrectly onto the track. To he
vehicle onto the track until about 16 inches of the end protru-
310 W
TM 9-759
'ORIZONTAL VOLUTE SPRING, SUSPENSION AND TRACKS

125
I'd•
RA PD 313349
Fure 153-Track Connecting Fixtures 141-F-2997-86) Installed
yond the front suspension wheel. Block the suspension wheels in

the track to prevent the vehicle from moving. Place the rear idler
wheel in the extreme forward position and lock the spindle in the
bracket to prevent breakage of the idler bracket. Roll the end of
the track over the idler wheel and pull the track forward over the
support rollers and sprocket with a cable attached to a towing unit.
(2) CONNECT TRACK SHOES (fig. 153). Attach the track con-
necting fixtures to the ends of the track and draw the ends together.
Install the track shoe bushing pin. Install the bushing pin retaining
lock pins. Drive the pins into the shoe, from the grouser side, until
they seal solidly and stake the shoe around the head of the pins.
Remove the track connecting fixtures.
(3) ADJUST TRACK TENSION. See subparagraph d below.
d. Adjustment of Track Tension.

(1) POSITION TRACK FOR ADJUSTMENT (fig. 154). Place a
wood block 3/4 inch thick and 2 inches wide between the track and
h dual support roller.
RELEASE TRACK TENSION (fig. 154). Loosen the two out-
311
TM 9-759
125
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
WOOD BLOCK TRACK WOOD BLOCK
DUAL SUPPORT ROLLER DUAL SUPPORT ROLLER
SINGLE SUPPORT ROLLER
BRACKET
COLLAR@
off,, .IDLER SHAFT
LOCK SPRING
CLAMP SCREW
Ilk ;! WRENCH
SPREADER SCREW
RA PD 313252
Figure 154-Adjusting Track Tension With Wrench 141-W-640

312 -
TM 9.759
125.126
HORIZONTAL VOLUTE SPRING, SUSPENSION AND TRACKS
Q clamp screws in the idler wheel bracket. Turn the spreader screw
counterclockwise to spread the bracket until the spindle is free.
CAUTION: Excessive spreading will crack the bracket. Place the
adjusting wrench on the hexagon at the end of the idler shaft and
turn the shaft to release the bind on the adjusting collar. Raise the
spring at the end of the bracket and slide the collar off the serrations
on the idler shaft.
(3) ADJUST TENSION (fig. 154). Use a piece of pipe on the
handle on the adjusting wrench for leverage and raise the handle
of the wrench to tighten the track. Slide the adjusting collar on and
off the serrations on the shaft when changing the wrench position.
Tighten the track until the track just clears the single support roller.
(4) LOCK IDLER ADJUSTMENT (fig. 154). Slide the adjusting
collar onto the serrations of the shaft and lock it in place with the
spring. Back out the center spreader screw by turning it clockwise
until it does not project through the split in the bracket. Tighten
both outside clamp screws securely, then tighten the center spreader
screw until it binds sufficiently to hold itself from working loose. Re-
move the idler adjusting wrench.
126. IDLER WHEELS AND BRACKET.

i'. General. The outer idler wheel can be removed without dis-
necting the track by releasing the track tension. The inner wheel
-n be removed without disturbing the hub or bearings by removing
the idler shaft from the bracket.
h. Removal and Disassembly (fig. 155).

(1) DISCONNECT TRACK. See paragraph 125 h.
(2) REMOVE IDLER WHEEL AND HUB ASSEMBLY. Take out
the attaching cap screws and remove the hub cap and gasket. Pry
the tongue of the nut lock out of the outer bearing nut. Unscrew
the outer bearing nut and remove the nut lock. Unscrew the inner
bearing nut and remove the thrust washer. Pull the wheels and
hub off the idler shaft.
(3) REMOVE BEARING CONES AND SEAL. Remove the outer
bearing cone. Pry the seal out of the hub. Remove the inner
bearing cone.
(4) REMOVE IDLER SHAFT AND BRACKET. Remove the cotter
pin in the hexagon end of the shaft. Slide the collar off the shaft.
Pull the idler shaft out of the bracket. Take out the cap screws that
attach the bracket to the hull and remove the bracket.
c. Cleaning of Parts. Clean all parts thoroughly. Use water
inder pressure to loosen and remove as much foreign inaiter as
sible. Use a stiff brush and dry-cleaning solvent to remove the
W4k ~~~~~ 313
TM 9.759
126
TANK. MEDIUM, M4A3
I IL
0 I LcV) u
-- co~ ca
IZ4 Z
4
0 _
Dz
Z " --.-
UU ;
z e
3:1
0 U
z
TM 9-759
126
ORIZONTAL VOLUTE SPRING, SUSPENSION AND TRACKS
Wining grease and dirt. Rotate the bearings while immersed in

dry-cleaning solvent until all traces of lubricant have been removed.
CAUTION: Do not spin bearings with compressed air. Oil the
bearings immediately to prevent corrosion of the highly polished
surfaces and wrap them in oiled paper if they are not to be used
at once.
d. Inspection of Bearings and Seals (fig. 155).
(1) INSPECT BEARINGS. The condition of a bearing is best
determined by the surface condition of the rollers and races. Inspect
for wear or pits caused by corrosion. Inspect for discoloration of the
rollers or cups, as this is evidence of overheating. Bearings that have
been overheated, pitted or worn must be discarded. Spinning a bear-
ing while holding it in the hands is not an accurate check for its
running qualities, although this test will indicate the presence of dirt
or foreign matter, and the bearing should be rewashed, lubricated
and checked again.
(2) INSPECT BEARING SEALS. If a bearing seal is removed from
the hub for any reason, always install a new seal.
(3) REPLACE BEARING CUPS. If a bearing cup is to be replaced,
yaa drift to drive the cup out of the hub. Keep moving the drift
in ,d the entire circumference of the cup, and drive the cup out
y. Position a new cup in the hub. Use a cup drift, and drive
tW 'cup into the hub until it seats against the shoulder in the hub.
e. Assembly and Installation (fig. 155).
(1) INSTALL IDLER SHAFT BRACKET AND SHAFT. Position the
bracket on the hull, and install the attaching cap screws (fig. 154).
Enter the idler shaft into the bracket. Slide the collar on the
hexagon end of the shaft, and install the cotter pin.
(2) INSTALL INNER BEARING CONE AND SEAL. Pack the inner
bearing cone with general purpose grease, and install the cone in the
hub. Position the seal in the hub with the flat side of the seal case out.
Use a seal drift, and drive the seal into the hub, until the flat side
of the seal case is flush with the end of the hub (fig. 158).
(3) INSTALL WHEEL AND HUB ASSEMBLY ON SHAFT. Slide the
hub onto the shaft. Pack the outer bearing cone with general purpose
grease. Install the bearing cone and thrust washer. Screw the inner
bearing nut on the idler shaft until the bearing cones are seated, but
not sufficiently to cause a bind.
(4) ADJUST BEARINGS. Turn the wheel by hand to determine
the amount of drag caused by the bearing seal. Tighten the bear-
nut until a slight increase in drag is felt when the wheel is turned.
off the bearing nut one-quarter turn.
_ 315
TM 9-759
126-127
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
(5) INSTALL NUT LOCK, OUTER BEARING NUT, HUB CAPW

GASKET. I. stall the nut lock, and bend a tongue into one of the
slots in the inner bearing nut. Screw the outer bearing nut onto
the shaft. Tighten the nut with 200 to 300 foot-pounds of torque,
and bend a tongue of the lock washer into one of the slots in the
outer bearing nut. If a tongue dot. not line up with the slot in
the outer nut, continue to tighten (do not back off the nut) until a
tongue alines with the slot. Install the gasket and hub cap with
the attaching cap screws. Fill the hub with grease through the
lubricant fitting in the hub cap until grease appears at the seal or
relief fitting in the center of the hub.
(6) INSTALL TRACK. See paragraph 125 c.
(7) ADJUST TRACK TENSION. See paragraph 125 d (3).
127. DUAL SUPPORT ROLLERS.

a. General. Due to the center guide in the track, only the outer
wheel of the dual track suppor rollers can be removed without dis-
connecting the track.
(1) RELEASE TRACK TENSION. See paragraph 125 (I (2).
(2) DISCONNECT TRACK. See paragraph 125 1).
(3) DISASSEMBLE ROLLERS (fig. 156). Take out the cap scO
that attach the hub cap to the hub, and remove the cap and ga_
Pry the nut lock tongue out of the recess in the nut, and unscrew
the nut. Remove the nut lock and thrust washer. Pull the hub off
the bracket shaft. Remove the outer bearing cone, seal and inner
bearing cone from the hub.
l. Cleaning and Inspection. See paragraph 126 c and d.
c. Assembly and Installation.
(1) ASSEMBLE SUPPORT ROLLER (fig. 156). Pack the bearing
cones with general purpose grease and install the inner cone. Position
the seal in the hub with the flat side of the seal case out. Press the
seal into the hub until the flat side of the seal case is flush with
the end of the hub (fig. 158). Slide the hub onto the bracket shaft
and install the outer bearing cone, thrust washer, nut lock and nut.
Tighten the nut sufficiently to seat the bearing cones in the cups,
but not tight enough to cause a bind in the bearings.
(2) ADJUST BEARINGS. See paragraph 126 e (4).
(3) INSTALL HUB CAP. Bend a tongue of the lock into one of
the slots in the bearing nut. Attach the gasket and hub cap to the hub
with the cap screws. Fill the hub with grease through the lubrication
fitting on the hub cap until grease appears at the seal or ref
fitting in the center of the hub.
316
TM 9.759
127
,i <
<
- I U
U
0
co <<V
C3
z
T w Z
'o u
z
U
e9
In
-0 l':,5- I ,-4R-- -21 317

TM 9-759
127
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
z w -
D uI-j cc
s 0
Cz <
V)71
<u.
'z x
~
< z~
oe
~~~~~(
2~~~
to< lie- ~
TM 9.759
128-129
SINGLE SUPPORT ROLLERS.

a. Removal and Disassembly. See subparagraph (3) below.
(1) RELEASE TRACK TENSION. See paragraph 125 d (2).
(2) DISCONNECT TRACK. See oaragraph 125 b.
(3) DISASSEMBLE ROLLER WHEEL (fig.' 157). Take out the
cap screws that attach the roller wheel to the hub and pull off the
roller wheel. Take out the countersunk head screws that attach the
hub cap to the hub and remove the cap and gasket. Pry the nut
lock tongue out of the recess in the nut and unscrew the nut. Remove
the nut lock and thrust washer. Pull the hub off the bracket shaft.
Remove the outer bearing cone, seal and inner bearing cone from
the hub.
h. Cleaning and Inspection. See paragraph 126 c end d.
c. Assembly and Installation.
(1) ASSEMBLE SUPPORT ROLLER HUB (fig. 157). Pack the
bearing cones with general purpose grease, and install the inner
.f
cone. Position the oil seal in the hub with the flat side of the seal
case out. Drive the seal into the hub with a driver until the flat
of the seal case is flush with the end of the hub (fig. 158). Slide
hub onto the bracket shaft and install the outer bearing cone,
st washer, nut lock and nut. Tighten the nut sufficiently to seat
the bearing cones in the cups, but not tight enough to cause a bind
in the bearings.
(3) INSTALL ROLLER WHEEL (par. 126 e (3) ). Depress a tongue
of the lock washer into the recess in the nut. Attach the hub cap
and gasket to the hub with the countersunk screws. Position the roller
wheel on the hub, and attach with the cap screws. Fill the hub with
grease through the lubricant fitting in the hub cap until grease ap-
pears at the seal or relief fitting (G103-03-01390) at the inner end
of the hub.
129. DRIVE SPROCKETS.
a. Description. The drive sprockets are bolted to hubs, which
in turn are attached to the flanged end of the final drive sprocket
shaft with studs, dowels and nuts. The sprockets are interchangeable.
b. Removal.
(1) RELEASE TRACK TENSION. See paragraph 125 d (2)
_
(2)
S DISCONNECT TRACK. See paragraph 125 b.
) REMOVE SPROCKETS. Remove the nuts that attach the
ket hub to the drive shaft. Pull the hub and dowels (G104-04-
319
TM 9.759
129-130
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
- FLAT SIDE OF SEAL CASE
HUB
END OF HUB RA PD 313347
Figure 158-Oil Seal and Hub
00550) off the studs. Remove the nuts and take out the bolts (G104-
15-24212) that attach the sprocket to the hub and remove the
sprocket.
c. Installation.
(1) INSTALL SPROCKETS. Position the sprockets on the hub. In-
stall the bolts and tighten with 140-foot-pounds of torque. Hold the
heads of the bolts with a wrench, install and tighten the nuts to 100
foot-pounds torque. Mount the hub and dowels on the drive shaft
studs. Install the attaching nuts and tighten securely.
(2) CONNECT TRACK. See paragraph 125 c (2).
(3) ADJUST TRACK TENSION. See paragraph 125 d.
130. SHOCK ABSORBERS.

a. Description (fig. 159). A telescopic-type hydraulic shock ab-
sorber is attached to each.of the six horizontal suspension assemblies.
A filler hole is provided in the reservoir for adding fluid when re-
quired. The fluid capacity of the shock absorbers is 70 ounces. If
the shock absorbers do not become warm when the vehicle is being
operated, it is an indication that the fluid is low, or that the se
absorber is not functioning. _
320
TM 9.759
E
RIZONTAL VOLUTE SPRING, SUSPENSION AND TRACKS
130
.,4
(2,m
v) a) Z S a
'Lo C ) 0
a)0 a a Z
0
*
,~n3:
go
') _ o
I I i
z
z L-
s
_a ,:
32 0
321
TM 9.759
130-131
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
h. Removal. See paragraph 131 c (1).

c. Installation. See paragraph 131 c (2).
d. Filling Shock Absorber on Vehicle. Ordinarily the shock
absorbers will not require filling after the vehicle has been put in
operation. If leakage is apparenc, replace the assembly. If filling is
necessary as a temporary expedient, proceed as follows:
(1) Place the vehicle sd that the shock absorber is approximately
horizontal and near midstroke. Clean off all mud and dirt at the
reservoir filler plug, and remove the plug. CAUTION: Exercise ex-
treme care to prevent dirt entering the filler plug opening.
(2) Fill the reservoir with shock absorber fluid to the level of the
plug opening (fig. 159) and install the plug, using a new gasket
if necessary.
(3) If the loss of the fluid has been excessive, operate the ve-
hicle over rough terrain to fill the shock absorber cylinder with
fluid. Then repeat steps (1) and (2) above, and add more fluid
if required.
131. SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY.
a. Description (fig. 159). The forward support arms on the front
suspensions and the rear arms on the rear suspensions are provi
with stops. The stops limit the downward movement of the al
therefore these arms are not interchangeable with the other suppo "
arms.
b. Removal and Installation of Suspension Wheels.
(1) REMOVE INNER SUSPENSION WHEEL. Place the vehicle on
level terrain. Lay a block one-inch thick on the track ahead of or
behind the outer wheel. Move the vehicle until the outer wheel
rests on the block. Take out the mounting screws and remove the
wheel. In some instances, such as when the vehicle is fully loaded,
it may be necessary to place a jack under the hull and raise the hull,
to provide the necessary clearance for removal of the inner wheel.
(2) INSTALL INNER SUSPENSION WHEEL. Mount the wheel on the
pilots in the hub. Install the mounting screws and tighten securely.
Move the vehicle and remove the block.
(3) REMOVE OUTER SUSPENSION WHEEL. Place the vehicle on
level terrain. Lay a block one-inch thick ahead or behind the inner
wheel. Move the vehicle until the inner wheel rests on the block.
Take out the mounting screws and remove the outer wheel.
(4) INSTALL OUTER SUSPENSION WHEEL. Follow the procedure
outlined in step (2) above.
(5) REMOVE BOTH INNER AND OUTER SUSPENSION WHE Y
Remove outer wheel (step (3) above). Place a jack under the
322
TM 9-759
131
0 0
Z Z
L a O~~~~
0.- v)~v u
a y,~~~~~~~~~~~
La:~~~~3..
IL
U,
'
0 zr ,' 4 UP
zzv ~JJO
",
<#l a
.i
zz~
Z Z
I
v) Q-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I
~~-
Z cx u"~
°~ Z
~~~oa - 0
C
a~~~~
rr)~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
,,..,r9
_zC =
Z3 0) 0
a~~~~ : rn(3~ ~ 32 --~-i-9
ZZ *
v
~~~n~~
3
-
323
TM 9-759
131
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
hub and raise the suspension arm just high enough to remove the bW
under the inner wheel. Take out the mounting screws and remove
the inner wheel. In some instances, such as when the vehicle is
fully loaded, it may be necessary to jack up the hull to provide
clearance for removal of the wheel.
(6) INSTALL BOTH INNER AND OUTER SUSPENSION WHEELS.
Install inner suspension wheel (step (2) above). Place a block one
inch thick under the inner wheel and remove the jack under the
outer hub. Install the outer wheel in the same manner as described
in step (2) above.
e. Relplacement of Volute il)rings (fig. 160).
(1) REMOVE VOLUTE SPRINGS. Remove the shock absorber clamp
bolts. Remove the shock absorber pins and lift off the shock absorber.
Place a 30-ton jack under arm support and raise the suspension
assembly until the suspension wheels are clear of the lower portion
of track. NOTE: When removing the springs from either front or rear
suspension assembly, place a 30-ton jack under center suspension
assembly, and release track tension (par. 125 (l (2) ). Remove one
mounting screw from each suspension wheel and attach adapters
to wheels. Attach track connecting fixture to adapters and draw the
wheels together. Insert a pry bar between the arm support and la_
coil end of the spring and pry the spring up until it is clear of
seat, then lift out the spring.
(2) INSTALL VOLUTE SPRINGS (fig. 160). Enter the small coil
end of each spring on the pilot and force the other end of each
spring into position in spring seat. Release the tension on the track
connecting fixture and remove the fixture and adapters from the sus-
pension wheels. Remove the jack. Position the shock absorber on
the suspension arms, with the reservoir filler plug to the outside,
install the pins and tighten the clamp screws.
(3) ADJUST TRACK TENSION. See paragraph 125 (I (3).
d. Disassemblv.
(1) RELEASE TRACK TENStON. See paragraph 125 (I (2).
(2) REMOVE SHOCK ABSORBERS, SPRINGS AND SPRING SEATS.
Remove springs (subpar. c (1) above). Lift out the spring seats.
Loosen the spring seat pin clamp bolts, and remove the pin (fig. 161).
Remove the other spring seat pin in the same manner.
(3) REMOVE SUSPENSION ARMS AND HUB ASSEMBLY (fig. 162).
Take out the suspension wheel mounting screws, and remove the
wheels. Remove the four suspension arm pin clamp bolts. Remove
the suspension arm support screws and the support. Pull the inner
end of the suspension arm pin out of the bracket, and remove
arm and pin assembly. Remove the other arm in the same ma
324
TM 9-759
E ORIZONTAL VOLUTE SPRING, SUSPENSION AND TRACKS

131
SPRING SEAT PIN CLAMP BOLTS
RA PD 341208
Figure 161-Removing Spring Seal Pin
(4) REMOVE SUSPENSION BRACKET (fig. 163). Take out the

cap screws that attach the bracket to the hull, and remove the
bracket.
(5) DISASSEMBLE HUB (fig. 162). Take out the attaching
screws, and remove the hub cap and gasket. Pry the nut lock tongue
out of the wheel outer bearing nut. Remove the nut and the nut
lock. Unscrew the wheel inner bearing nut, and remove the thrust
washer. Pull the hub off the wheel shaft. Remove the outer and
inner bearing cones and seal. Disassemble the other hubs in the
same manner.
e. Inspection and Repair of Parts.
(1) CLEAN PARTS. See paragraph 126 c.
(2) INSPECT BEARINGS AND SEALS. See paragraph 126 d.
(3) INSPECT OTHER PARTS (fig. 162). If a suspension bracket is
cracked or twisted. replace the bracket. Replace the suspension arm
mbly if cracked or twisted. If a suspension arm pin or a wheel
t is bent or loose in the arm, replace the arm assembly. If the
325
TM 9.759
131
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
z .0
a. '
'A 9
0
<.. c
l.,z IJ- 3z
L "z FL Z
a Z LL
0.
zz z P6
u- u.
0U F 5 Z
C3 Ctx n JV)
O 326 D
TM 9.759
.e RIZONTAL VOLUTE SPRING, SUSPENSION AND TRACKS

131
spring seat plates are worn excessively, turn the plates over or
install new plates. Replace the springs if cracked or broken or if
they measure less than 13 inches in length. Replace the spring
seat pins if badly worn or bent. If the shock absorber pins or bush-
ings are worn, replace the bushings and pins.
f. Assembly.
(1) INSTALL INNER BEARING CONE AND SEAL (fig. 162). Pack
the inner bearing cone with general purpose grease, and install the
cone in the hub. Position the seal in the hub with the flat side of
the seal case out (fig. 158). Use a seal drift, and drive the seal into
the hub until the flat side of the seal case is flush with the end of
the hub.
(2) INSTALL HUBS (fig. 162). Slide the hub onto the shaft.
Pack the outer bearing cone with general purpose grease. Install
the bearing cone and thrust washer. Screw the bearing inner nut
on the shaft until the bearing cones are seated, but not sufficiently to
cause a bind in the bearings.
_(t4) INSTALL NUT LOCK, BEARING OUTER NUT, HUB CAP AND
KET. (fig. 162). Install the nut lock, and bend a tongue into
_1[ of the slots in the bearing inner nut. Screw the bearing outer
nut onto the shaft. Tighten the nut to 200 foot-pounds torque, and
bend a tongue into one of the slots in the nut. If a tongue does not
line up with a slot in the outer nut, continue to tighten (do not back
off the nut) until a tongue alines with the slot. Install the gasket
(G104-03-02310) and hub cap with the attaching screws. Fill the
hub with grease through the lubricant fitting in the hub cap until
grease appears at the seal or relief fitting in the center of the hub.
(5) INSTALL SUSPENSION BRACKET (fig. 163). Position the
bracket on the hull. Support the bracket with a jack. Install the
attaching 1-inch floor bolts and tighten securely. Then install the
attaching 3 /4-inch side bolts and tighten securely.
(6) INSTALL SUSPENSION ARMS (fig. 163). Raise the arm into
position on the bracket and insert the rear end of the suspension arm
pin into the bracket. Install the other arm in the same manner.
Position the arm support on the suspension arm pins, and drive the
support on the pins until it seats solidly on the end of the sus-
pension bracket. Be sure the key on the end of the bracket is
properly entered in the keyway in the arm support. Raise the arm
support with a jack until it seats solidly against the bracket, install
He support attaching screws and tighten securely. Aline the slots
_inthe outer ends of the suspension arm pins with the slots in the
port. Install the clamp bolts, and tighten the nuts securely.
327
TM 9.759
131-132
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
SUSPENSION ARM- BRACKET 1 r CLAMP BOLTS SUSPENSION ARM
m SUPPORT
SUPPORT SCREWS -
"'. _ SUSPENSION WHEEL
RA PD 3133 9
Figure 163-Suspension Arms and Wheels Installed
(7) INSTALL WHEELS. Install the wheels on the hubs and

tighten the mounting screws securely.
(8) INSTALL SPRINGS AND SHOCK ABSORBERS (fig. 159). Install
the spring seat pins in the support arms. Be sure the pins are cen-
tered, so that both ends of the pin are an equal distance from the
arm. Tighten the clamp bolts. Position the spring seats on the
spring seat pins. Install the springs and shock absorber.
Section XXIV
VERTICAL VOLUTE SPRING, SUSPENSION AND
TRACKS
132. DESCRIPTION.
a. Two individually driven tracks propel the vehicle forward _
backward (fig. 164). Each track is composed of 79 separate siW
328
TM 9-759
132
VERTICAL VOLUTE SPRING, SUSPENSION AND TRACKS
TRACK SPROCKET TRACK SUPPORT SKID
VOLUTE SUSPENSION BRACKET- \ TRACK SUPPORT ROLLER
,,_I 1 j_
r-.
?I~- it
VOLUTE SPRING SUSPENSION WHEEL
/1 ..
TRACK REAR IDLER WHEEL
RA PD 312500
.igure 164--Vertical Volute Spring Suspension and Tracks

W~329 329
TM 9-759
132-133
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
The tank is supported on six bogie suspension assemblies bolted t

hull. Each suspension has two rubber-tired wheels. As the
passes over uneven ground, the vertical movement of the suspension
wheels is transferred to the supporting arms or levers, and is absorbed
by the two volute springs in each suspension assembly. Two drive
sprockets at the f:ont end of the vehicle pull the tracks from the rear,
and lay them down in front of the advancing suspension wheels. A
track skid (G104-23-86584) and a single steel roller are mounted at
the top of each suspension to support and carry the upper portion of
the track. An adjustable idler wheel for each track is mounted at the
rear of the vehicle for adjusting tension of the tracks.
133. TRACKS.
a. Track Removal. With the vehicle on level terrain, so that
it can be moved as required, remove track sand shields. Release the
track tension at the idler adjustment (subpar. d (1) below). Break
the track between the front suspension wheel and the sprocket.
NOTE: If the track has been thrown, break the track underneath
either the idler or the sprocket, depending on which end of the track
has the least twist. Remove the wedge nuts and the wedges
(G104-03-07761) and drive off the connectors (G104-03-01488).
Lay t-.? top half of the track on the ground to the rear of the vehic~
1. Track Installatien.
(1) INSTALL TRACK (fig. 165). If a new track or track section
(G104-17-83067) or (G104-17-83069) is to be installed, lay it in
front of, and in alinement with, the old track. If a thrown track is to
be installed, dig a trench deep enough for the end of the track, so that
the suspension wheel can roll directly onto the track. Tow the vehicle
onto the track until about 16 inches of the end protrudes beyond
the front suspension wheel. Block the suspension wheels in the
track to prevent vehicle moving. Place the rear idler wheel in the
extreme forward position, and lock the spindle in the bracket to pre-
vent breakage of the idler bracket. Roll the end of the track over
the idler wheel, and pull the track forward over the support rollers
and sprocket with a cable attached to a towing unit.
(2) CONNECT TRACK SHOES (fig. 165). Attach the track con-
necting fixture to the ends of the track, and draw the ends together.
Install connectors, wedges and wedge nuts. Remove the blocks from
the suspension wheels.
(3) ADJUST TRACK TENSION. See subparagraph d below.
c. Dead Track Block Replacement (fig. 166).
(1) REMOVE DEAD TRACK BLOCK. Move tank so that the shoe
to be replaced is midway between the idler wheel and the rear _
330t
TM 9-759
133
TRACK ASSEMBLY
HUB AND SPROCKET ASSE BL
RA PD 341209
Figure 165-Connec*in g Track

331
TM 9-759
133
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
DEAD TRACK BLOCK
RA PD 312502
Figure 166-Dead Track Block
pension wheel. Release track tension at the idler adjustment (sub-

par. dl (1) below). Remove the wedge nuts and wedges and drive
off connectors.
(2) INSTALL TRACK BLOCK. Attach the new shoe to one en_
the track. Connect track shoes with the track connecting fixture.
Install connectors, wedges, and wedge nuts.
(3) ADJUST TRACK TENSION AND LOCK IDLER ADJUSTMENT. See
subparagraph dI below.
d. Track Tension Adjustment.

(1) RELEASE IDLER LOCK (fig. 167). Loosen the two outside
clamping bolts in the idler wheel bracket. Turn the center bolt counter-
clockwise to spread the bracket until the spindle is free. CAUTION:
Excessive spreading will crack the bracket. Place the adjusting
wrench on the hexagon at the end of the spindle, and turn the spindle
to release the bind on the collar. Raise the spring at the end of the
bracket, and slide the collar off the serrations on the idler wheel
spindle.
(2) ADJUST TENSION (fig. 167). Remove the sand shields over
the rear suspension wheels. Lay a straightedge along the top of the
track between the center and rear track supporting rollers. Use a piece
of pipe on the handle of the adjusting wrench for leverage, and raise
the handle of the wrench to tighten the track until there is 1/2- to 3/4-
inch clearance between the straightedge and the top of the tr
measured midway between the center and track rear supp
332
TM 9-759
133
STRAIGHTEDGE 'A-TO 3/4-INCH SAG

X BETWEEN ROLLERS
TRACK SUPPORT ROLLERS
ADJUSTING
COLLAR IDLER WHEEL BRACKET
ADJUSTING COLLAR SPRING \ SPREADING BOLT L.H
REAR IDLER WHEEL SPINDLE
WRENCH (41-W-640-400) .-" . d

CLAMPING BOLTS
RA PD 312503
Figure 167-Adjusting Track Tension

SI :t:r: ( ,-4,R-- -2 333
TM 9.759
133
TANK. MEDIUM, .M4A3 _
Sz :' __
I 0 u I ZE
u I N< D 'D V
-Z
z _
uj w
z -~ " 0
-- co 1
<i <-0 V
<Z I -<U
'
I _I
a°- <xs!°o
TM 9.759
133-134
.O lers.
(3)
Slide the collar plate back on and off the spindle when
changing the wrench position.
LOCK IDLER ADJUSTMENT (fig. 167). Slide the collar on
the serrations of the spindle and lock it in place with the spring.
Back out the center spreader bolt by turning it clockwise until it
does not project through the split in the bracket. Tighten both :,t-
side clamping bolts securely, then tighten the center spreader bolt
until it binds sufficiently to hold it from working loose. Remove the
idler adjusting wrench. Install the sand shields.
e. Grousers,.
(1) DESCRIPTION. Grousers are used with chevron-type rubber
shoe tracks to give positive traction on slippery surfaces when the
chevrons are worn off the shoes.
(2) INSTALLATION. Place the grouser over the track so that it
is across the opening between two track shoes, and slide the two
pins on the inside grouser end plate into the holes in the track shoe
pins. Install the pins on the outside grouser end plate in the cor-
responding outer track shoe pins, and fasten the plate to the grouser
with the special bolt and lock washer. Move the vehicle to install
.rousers on the lower part of the track.
4. TRACK IDLER WHEEL AND BRACKET.

a. Removal anal Disassemblv.
(1) REMOVE TRACK. See paragraph 133 a.
(2) REMOVE IDLER WHEEL. Remove the six cap screws in the
idler wheel cap. Take out the cotter pin which secures the wheel
nut, and remove the nut and washer. Pull the idler wheel (G104-03-
07773) off the spindle with the idler wheel puller '(41-P-29400-800).
(3) REMOVE OIL RETAINERS AND BEARING (fig. 168). Remove
the outer idler wheel bearing and oil retainer with the bearing puller
(41-P-29400-800). Remove the center bearing spacer. Drive out
the inner idler wheel bearing and oil retainer.
(4) CLEAN AND INSPECT PARTS. Clean the hub of the idler
wheel, bearings, and spacer. Inspect the bearings carefully for rough
or broken balls, or cracked races. The bearing should spin freely
without binding. Replace all damaged parts.
1). Assembly and Installation.
(1) INSTALL OIL RETAINERS AND BEARINGS (fig. 168). Pack
the inner idler wheel bearing with grease (par. 29), and place the
bearing in position in the hub. Drive the bearing into the hub with
drift until the bearing seats against the shoulder of the hub. Turn
idler wheel cover, and install the center bearing spacer. Pack the
_0~~~~ ~~335
TM 9-759
134
TANK. MEDIUM, M4A3
V
Z < C
0 0 Z - 0
4 X 0 _ <
u/ " 0 0 o _
0
D 336
A> 0< < 0
0
> 6 0
0;--
/
c,
t- ~Y ~ CL ~ Q c
33
c3o
c .
0 ·
))&m I
33
TM 9.759
134.135
O er bearing with grease (par. 29), and drive the bearing into place
in the hub with a drift. Install two new oil retainers on the spindle
with the lips of the retainers toward the shoulder of the spindle. Place
two shims (made from an old oil retainer) between the shoulder
of the spindle and the oil retainer to force the oil retainer to the proper
depth in the hub when the idler wheel is installed.
(2) INSTALL TRACK IDLER WHEEL. Place the idler wheel on
the spindle. Screw the idler wheel installing tool (41-T-3216-150)
on the spindle, and force the idler wheel onto the spindle. Remove
the installing tool. Remove the locating shims between the shoulder
of the spindle and the oil retainer. Install the washer and nut on
the spindle, and tighten securely. Install cotter pin. Install the
idler wheel cap and retainer screws.
(3) INSTALL TRACK. See paragraph 133 h.
c. Idler Wheel Bracket Removal.
(1) RELEASE IDLER LOCK. See paragraph 133 d (1).
(2) DISCONNECT TRACKS AND REMOVE BRACKET. Disconnect
the track between the idler wheel and the rear suspension wheel. Re-
_v e the sand shields, and move the track toward the front of the
inicle until the end of the track is clear of the idler wheel. Remove
s icotter pin from the hexagon end of the spindle, and slide the
collar off the spindle. Pull the spindle and wheel out of the idler
wheel bracket. Remove the cap screws that attach the bracket to
the hull, and take off the bracket.
d. Idler Wheel Bracket Installation.
(1) INSTALL BRACKET AND TRACK. Attach the idler bracket
to the hull with cap screws. Tighten the cap screws securely, and
install the lock wires. Spread bracket and install the spindle and
wheel in the idler wheel bracket. Slide the collar on the serrated
end of the spindle, and install the cotter pin in the hole in the spindle.
Pull the track over the idler wheel.
(2) CONNECT TRACK SHOES. See paragraph 133 b (2).
135. TRACK SUPPORTING ROLLER AND BRACKET.

a. Removal (fig. 170). Remove sand shields. Remove the lock
wires, take out the four cap screws that attach the track skid (G104-
23-86584) to the top of the bogie frame, and raise the track suffi-
ciently to take the weight off the roller (G104-03-05690). Remove
lock wires, take out the six cap screws and attach the roller
ket to the bogie frame, and remove the roller and bracket.
-_~~~ ~~337
TM 9-759
135
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
C BFG
B o.. DD
A~~~~~~~
D~~~~~~~
E
AL
K-
AK.. i 0
L N AA- L
A.
o M
P~~~~Car~~~~
AF
~~~AJ
AC J/
170-Vout
AAFigure Sprin z Supension Assembly
w~ Disssm
AL ~~~~AC
AD ~ AS-Q AA
Figure 170.Volufe Spring Suspension Assembly Pliorrsn,

338
TM 9-759
135
A-SUPPORT ROLLERASSEMBLY T-RUBBING PLATESCREW
B-NUT U-VOLUTE SUSPENSION ARM, LEFT
C-CAP SCREW V-VOLUTE SUSPENSION GUDGEON NUT
D-CAP SCREW - W-WHEEL GUDGEON OIL SEAL
E-LOCK WASHER X-VOLUTE SUSPENSION BRACKET CAP
F-LOCK WIRE Y-VOLUTE SUSPENSION BRACKETCAP LOCK
G-CAP SCREW Z-BRACKET CAP STUD
H-TRACK SUPPORTSKID AA-VOLUTE SUSPENSION WHEEL ASSEMBLY
I-BRACKET PLUG AB-WHEEL GUDGEON
J-VOLUTE SUSPENSION BRACKET AC-WOODRUFF KEY
K-VOLUTE SUSPENSION SPRING AD-WHEEL GUDGEON CAP SCREW
L-CAP SCREW AE-LOCK WASHER
M-LOCK WASHER AF-VOLUTE SUSPENSION ARM, RIGHT
N-LEVER BUSHING AG-VOLUTE SUSPENSION BUSHING
O-LEVER AH-VOLUTE SUSPENSION SPACER
P-RUBBING PLATE AI-VOLUTE SUSPENSION RUBBING PLATI
Q-SPRING SEAT AJ-SPRING SEAT BUSHING
I--SUSPENSION GUDGEON AK-SPRING SEAT RING
5-VOLUTE SUSPENSION PLATE AL-TRACK SUPPORTROLLERBRACKET
IA PD 531571
Legend for Fivure 170

339
TM 9.759
135-136
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
Remove the lock wires and four cap screws that attach the rW
shaft to the bracket, and lift roller and spacers from the bracket.
b. Installation (fig. 170). Place the roller and spacers in the
support bracket, and install the four cap screws that attach the
roller shaft to the bracket. Tighten cap screws securely, and install
lock wires. Attach the roller bracket to the bogie frame with the
six cap screws. Tighten cap screws securely and install lock wires.
Remove the jack. Attach the track skid to the top of the bogie
frame with the four cap screws. Tighten cap screws securely, and
install lock wires.
136. SUSPENSION WHEELS, BEARINGS, AND OIL RE-

TAINERS.
a. General. The forward suspension wheel under the drive
sprocket on each track cannot be removed without disconnecting the
track. The remainder of the suspension wheels can be removed
without disconnecting the track.
Il. Removal and Disassemldiv.
(1) REMOVE SUSPENSION WHEEL (fig. 171). Place the bogie
lift (41-L-1375) on the track under the suspension arms to
lifted. Carefully drive the vehicle forward or backward, depen
on the wheel to be lifted, until the lift is vertical and the w
has been raised. If a forward wheel is being removed, release tray
tension (par. 133 d (1)), and break the track between front sus-
pension wheel and drive sprocket. Remove the cotter pin from
the nut (G104-23-15900) on the inner end of the wheel gudgeon
(G104-22-05500) and remove the nut. Remove the plug in the
head of the gudgeon pin. Pull out the gudgeon pin, and remove
the wheel.
(2) REMOVE OIL RETAINERS AND BEARINGS (fig. 172). Support
the wheel on its side on blocks. Move the bearing spacer located
in the center of the hub between the bearings to one side. Use a
drift seated on the outer bearing race to drive out the bearing, oil
retainers, and outer spacer. Keep moving the drift around the entire
circumference of the outer bearing race, and drive the bearing out
evenly. Remove the inner spacer, turn the wheel over, and drive
out the other bearing, oil retainers, and outer spacer.
c. Assenllyv anud Installation.
(1) INSTALL BEARINGS AND OIL RETAINERS (fig. 172). Lay the
wheel on its side. Pack the bearing with general purpose grease,
and start the inner bearing into the hub by hand. Tap the bearing
into place with the bearing installing drift (41-D-1463) until it s
against the shoulder in the hub. Install both the inner and
340
TM 9-759
136
VOLUTE SUSPENSION WHEEL rVOLUTE SUSPENSION BRACKET
BOGIE WHEEL LIFT

(41-L-1375)
VOLUTE SUSPENSION ARM

TRACK SHOE CONNECTION
VOLUTE SUSPENSION
RACKET
OLUTE SUSPENSION WHEEL '
SUSPENSION ( K
VOLUTE
SUSPENSION
ARM (RAISED)
STEP ON BOGIE
WHEEL LIFT
BOGIE WHEEL
LIFT (41-L-1375)
RA PD 312507
Figure 171-Raising Volute Suspension Wheel With Lift

341
TM 9-759
136
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
IA I I I A1
E a n / /
H A-BEARING SPACER, OUTER
A-BEARING SPACER, OUTER

B-BEARING OIL SEAL
C-BEARING OIL SEAL
BACKING PLATE
D-ROLLER BEARING AND RACE
E-LUBRICATION FITTING
F-WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY
G-BEARING SPACER, CENTER
H-RELIEF FITTING
I-BEARING OIL RETAINER
J-DOUBLE ROW BALL BEARING
RA. PD 3125_
Figure 172-Volute Suspension Wheel Disassembler V

342
TM 9-759
136-137
. VERTICAL VOLUTE SPRING, SUSPENSION AND TRACKS
retainers on the outer spacer with the lips of the retainers toward
the shoulder of the spacer. Start the spacer into the wheel hub, and
tap the spacer into place with the drift. Turn the wheel over, and
install the inner spacer. Pack the bearing with general purpose
grease, and tap the bearing into place in the hub. Install the oil
retainer on the outer spacer. Install spacer in wheel.
(2) INSTALL SUSPENSION WHEEL. Place the wheel, with lubri-
cation fitting toward the outside of the vehicle, on the track between
the arms. Aline the gudgeon hole in the arms and wheel. Install
the plug in the hexagon end of the gudgeon pin, and start the gudgeon
pin through the outer arms and into the outer spacer and wheel
bearing. Line up the center spacer with a bar from the inner side
of the wheel, and tap the gudgeon pin into the center spacer. Drive
the gudgeon pin through far enough to aline the key slot in the
gudgeon pin with the slot in the outer arm. Install the key, and
drive the gudgeon pin all the way in. Install and tighten the nut
on the inner end of the gudgeon pin, and secure with a cotter pin.
137. VOLUTE SPRING SUSPENSION.
a. Volute Suspension Assembly Removal.
(1) RELEASE TRACK TENSION. See paragraph 133 d (1).
_ 2) DISCONNECT TRACK. Break the track between the idler
Weel and rear suspension wheel. Remove the sand shields. Drive
tank forward until the end of the top of the track clears the bogie
to be removed. Set the hand brake to prevent the track moving.
(3) REMOVE VOLUTE SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY. Remove all cap
screws from volute suspension bracket. Jack up the tank hull so
that the suspension wheel (G104-18-46950) will clear the track.
Attach a hoist to the volute suspension, and lift out the assembly.
h. Volute Suspension Assembly Installation.
(1) INSTALL VOLUTE SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY. Attach a hoist
to the volute suspension, and lift the assembly into the track. Place
a jack under the tank hull, and lift the side of the tank sufficiently
to allow the foot of the bracket of the volute suspension to clear the
bottom of the tank hull. Lower the hoist, and move the top of the
assembly into position against the hull. Line up the mounting holes,
and install cap screws or nuts.
(2) CONNECT TRACK. Drive tank backward, and guide the track
over the rollers with a bar or plank into position to be connected.
Connect the track with track connecting fixture (fig. 165).
(3) ADJUST TRACK TENSION. See paragraph 133 d (2)
c. Volute Spring Replacement (fig. 173)
1) REMOVAL. Place two 5-ton jacks beneath springs. Poui-
343
TM 9-759
137
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
VOLUTE SPRING GUDGEON CENTER CAP SCR*
LOCKING CAP SCREW*

-eHYDRAULIC
x'~ J~~~ JACKS
RA PD 28455
Figure 173-Changing Volute Spring
tion the jacks on the track so that the head of each jack is in the
center of each end of the spring seat plate. In placing the jacks,
arrange the blocking so that the jack plunger will be nearly at the
upper end of its travel when the thrust of the springs is taken up,
in order to permit a greater lowering travel later (fig. 173). Jack
up seat plate. Raise each jack until the thrust of the spring has
been taken up. Straighten the ears of locking plate, remove the
two locking cap screws and loosen the center cap screw that secures
the center gudgeon pins in the bogie bracket (fig. 173). Remove the
bogie gudgeon pins. When the pins are pulled out, the bogie arms
and gudgeon spacers will drop. Lower the jack with the spring
seat plate and springs. If the jack has not sufficient travel to de-
compress the springs, push two bars through the gudgeon pin holes,
and lower the spring seat plate onto the bars. Remove the blocking,
or lower the adjustable screw onto the jack, and again raise the
plate off the bars with the jack. Remove the bars, and continue
lower the jack and decompress the spring. If the spring seat
344 _
TM 9.759
137- 139
HULL AND TURRET
O! springs do not drop out on removal of the jack, free them with
a hammer or wood block. NOTE: Whenever a new volute spring is
required, install two new springs, never one old and one new spring.
(2) INSTALLATION. Place the springs and spring seat plate in
position, and raise with the jacks until the springs are compressed
sufficiently. Aline the bogie arms and spacer plates, and install
the gudgeon pins, making sure that grooves are on the side to permit
installation of the locking cap screws. Install the gudgeon locking
cap screws, and secure the lock plate to the cap screw heads. Lower
and remove the jacks, allowing the bogie levers to resume their
normal position on the wheel arms.
d. Rubbing Plate Replacement (fig. 170). Place a pinch bar
between the lever and arm to relieve the pressure on the rubbing
plate. Insert a block between the arm and lever. Unscrew the
rubbing plate retainer screw from the plate, install a new plate and
tighten the screw securely. Remove the block from between the
arm and lever with a pinch bar.
Section XXV
* HULL AND TURRET
'38. HULL.
a. Description. The hull of the vehicle is made of welded armor
plate, and is divided into two sections by a bulkhead. The engine
compartment is located in the rear section; the fighting compartment
and driver's and assistant driver's stations are located in the front
section.
b. Wet Stowage. Wet stowage is provided on some 75-mm
vehicles and on all 76-mm vehicles. Wet stowage means that the
ammunition racks are enclosed in a container filled with a solution
to prevent fire. The container is filled through plugs located on the
top of the container.
c. Fender or Sand Shield Replacement. Turn all of the screw
head locks one-quarter of a turn counterclockwise on the fender or
sand shield to be removed. Remove the nuts, bolts and bond washers
that secure the fender or sand shield. Hold the fender or sand shield
in place and install the nuts, bolts and bond washers. Push in on the
screw head locks, and turn them one-quarter of a turn clockwise.
139. ESCAPE HATCH.

a. The escape hatch is located in the vehicle floo: back of the
stant driver's seat (fig. 175). The escape hatch is important to
345
TM 9.759
139-140
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
ASSISTANT DRIVER'S COMPARTMENT DI
PERISCOPES
POWER TRAIN PERISCOPES DRIVER'S COMPARTMENT DOOR

IA PD 329251
Figure 174-View of Driver's and Assistant Driver's Doors

From Above
the safety of the crew, and should be checked frequently for ease of
operation. It should be removed, cleansed of dirt and rust, and its
working parts lubricated at regular intervals. Operation of the escape
hatch is described in paragraph 12 h.
140. VISION DEVICES.

a. Description. A periscope is provided for each member of
the crew at his station. The mounting for each periscope, except that
of the gunner, includes a revolving plate which permits the periscope
to be aimed in any position. A rotation set screw can be tighte
to hold the periscope in any position desired. The periscope m_
346
TM 9-759
140-141
HULL AND TURRET
HANDLE LOCKING RODS
LOCKING RODS RELEASE AND LOCKING LEVER HANDLE
RA PD 329249
Figure 175-Escape Hatch
can be tilted to elevate the line of vision, and can be locked in place
by a knurled nut on the back of the periscope. A safety lock pre-
vents the periscope from falling out if the knurled nut becomes
loosened.
b. Periscope Replacement. Slide the safety lock back, loosen
the knurled nut, and remove the periscope. To install, insert the
periscope in place, tighten the knurled nut, and secure with safety
lock.
141. DRIVER'S AND ASSISTANT DRIVER'S HATCH DOORS.
a. Description (fig. 174). The driver's hatch doors, located at
the front of the hull, permit entrance into the driver's and assistant
driver's compartment. A periscope is mounted in each door on a ball-
bearing race permitting a 360-degree rotation
b. Removal. Disconnect the assist spring on top of the door.
crew the plug in the rear hinge bearing, and remove the hinge
Remove the hatch door. This procedure applies to both doors.
347
TM 9-759
141-144
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
C. Installation. Fit the door hinge section to the hull hi

section so that it does not bind in any position. Fit the hinge pin in
the hinge so that the door will operate freely. Fill the space at the
rear end of the hinge with oil, and screw the plugs tightly in place.
142. ENGINE COMPARTMENT DOORS.

a. Description (fig. 24). The engine compartment covers con-
sist of a front cover, rear cover, and two doors. The engine com-
partment doors are mounted directly to the hull. The doors on later
vehicles are provided with shutters under the grilles, and are con-
trolled by a cable operated in the fighting compartment.
i,. Removal. Remove the two bolts that secure each door at
the lifting handles. Open both doors and, if equipped with shut-
ters, disconnect both shutter control cables at the hinged ends of the
doors. Remove the six bolts that secure each of the hinge plates to
the hull. Remove the doors and hinge plates from the hull. Remove
the cotter pin at each of the four hinges and remove the hinge pins.
Remove the hinge plates from the two doors.
c. Installation. Place the hinge plate in place between the
hinges on the door. Install the hinge pins and cotter pin. Place the
door in position on the hull. Use a long-nosed drift to line up
holes in the hinge plate with the holes in the hull. Install the
bolts that secure the hinge plate and door to the hull. If equippe
with shutters, connect the shutter control cable at each door. Close
both doors, and install the four bolts at the lifting handles.
143. PINTLE HOOK.

a. Description. A pintle hook is provided on the rear of the
later vehicles for towing a trailer only. The pintle hook is attached to
the hull by means of a large nut on the end of the pintle stud.
b. Replacement. Remove the cotter pin and castellated nut
that secure the pintle hook to the bracket and remove the pintle
hook. To install the pintle hook, position it in place on the bracket,
and install the castellated nut and cotter pin.
144. TURRET.
a. General. The turret is a one-piece, armor-steel casting, ro-
tating on a ball-bearing race, which is recessed and protected against
direct hits and lead splash. The turret platform or basket is sus-
pended from the turret by a ring of bolts around its top circumference.
b. 75-mm Dry Stowage Vehicles (fig. 4). The 75-mm
stowage vehicles are equipped with one turret hatch cover, w t
348
TM 9.759
144-146
HULL AND TURRET
Oates through 360 degrees and mounts a 50-caliber gun. A turret

basket is provided on all 75-mm dry stowage vehicles.
c. 75-mm Wet Stowage Vehicles (fig. 3). The 75-mm wet stow-
age vehicles are equipped with two turret hatch covers, one which ro-
tates through 360 degrees and mounts a 50-caliber gun, and also one
hinge-type hatch cover; which is held open or closed by a spring-
loaded latch. The turrets on the 75-mm wet stowage vehicles are
equipped with a full-turret platform.
d. 76-mm Wet Stowage Vehicles (fig. 2). The 76-mm wet
stowage vehicles are equipped with a turret hatch cover which ro-
tates through 360 degrees and mounts a 50-caliber gun. A cupola
is also provided to insure better vision from inside the turret (fig. 2).
A partial platform is provided in this type of turret for the gunner.
e. 105-mm Howitzer (fig. 5). The turrets on all 105-mm
howitzer vehicles are provided with a cupola and a hinge-type hatch
cover. The 50-caliber gun mount is stationary on the turret.
145. CUPOLA VISION BLOCKS.

a. Description. Direct-vision blocks are provided in a cupola
_h the 76-mm wet stowage and 105-mm howitzer vehicles (figs. 2
5). The vision blocks are bulletproof, and are easily replaced.
b. Replacement. Remove the socket head set screw from
each end of the vision block. Loosen the center soc!:et head set
screw and remove the vision block retainer and vision block. To
install the vision block, hold the block in place and install the re-
tainer and tighten the center socket head set screw. Install and
tighten the two end socket head set screws.
146. GUN-TRAVELING LOCKS.

a. Description. The later M4A3 vehicles, with the exception
of the 75-mm dry stowage vehicles, are equipped with a gun-traveling
lock (figs. 2, 3, and 5). To release the gun from the gun-traveling
lock, pull down on the release ring and at the same time raise the
gun. To lock the gun in the gun-traveling lock, hold the gun-traveling
lock jaws in a halfway open position and at the same time lower
the gun into the gun-traveling lock.
b. Replacement. Drive the lock pin from the right-hand side
of each bracket. Drive both hinge pins from the brackets and re-
move the gun-traveling lock. Position the gun-traveling lock in the
brackets and install the two hinge pins, making sure the lock pin
Wtall
_2lle in the hinge pin is in line with the lock pin hole in each bracket.
the lock pin in each bracket.
81:55,, 0--48-s2: 349
TM 9-759
147
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
Section XXVI
TURRET TRAVERSING MECHANISM

147. GEAR MECHANISM AND MANUAL DRIVE REPLACE-
MENT.
a. Removal (figs. 176 and 177).
(1) GENERAL. If working on a vehicle with the 105-mm howitzer,
follow the procedure in step (4) below. On all other vehicles, fol-
low the complete removal procedure (steps (2) through (4) below).
(2) REMOVE TUBES FROM TRAVERSE MOTOR TO TRAVERSE
PUMP AND OIL RESERVOIR (fig. 177). Disconnect nut on elbow fit-
ting in traverse pump port No. 2 and on motor port No. 1. Remove
the tube. Drain the oil remaining in the tube into a rag. Disconnect
nut on elbow fitting in motor port No. 3 and in port No. 14 in the
oil reservoir. Remove the tube. Drain oil remaining in the tube into
a rag. Disconnect nut on elbow fitting in traverse motor port No. 2
and in pump port No. 1. Remove the tube and drain the oil remain-
ing in the tube into a rag.
(3) REMOVE GEAR Box ADAPTER AND MOTOR. Remove locking
wire from the four nuts which hold the adapter to gear mechanis,
loosen the four nuts as much as possible and raise adapter and trav
motor assembly to unscrew the nuts from the studs. Lift gear
adapter and motor off gear mechanism.
(4) REMOVE GEAR Box. Remove two cap screws and lock
washers at lower end of gear case. Support manual traverse drive
handle extension and remove upper cap screws. Lift off the gear
mechanism and manual drive, being careful not to lose the case key
and the case shim.
hb. Installation (figs. 176 and 177).
(1) GENERAL. If working on a vehicle with a 105-mm howitzer,
follow the procedure in step (2) below; on all other models, follow
the complete installation procedure (steps (2) through (5)
below). Insert the two long cap screws with lock washers through
upper supports of gear case. Place spacer over end of each cap
screw and lift assembly into position. Start two upper screws with
fingers. If working on a 105-mm howitzer, install the two short cap
screws with lock washers through the lower case support, then
tighten all four cap screws.
(2) INSTALL CASE KEY AND SHIM. Insert the case key in slot
and slip the case shim into position. Insert two short cap screws with
lock washers through lower case support and shim and be sure the
key and shim are in position. Tighten upper and lowL, cap scr
350 _
TM 9.759
147
9 = o uj~~~o
Ki
pu
o o
w
-l
U
CL aZ >- A
L?< s. O i
Lai I a L
,t OO
D uj I
35 0
\>-~
351
TM 9-759
147
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
U U U I
/Z |Q. : Z oZ>
Ut .............. ° ~~S a
°U.' o2 - I ~- -. ~'vu ,
X~~ ~~ X e
352- 0_
/- .
0 'U
· O~ ~ ~ ~
to~o < 0
352
TM 9-759
147-148
W3 ) ASSEMBLE ADAPTER AND TRAVERSE MOTOR UNIT TO GEAR

MECHANISM. Set gasket on gear mechanism boss. Position splined
end of adapter shaft into gear mechanism pinion and set adapter
in place on studs. Fasten adapter to gear mechanism with four
safety nuts.
(4) INSTALL TUBES FROM TRAVERSE MOTOR TO TRAVERSE
PUMP AND OIL RESERVOIR. Insert ends of tubes and rings into their
respective fitting and just start the nuts. Install tube from motor
port No. 2 to pump port No. 1. Install tube from motor port No. 1
to pump port No. 2. Install tube from motor port No. 3 to oil
reservoir port No. 14. After tubes are in place in the manner
described, tighten all nuts.
(5) LUBRICATE GEAR Box ADAPTER, GEAR AND PINION. Place
a few drops of hydraulic oil onto the gears in the adapter through
the small oil cup in the adapter cover.
148. TRAVERSE MIOTOR AND GEAR BOX ADAPTER (ALL

M14A3 VEHICLES EXCEPT THE 105-MM HOWITZER).
a. Description (fig. 178). The traverse motor, flanged to an
adapter on top of gear box and piped to the traverse pump, transmits
_ntrolled hydraulic power into a rotary drive for traversing the
iet in either direction. The adapter unit reduces the speed from
traverse motor to the gear train in the gear box.
l>. Removal.
(1) REMOVE TUBES FROM TRAVERSE MOTOR TO PUMP AND OIL
RESERVOIR (fig. 177). Disconnect nuts from fittings in ports 1, 2,
and 3 of motor, ports 1 and 2 of pump and port 14 of oil reservoir.
Absorb oil draining from motor and tubes in a clean cloth to prevent
oil from running down on pump and floor.
(2) REMOVE TRAVERSE MOTOR FROM GEAR Box ADAPTER. Cut
and remove lock wire from the eight mounting screws on rim of motor
case. Four of these screws hold traverse motor to gear box adapter
and four hold traverse motor cover to case. Remove only the four
screws directly below the four traverse motor end head mounting
screws. Lift the traverse motor and drive pinion off gear box
adapter and remove gasket. Cover ends of tubes and tube fittings
with paper or cloth to prevent foreign matter from entering the
turret traversing system. NOTE: Traverse motor and gear box
adapter can be removed as a unit as explained in step (3) below.
(3) REMOVE GEAR Box ADAPTER AND MOTOR (fig. 178). Loosen
the four nuts, which hold the adapter to gear box, as much as pos-
sible. Raise adapter and motor assembly to unscrew nuts from the
ds. Lift gear box adapter and motor off gear box. Remove gasket
gear box boss.
353
TM 9-759
148
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
GEAR BOX ADAPTER
GEAR BOX ADAPTER /
TRAVERSE MOTOR f.
PORT 1
'-GEAR BOX
MOUNTING HOLES
PORT 2 -
-PORT 3
IA PD 53622
Figure 178-Traverse Motor and Gear Box Adapter
c. Installation.
(1) INSTALL TRAVERSE MOTOR ON GEAR Box ADAPTER (fig.
178). Place gasket on gear box adapter. Position traverse motor
with drive pinion in gear box adapter. The drive pinion must mesh
with the teeth on the intermediate adapter gear. Mount the traverse
motor in place with the four mounting screws and lock the eight
screws with wire.
(2) ASSEMBLE ADAPTER AND TRAVERSE MOTOR UNIT TO GEAR
Box (fig. 177). Place gasket on gear box. Enter the splined end
of the adapter shaft into gear box pinion and position the adapter
on the studs. Fasten adapter to gear box with four safety nuts.
(3) INSTALL TUBES FROM TRAVERSE MOTOR TO TRAVERSE
PUMP AND OIL RESERVOIR (fig. 177). Connect the tubes to their
respective fitting as identified. Insert ends of tubes and rings into
fittings and just start the nuts. Connect the tubes to motor port
No. 3 to oil reservoir port No. 14, motor port No. 2 to pump port
No. 1, and motor port No. 1 to pump port No. 2. Tighten all nuts.
(4) FILL TRAVERSE SYSTEM WITH HYDRAULIC OIL. Check oil
level in reservoir. If low, remove breather cap from oil reser
and add sufficient hydraulic oil.
354
TM 9-759
148-149
CONTROL HANDLE
SRADWS! PILOT VALVE CAP
PORT 4 .~ DRIVE SHAFT

v, I .. W : COUPLING
PORT 3 ----
. TRAVERSE MOTOR
MOUNTING HOLES
- PORT 5 RA PD 313277
Figure 179-Rear of Traverse Pump
(5) LUBRICATE GEAR Box ADAPTER GEAR AND PINION. Place

a few drops of hydraulic oil onto the gears in the adapter through
the small oil cup in the adapter cover.
149. TRAVERSE PUMP (ALL M4A3 VEHICLES EXCEPT

105-MM HOWITZER)
a. Description (fig. 179). The traverse pump is coupled directly
to, and mounted on top of an electric motor in front of and slightly
to the left of the gunner's seat. It supplies hydraulic power to the
traverse motor for the turret drive. A control handle mounted
integral with the pump enables gunner to accurately select the
speed and direction of turret rotation.
b. Cleaning Pilot Valve Plunger (fig. 179). Turn off the turret
control switch. Remove pilot valve cap, spring and gasket. Push
pilot valve plunger up and turn the control handle to force the
plunger up and down several times to make certain the plunger is
working freely. Reassemble spring, gasket, and cap. Lock cap in
place with wire.
T~c. Cleaning Check Valves (fig. 177). Turn off the turret control
tch. Remove the check valve cap, spring, and gasket and lift
355
TM 9-759
149-150
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
out the check valve shim. Inspect seat of check valve for sc
or foreign matter. If seat is scored, replace the pump (subpa
and f below). Clean parts thoroughly and assemble. Lock cap in
place with wire. Remove, inspect, and assemble the other check
valve in the same manner.
d. Adjusting Pump Control Shaft for Neutral (fig. 179). If the
turret has a tendency to creep, remove the lock wire on the two screws
in the pump control handle and loosen the locking clamp screw. If
turret creeps clockwise, loosen upper screw about one-quarter turn
and tighten lower screw by same amount. Adjust screws until neutral
position is reached. If turret creeps counterclockwise, loosen lower
screw and tighten upper screw the same number of turns. Tighten
the clamp screw securely after adjustment is completed. Lock
screws in place with wire.
e. Removal.
(1) DRAIN THE OIL (fig. 177). Turn off both battery switches
and lower the gun barrel as far as possible. Unscrew flange nut on
port No. 13 and drain the oil in a clean container.
(2) DISCONNECT TUBES (TRAVERSE PUMP TO MOTOR) (fig.
177). Unscrew the flange nuts on motor port tubes 1, 2, and 3 and
pump ports 1 and 2. Unscrew flange nut on reservoir port No. 1
Remove and tag each end of the tubes with identifying port numbI
(3) DISCONNECT TUBES (PUMP TO RESERVOIR) (fig. 171
Unscrew flange nuts on pump ports 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 -nd reservoir
ports 10, 11, 12, and 15. Remove and identify both ends of tubes.
(4) REMOVE PUMP. Remove the four mounting bolts and lift
the pump off the electric motor.
f. Installation.
(1) INSTALL TRAVERSE PUMP. Place the drive coupling on the
electric motor shaft, aline the slot with the pump shaft, and position
the pump on the electric motor. Install the four mounting bolts,
toothed lock washers, and nuts.
(2) INSTALL TUBES (fig. 177). Install all tubes, as indicated,
which connect the pump, traverse motor and reservoir. CAUTION:
Do not tighten flange nuts too tight to avoid damage to the fittings.
If tubes or fittings are damaged, make new tubes and use new fittings.
(3) FILL SYSTEM. Fill the reservoir through the filler hole
with clean oil of proper specifications (fig. 26).
150. OIL RESERVOIR (ALL M4A3 VEHICLES EXCEPT
105-MM HOWITZER).
a. Description (fig. 176). A rectangular oil reservoir, mounted
to the left of the traverse pump and drive motor, is connected
356 _
TM 9-759
150
PORT 2
/,- OIL RESERVOIR
PORT 1
SPACER BUSHING
RELIEF VALVE PLUNGER_
HIGH PRESSURE RELIEF SPRING GUIDE

VALVE SPRING
- 1> ~ GEAR PUMP RELIEF

*J ELEFVALVE, VALVE SPRING
SHIMS S
-ELIEF ofLE 1RELIEF VALVE CAP

RELIEF VALVE .;'
CAP GASKET " /t
RA PD 53624
Figure 180-0il Reservoir Relief Valves Disassembled
tubing to the traverse pump and traverse motor. The oil capacity is
approximately one gallon. The oil should be maintained at the
two-thirds level (fig. 26). Both the high pressure and gear pump
pressure relief valves are built into the oil reservoir.
h. Cleaning High-pressure Relief Valve (fig. 180). Place a
clean shallow pan beneath the oil reservoir. Remove the high-pres-
sure relief valve cap marked No. 1, spring, retainer, plunger and
spring guide. Inspect the plunger for scored surfaces, foreign ma-
terial or signs of wear. Examine inside of relief valve and plunger
for any foreign sediment or chips. Start pump, and turn the control
handle fully in either direction to force oil out of relief valve hole
and push out any foreign matter. Clean and assemble the plunger
reservoir bushing. Insert the spring guide into retainer with
TM 9-759
150
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
PORT 11 PORT 10 PORT 12
LOW PRESSURE PORT 14

GEAR PUMP \ _.R
RELIEF
VALVE a
X s -OIL
I
HIGH
PRESSURE
RELIEF O.
VALVE ]... OIL LEVEL
SIGHT
PORT 1 GAGE
THIS NUT
'S ''S / TO DRAIN
~":~~i5 / ~OIL FROM
/PORT - RESERVOIR
PORT 13 .- RA PD 53623
Figure 181-Oil Reservoir
button-head to protrude through hole in the end of retainer. Place

the spring over tongue of spring guide, insert the shim (if any) into
hole in the relief valve cap and slip cap over the spring and retainer.
Tighten the cap and gasket firmly into place.
c. Removal.
(1) DRAIN OIL (fig. 181). Disconnect the tube from reservoir
port No. 13 and drain the oil into a clean container.
(2) DISCONNECT TUBES (fig. 177). Unscrew the tube flange
nuts from the pump ports 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, reservoir ports 10, 11, 12,
14, and 15, and motor port No. 3. Remove the tubes and tag each
end with proper port numbers.
(3) REMOVE RESERVOIR. Remove the screws which hold the
reservoir to the mounting bracket and remove the reservoir.
d. Installation.
(1) INSTALL RESERVOIR. Position the reservoir on the mount-
ing bracket and secure with three screws and toothed lock washers.
(2) CONNECT TUBES (fig. 177). Install all tubes as identified
when removed. Do not tighten the flange nuts too tight to avoid
damage to the fittings.
358
e
TM 9.759
150-152
._ (3)
RADIO INTERFERENCE SUPPRESSION
INSTALL OIL. Fill the reservoir with clean oil of the proper
specifications (fig-. 26).
151. DRIVE MOTOR (ALL M4A3 VEHICLES EXCEPT

105-MM HOWITZER).
a. Description (fig. 176). A direct current, 24-volt, 2.5 horse-
power, 100-ampere, 2,000 revolutions per minute motor is used to
drive the traverse pump. This motor also drives the stabilizer oil
pump which is mounted on the end, opposite the traverse pump.
Is. Removal. Disconnect the four copper tubes at the stabilizer
pump. Remove the junction box cover plate and disconnect the
three leads, identifying each for installation. Unscrew the coupling
and remove the cable terminal at the turret master control switch
box. Remove the traverse pump mounting screws and the four bolts
that hold the drive motor to the basket. Lower the motor to clear
the traverse pump drive shaft coupling and remove it from turret
platform.
c. Installation. Position the electric motor so that engagement
is made properly at the traverse pump drive shaft coupling and
secure motor to the turret platform with the four bolts. Replace,
,hten and lock wire traver;e pump to motor mounting screws.
nnect and tighten the four copper tubes to the stabilizer pump.
Wonnect the three leads inside the junction box and replace and se-
cure the cover plate. Connect and tighten the cable terminal at
the turret master switch box.
Section XXVII
152. INTRODUCTION.
a. Purpose. Radio interference suppression is the elimination
or minimizing of the electrical disturbance which interferes with
radio reception or would disclose the location of the tank to sensi-
tive electrical detectors. The radio set used in the M4A3 Medium
Tanks are designed to meet the requirements of communication under
the existing conditions. The placement of tubes, transformers, coils
and condensers in the various circuits of the frequency modulated
equipment automatically suppress many of the common interfer-
:e"cause
ences and produce a high ratio "signal to noise" reception. However,
of the type of operation of these vehicles, many sources
interference are present and must be considered to maintain effec-
359
TM 9.759
152
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
tive suppression. It is important that all tanks, with or with

radio equipment, be suppressed properly to prevent interference wi
radio-equipped vehicles.
h. Description. Suppression is accomplished in the M4A3
Medium Tanks by the use of _.ndensers, filters, shielding and or
bonding in all circulcs to confine and dissipate electrical disturbances
that could affect radio reception. When any electrical circuit is inter-
rupted, such as to stop or change the flow of current, frequencies
which interfere with sensitive signal and detective apparatus are
broadcast. The extent of this interference depends upon the amount
of current flowing and the rapidity of change. The frequencies
which are set up will radiate from or feed back into the circuit,
causing radio interference. Various types of suppression are used as
described below to prevent such interference.
(1) FILTERS. Filters are generally constructed of a magnetic coil
with two condensers connected in parallel. These units are sealed
in a metal shielding and connected in series with the circuit. This
type of suppression is used in circuits where rapid interruption or
changes of current occur, such as in the ignition or regulator circuits,
to prevent a feedback into the battery and to other circuits which
are connected to the battery.
(2) CONDENSERS. A condenser or capacitor, as someti
called, is a storage space for electrical energy and functions similar
a surge tank or diaphragm in a hydraulic circuit. The unit is con-
structed of two layers of a highly conductive flexible material such
as tinfoil, insulated from each other by a nonconductive material,
usually a wax-impregnated paper. These components are rolled to-
gether so that a terminal can be attached to each end of the roll
forming contact with the individual layers of foil. The. unit is sealed
in a metal container with one terminal connected to the container
and the other connected to an insulated lead for connection to the
circuit. This type of suppression is used in parallel with the circuits
which carry a high flow of current, such as in the generator armature,
auxiliary generator starter winding, traverse motor and battery leads
to the radio.
(3) SHIELDING. Shielding, such as conduits, fittings, enclosed
terminal boxes and covers, is used to protect the wiring and to afford
a conductive path for the radiated frequency to ground (vehicle
structure). This type of suppression is used throughout these tanks
on all wiring and cables. In some instances, individual wires are
covered with a metallic braid which is grounded to form a shield
(fig. 182).
(4) BONDING. Bonding is a secure ground (conductive contact)
to the vehicle structure. Wires, cables, copper braid and plated cO
360
TM 9-759
152.153
BLOWER LEAD SHIELD ' BLOWER MOTOR RA PD 313260
.* Fioure 182-Method of Shielding Individual Wires
or clamps are used for bonding purposes. These bond straps and
clips or clamps are attached to a clean surface on the vehicle with
plated screws and toothed lock washers. Where the greatest sources
of interference is anticipated,.the terminals of the bond straps or the
flange of the clips are placed between two toothed lock washers
and secured to the vehicle. All switch and terminal boxes are mounted
with toothed.washers against the mounting surfaces as well as under
the screw or bolt head and the covers are securely bonded to the
boxes. All sand shields and fenders are securely bonded by the use
of toothed lock washers in assembly. IMPORTANT: All bonds must
be securely restored when replacing any equipment treated for radio
suppression. The ground straps on the engine, auxiliary generator.
regulators and instrument panel are necessary to complete the elec-
trical circuit for proper operation of the units. While these ground
straps may be sufficiently tight for operation, they may present a
source of radio interference if good contact is not insured.
153. IGNITION SYSTEIM.

a. Description. When the engine is running the magneto points
ake and break contact rapidly to interrupt the primary circuit.
is interruption causes the high-tension circuit to discharge a spark
361
TM 9-759
153-155
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
at the spark plugs. Both of these conditions set up impulses of _

quencies which could be radiated as radio interference. Suppres
of the interference is accomplished as follows:
(1) MAGNETO. A condenser is used across the contact points in
each magneto to prevent arcing and to intensify the high-tension
spark. The action of the condenser in performing its function also
suppresses the radio interference impulses that would be caused by
arcing.
(2) SPARK PLUGS AND WIRES. The spark plug wires are enclosed
in flexible conduits which form a shield over the wires to dissipate
interference.
1b. Replacement. The condensers in the magnetos are a part
of the ignition circuit and not purposely intended for radio sup-
pression. To eliminate interference from this source, replace the
magnetos (par. 66 b). See paragraph 68 Is for replacement of spark
plugs.
15.4. STA!RTI N'G;$~'SY'EM.

a. I)escription. The cranking motor, cable. solenoid and crank-
ing motor switch are shielded and grounded where necessary to
eliminate interference. When the engine is cranked, a heavy flow _
current is drawn over the cable and through the contacts of m
solenoid. Suppression is necessary to minimize the interference W
up when the circuit is closed and opened and when the cranking
motor is operating.
hi. Replacement. A bond strap connects the engine mounting
to the hull to insure a good ground for the engine electrical units.
Loose connections, burned commutator or faulty brushes would cause
radio interference. For information pertaining to replacement of
components of the starting system, see paragraphs 105 and 106.
155. BATTERY (:H!ARGINGI; SYSTEM.

a. Descr iption. The generators and regulators are a constant
source of radio interference because of the varying friction contact
of the generator brushes on the commutator and the rapid action of
the contact points in the regulators. Suppression is accomplished as
follows:
(1) GENERATOR. A condenser. which is mounted inside the com-
mutator end housing of the main generator, is connected to the posi-
tive brushes to minimize the interference caused by worn or faulty
brushes and commutator. On generators mounted at the rear of the
transmission, a ground cable connects the generator to the mounting
bracket to insure a good ground for the generator (fig. 118).
362
TM 9.759
155
O 9 1
x ~z t D -°
l z
at
, -.
u- CC :
X o
TM 9.759
155
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
SR
APS..MOUNT
G,
GROUND | BRACKET
STRAPS--.. MOUNTING
BOLTS
CONDENSER
RA PD 313262
Figure 184-Auxiliary Generator Condenser and Regulatol

Mounting
(2) REGULATORS. A filter and a condenser are mounted in each

regulator. A ground strap at each shock mount completes the elec-
trical circuits of the regulator as well as insuring a good electrical
bond for the elimination of radio interference (fig. 184). The filter is
connected in series with the battery lead and the condenser is con-
nected in parallel with the armature circuit.
(3) AUXILIARY GENERATOR (figs. 183 and 184). A condenser
(ESM 23470) is mounted in the auxiliary generator control box and
is connected to the starting circuit winding. A ground strap from the
generator frame completes the electrical circuit to the sponson.
b. Replacement.
(1) GENERATOR AND REGULATOR SUPPRESSION. The suppres-
sion equipment used in the main generator and in the regulators is
an integral part of the units. See paragraphs 102 c and 104 1) for re-
placement of these units.
(2) AUXILIARY GENERATOR CONDENSER (fig. 184). Remove the
cover screws from the auxiliary generator control box and swing the
cover up out of the way. Disconnect the condenser and install
new unit of the same type. Install the control box cover.
364
TM 9-759
156-158
*. INSTRUMENTS.
a. Description. All instruments which are enclosed in the
instrument box are bonded to and shielded by the box which in turn
is bonded to the sponson by a wire. The utility outlet which is some-
times used to connect the windshield wiper for the driver's door hood
is suppressed by a condenser connected in parallel with the outlet
inside the instrument panel.
l>. Replacemenll t. Open the 24-volt battery switch and remove
the instrument panel cover. mounting screws without disconnecting
any of the cables or conduits from the back of the box. Pull the top
of the panel out for access to the wiring on the back of the panel.
Disconnect the condenser lead from the utility outlet and remove the
condenser mounting screw. To connect, attach the new condenser
with the mounting screw and an external tooth lock washer. Connect
the condenser lead to the outlet terminal. Place the panel in position
and install the panel screws.
1.57. WIRIN( SY;STEFM.

a. I)escription.
(1) CONDUITS (figs. 183 and 185). All wiring is contained in
protective conduits which act as shielding for the electrical circuits.
e conduits are secured in position with clips or brackets fastened
hull with toothed lock washers and screws.
(2) RADIO TERMINAL BOXES (fig. 185). Two condensers are
used in radio terminal box in parallel with the number 6 wire (12-
volt) and the number 7 wire (-) 24-volt circuits. The boxes are
mounted with toothed lock washers between the hull (or turret)
and the box as well as under the mounting screw heads.
1). Replacement. See paragraph 101 lb (1) for removal and
installation of conduits. NOTE: It is very important that all con-
duits be securely clamped when installed.
158. TURRET TRAVERSING SYSTEM (ALL M4A3 MEDIUM

TANKS EXCEPT 105-.IMM HOWITZER).
a. Description. The electric motor in the turret which drives
the oil pump for the hydraulic traverse motor and the stabi-
lizer presents a source of radio interference because of the brush
and commutator action. A condenser is used in parallel with the
motor lead at the circuit breaker in the turret control box. A bond
cable is connected from one of the lugs on the turret collector ring
terminal from one of the lugs on the turret collector ring terminal
box, to provide a positive ground for the turret and its electrical
mechanism. CAUTION: The turret may operate without this
und strap but radio interference will be encountered and possible
.",:,,1
--4: ' 24 365
TM 9-759
158
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
RADIO
INTERFERENCE
BONDS
RADIO
TERMINAL
As- BOX
,:. an RA PD 313259
Figure 185-Rodio Terminal Box and Method of Bonding Ci*
damage to the turret race ball bearings oecause of poor electrical

contact.
h. Replacement (fig. 185). To replace the condenser, turn off
the 24-volt battery switch and remove the right-hand section of the
turret terminal box cover. Disconnect the condenser from the
traverse motor circuit breaker and remove the condenser mounting
screw. To install, mount the condenser in place with the mounting
screw and toothed lock washer. Connect the condenser lead to the
traverse motor cable contact on the circuit breaker. Install the
terminal box cover.
366
TM 9-759
159.160
-AUXILIARY GENERATOR, FIXED FIRE EXTIN-

GUISHER SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION
EQUIPMENT
Section XXVIII
AUXILIARY GENERATOR
159. DESCRIPTION.
a. The auxiliary generator is a self-contained generating unit.
It is used to charge the tank batteries at such times as the use of
the stabilizer-unit, turret traversing motor, gun firing solenoids, radio
and interphone installations and ventilating fans impose too heavy
a load on the electrical system. The unit is located in the left rear
corner of the fighting compartment on the sponson.
160. REPLACEMENT.
a. Generator.
(1) EARLY VEHICLES (fig. 21).
(a) Removal. Open the battery master switch. Remove the
leaner. Disconnect the exhaust coupling at the cylinder. Close
shut-off cock on the fuel filter and disconnect the fuel line at
carburetor. Remove the control box cover. Disconnect the
three wires that come through the back of the control box from the
generator yoke. Tag these wires for later identification. Remove
the two screws that hold the control box to the generator yoke and
remove the box. Remove the bolts that secure the foot mounting
(except the rear one on the generator) to the sponson. On the
remaining mounting, disconnect the angle iron support from the
sponson. Lift the unit from the vehicle.
(b) Installation (fig. 21). Position the auxiliary generator on
the sponson. Install the bolts that secure the foot mounting (except
the rear one on the generator end) to the sponson. On the re-
maining mounting, connect angle iron support to the sponson. In-
stall the control box on the generator yoke. Push the three wires
through the opening in the rear of the box and connect the wires to
their correct terminal post. Install the cover on the control box.
Connect-the fuel line to the carburetor. Open the shut-off cock on
the fuel filter. Place a new gasket between the exhaust coupling
and cylinders and install the four bolts. Install the air cleaner.
(2) LATER VEHICLES.
(a) Removal (fig. 20). Open the master switch. Cut the wing
lock wires on the regulator terminal box cover, and remove wing
O9 367
TM 9-759
160
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
nuts and cover. Disconnect the two lead wires that are attache
the terminals marked "A" and "F" in the regulator terminal box.
Identify the wires for installation. Unscrew the knurled connector
nut on the generator to regulator conduit at the terminal box and
pull out the wires. Remove the clamps that hold the conduit to
the sponson. Unlatch and lift off the battery box cover and remove
battery box baffle plate. Disconnect the generator to battery box
conduit at the side of the battery box. Disconnect the yellow wire at
the battery box terminal, remove from the box and identify for
installation. Remove the auxiliary generator heater duct inspection
plate. Disconnect the flexible exhaust coupling at the cylinder.
Close the shut-off cock on the fuel filter and disconnect the fuel line
at the carburetor. Disconnect the generator ground strap at the
sponson. Remove the bolts that hold the generator angle iron sup-
ports to the foot mountings, and lift out the assembly.
(b) Installation (fig. 20). Open the master switch. Position the
generator on the sponson with the angle iron supports on the foot
mountings and the control panel to the front, and install the mount-
ing bolts. Place a gasket between the flexible exhaust flange and
the engine cylinder flange, and install the attaching screws. Install
the heating duct inspection plate. Place a toothed lock washer on
each side of the ground strap terminal, and attach to sponson
attaching screw. Insert the wire from the generator to battery
conduit through the opening in the battery box, and attach it toW_
top post on the shunt terminal with a nut and split-type washer.
Connect the conduit to the battery box with the knurled conduit nut.
Insert the black wire and the yellow wire from the generator to
regulator conduit through the forward opening in the side of the
regulator terminal box. Attach the black wire to the connector strap
marked "A" with a cap screw and split-type washer. Connect the
yellow wire on the regulator terminal marked "F" with an external-
toothed lock washer between the wire terminal and the regulator
terminal, and secure with a cap screw and split-type washer. Attach
the generator to regulator conduit to the regulator terminal box with
the knurled conduit nut. Position the regulator terminal box cover
on the terminal box, secure with wing nuts, and install lock wire.
Close the master switch, start the auxiliary generator and test.
1b. Muffler and 'Tail Pipe.

(1) EARLY VEHICLES.
(a) Removal. Open the engine compartment doors. Remove
the engine front plate. Remove the two nuts and lock washers that
secure the tail pipe to the muffler. Loosen the clamp at the lower
end of the muffler. Remove the two cap screws and lock washers
that secure the muffler bracket to the bulkhead and removeO
368
TM 9-759
160-161
FIXED FIRE EXTINGUISHER SYSTEM
er. Remove the cap screws that secure the tail pipe hold-down
ps to the hull, and remove the tail pipe.
(b) Installation. Install the muffler on the exhaust pipe, but
do not tighten the muffler clamp. Secure the muffler and bracket
to the bulkhead with two cap screws and lock washers. Tighten
the clamp on the lower end of the muffler. Place a npw gasket
between the tail pipe 'and muffler, and secure the tail pipe to the
muffler with two cap screws and lock washers. Secure the tail pipe
and clamps to the hull with cap screws.
(2) LATER VEHICLES.
(a) Removal. Remove the auxiliary generator (subpar. a (2)
(a) above). Remove the terminal box that is mounted on the
shroud. Remove the conduit clamps and move the conduit to one
side to permit removal of the shroud. Remove the shroud. Loosen
the clamp at the lower end of the muffler and lift the muffler off the
tail pipe.
(b) Installation. Slide the muffler onto the tail pipe and posi-
tion the muffler so the exhaust coupling on the muffler will be in line
with the exhaust coupling on the auxiliary generator. Tighten the
clamp on the lower end of the muffler. Install the shroud. Secure
the terminal box in place on the shroud. Secure the conduit clamps
he hull. Install the auxiliary generator (subpar. a (2) (b) above).
Section XXIX
161. FIXED FIRE EXTIN(,;ISHER SYSTEM.
a. Removal of Fire Extinguisher Cyvlinders. Unscrew the
control head swivel nut from the cylinder and lay the head aside.
Loosen the discharge tubes at the check valve and disconnect the tubes
from the cylinders. Remove the cylinder clamp bolts and lift out the
cylinder.
lb. Installation of Fire Extinguisher C:ylinders. Place the
cylinder in position and install the clamp bolts. Connect the discharge
tubes to the cylinder and tighten the tubes to the check valve. Install
the control head on the cylinder.
e. Removal of Condluit and :ahle (Dual-ptull-to-eontrol-hlead).
(1) -REMOVE CONDUIT (figs. 186 and 187). Unscrew the large
swivel nut, and remove the control head from the cylinder. Discon-
t the conduit at both ends, and remove the clamp from the bulk.
369
TM 9.759
161
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
FLEXIBLE CONDUITS
DUAL CONTROL
CABLE PULLEYS
DUAL PULL . . :
MECHANISM · . X
; :'- TUBE ATTACHING

NUTS
RA PD 313
Figure 186-Dual Pull Mechanism
head. Screw off the lower half of the dual pull mechanism, and dis-
connect the cables. Slide the conduit off the upper end of the cable.
(2) REMOVE CABLE. Remove the lock wire and three screws
which attach the cover plate to the control head, and remove the
cover. Disconnect the cable, and pull it out of the control head.
d. Installation of Conduit and Cable (Dual-pull-to-control-

head).
(1) CONNECT CABLES. Insert the ends of the two pull cables
and the end of the control cable into a 2-inch piece of copper tubing.
Pull the upper cables tight, and slide the copper tube up to the upper
half of the dual pull mechanism. Crimp each end of the copper tube
around the cables, then hold the upper end of the tube and twist the
lower end two complete turns to securely connect the cables.
(2) INSTALL CONDUIT. Slide the lower half of the dual pull
barrel and the conduit over the cable. Screw the barrel into place and
connect both ends of the conduit. Install the conduit clamp to
bulkhead. 3
370
TM 9.759
161
*e~ ~~WIRE~~~~
AND LEAD SEAL
LOCKING PIN- CABLE CLAMP
SET SCREWS
LEVER o-- : '
ARROW I (LCABLE
TO REMOTE
PULL HANDLE
CONTROL HEAD
SWIVEL NUT e '
PIN AND ARROW MUST LINE R

UP WHEN CONTROL HEAD IS REMOTE
IN SET POSITION CONTROL HEAD
COVER PLATE COVER PLATE
ATTACHING SCREWS
RA PD 313298
Figure 187-Control Head Assembly
(3) CONNECT CABLE TO CONTROL HEAD (fig. 187). Place a

1/2-inch pin between the pull cable and the pulley on top of the dual
pull barrel to provide the proper slack in the cables. Turn the pulley
in the control head clockwise until the pin contacts the stop and is in
line with the arrow on the control body. With the pulley in that
position, pull the cable tight over the l/2-inch pin and connect it to the
pulley in the control head, then remove the pin. Install the control
head cover, then install the head on the cylinder.
e. Removal of Pull Cable (to control box on top of hull).
Unscrew the large nut and remove the control head from both fire
extinguisher cylinders. Remove the lock wire and three screws which
attach the cover plate to the control head and disconnect the cable
from the head. Disconnect the conduit from the bottom of the dual
pull barrel. Unscrew the lower half of the barrel and disconnect the
cables. Pull the handle and cable out of the control box.
f. Installation of Pull Cable (to control box on top of hull).
(1) INSTALL CABLE. Remove the plate and pulleys from the con-
trol box. Attach cable to the pull handle and thread the cable over
pulley and down through the tube to the dual pull barrel. Pull
cables tight while installing the plate in the control box.
TM 9.759
16 1.62
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
(2) CONNECT CABLES (subpar. d( (1) above).

(3) CONNECT LOWER HALF OF DUAL PULL BARREL AND CON
Screw the lower half of the dual pull barrel into place, and connect the
conduit to the barrel.
(4) CONNECT CABLE TO CONTROL HEAD (subpar. (d (3) above).
g. Removal of Pull Cable or Conduit (to bracket over dIriver's

seat). Unscrew the large nut and remove the control head from
the fire extinguisher cylinder. Remove the lock wire and three screws
which attach the cover plate to the control head, and disconnect the
cable from the head. Disconnect the conduit from the bottom of the
dual pull barrel. Unscrew the lower half of the barrel, and discon-
nect the cables. Pull the handle and cable out of the bracket above
the driver's seat. Disconnect the conduit at both ends. Remove the
conduit clamps from the hull, and remove the conduit.
h. Installation of Pull Cable or Conduit (to bracket over
driver's seat).
(1) INSTALL CABLE AND CONDUIT. Attach the cable to the pull
handle, and insert the cable through the bracket above the driver's
seat. Thread the cable through the conduit and pulley and down
through the dual pull barrel. Connect both ends of the conduit, and
install the clamps to the hull.
(2) CONNECT CABLES IN DUAL PULL BARREL (subpar. dI
above).
(3) CONNECT LOWER HALF OF DUAL PULL BARREL AND CONDUIT
(subpar. f (3) above).
(4) CONNECT CABLE TO CONTROL HEAD (subpar. d (3) above).
Section XXX
COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT
162. DESCRIPTION.
a. General (figs. 188 and 189). M4A3 Medium Tanks are
equipped with radio and interphone systems, shock-mounted on a
common base located on a shelf in the turret bulge. Interphone
control boxes are provided for each member of the crew. The power
supply for the system is supplied from the batteries of the vehicle.
The operating voltage of the sets is indicated on a plate attached
to the right front of the mounting base. One of the following fre-
quency modulated radio telephone sets, models SCR 508, SCR $
quenc mouae
rdoS R
TM 9-759
162
COMMUNICATION E9UIPMENT
.--MOUNTING PLATE - MOUNTING BASE -RECEIVER CLAMP SCREWS
..... _ .... 3'-;-

ACH GUN
RADIO TERMINAL BOX I SHOCK MOUNTS BATTERY VOLTAGE PLATE

DA PD 337127
Figure 188-Radio Mounting Base
or SCR 538, may be used in the tank, depending on the type of oper-
ation to which the vehicle is assigned. Detailed descriptions and
instructions covering these sets are contained in TM 11-600.
(1) MODEL SCR 508. This radio set, which consists of a radio
transmitter, model BC 604, and two radio receivers model BC 603,
mounted on a base, model FT 237, is generally used in command
vehicles.
(2) MODEL SCR 528. This set consists of a radio transmitter,
model BC 604, and one radio receiver, model BC 603, mounted on
the base, model FT 237.
(3) MODEL SCR 538. This set consists of an interphone am-
plifier, model BC 605, and one radio receiver, model BC 603, mounted
on the base, model FT 237. This set is used where a transmitter is
not required.
h. Mounting Base Model FT 237 (fig. 188). This mounting
base, which is used with each of the radio sets described in steps
(1), (2), and (3) above, is wired through a multiple connector
receptacle into which the units of the set can be plugged. Two bed
.ates are attached to the mounting base with four rubber shock
h nts(two on each plate) to support the radio set. Two additional
_W~~~ ~~373
TM 9-759
162
TANK. MEDIUM, M4A3
_-- ICROPHONE AND R- PD 337128
mICROPHONE AND RA PD 337128

HEAD SET HOOKS
Figure 189-Turret Interphone Control Boxes
rubber shock absorbers, on each bed plate, prevent excessive move-

ment of the set. The bed plates are secured to the radio shelf in
the turret with four cap screws through each plate. The units of
the set are fastened to the mounting base with screws and clamps
as follows:
(1) MODEL SCR 508. The transmitter is plugged into its al-
lotted position at the left end of the mounting base and the two
receivers are installed in the remaining position.
(2) MODEL SCR 528. The transmitter is mounted at the left
end and the one receiver at the extreme right position, leaving the
center position open for access to transmitter adjustments.
(3) MODEL SCR 538. The left end of the mounting is vacant.
The receiver is plugged into the center position and the interphone
amplifier is located in the extreme right position. CAUTION: Do
not mount an amplifier and a transmitter on the same base.
c. Antennas.
(1) MAST BASE. A mast base, model-MP 37, equipped with a
large helical spring of flexibility, is rigidly mounted to the to_
the turret. _
374
TM 9-759
162
COMMUNICATION E9UIPMENT
MICROPHONE AND
HEAD SET HOOKS
IA PD 337129
Figure 190-Driver's and Assistant Driver's Compartment

Interphone Control Boxes
(2) MAST SECTIONS. Three mast sections, models MS 51, MS 52,

and MS 53 used with the radio sets described in subparagraph a
above, are screwed together to form the antenna. The sections are
made of high tensile strength steel and the ends which join together
have enamel marks of the same color. The body of the mast bears
the type number. The mast sections are stored in Roll BG 56
when not in use.
d. Interphone Control Boxes (figs. 189 and 190). The inter-
ne control boxes contain controls and connection facilities fur the
_&~~~ ~~375
TM 9-759
162
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
JAM NUT MAST BASE RETAINING NUT RECEIVER
-RECEIVE CLAMP SCREWS RA P 337130
Figure 191-Method of Mounting Mast

376
TM 9-759
162-163
crophones (carbon or magnetic) and the headsets used by mem-

bers of the tank crew at their respective stations. The plug jacks
are identified for connection of the type.of microphone supplied and
the volume control knob regulates the speech volume in the head-
set. Hooks are mounted adjacent to each control box for con-
venient placement of the microphone and headset when not in use.
163. INSPECTIONS.
a. Antenna.
(1) MAST SECTIONS. Inspect the antenna mast sections to be
sure that they are securely screwed and clamped together and are
not damaged.
(2) HELICAL SPRING. Inspect the helical spring on the base. Be
sure that it maintains a vertical position and is not damaged to pre-
vent flexibility.
(3) MAST (fig. 191). See that the mast is secured to the top
of the turret.
(4) LEADS TO SET. Check the leads to the set and make sure that
thing interferes with them or could damage the cords.
-b. Mountings (fig. 188).

(1) CLAMP SCREWS. Make sure that the units are securely
fastened into the mounting base.
(2) SHOCK MOUNTS. Inspect the mounting screws to see that
they are tight and that the shock mountings are in good condition.
Rock the set to determine if it is bumping against any other equip-
ment and observe whether the shock absorbers prevent excessive
movement.
c. Cords and Connections (fig. 192). Inspect all cords which

connect the radio or interphone control boxes to see that they are
not damaged. Make sure they are properly secured in the clips. Re-
port any damage to the proper authority. Make sure that the cords
are not twisted or knotted to prevent movement of the wearer. In-
spect the jack plugs on the microphone and headsets to see that
they are not damaged.
d. Interphone Control Boxes, Microphones and Headsets.

(figs. 189 and 190). Inspect the control boxes for damage, loose-
ness and operation. Handle the microphones and headsets with care,
see that they are hung on the hooks provided for this purpose
O ren not in use.
377
TM 9-759
163-164
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
TRANSMITTER RECEPTACLE
CLAMP SCREWS DUST COVER
!/ DUST COVE
iRa
L MOUNTING BASE MOUNTING PLATE IA PD 337126
Figure 192-Radio Mounting Bolts
e. Covers. Check to see that all covers for the protection of

the radio set are available in the vehicle and make sure that these
covers are installed when the equipment is not in use. See that all
fasteners and zippers are in good condition.
164. PRECAUTIONS.
a. Antenna. Tie the antenna back securely when the tank

is in motion and radio is not in use to prevent breakage. Make sure
the antenna is vertical and not touching anything when the radio
is in use.
b. Radio.
(1) Keep the radio covered when the vehicle is not in use to
prevent dust and moisture entering the set. Keep all hatch doors
securely closed and fastened.
(2) Turn off all radio switches when not in use. Do not turn
off the battery switch with the radio on.
(3) Do not store equipment behind the radio where it can
vent motion of the shock mountings or damage the connectW
378
TM 9.759
164
. ROTOR SHIELD
GUN CRADLE
_'SIGHT
FRONT TELESCOPIC
MOUNTING
GUN CRADLE ME
BRE CH ' ELEVATING

BREECH a _ c MECHANISM
_-~~- = REAR TELESCOPIC
SIGHT MOUNTING
-y s *BRACKET
ODY GUARD
.
RA PO 31249
gure 193-Combination Gun Mount M34A1-Rear View
(4) Do not start the engine with the radio turned on.
c. Batteries and Generating System.

(1) Make sure that the batteries are properly charged at all
179 ~ ~ EEVTN
times to insure satisfactory operation of the set. Low batteries will
cause the set to be noisy, resulting in poor reception.
(2) See that all battery cables and terminals are in good con-
dition and tight.
(3) Test the operation of the generator and regulator (par.
43 d (1) and (2)). Excessive charge will damage the radio and make
it noisy.
(4) Do not race the engine while the radio is in operation.
d. Interphone Equipment. This equipment is sensitive and deli-

cate. Do not drop or misuse it. Keep the microphone and headset on
their hooks, when not in use. Keep cords clear of moving equipment
e vehicle. 379
wOe
TM 9-759
165-166
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
PART FOUR-AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (Cont*

B-ARMAMENT
75-MM GUN M3 IN THE COMBINATION GUN
MOUNTS M34 AND M34A1
Section XXXI
INTRODUCTION
165. SCOPE.
a. Part Four-B contains instructions on the operation of the
75-mm Gun M3 in the Combination Gun Mounts M34 and M34A1.
It lists the authorized ammunition and contains information on the
sighting equipment. Refer to section IX for lubrication instructions
on the armament.
h. The other armament on the Medium Tank M4A3 is as follows:
Machine gun, cal..30, M1919A4, located in the Combination Gun
Mount M34 or M34A1; Machine Gun, cal..30, M1919A4, mounted
in the front of the tank on the right side in the flexible bow mount
D51070; Machine Gun, cal. .50, HB, M2, when used is mounted in a
bracket-type mount on the revolving turret hatch; and a 2
Mortar M3, located in a fixed mount in the turret to the left
combination gun mount. _
166. CHARACTERISTICS.
a. The armament is employed chiefly against enemy tanks and
other ground objectives. The turret can be traversed 360 degrees
manually or by a hydraulic traversing mechanism. The gun can be
elevated 25 degrees and depressed 10 degrees. The cal. .30 machine
gun in the combination gun mount is elevated and traversed with
the 75-mm gun.
1). The cal. .30 machine gun in the bow mount is elevated and
traversed manually and fired by the conventional trigger. Refer to
FM 23-50 for complete information on its operation.
c. The cal..50 machine gun is employed chiefly against enemy
aircraft. It is elevated and traversed manually and fired by the
conventional trigger. The machine gun can be traversed indepen-
dently of the turret. Refer to FM 23-65 for complete information
on its operation.
d. The 2-inch mortar is used to lay a smoke screen while the
tank is advancing. It is in a fixed mount, has no elevation or depres-
sion, traverses with the turret, and is manually fired. Refer to
TM 9-293 for complete information on its operation.
380 0
TM 9.759
167-169
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
_7. DIFFERENCES AMONG MODELS.

a. Differences Between M34 and M34A1 Combination Gun
Mounts. The Mount M34 has been modified to M34A1 which in-
corporates a direct-sight telescope. The 75-mm Gun M3 uses the
Direct-sight Telescope M55 or M70F in the Combination Gun
Mount M34A1 (fig. 193). The other modifications of the mount
consist essentially of the following:
(1) Addition of a new front shield which protects the cal. .30
coaxial machine gun, the 75-mm gun, and the direct-sight telescope.
(2) Addition of a breech counterweight to balance the new
shield.
(3) Machining a slot in the front plate to allow the telescope to
protrude through the opening.
(4)! Machining a pad on the mount to hold the telescope mount-
ing brackets.
(5)> Machining two additional slots in the front plate to allow
for bolts holding the shield.
Section XXXII
168. PLACING TIIE 75-MM GIN IN' FIRING POSITION.
a. Remove the breech and muzzle covers.
h. Remove the pin from the traveling lock, which holds the gun
in position while traveling, and lock the traveling lock in position
under; turret roof.
c. I Disengage the turret clamp by turning the wheel of the turret
clamp all the way to the left or counterclockwise.
169. INSPECTION BEFORE FIRING.

a. ]Check Oil Level In Recoil Cylinder. To check oil level,
depress gun nine degrees and remove recoil cylinder filling plug
(fig. 1,94) at the rear end of each recoil cylinder. The oil level in the
cylinder should reach the bottom of the hole. If oil does not reach
this level, fill until level is reached. Replace plugs. The recoil mecha-
nism uses special recoil oil for all temperatures.
b. , Check path of recoil to make sure that it is free from all
obstructions.
c. Open breech and inspect bore of gun for cleanliness.
* l. ' Bore Sighting. Refer to paragraph 181.
1:55,) (0--4s --
'". 381
TM 9-759
170
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
CAL 30 MACHINE CUN RECOIL CYLINDER
RECOIL CYLIIJDER FILLING PLUG OPERATING CRANK CAM
RA PD 59211
Figure 194-Recoil Cylinder Filling Plug
170. TRAVERSING TURRET.

a. Power Operation (fig. 195). Before traversing turret by
means of the hydraulic traversing mechanism, be sure the doors for
the driver and assistant driver are closed. Make sure personnel are
clear of rotating parts. Move gearshift lever in front of gunner
and under gear mechanism, to the "UP" or "POWER" position. It
may be necessary to turn slightly the manual drive handle on top
of gear mechanism to engage gears. Turn master switch to the "ON"
position to start electric drive motor. Disengage the turret positive
locking clamp by turning handwheel to the left or counterclockwise,
as far as possible. CAUTION: It is important to have locking clamp
completely disengaged before traversing turret and to lock turret
in position when need for traversing has been completed. The con-
trol handle on the traverse pump, to the right of the gun elevating
handwheel, controls the speed and direction of turret rotation. To
traverse turret to the right, turn the control handle so that the top
is to the right. To traverse turret to the left, turn the control handle
so that the top moves to the left. To increase the traverse speed, turn
the control handle farther to the left or right, depending upon the
direction of traverse. To stop turret traverse, release control handle,
or bring it to the upright or neutral position. Turret rotation ca/
reversed instantly without damage to the fluid power mechanis
382
TM 9.759
170
" O < °> Z U!I
<zz M
0 \- < 1"i -
z \
D U
t2 r
z
0
z
0
0
CZa~~ _Z4 Z
¢Z > >
8 a383
TM 9-759
170-172
TANK. MEDIUM, M4A3
I). Manual Operation (fig. 195). If electric power fails, oe

hydraulic traverse system will not operate, due to some other cause,
the turret can be rotated by the manual drive handle located on
top of gear mechanism to the right of gunner's seat. Before travers-
ing turret, be sure the doors for the driver and assistant driver are
closed. Disengage the turret positive locking clamp by turning hand-
wheel to the left or counterclockwise, as far as possible. Move gear-
shift lever under gear mechanism to the "DOWN" position. It may
be necessary to turn slightly the manual drive handle on top of gear
mechanism to engage gears. The manually operated gears are then
engaged with the turret ring gear and pinion. Grip the manual drive
handle and its associate lever on top of gear mechanism in front of
gunner to release brake in gearbox. Turn manual drive handle to
the right, or clockwise, to rotate turret clockwise, and to the left,
or counterclockwise, to rotate the turret counterclockwise. The
rate of speed of turret rotation is dependent upon the position of
the control handle from the neutral position. If the manual drive
handle on gear mechanism turns freely and fails to move the turret.
the shift lever under gear mechanism is in the "UP," or power-
traverse position and should be moved to the "DOWN" or manual-
traverse position. NOTE: If the tank is on an incline, when the posi-
tive locking clamp is disengaged, and the shift lever is in the "U
or power-traverse position, when the traverse pump is not in o
ation, the unbalanced load of the gun will cause the turret to a*
rapidly until the gun reaches the lowest position. Always traverse
the turret 360 degrees manually, with the manual-drive handle on
gear mechanism, to be sure the turret is free.
171. ELEVATING OR DEPRESSING THE GUN.

a. The gun (fig. 193) is elevated or depressed by turning the
elevating handwheel. Maximum elevation is 25 degrees and maxi-
mum depression is 10 degrees. If turning the handwheel does not
elevate or depress the gun, the hand elevating gears are out of
mesh. To put gears in mesh for manual operation, press the release
lever down (fig. 197) and move the elevating clutch lever to the
right or away from the gun mount. It may be necessary to bear
down on the shoulder guard to engage the gears.
172. OPERATING THE STABILIZER.

a. Purpose. The stabilizer holds the 75-mm gun and the cal..30
machine gun in the combination gun mount at a predetermined
elevation while the tank is in motion. The stabilizer controls gun
movements in a vertical plane caused by the pitching of the tank.
The stabilizer has no control of movement in a horizontal plane e
to the roll of the tank. W
384
TM 9-759
172
0
'3I Da' II IL
I z9 a °- ,u mO
° aC) zU
jo > I c/J -I
W< J1 z__Z OU
?,I' ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~94-
':''
38515!~~ ~"
; i
.. 185~'.
TM 9.759
172
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
O . h
II I I I I0
wu
czC9< O<Cu2" A
"n .. ,-n
L9 0'
j, 0 z 0 *J-..
Zs.
,ZJ~a~T_
z uj uJ~ qc
wC~~~m v~~~~U-so
~~mu~~y
u~~l~~Y~:go
~
UmC3He ~ *~;~*e · C SI
'P . ii~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~f
lb.··
386~ ~ ·
Zl i' '-
TM 9-759
172
1). Control of the Gun. When the stabilizer is in operation, the

ns are elevated or depressed in the usual manner by turning the
elevating handwheel. As the angular relation between the guns and
the gyro control is changed, the guns automatically take up the new
desired elevation. When the tank is in motion, the guns are auto-
matically kept at the set elevation within close limits, making it
necessary to elevate 6r depress the guns only when the target moves,
when the tank changes direction, or when the elevation of the tank
(other than that caused by normal pitching) is changed. The ele-
vating handwheel should not be turned after the guns have reached
their limits of travel in elevation or depression. Further turning of
the handwheel when the guns are against either stop will result in
excessive overload on the tank battery.
c. Starting the Stabilizer.
(1) Be sure the oil reservoir (fig. 196) shows at least two-thirds
full of hydraulic oil.
(2) Take the hand elevating gears out of mesh by pushing
the release lever down and moving the elevating clutch lever toward
the gun mount (fig. 193). It may be necessary to rotate the elevating
handwheel, slightly, to remove tension from the elevating pinion.
(3) Adjust the gyro control to an approximate vertical position
hand (fig. 197). CAUTION: This operation is necessary to pre-
i nt the 75-mm gun from moving sharply into the elevated or
depressed position caused by the displacement of the gyro control
in other than a vertical position.
(4) Turn the master turret electrical switch to "ON" position
(fig. 197).
(5) Turn the stabilizer switch to the "ON" position (fig. 197).
(6) In cold weather, permit the oil to warm up. In subzero
weather, allow '/2-minute running time for each degree of temper-
ature below zero.' For example. a total running time of 10 minutes
at 20 degrees below zero.
d. Adjusting the Stiffness Rheostat. Starting at zero, slowly
turn the knob clockwise (fig. 196). A vigorous vibration of the gun
indicates too "stiff" an adjustment. Failure of the gun to remain in
its aimed or set position indicates insufficient stiffness. If the gun
starts to vibrate after the stiffness control knob is turned, decrease
the adjustment by turning the knob in the opposite direction until
the vibration is eliminated. It may be necessary to change the stiff-
ness adjustment from time to time as the viscosity of the oil and
the tank battery voltage change.
eV
S e. Adjusting the Recoil Rheostat (fig. 196). The recoil rheo-
t adjustment prevents the breech from dropping when the gun
387
TM 9-759
172.173
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
recoils. Make the recoil rheostat adjustment by trial and e

while the gun is being fired. Set the recoil adjuster knob on No. 5
position. If the breech of the gun drops during recoil, turn the recoil
adjustment knob gradually to the right, or clockwise, until a point is
reached where the gun will keep its angular setting during recoil.
f. Checking Stabilizer Operation. Check the stabilizer for
effectiveness accuracy before the tank is used in combat, in the
following manner:
(1) Recheck the stiffness rheostat adjustment.
(2) Choose a suitable location for a trial run of the tank. The
terrain should be average rough, with no slopes, and sufficient acre-
age to permit adequate cruising time for the test run.
(3) Operate the tank at a normal and constant speed with the
guns aimed at a fixed target.
(4) Observe the target through the telescopic sight in the gun-
ner's periscope or in the direct-sighting telescope.
(5) If it is possible to hold the gun on the target within close
limits, using the handwheel, the stabilizer is operating satisfactorily.
173. OPERATING THE BREECH MECHANISM.

a. Opening Breech. To open the breech, grasp the grip port
of the breech-operating handle (fig. 198), release the latch in the
grip, and pull toward the right and to the rear. This moves the
breechblock to the right and thus opens the breech. CAUTION:
Keep hands out of gun when breech is open. Return operating handle
to the closed position immediately after opening breech in order to
avoid injury to personnel and the mechanism.
h. Closing Breech. Close the breech by unlatching the operating

handle and pull rearward and to the right. Bear sufficient weight
on the handle to overcome the tension of the closing spring and re-
lease the extractors from their locking position by pressing them
forward with the base of an empty cartridge case. The breechblock
is then free to be easecd into its closed position by means of the op-
erating handle which should finally be latched in place. CAUTION:
Do not use hands to release the extractors.
c. Semiautomatic Operation. Under ordinary circumstances it

will be necessary to open the breech only at the start of firing oper-
ations. A cam attached to the crank arm within the breech mecha-
nism is operated by the recoil of the gun after firing, and serves to
open the breech and extract the empty cartridge case during
recoil and return of the gun to battery.
388
TM 9-759
173
_ ~~~~~~~~STOP
~~EXTRACTOR
TUBE
CLOSING
CYLINDER
PFIRI RN BREECH RING

PLUNGEL
CHAIN
OPERATING
HANDLE
TERMINAL
CRANK BREECHBLOCK
LUG _ COVER PLATE
STOPi_ COCKING
LEVER
TUBE 3 BREECHBLOCK
CLOSING ~-
tw- |-\ BREECHRING
OPERATING R
HANDLE BREECHBLOCK
CRANK~~~~~~~ ~CRANK
TECRANK RA PD 312518
l* ure 1 9 8-75.mm Gun M3-Breech In Open and Closed Position

389
TM 9.759
174-175
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
BREECHBLOCK OPERATING HANDL

BREECH RING
FIRING LEVER ROD YOKE \ -SHOULDER GUARD FRAME
SOLENOIDI LSAFETY LEVER } RETURN SPRING FIRING LEVER

FIRING SHAFTJ FIRING MECHANISM BRACKET
RA PD 312523
Figure 199-Placing Safety Lever Forward in Safe Positfio
174. LOADING THE GUN.

a. Before loading, open breech and examine the bore of the gun
to see that it is clear and free from. foreign material. Be sure to
return operating handle to its closed position.
h. To load the gun, place a round in the breech with the nose
protruding in the bore, and impel the round into the chamber with
sufficient force to cause the flange of the cartridge case to drive the
extractors forward, and automatically close the breech. NOTE: The
loader's hand should be moving toward the left as he shoves the
projectile home, in order to clear the breechblock as it is auto-
matically closed.
175. FIRING THE GUN.

a. The 75-mm gun can be fired either electrically or manually
in case of failure of the electrical system. A firing switch is located
in the turret control box and controls the circuit to the two foot-
operated switches (fig. 200) convenient to the gunner's foot located
on the turret floor. The right switch operates the 75-mm gun solenoid
and the left one operates the cal. .30 machine gun in the combinat O
gun mounts The firing pedal is used to fire the 75-mm gun manuW
390
TM 9.759
175
l000
C
4IRIN 0 a,_
00 090000
CALIBER M 0,000005*
.30 A
~.·
;:IRIG
PEDLS _ ~
CALIBER~~.3A H N E .. ~.:L
FIRING GCABLE
UN FI··RIN _ SICH'"A
~~~~(~~~·
· · · · '···0·~~~.
?$- M M ~ · · · ~·
SIT GNFRIN .~ .
FIRING PEDAL BRACKET ae... · ·
:HI /: ,.-:_.
· ··,~~~~~AP 3 1 2 524·
Figre20--irngSwtcesan
Fi·ring eda
', . ~ ~ ~ · · Tofrete 5m gnelcrcal, unth irn wic i h
control~· bo o h "N pstin Pae h sftylve owr
~ he ~ ~ ~ · · rerinfrigpoiio
fi.9) T ir heom undprs
t he ~ ~ ~ ·
floo··r sichfrth?5mgu.Tecl.0ahieunfrg
75-MM GUN FIRING SWITCHswitch~~·/ onte urt lorfrs v_
h mcie uweepese.I
~he~~~~ fis mto
elcria ofiete 5mmgntefiig ea
. b. To
may
e usd
e.~~ ~~
mecansm
If fire
hebrec
thethe 75-mm
t
filre
f
fir thegunmanully
Iftegn al ofieuigeihreetrlo·
Figure 200-Firing Switches and Firing Pedal
toBL
tepstooftesftleeshudbchce.FailreN
ana en,·
maybedu t te gn tain otobttry
toclse o dfeciv amuiton
gun gunis electrically,
in turn
batter,rcclo the
h oknfiring
ymaso
filue
f hefiin
ee, switch in the
fire·~··
control catdbox nto heto

the rer "ON"al position.
o te beehPlacein, nd thettmp t fre
safety lever toward
CAUTION: ncs
BaCE o fDA misfire··, oe h iigsic meit
the rearbet ino firingratrtre
position
ofr (fig.unsilfil
teps e reokn. · 199).
·h· I To fire the 75-mm gun depress
theaitM
floor0seodbeoeonig
switch for the 75-mm gun.
tebec;te The cal. .30 machine gun firing
eoerundre
switch
loadG on the turret
anteptofie
aa floor fires the machine gun when
i.Aftrtene depressed.
orfrn sc If
pltdtrw method
the electrical h ifails tor fire i the an gsic
75-mm ote"F"psto
gun,p the firinglc sft pedal
OUIIGSIC
mayve
n"AIE"
bepositACion
used to fire the . gun manually.
c. If the gun fails to fire using either electrical or manual means,

the position of the safety lever should be checked. Failure to fire
may be due to the gun staying out of battery, failure of the firing
mechanism, failure of the breech to close, or defective ammunition.
If the gun is in battery, recock by means of the cocking lever, lo-
cated on the top rear wall of the breech ring, and attempt to fire.
CAUTION: In case of a misfire, open the firing switch immediately
before recocking. If the gun still fails to fire after three attempts,
wait 30 seconds before opening the breech; then remove round, re-
load, and attempt to fire again. After the need for firing is com-
pleted, throw the firing switch to the "OFF" position and place safety
W n391
TM 9.759
176.178
TANK, MEDIUM M4A3
176. PLACING THE GUN IN TRAVELING POSITION.

a. Place the gun in traveling position by releasing traveling bar
from stowage position on roof of turret and attaching it to the cradle
yoke by means of the pin.
l>. Place safety lever in forward safe position. Check to see if
the breech is clear and that a round of ammunition has not been left
in the breech.
c. Clean and lubricate gun and install muzzle and breech covers.
d. Lock the turret in traveling position by turning the wheel of
the turret clamp, all the way to the right or clockwise.
Section XXXIII
SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
177. (HARACTERIS1'ICS.
a. The sighting and fire control equipment for the 75-mm gun
used in the Medium Tank M4 series includes the Telescope M70F
illuminated by Instrument Light M32, Periscope M4A1 with Tele-
scope M38A2 or Periscope M1OC, Elevation Quadrant M9 illumi-
nated by Instrument Light M30, and Fuze Setter M14.
178. TELESCOPE M70F.
a. The Telescope M70F (fig. 201) is used for direct laying of the
75-mm gun. The telescope is mounted in a front and rear bracket
on the right-hand side of the gun mount, and moves with the gun.
The reticle pattern (fig. 202) is graduated for Armor-Piercing
Capped Projectile M61, fired with a muzzle velocity of 2030 feet
per second, plus 0.3 mils jump. The graduations are based on data
contained in firing table 75-AD-5, C1. The cross represents zero
range and zero deflection for use in lining up the telescope with
the gun when performing the bore sighting adjustment.
lb. To use the Telescope M70F for direct laying, bring the image
of the target to the point on the reticle which represents the required
range and deflection by rotating the elevating handwheel
traversing the turret. The range markings are in hundred of y:
392
TM 9-759
178
0
m
Co c ujo
O
-J W
LU U
Z ' 2
l IL
u
I --
LU
C.
393
393
TM 9.759
178-180
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
75 - M61
4-
6i - -
24 -24- -1
Figur 202Retile4PtterA PD 2T9oe
Figure 202--Reticle Pattern of Telescope M70F
Each horizontal line and each space represents a deflection of 5

mils. This deflection is equivalent to a lead of 2 yards at 400 yards
range; 4 yards at 800 yards range; 6 yards at 1,200 yards range, etc.
The gunner's eye should be approximately 11.'4 inches from the tele-
scope eyelens when observing.
179. PERISCOPE Ml4Al W ITH TELES(OPE M138A2.

a. For description and use of the Periscope M4A1 refer to para-
graph 198.
I. The reticle pattern for the Telescope M38A2 is the same as

that shown in figure 202 and described in paragraph 178.
180. PERISC)PE M11C4:.

a. For description and use of the Periscope M10C refer to
paragraph 199.
h1. The reticle pattern for the one-power optical system is the
same as that shown in figure 223, and the reticle pattern for the s'
power system is the same as that shown in figure 202.
394
TM 9-759
181-182
AMMUNITION
*1. ELEVATION QUADRANT 119, FUZE SETTER M14 AND

BORE SIGHTING ADJUSTMENT.
a. The Elevation Quadrant M9 is described in paragraph 200;
the Fuze Setter M14 is described in paragraph 201; and the bore
sighting adjustment is described in paragraph 202.
Section XXXIV
AMMUNITION
182. AUTHORIZED AMMI NITION.
a. Ammunition authorized for the 75-mm gun, M3, is listed in
Table I. Standard nomenclature which completely identifies the
ammunition is used in the listing. Identification is provided for by
painting and marking on the rounds themselves and on all packing.
TABLE I. AUTHORIZED AMMUNITION'
Action Approx. Weight

Nomenclature of of Projectile
Fuze as Fired (lb)
Service Ammunition
PROJECTILE, fixed, A.P.C., M61A1, Delay 14.96

w FUZE, B.D., M66A1, and
TRACER, 75-mm gun
PROJECTILE, fixed, A.P.C., M61, Delay 14.96
TRACER, 75-mm gun
PROJECTILE, fixed, A.P.C., M61, None 14.40
w TRACER, 75-mm gun
SHELL, fixed, H.E., M48, super- SQ & 0.05-sec. 14.60
charge, w FUZE, P.D., M48, delay 4
75-mm gun:;
SHELL, fixed, H.E., M48, supercharge, SQ & 0.15-sec. 14.60
w FUZE, P.D., M48A1, 75-mm gun 3 delay 4
SHELL, fixed, H.E., M48, supercharge, ! SQ & 0.05-sec. | 14.60
w. FUZE, P.D., M48A2, SQ & 0.05- delay 4
sec. delay, 75-mm gun::
SHELL, fixed, H.E., M48, normal SQ & 0.05-sec. 14.60
charge, w FUZE, P.D., M48, 75-mm delay 4
gun :
es at end of Table.)395
oo
W395
TM 9.759
182
TANK., MEDIUM, M4A3
TABLE 1. AUTHORIZED AMMUNITION- (Contd.)
Action Aip e.
Nomenclature of Projc+&th
Noem cFuze as Fired (lb)
Service Ammunition-(Contd.)
SHELL, fixed, H.E., M48, normal SQ & 0.15-sec. 14.60
charge, w FUZE, P.D., M48A1, delay 4
75-mm gun-
SHELL, fixed, H.E., M48, normal SQ & 0.15-sec. 1 14.60
charge, w FUZE, P.D., M48A2, SQ delay 4
& 0.15-sec. delay, 75-mm gun::
SHELL, fixed, H.E., Mk. I, flashless, SQ (M46), or 12.41
reduced charge, unfuzed, 75-mm gun delay (M47)
(adapted for FUZE, P.D., M46 or
M47) 4
SHELL, fixed, H.E., Mk. I, flashless, SQ (M46), or 12.41
unfuzed, 75-mm gun (adapted for delay (M47)
FUZE, P.D., M46, or M47)
SHELL, fixed, H.E., Mk. I, reduced SQ (M46), or 12.41
charge, unfuzed, 75-mm gun delay (M47)
(adapted for FUZE, P.D., M46
or M47)_
SHELL, fixed, H.E., Mk. I, unfuzed, SQ (M46), or 12.4
75-mm gun (adapted for FUZE. delay (M47)
P.D., M46 or M47) 5 f;
SHELL, fixed, smoke, phosphorus, WP, SQ 15.25
M64, w 'FUZE, P.D., M57, 75-mm
gun
SHELL, fixed, smoke, phosphorus, WP. SQ 12.82
Mk. II, normal charge, unfuzed,
75-mm gun (adapted for FUZE,
P.D., M46)
SHELL, fixed, smoke, HC, B.I., M89, None 6.61
75-mm guns, M2 and M3
SHOT, fixed, A.P., M72, w;'TRACER, None 13.94
7
5-mm gun2
Blank Ammunition
AMMUNITION, blank (single pellet !
charge), 75-mm guns, M1897-16-17,
and 3" field guns, M1902-04-05
AMMUNITION, blank (double pellet l
charge), 75-mm guns, M1897-16-17,
75-mm how., Ml and MlAl, and 3"
field guns, M1902-04-05
(See footnotes at end of Table.)
396
TM 9-759
182-183
AMMUNITION
TABLE I. AUTHORIZED AMMIUNITIONI--(Contd.)

Action Approw. Weight
Nomenclature of Proectill
Fu. as Fired (lb)
Drill (Dummy) Ammunition
CARTRIDGE, drill, M7, 75-mm guns,

M1897-16-17, M2, M3, and T6
CARTRIDGE, drill, M16, w FUZE,
dummy, M59, 75-mm gun
A.P.-armor-piercing B.I.-base-ignition
A.P.C.-armor-piercing-capped H.E.-high-explosive
B.D.-base-detonating P.D.-point-detonating
SQ-superquick
'-Service rounds have been manufactured with both brass and steel cases.
Nomenclature of steel case rounds includes the words "steel case" immediately
following the model designation. The words are also stenciled on packing
boxes and crates, when applicable. Steel cartridge cases are signified in the
stamping on the base of the case by the addition of "Bl" to the model desig-
nation of the case.
--This round may be issued and used for target practice.
:'-In future manufacture, supercharge H.E. rounds requiring the M48-series
fuzes will be assembled with the M48 or M48A2 with 0.05 second delay;
rounds with normal or reduced propelling charge will be assembled with the
_M48AI or M48A2 with 0.15 second delay. Only rounds.fitted with the M48
or M48A2 (0.05 second delay) will be issued for oversea shipment for tank
use. See note 3 for identification of the M48A2 fuze.
4-The delay of FUZE. P.D., M48, is 0.05 second; of FUZE. P.D., M48A1, 0.15
second. The M48A2 fuze may have either 0.05 second or 0.15 second delay,
depending on the lot. Provision is made for identification by stamping the
length of delay in seconds on the M48A2 fuze immediately following the
model number. Thus, M48A2 fuzes with the 0.05 second delay element will
have stamped on the body "FUZE. P.D., M48A2 (.05 SEC.)"; M48A2 fuzes
with 0.15 second delay will be stamped "FUZE, P.D., M48A2 (.15 SEC.)."
5--For restrictions on issue and use of FUZE, P.D., M46, and M47, for training,
see OFSB 3-3.
';-Issue for training will be from existing supply.
183. PREPARATION FOR FIRING.

a. Fuzed Rounds. Fuzed rounds authorized for this gun are
ready for firing as removed from packing (including the U-shaped
packing stop), except for setting the M48 point-detonating fuze of the
M48 high-explosive rounds for the required action. As shipped, FUZE,
P.D., M48, M48A1, and M48A2 are set for superquick action (SQ),
that is, the slot in the setting screw is parallel to the axis of the fuze
and in line with "SQ." To adjust for delay action, the setting screw
should be turned by means of the screwdriver end of WRENCH, fuze,
M7AI, or similar instrument, so that the slot is alined with "DELAY,"
. t is, at right angles to the axis of the fuze. (Delay action is pro-
_ 1 :.,550
()--4 ..2; 397
TM 9-759
183-184
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
vided for in the fuze by a delay pellet.) The setting may be

or changed at will, and can be done in the dark by noting the position
of the slot in the setting sleeve.
b. Unfuzed Rounds. In the case of unfuzed rounds, it is neces-

sary to remove the adapter closing plug from the projectile and to
assemble the required fuze. To assemble FUZE, P.D., M46 and
FUZE, P.D., M47, to the projectile, proceed as follows:
(1) Remove the closing plug from the projectile.
(2) Inspect the fuze cavity and threads to make certain that
there is no foreign matter present which would interfere with proper
assembly of the fuze.
(3) Screw the fuze slowly into the adapter by hand. (It is essen-
tial that the felt washer provided with the fuze be under the detonator
socket flange when the fuze is screwed into the adapter.)
(4) Tighten with fuze wrench, whereupon the fuzes are then
ready for firing.
PART FOUR-AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT-(Contd.)

C-ARMAMENT
76-MM GUN MIA1, M1A1C, OR M1A2 IN'

THE COMBINATION GUN MOUNT M62
Section XXXV
INTRODUCTION
184. SCOPE.
a. Part Four-C contains instructions for the operation of the
76-mm Gun MiA1, MlAlC, or M1A2 in the Combination Gun
Mount M62. It lists the authorized ammunition for the gun and con-
tains information on the sighting equipment. Refer to section IX for
lubrication instructions on the armament.
lb. The other armament in the vehicle (fig. 203) is as follows:
Cal. .30, M1919A4 Machine Gun mounted in the Combination Gun
Mount M62; Cal. .30 M1919A4 Machine Gun mounted in a bow
mount in, the right front of the vehicle (fig. 204); Cal..50, HB,
M2 Machine Gun mounted in a bracket-type mount on a revolving
turret hatch (fig. 205); and a 2-inch Mortar M3 located in a fixed
mount in the turret to the left of the combination gun mount
206) m
398
TM 9-759
184
INTRODUCTION
cr ~~~~~~~~o
It .I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ I
u z 9
. <
TM 9.759
185
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A1
GUN TRAVELING LOCK MECHANISM RA PD 19709
figure 204-Cal..30 F M1919A4 Machine Gun Installed in

4 A. .Mount
manually or by a hydraulic traversing mechanism. The 76-mm gun
can be elevated 25 degrees and depressed 10 degrees. The cal. .30
machine gun in the combination gun mount is elevated and traversed
with the 76-mm gun.
h. The cal. .30 machine gun in the bow mount is elevated and
traversed manually and fired by the conventional trigger. Refer to
c. The cal. .50 machine gun is employed chiefly against enemy
aircraft and is elevated and traversed manually and fired by the con-
ventional trigger. The machine gun can be traversed independently
of the turret. Refer to FM 23-65 for complete information on its
operation.
tank is advancing. It is mounted in a fixed mount, has no elevation or
depression, and traverses with the turret. Refer to TM 9-293 for com-
plete information on its operation.
400
TM 9-759
185
INTRODUCTION
;A ; .. -il
K Ut
' -4'
'9-s
-~~~·~~:
· ·i
Ir~~~~~~\L~~~~~ D~~~~~~~~.
Q irf~
l~~ o ~~~
*6
:'~tEtBi ~ U
C,
".
401
TM 9-759
185
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
=Qo C
DS.<
Z E4
402z.
402 e
TM 9.759
186-188
DIFFERENCES AMONG MODELS.

a. There are three models of 76-mm guns which can be used
in the Combination Gun Mount M62 in the Medium Tank M4
series. They are the M1A1, Ml1AC, and the M1A2. The MIA1 is
rifled with uniform right-hand twist, one turn in 40 calibers. The
M1AIC is modified by the addition of threads at the muzzle end
to take a muzzle brake. When the muzzle brake is not installed the
threads will be protected by a ring. The M1A2 model has the rifling
changed to uniform right-hand twist, one turn in 32 calibers with the
muzzle end threaded to take the muzzle brake. If the muzzle brake
is not installed, a ring is used to protect the threads. The guns will
be so marked that proper identification can be made.
Section XXXVI
187. PLACING THE 76-MM GUN IN FIRING POSITION.
Remove the muzzle cover.
.... Pull out the traveling lock pin from the cradle lock, and lock
the traveling lock bar in position under turret roof (fig. 207).
c. To disengage the gun traveling lock, pull down on the spring
release, and elevate the gun until it clears the lock. Swing the travel-
ing lock down to its latched position and it will be locked in place by
the traveling lock latch (fig. 208).
d. Disengage the turret lock by turning the handle, pulling it
out, and rotating one-quarter turn clockwise (fig. 212).

a. Check Oil Level in Recoil Cylinder. To check oil level, de-
press gun 5 degrees and remove the filling plugs (figs. 209 and 210) at
the rear of each recoil cylinder. The oil level in the cylinder should
reach the bottom of the hole. If oil does not reach this level, fill until
level is reached. Replace plugs. The recoil mechanism uses special
recoil oil for all temperatures.
h. Check path of recoil to make sure that it is free from all ob-
structions.
Bore Sighting. Refer to paragraph 202.
403
TM 9-759
189
TANK. MEDIUM, M4A3
Roof of Turret
189. TRAVERSING TURRET.
a. Power Operation. Before traversing turret by means of the

hydraulic mechanism, be sure the hatches for the driver and assistant
driver are closed. Make sure personnel are clear of rotating parts.
Move gearshift lever, in front of gunner and under traversing gear
mechanism, to the "UP" position or power position (fig. 213). It may
be necessary to turn, slightly, the manual traversing handle on top of
traversing mechanism to engage gears. Turn master turret electrical
twitch to the "ON" position to start electric drive motor (fig. 214).
Disengage the turret lock by turning the handle, pulling out the
handle, and rotating it one-quarter turn to the left (fig. 212). CAU-
TION: It is important to have turret lock completely disengaged
before traversing turret, and to lock turret in position when the need
for traversing has been completed. The control handle on the traverse
pump to the right of the gun elevating handwheel controls the speed
and direction of turret rotation (fig. 213). To traverse turret to the
right, rotate the control handle to the right. To traverse turret to the
left, rotate the control handle to the left. The further the handle is
rotated from its normal position, the faster the speed of traverse_
stop turret traverse, release control handle or bring it to the new
404
TM 9-759
189
0:0
IL.
e '>,~~~~~~.
405
du~~.'
-. ~~~~~~~~~
|.1|.. ~F
a~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I··- "
ZQ c40
405
TM 9-759
189
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
za
z~o
_' =, Lu au-
_-
CI
Z,
CC; r
..)
406 ,.
t;~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Lu 4
TM 9.759
189
ioO-
Z..
El
0 E
2 VI.
*~~~~~~~
Y,
z "`
407
31~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
z~~~~~~~~~~~~~
El
IoY, ~ O7
0~~
~~-T~~~;40
gz
TM 9.759
189
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
76MM GUN
MANUAL
FIRING PED,",t
e$ )n FFIRING 5 !TCH
GUN FIRIiNG S'vITCH O( PUMP 19724
Figure 211-Turret Guns Firing Switches and Manual Firing P 0

position. Turret rotation can be reversed instantly without damage
to the power mechanism.
b. Commander's Hydraulic Traverse Control Handle. Mounted
on a bracket on the inner right turret wall is the commander's
hydraulic traverse control handle (fig. 212). If the commander so
desires, he may take traverse control of the turret away from the
gunner, since operation of the handle automatically cuts out the
gunner's hydraulic traverse control handle. To operate the com-
mander's hydraulic traverse control handle, depress button in top of
handle and move handle forward to traverse turret counterclockwise,
and toward the rear to traverse turret clockwise.
c. Manual Operation. If the electric power fails, or if the hy-
draulic traversing system will not operate due to some other cause,
the turret can be rotated by the manual drive handle located on top
of traversing mechanism to the right of the gunner's seat (fig. 213).
Before traversing turret, be sure the hatches for the driver and as-
sistant driver are closed. Disengage the turret lock by turning the
handle, pulling out the handle, and rotating it one-quarter turn to the
left (fig. 212). Move the gearshift lever under traversing mechanism
to the "DOWN" position (fig. 213). It may be necessary to
slightly, the manual drive handle on top of traversing mechanis:
408
TM 9.759
189
COMMANDER'S HYDRAULIC TRAVERSE CONTROL OANDLE- '
BINOCULAR BRACKET
- AZIMUTH INDICATOR
TURRET LOCK ANDLE
RA PD 77286
Figure 212-Turre--lnner Right Side
engage gears. Manually operated gears are then engaged with the
turret ring gear and pinion. Grip the manual drive handle and its
associate lever on top of gear mechanism to right of gunner to release
brake in gear box. Turn manual drive handle to the right, or clock-
wise, to rotate turret clockwise, and to the left, or counterclockwise,
to rotate the turret counterclockwise. The rate of speed of turret
tion is dependent upon the speed o.. wvhich the handle is operated.
e manual drive handle on traversing mechanism turns freely and
409
TM 9.759
189-191
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
fails to move the turret, the shift lever under the mechanismW
the "UP," or power traversing position. and should be moved to the
"DOWN," or manual traversing position. NOTE: If the tank is on
an incline when the turret lock is disengaged and the shift lever not
in the "UP" or power traversing position and the traversing pump is
not in operation, the load of the gun will cause the turret to drift
rapidly until the gun reaches the lowest position. Always traverse the
turret 360 degrees manually with the manual drive handle to be
sure the turret is free.
190. ELE\VATING; O}R DEPRE.SSIN'G GUN.

a. When the elevation of the gun is being controlled manually,
the stabilizer system is used to minimize.the effect of backlash in the
gears of the elevating mechanism. Maximum elevation is 25 degrees
and maximum depression 10 degrees.
h. To use the stabilizer system to minimize backlash while elevat-
ing the gun manually, turn the stabilizer switch (fig. 213) to the
"ON" position. Press the release lever down and move the elevating
clutch lever (fig. 213) to the left, toward the gun mount. It may be
necessary to turn the elevating handwheel slightly, to engage the
gears. The gun is elevated or depressed by turning the elevating h
wheel located to the right of the 76-mm gun. _
191. OPERATING THE STABILIZER.

a. Purpose. The stabilizer holds the 76-mm gun and the cal. .30
machine gun in the combination gun mount at a predetermined eleva-
tion while the tank is in motion. The stabilizer controls gun move-
ments in a vertical plane caused by the pitching of the tank. The
stabilizer has no control of movement in a horizontal plane due to
the roll of the tank.
b. Control of the Gun. When the stabilizer is in operation, the
guns are elevated or depressed in the usual manner by turning the
elevating handwheel. As the angular relation between the guns and
the gyro control is changed, the guns automatically take up the new
desired elevation. When the tank is in motion, the guns are automati-
cally kept at the set elevation within close limits, making it necessary
to elevate or depress the guns only when the target moves, when the
tank changes direction, or wher the elevation of the tank (other than
that caused by normal pitching) is changed. The elevating handwheel
should not be turned after the guns have reached their limits of travel
in elevation or depression. Further turning of the handwheel when
the guns are against either stop will result in excessive overloa O
the tank battery.
410
TM 9-759
191
_- Jo as MANUAL X
C:~ HANDL
, CONTROl
ELEVATING TURRET TRAVERSE HYDRAULIC

CLUTCH LEVER GEARSHIFT LEVER TURRET TRAVERSE
ELEVATING 76-MM GUN ELECTRICAL CONTROL HANDLE
HAND WHEEL FIRING TRIGGER RA PD 77293
Figure 213-Turret Traverse and Elevation Controls
c. Starting the Stahilizer.

(1) Be sure the oil reservoir (fig. 206) shows at least two-thirds
full of hydraulic oil.
(2) Take the hand elevating gears out of mesh by pushing the
release lever down and moving the elevating clutch lever away from
the gun mount (fig. 213). It may be necessary to rotate the elevating
handwheel, slightly, to remove tension from the elevating pinion.
(3) Adjust the gyro control to an approximate vertical position
by hand (fig. 217). CAUTION: This operation is necessary to pre-
vent the 76-mm gun from moving sharply into the elevated or de-
pressed position caused by the displacement of the gyro control in
other than a vertical position.
) Turn the master turret electrical switch to the "ON" position
_216).
411
TM 9-759
191
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
GUN ELEC[RICAL FIRING SAFETY SwC
/' V WARNING LIGHT
KNOB ( B
PD 77285
RA PD
Figure 214-Turref Confrol Box
(5)
(5) Turn
Turn thethe
stabilizer
stabilizer switch
switch to
to the
the "ON"
"ON" position
position (hg.
(fihg.214).
214).
(6) In cold weather, permit the oil to warm up.' In subzero
weather, allow 1/2-minute running time for each degree ol temperature
below zero. For example, a total running time of 10 minutes at 20
degrees below zero.
d. Adjusting the Stiffness Rheostat. Starting at zero, slowly
turn the knob clockwise (fig. 214). A vigorous vibration of the gun
indicates too "stiff" an adjustment. Failure of the gun to remain in
its aimed or set position indicates insufficient stiffness. If the gun
starts to vibrate after the stiffness control knob is turned, decrease
the adjustment by turning the knob in the opposite direction until
the vibration is eliminated. It may be necessary to change the stiff-
ness adjustment from time to time as the viscosity of the oil and the
tank battery voltage change.
e. Adjusting the Recoil Rheostat (fig. 214). The recoil rheo-
stat adjustment prevents the breech from dropping when the g
412
TM 9.759
191
FILLING PLUG BREECHRING RECOIL GUARD
76-MM GUN ELECTRICFIRING BREECHOPERATING HANDLE

RECOIL MANUAL FIRING BUTTON
CYLINDER FOOT PEDAL SWITCH BOX RA PD 77289
Figure 215--Breech End of 76-mm Gun

coils. Make the recoil rheostat adjustment by trial and error while
the gun is being fired. Set the recoil adjuster knob on No. 5 position.
If the breech of the gun drops during recoil, turn the recoil adjust-
ment knob gradually to the right, or clockwise, until a point is reached
where the gun will keep its angular setting during recoil.
f. Checking Stabilizer Operation. Check the stabilizer for effec-

tiveness and accuracy before the tank is used in combat, in the fol-
lowing manner:
(1) Recheck the stiffness rheostat adjustment.
(2) Choose a suitable location for a trial run of the tank. The
terrain should be average rough, with no slopes, and sufficient acreage
to permit adequate cruising time for the test run.
(3) Operate the tank at a normal and constant speed with the
guns aimed at a fixed target.
(4) Observe the target through the telescopic sight in the gun-
ner's periscope or in the direct sighting telescope.
5) If it is possible to hold tl.c gun on the target within close
Wts, using the handwheel, the stabilizer is operating satisfactorily.
Sl::.5.5,41 4. '27 413
TM 9.759
192
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
BREECHBLOCK
,uRS~~~~~ _S r~~~~~~ ~BREECH

HANDLE
19723
Figure 216-Breech Mechanism on 76-mm Gun
192. OPERATING THE BREECH MECHANISM.

a. Opening Breech (figs. 215 and 216). To open the breech,
grasp the grip portion of the breech operating handle. Release the
latch on the grip, and push the breech operating handle across under-
neath the breech mechanism and through the opening in the guard.
This moves the breechblock to the right and thus opens the breech.
Keep hands out of gun when breech is open. Return operating handle
to the closed position immediately after opening breech in order to
avoid injury to personnel and the mechanism.
b. Closing Breech (figs. 215 and 216). Close the breech by
unlatching the operating handle, pushing it across underneath the
breech mechanism and through the body guard. Bear sufficient
weight on the handle to overcome the tension of the closing spring.
Release the breechblock extractors from their locked position by
pressing them forward with the back of an empty cartridge case. The
breechblock is then free to be eased into its closed position by means
of the operating handle which should finally be latched in place.
CAUTION: Never use hands to release the extractors.
c. Semiautomatic Operation. Under ordinary circumstanc /
will be necessary to open the breech only at the start of firing opW
414
TM 9-759
192-194
ns. A cam attached to the crank arm within the breech mechanism
operated by the recoil of the gun after firing, and serves to open the
breech and extract the empty cartridge case during the recoil and
return of the gun to battery.
193. LOADING THE GUN.

a. Before loading, open breech and examine the bore of the gun
to see that it is clear and free of foreign material. Be sure to return
operating handle to its closed position. Refer to paragraphs 203 and
204 for information on authorized ammunition and preparation of
ammunition for firing.
h. To load the gun, place a round in the breech, with the nose
protruding in the bore, and impel the round into the chamber with
sufficient force so that the flange of the cartridge case will drive the ex-
tractors forward and automatically close the breech. NOTE: The
loader's hand should be moving toward the left as he shoves the
projectile home in order to clear the breechblock as it automatically
closes.
194. FIRING THE GUiN.

a. The 76-mm gun can be fired either electrically, or manually
case of failure of the electrical system. A firing switch is located in
ehe turret control box and controls the circuit to the two foot-operated
switches convenient to the gunner's foot located on the turret floor.
One switch is for the 76-mm gun and the other for the machine gun
in the combination gun mount. The foot switches energize the sole-
noids which fire the 76-mm gun and cal. .30 machine gun. The
76-mm gun may also be fired electrically by the firing trigger on the
traverse control handle. The firing pedal is used to fire the 76-mm
gun manually.
b. To fire the 76-mm gun electrically, throw the firing switch in
the control box to the "ON" position. This will cause the indicating
light to glow. Pull the firing safety lever down and rotate one-quarter
turn in either direction to hold the lever in the "fire" position. To fire
the 76-mm gun, use either the switch on the hydraulic traverse control
handle or the 76-mm gun firing switch on the floor of the turret. The
cal. .30 machine gun firing switch on the turret floor fires the machine
gun when depressed. If the 76-mm gun fails to fire using the firing
switches, the firing pedal may be used to fire the gun manually.
c. If the gun fails to fire using either the electrical or manual
means, the position of the safety lever should be checked. Failure to
fire may be due to the gun staying out of battery, failure of the firing
echanism, failure of the breech to close, or defective ammunition.
415
TM 9-759
194-195
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
..... w. · a FIRING
SAFETY
4I( LEVER,
76-MM
"' "' GUN
GYRO
CONTROL
RA PD
- ' =" 9 77287
Figure 217-Under Side of 76-mm Gun Mount
If the gun is in battery, recock by means of the cocking lever (fig.

215) located on the top of the breech ring and attempt to fire. CAU-
TION: In case of a misfire, open the firing switch immediately before
recocking. If the gun still fails to fire after three attempts, wait 30
seconds before opening the breech; then remove round, reload, and
attempt to fire again. After need for firing is completed throw the
firing switch to the "OFF" position and place safety lever in "safe"
position.
195. PLACING THE GUN IN TRAVELING POSITION.

a. Place the safety lever in its "safe" position by rotating the
lever one-quarter turn in either direction.
h. Open breech and check that a round of ammunition has
been left in the gun. h
416
TM 9-759
195-196
RA PD 19722
*O ~ure 218-Cradle Locked in Traveling Position by Traveling

Lock
c. Clean and lubricate gun and install muzzle cover.

d. Place the gun in traveling position by taking the traveling
lock out of the traveling lock latch and placing the traveling lock
in a vertical position (fig. 208). Depress the gun until it bottoms
firmly in the traveling lock.
e. Install pin in cradle traveling lock (fig. 218).
f. Lock the turret in traveling position by pulling and rotating
the turret lock handle one-quarter turn counterclockwise (fig. 212).
Section XXXVII
a. The sighting equipment for the 76-mm Gun used in the
Medium Tank M4 series includes Telescope Mount M57 with Tele-
e M71D, illuminated by Instrument Light MA3, Periscope
Al with Telescope M47A2 or the Periscope M1OG. E.levation
417
TM 9-759
196
TANK, MEDIUM. M4A3
o
0
L i t9
~OF~~~ Q~>
-J
0.w o
418~~~~~~~v
418
TM 9-759
196-197
/. /. 76- M62
-4-
16
- - - 4 -
/ 32 - | - -32
RA PD 14&11
Figure 220-Reticle Pattern for Telescope M71D
Quadrant M9 illuminated by Instrument Light M30, and Fuze

Setter M14.
197. TELESCOPE MOUNT M57 WITH TELESCOPE M71D.
a. The Telescope Mount M57 (fig. 219) is attached to right-
hand side of the gun. The mount has range and deflection adjusting
mechanisms for bore sighting the telescope, and an adjustable head-
rest, and the Instrument Light M33 for illuminating the reticle of the
telescope. The mount supports the Telescope M71D.
h. The Telescope M71D is used for direct fire. The telescope
moves with the gun. The reticle pattern (fig. 220) is graduated for
Armor-piercing Cap Projectile M62 fired with a muzzle velocity of
2600 feet per second, minus 1.0 mil jump. The graduations are based
on data contained in firing table 76-A-4. The cross represents zero
deflection for use in lining up the telescope with the gun when bore
sighting.
c. To use the Telescope M71D for direct laying of the 76-mm
gun, bring the image of the target to the point on the reticle which
represents the required range and deflection by rotating the elevating
handwheel and traversing the turret. The range markings are in
ndreds of yards. Each horizontal line and space represents a
419
TM 9.759
197
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
'-AD ASSEMBLY
NOTATION LABEL
XSI .G J/ECCENTRIC
( | S it ADJ
U"SAI
> ~sl HANDLE
\SLOT FOR
iSCREWDRIVER
iARROW
ICONTACT QAMP
TELESCOPE
iADJUSTING
IKNOBS
COVER REMOVED,
ELBOW ASSEMBLY
RA PD 603
Figure 221-Periscope M4A1-Rear View

420
TM 9-759
197
NOTATION LABEL
HEAD
LATCH /
MOUNTING STUD
:DIOPTER SCALE
PLUG RECEPTACLE (SIX-.PoWER

EYE SHIELD
-- INSTRUCTION PLATE
OBSERVATION WINDOW
RA PD 31451
Figure 222-Periscope MIOG-Righf Rear View

421
TM 9-759
197-198
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
8 - - - - 8
12 - 12
76-M62
RA PD 6036
Figure 223-Reficle Pattern for One-Power Optical System

Periscope MIOG
deflection of 5 mils. The gunner's eye should be approximately 11/4

inches from the telescope eyelens when observing.
198. PERISCOPE MY4A1 WITH TELESCOPE M47A2.

a. The Periscope M4A1 contains Telescope M47A2, and is used
for direct laying against moving targets when firing the 76-mm Armor-
piercing Capped Projectile M62. The head of the periscope (fig. 221)
is constructed of plastic material so it will shatter into small pieces if
struck by a projectile. The head is readily replaced with the spare
heads which are provided.
). To operate Periscope M4A1 with telescope, observe through
the telescope, and bring the image of the target to the point on the
reticle representing the required range and deflection, by rotating
the elevating handwheel and traversing the turret. By moving the eye
to the left of the telescope eyepiece, the periscope may be used for
observation. If the periscope is equipped with a window wiper, the
window in the head can be cleaned by pulling the periscope down to
the retracted position and then pushing it back into the viewing
sition. Repeat this operation several times until the window is c
422
TM 9-759
198
A
£ N
z -
L ,2 o
U IA : to E <~~U
0
0~~~~~~~I
Z .
0
J .. J
us S~~~~, , F-¢
4'
u~~~~
iL o
4-
,I. ~~~~~C
< UJ
o ,,
0~~~~~~~~
4.,
ul~~~~ o
uJ
w~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~4
b
_o >~~~~
z ~~~~~"
ur I~~~~~ I ' ~~ - ..
J: Z~~~
>4~~~~~~52
y~~~ >
Ln
1 ~~~a u4~~ z
h-_1
_
L
2 z
423~~~~~~~~~4
-J -JZ
423
TM 9.759
198
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
IL
4i2
OI
424I
424
TM 9-759
199-202
W9. PERISCOPE M10G.

a. The Periscope M1OG (fig. 222) will eventually replace the
Periscope M4A1, as standard equipment. An adapter furnished with
the periscope mount permits interchanging of periscopes. The Peri-
scope M1OG contains both a one-power and a six-power optical sys-
tem for direct laying against moving targets. The one-power system is
advantageous when the general terrain is to be observed and the
target is close to the gun; it may also be used in an emergency to
supplant the six-power system. The six-power optical system is used
for laying on distant targets. The reticle pattern for the one-power
system is shown in figure 223, and the pattern for the six-power
system is the same as shown in figure 220. The head of the periscope
is constructed of plastic material so it will shatter into small pieces
if struck by a projectile. The head is readily replaced with the spare
heads which are provided.
I). To operate the Periscope MIOG for laying on close targets,
observe through the window and bring the image of the target to the
point on the reticle representing the required range and deflection,
by rotating the elevating handwheel and traversing the turret. For
distant targets, observe through the eyepiece. The reticles may be
Ruminated for night operation.
~ll). ELEVATION QUADRANT M9.

a. The Elevation Quadrant M9 (fig. 224) is used to lay the
76-mm gun in elevation for indirect fire.
b1. To lay the gun in elevation, set off the elevation angle on the
coarse scale (100-mil intervals) and on the micrometer (1-mil in-
tervals). The quadrant has two scales and two micrometer indexes.
Use the micrometer index on the side corresponding to the scale
in use.
201. FUZE SETTER M 14.

a. The Fuze Setter M14 (fig. 225) is used as a hand wrench to
set the fuzes. After the fuze safety pin has been removed, place the
wrench on the fuze with the tapered side of the hole fitting the fuze.
Engage the key in the slot of the fuze and turn the handle clockwise
(increasing direction) until the index mark on the fuze alines with
the required time setting on the fuze scale. Use care in removing
the wrench to avoid changing the setting.
202. BORE SIGHTING.

a. The purpose of bore sighting is to test the alinement of the
sighting equipment for parallelism with the gun bore. For expediency
may be performed by sighting on a well-defined fixed object at
st 1,000 yards distant.
425
TM 9-759
202-203
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
b. Open the breech of the gun, and, while looking through

barrel, aline the gun on the distant object. With the telescope in po-
sition in its mounting, observe through the telescope and note the
position of the cross on the reticle representing zero range and zero
deflection, with respect to the aiming point. If they do not coincide,
move the line of sighting of the telescope, by first loosening the
clamping nuts, and then turning the adjusting knobs on the rear of
the telescope mount or bracket until coincidence is obtained.
c. Check the Periscope M4A1 or MIOG irl a similar manner, and
if coincidence is not observed, move the line of sighting by, first, re-
moving the cover on the Periscope M4A1 and then turning the ad-
justing knobs until coincidence is obtained. Press inward on the
adjusting knobs of Periscope M1OG before turning them. Record the
adjustment and serial number of the periscope on the notation label.
Replace the cover on the adjusting knobs of the Periscope M4A1.
Section XXXVIII
AMMUNITION
203. AUTHORIZED A.MMUNITION.
a. Ammunition authorized for the 76-mm gun, M1A1, M1
and M1A2, is listed in Table I below. Standard nomenclature whi
completely identifies the ammunition is used in the listing. Identifica-
tion is provided for by painting and marking on the rounds them-
selves and on all packing.
TABLE I. AUtTHIORIZED A-\IIIUNITION'
Nomenclature of I of Proiectile.
Fuze Jas Fired (Ib)
Service Ammunition
PROJECTILE, fixed, A.P.C., M62A1, Delay 15.44

TRACER, 76-mm guns, M1,
M1A1, and M1A2
PROJECTILE, fixed, A.P.C.. M62, Delay 15.44
TRACER, 76-mm guns, M1,
M1A1, and M1 and M1A2
PROJECTILE, fixed, A.P.C., M62, Delay 15.44
NH w FUZE, B.D., M66A1, and
TRACER, 76-mm guns, M1, MlAI, l
and M1A2
(See footnotes at end of Table. )
426
TM 9-759
203
AMMUNITION
TABLIE I. AUTHORIZED AMIMUNITION '-(Contd.)
Action Approx. Weigth
Nomenclature of of Projectile,
FUCe as Fired (lb)
Service Ammunition-(Contd.)
PROJECTILE, fixed, A.P.C., M62, i 15.11

w TRACER, 76-mm guns, M1,
MlAl, and M1A2
SHELL, fixed, H.E., M42A1, w FUZE, SQ & 0.15-sec. 12.87
P.D., M48A1, 76-mm guns, M1, delay8
M1Al, and M1A2 2
SHELL, fixed, H.E., M42A1, w FUZE, SQ & 0.05-sec. 12.87
P.D., M48A2 SQ & 0.05-sec. delay, delay::
76-mm guns, M1, M1A1, and M1A2 2
SHELL, fixed, H.E., M42A1, NH, SQ & 0.15-sec. 12.87
w FUZE, P.D., M48A1, 76-mm i delay :8
guns, Ml, M1A1. and M1A2 2
SHELL, fixed, H.E., M42A1, NH, SQ & 0.05-sec. [ 12.87
w FUZE, P.D., M48A2, SQ & 0.05- delay:'
sec. delay, 76-mm guns, M1, MlAl,
and M1A2
_ IELL, fixed, H.E., M42A1, w `FUZE, SQ & 0.05-sec. 12.87
P.D., M48, 76-mm guns, M1, M 1A1, delay:'
and M1A2"
SHELL, fixed, H.E., M42A1, NH, SQ & 0.05-sec. 12.87
w FUZE, P.D., M48, 76-mm guns, delay::
M1, MlAl, and M1A2'
SHELL, fixed, H.E., M42, w FUZE, SQ & 0.15-sec. 12.81
P.D., M48A1, 76-mm guns, M1, delay : ,
M1Al, and M1A2'
SHELL, fixed, H.E., M42A1, reduced SQ & 0.15-sec. 12.87
charge, w FUZE, P.D., M48A2, SQ delay:'
& 0.15-sec. delay, 76-mm guns, M1,
M1A1, and M1A2'
SHELL, fixed, smoke, HC, B.I., M88, 7.60
76-mm guns, Ml, MlAl, and M1A2
SHOT, fixed, A.P., M79, w TRACER, i 15.00
76-mm guns, M1, MIA1, and M1A2
Drill (Dummy) Ammunition
CARTRIDGE, drill, M20, w'FUZE, I Inert

dummy, M59, 76-mm guns, M1 and
M1A 1
See footnotes at end of Table.)

427
TM 9.759
203-205
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
A.P.-armor-piercing B.I.-base-ignition
A.P.C.-armor-piercing-capped H.E.-high-explosive
B.D.-base-detonating P.D.-point-detonating
SQ-superquick
1-(a) Service rounds which do not have "NH" in the nomenclature contain
flashless (FNH) propellent powder.
(b) Service rounds for the 76-mm gun have been manufactured with both
brass and steel cases. Nomenclature of steel-case rounds includes the
words "steel case" immediately following the model designation. The
words are also stenciled on packing boxes and crates, when applicable.
Steel cartridge cases are signified in the stamping on the base of the
case by the addition of the suffix "B" and arabic numeral to the model
designation of the case. The ammunition lot number has an "X" suffix
when the round is steel cased.
2-In future manufacture, 76-mm rounds requiring the M48 series fuze, other
than reduced charge rounds, will be fuzed with the M48, or the M48A2 with
0.05-second delay. Reduced-charge rounds will be fuzed with the M48AI or
M48A2 fuzes with 0.15-second delay.
3-The delay of FUZE, P.D., M48 is 0.05 second; of FUZE, P.D., M48A1, 0.15
depending on the lot. Provision is made for identification by stamping the
length of delay in seconds on the fuze, immediately following the model num-
ber. Thus, M48A2 fuzes with the 0.05 second delay element will have stamped
on the body, "FUZE, P.D., M48A2 (.05 SEC.)"
a. The 76-mm rounds are ready for firing as removed from pack-
ing, except for setting the M48 point-detonating fuzes of the high-
explosive rounds for the required action. As shipped, FUZE, P1i
M48, FUZE, P.D., M48A1, and FUZE, P.D., M48A2, are set
superquick action (SQ), that is, the slot in the setting screw is paraWl
to the axis of the fuze and in line with "SQ." To adjust for delay
action, the setting screw should be turned by means of the screw-
driver end of WRENCH, fuze, M7A1, or similar instrument, so that
the slot is alined with "DELAY," that is, at right angles to the axis
of the fuze. (Delay action is provided for in the fuze by a delay
pellet.) The setting may be made or changed at will, and can be done
in the dark by noting the position of the slot in the setting sleeve.
PART FOUR-AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT-(Contd.)

D-ARMAMENT
105-MM HOWITZER M4 IN THE COMBINATION
GUN MOUNT M52
Section XXXIX
INTRODUCTION
205. SCOPE.
a. Part Four-D contains instructions for the operation of
105-mm Howitzer M4 in the Combination Gun Mount M52. It
428
TM 9.759
205
INTRODUCTION
is
0o llb~~ a
~~o. N~~~~~~~~
o U
0-' 'I35 4293

0-82Se
U i
-. '41:.5510 4)--48--'_S 429

TM 9.759
205-206
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
GUN TRAVELING LOCK MECHANISM RA PO 197
Figure 227-Cal..30 M1919A4 Machine Gun Installed in

Mount
the authorized ammunition for the howitzer and contains information

on the sighting equipment. Refer to section IX for lubrication instruc-
tions on the armament.
h. The other armament in the vehicle (fig. 226) is as follows:
Cal. .30, M1919A4 Machine Gun mounted in the Combination Gun
Mount M52; Cal. .30, M1919A4 Machine Gun mounted in a bow
mount in the right front side of the vehicle (fig. 227); Cal. .50 HB,
M2 Machine Gun mounted in a bracket-type mount on a revolving
turret hatch (fig. 228); and a 2-inch Mortar M3 located in a fixed
mount in the turret to the left of the combination gun mount (fig. 229).
manually. The 105-mm howitzer can be elevated 35 degrees and de-
pressed 10 degrees. The cal. .30 machine gun in the combination gun
mount is elevated and traversed with the howitzer.
io. The cal. .30 machine gun in the bow mount is elevated and
traversed manually and fired by the conventional trigger. Re o
430
TM 9-759
206
INTRODUCTION
s. 7
a! 4 1.
' ''
431
TM 9-759
206-207
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
PERISCOPE M6
2-INCH MORTAR M3 RA PD
Figure 229-2-inch Mortar M3 Installed W

c. The cal. .50 machine gun is employed chiefly against enemy
aircraft, and is elevated and traversed manually and fired by the con-
ventional trigger. The machine gun can be traversed independently
of the turret. Refer to FM 23-65 for complete information on its
operation.
tank is advancing. It is mounted in a fixed mount, has no elevation
or depression, and traverses with the turret. Refer to TM 9-293 for
complete information on its operation.
Section XL
207. PLACING TIlE 105.-MM5 HOWITZER IN FIRING
POSITION.
a. Remove the muzzle cover.
h. Pull out the traveling lock pin from the cradle lock, an_
the traveling lock bar in position under turret roof (fig. 230).
432
TM 9-759
207-208
spring release, and elevate the howitzer until it clears the lock. Swing
the traveling lock down to its latched position and it will be locked
in place by the traveling lock latch (fig. 231).
d. Disengage the turret lock by turning the handle, pulling it out,
and rotating one-quarter turn clockwise (fig. 233).

a. Check Oil Level in Recoil Cylinder. To check oil level, de-
press howitzer 5 degrees and remove the filling plugs (figs. 232 and
234) at the rear of each recoil cylinder. The oil level in the cylinder
should reach the bottom of the hole. If oil level does not reach this
level, fill until level is reached. Replace plugs. The recoil mechanism
uses special recoil oil for all temperatures.
h. Check path of recoil to make sure that it is free from all ob-
structions.
1. Bore Sighting. Refer to paragraph 219.
433
TM 9.759
208
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
0.
0
I-a
-~i~~ ~, .,> An. go~~~~-
434~ ~~i
434
TM 9.759
208
~~~~~~~~~~~to~
mitt
Z' ,ur J
<0vu >0
uaQ v I
I EI
A''-a t4 r
3 *
c
2
cr~~~~~~_ 0,
(3~~~~~~~~~~~ c
Z I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~V
I
j ~~~~~~~_
.N 0
4-C
00
VI
C~ ~~ ~ ~~~~~ E~~~~~~~
z 'I ·~~~'' A
O~~~-L
lu
3~~ar <<0
435-
TM 9.759
208
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
' '~S
."NS.,'L,
?~~m .- =~
.,. '. :;
~'.~ ~.~~ ,., : ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ r
ii i L~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
~~436~~E
>a
U.
TM 9.759
209-210
RECOIL CYLINDER BREECHBLOCK

FILLING PLUG OPERATING HANDLE
BREECHBLOCK RA PD 19714
_igure 234-Breechblock in Closed Position
209. TR.\VER;SIN(; TI RRE'I!.

a. To traverse turret the shift lever (fig. 233) must be pulled
down as far as it will go. Disengage turret lock. Before traversing
turret make sure hatches for driver and assistant driver are closed, and
personnel are clear of rotating parts. Grip manual traverse control
handle and its associate lever on top of gear mechanism to release
brake in gear box. Turn handle clockwise to rotate turret clockwise,
and to left or counterclockwise to rotate turret counterclockwise.
1). An azimuth indicator (fig. 233) is mounted to the right of the

traverse handle and gives position of the howitzer in traverse.
210. ELEVATIN( ! )EPRESSiNG;

(OR !OWITZER.
a. Elevating handwheel (fig. 233) is located left of traversing
mechanism. A clockwise rotation of handwheel will elevate howitzer.
The handwheel is notched in 25 equal divisions. Each notch on hand-
wheel represents one mil elevation or depression of howitzer. Maxi-
mum elevation is 35 degrees and maximum depression is 10 degrees.
in.. An elevation quadrant is located on the top of the cradle

232) and gives position of the gun in elevation or depression.
437
TM 9.759
211-213
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
FIRING
SWITCH
FIRING SWITCH BOX

RA PD 19710
Figure 235-Firing Switch Box Installed

211. OPERATING BREECH MECHANISM.
a. Grasp the breechblock operating handle and squeeze the handle
latch until the latch is disengaged from the operating latch catch.
Pull the breechblock operating handle (fig. 234) to the real and right
as far as it will go. NOTE: This breechblock is manually operated,
and has no semiautomatic feature.
h. To close the breech, move the breechblock operating handle
forward until the operating handle latch locks in its closed position
in the catch on the top of the breech ring.
212. LOADING THE HOWITZER.
a. To load the howitzer, push the round into the breech recess
(fig. 234). As the lip on the cartridge case contacts the extractor, it
imparts a slight motion to the breechblock operating handle. When
this motion is felt, close the breech. CAUTION: Make sure that the
operating handle latch locks in its closed positi6n on the catch on the
top of the breech ring.
213. FIRING THE HOWITZER.
a. The 105-mm howitzer can be fired electrically, or manually
in case of failure of electrical system. A firing switch bo-- (fi
438 W
TM 9-759
213
105-MM HOWITZER MANUAL FIRING PEDAL
CAL. .30 MACHINE GUN 105-MM HOWITZER

FIRING SWITCH FIRING SWITCH RA POD19711
. re 236-Turret Guns, Firing Switches, and Manual Firing

Pedal
~.3.
i
t)O ~' ,..JJis; _'SAFETY
LEVER
SOLENOID
~
.. ~-z l J ~ J'.t,.,l, e ~ TIMING
· ' RA PD 19712
Figure 237-105-mm Howitzer Firing Mechanism

439
TM 9.759
213
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
_;i.
RA PO 85143
Figure 238-Cradle Lock in Traveling Position
is installed to the right of the turret lock which controls the cir-
cuit to the two foot-operated switches convenient to the gunner's
foot (fig. 236) located on the turret floor. One switch is for the
howitzer and the other for the machine gun in the combination gun
mount. The foot-operated switches energize the solenoids which fire
the howitzer and cal. .30 machine gun. A fi:mng pedal is used to fire
the 105-mm howitzer manually.
b. To fire the howitzer electrically, throw the firing switch to
the "ON" position. This will cause the indicating light to glow. Pull
the safety lever (fig. 237) all the way out. This disengages it from
the firing mechanism plunger. Depress the 105-mm howitzer firing
switch (fig. 236) located on the turret floor to fire the gun. The
cal. .30 machine gun firing switch fires the machine gun when de-
pressed. To fire the howitzer manually, depress the manual firing
pedal located in the turret floor.
c. If the howitzer fails to fire using either the electrical or manual
means, the position of the safety lever should be checked. Failure to
fire may be due to the howitzer staying out of battery, failure of the
firing mechanism, failure of the breech to close, or defective ammai-
tion. If the howitzer is in battery, recock by means of the cockin
located on the top of the breech ring and attempt to fire. CAU
440
TM 9.759
213.216
ase of a misfire open the firing switch immediately before recock-

If the howitzer still fails to fire after three attempts, wait 30
seconds before opening the breech; then remove round, reload, and
attempt to fire again. After need for firing is completed, throw the
firing switch to the "OFF" position.
214. PLACIN(; HIOWITZER IN' TRAVELING POSITION.

a. Push the safety lever (fig. 237) all the way in to its "safe"
position. This prevents the howitzer from being fired accidentally.
hi. Open breech and check that a round of ammunition has not
been left in the howitzer.
c. Clean and lubricate howitzer and install muzzle cover.
d. Place the howitzer in traveling position by taking the traveling
lock out of the traveling lock latch and placing the traveling lock
in a vertical position (fig. 231). Depress the howitzer until it bottoms
firmly in the traveling lock.
. e.
f.
Install pin in cradle traveling lock (fig. 238).
Lock the turret in traveling position by pulling and rotating
turret lock handle one-quarter turn counterclockwise (fig. 233).
Section XLI

a. The sighting equipment for the 105-mm Howitzer used in the
Medium Tank M4 series includes Telescope Mount M56 with Tele-
scope M72D illuminated by Instrument Light M33, Periscope M4A1
with Telescope M77C or the Periscope M1OD, Elevation Quadrant
M9 illuminated by Instrument Light M30, and Fuze Setter M23.
216. TELESCOPE MOUNT 1M56 WITH TELESCOPE M17_D.

a. The Telescope Mount M56 (fig. 240) which supports the Tele-
scope M72D is mounted on the right side of the 105-mm Howitzer.
The mount and telescope are similar to and are operated in the same
manner as the Telescope Mount M57 with its telescope described
Paragraph 197.
441
TM 9-759
216-218
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
105MM HOW HE.MI , \

CHARGE 7
I, - -: - 8 '-
16 - - I - - 16
K 220- i- - 20
24 36 - | - 624
RA PD 84779
Figure 239-Reficle Pattern for Telescope M72D
l. The reticle pattern (fig. 239) is graduated for High Explosive

Shell Ml. fired with a muzzle velocity of 1550 feet per second; charge
7: plus 0.2 mil jump. The graduations are based on data contained
in firing table 105-H-3, part 2G. The cross represents zero range and
zero deflection for use in bore sighting the telescope.
217. PERISCOPE 4AI\ WITH TELESCOPE M77C AND

PERISCOPE M10D.
a. These periscopes which are used on the 105-mm howitzer, are
identical to, and are operated in the same manner as the periscopes
described in paragraphs 198 and 199.
218. FIVZE SETTER M123.

a. The Fuze Setter M23 which is a hand-operated dialed instru-
ment is used for setting the mechanical time fuzes. The Fuze Setter
M14 is also furnished for this purpose.
h. To cut a fuze, rotate the corrector knob on the fuze setter
until the announced corrector valve is registered. Rotate the time
setting knob until the announced time valve is registered. R /
442
TM 9.759
218-220
AMMUNITION
WING NUT
ROUND NUT /
TELESCOPE CLAMP
VERTICAL
ADJUSTMENT
LTSCEALE| \' .ULATERAL ADJUSTMENT SCALE
LATERAL; .,:_
ADJUSTMENT
MICROMETER. .'HOLDER CLAMPING BOLT
GIB ADJUSTINGS
BOLTS,
VERTICAL ADJUSTMENT MICROMETER
RA PD 29173
Figure 240-Telescope Mount M56-Right Side
the safety wire from the fuze, and place the fuze setter carefully over
the fuze. Turn the fuze setter clockwise with the hand until the notch
in the fuze engages the stop in the fuze setter. Push the instrument
down to fully engage the stop and continue to turn the fuze setter
in the same direction until the pawl in the adjusting ring drops into
the notch in the fixed fuze ring, indicating that the setting operation
is completed. Without rotating the fuze setter, lift it off the fuze.
c. A fuze which has been set can be reset to the SAFE position
by setting the fuze setter time scale to "S", the corrector scale to
normal (30), and resetting the fuze as described above.
219. ELEVATION QUADRANT M9 AND BORE SIGHTING.

a. The Elevation Quadrant M9 is described in paragraph 200
and the Bore Sighting is described in paragraph 202.
Section XLII
AMMUNITION
220. AUTHORIZED AMMUNITION.
Ammunition authorized for the 105-mm howitzer, M4, is
in Table I. Standard nomenclature which completely identifies
443
TM 9-759
220
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
the ammunition is used in the listing. Identification is provid

on the round itself by painting and marking in accordance wit
basic scheme prescribed in TM 9-1900, and on all packing.
TABLE I. AUTHORIZED AMMUNITION'
Action Approx. Weigh
Nomenclature of of Projectile.
Fuxe as Fired lib)
Service Anllniliition
SHELL, semifixed, H.E., A.T.. M67, Nondelay 28.79

w'FUZE, B.D., M62 or M62A1,
105-mm how., M2, M2A1, and M42
SHELL, semifixed, H.E., M1, w FUZE, SQ & 0.05-sec. 33.00
P.D., M48, 105-mm how., M2, M2A1, delay-'
and M4:3 4
P.D., M48A1, 105-mm how., M2. delay:
M2Al,, and M4:: 4
P.D., M48A2, SQ & 0.15-sec. delay, delay:'
105-amm how., M2, M2A1, and M4: 4|
SHELL, semifixed. H.E., Ml, w FUZE, Time to 25 sec., 3
TSQ, M54, 105-mm how., M2. M2A1, & SQ
and M4:'
SHELL, semifixed, smoke, HC, B.E., Time to 25 sec., 32.87
M84, w. FUZE, P.D., M54, 105-mm & SQ
how., M2 M2A1, and M4::
SHELL, semifixed, smoke, FS, M60, SQ 35.21
w/FUZE, P.D., M57, 105-mm how.,
M2, M2A1, and M4::
SHELL, semifixed, smoke, phosphorus, SQ 34.70
WP, M60, w FUZE, P.D., M57,
105-mm how., M2, M2A1, and M4::
SHELL, semifixed, gas, persistent, H, SQ 33.77
M60, w FUZE, P.D., M57, 105-mm
how., M2, M2A1, and M4::
SHELL, semifixed, gas, persistent, CNS, SQ
M60, w/FUZE, P.D., M57, 105-mm
how., M2, M2A1, and M4::
(See footnotes at end of Table.)
444
TM 9.759
220
AMMUNITION
TABLE I.AUTHORIZED AMMIINITIONI --(Contd.)

Nomenclature of of Projectile.,
Fu.e as Fired (lb.)
Practice Ammunition
SHELL, semifixed, empty; for sand Inert 33.00
loading, M1, w FUZE, inert, P.D.,
M48, 105-mm how., M2, M2A1, and
M4::
Blank Ammunition
AMMUNITION, blank (1.5-lb or 2-lb -
charge), 105-mm how., M2, M2A1,

M3 and M4
Drill (Dummyv) Ammunition

CARTRIDGE, drill, semifixed. M14, Inert
w/FUZE, dummy, M59, 105-mm
how., M2, M2A1, M3, and M4';
B.D.-base-detonating H.E., A.T.-high-explosive antitank

B.E.-base-ejection P.D.-point-detonating
H.E.-high-explosive SQ-superquick
1-(a) Service and practice rounds have been manufactured with both brass and
steel cases. Nomenclature of steel case rounds includes the words "steel
case" immediately following the model designation. The words are also
stenciled on packing boxes and crates, when applicable. Steel cartridge
cases are signified in the stamping on the base of the case by the addition
of "Bl" to the model designation of the case. The ammunition lot number
has an "X" suffix when the round is steel cased.
(b) With the exception of the canister round, which is the same for all
105-mm howitzers, rounds for the M2, M2A1, and M4 howitzers differ
from those for the M3 (airborne) howitzer only with respect to propelling
charges. The adjustable charges of rounds for the M2, M2A1, and M4
howitzers are made up of seven sections, whereas the M3 howitzer rounds
have a five-section charge of quick-burning powder. These charges, or
sections thereof, are not interchangeable. However, the Ml high-explosive
rounds for the M3 howitzer may be fired in the M2, M2A1, and M4
howitzers by applying suitable corrections as given in FT 105-H-3 and
changes.
2-The propelling charges of these rounds are nonadjustable, and are retained in
a single cloth bag fastened in the bottom end of the cartridge case.
3-The propelling charges of these rounds are adjustable, and are in seven parts.
Each part is held in a separate cloth bag. All sections are loosely linked to-
gether to permit withdrawal of unnecessary increments in the field.
4-In future manufacture of 105-mm howitzer rounds, high-explosive rounds re-
quiring the M48-type fuze will be fuzed with the M48AI, or M48A2 with 0.15-
second delay.
5--The delay of FUZE, P.D., M48 is 0.05 second; of FUZE, P. D., M48A1, 0.15
epending on the lot. Provision is made for identification by stamping the
_ .::5, (),--4--- ......) 44
TM 9.759
220-221
TANK, MEDIUM. M4A3
length of delay in seconds on the fuze, immediately following the model n

Thus, M48A2 fuzes with the 0.15 second delay element will have stamp
the body, "FUZE, P.D., M48A2 (.15 SEC.)".
6-This cartridge has an inert sectioned charge simulating the adjustable sectioned
service propelling charge.

a. H.E.A.T. rounds, which have fixed (nonadjustable) propelling
charges, are ready for firing once the packing is removed and the
projectile is seated properly in the cartridge case.
1b. Rounds with semifixed (adjustable) propelling charges require

the following preparation before firing:
(1) After removing the round from its packing, withdraw the
U-shaped packing stop from the fuze wrench slots in the fuze. This
stop is used to prevent the fuze from touching the separator or end of
the fiber container. Serious damage may result if this stop is not
removed before firing.
(2) Adjust the propelling charge for the zone to be fired. When
the full (outer zone) charge is to be fired, no adjustment is neces-
sary, but the charge should be inspected to make certain that all
proper sections are present. For inner zones, withdraw the increm6
from the cartridge case, and remove and discard those incre
numbered higher than the charge to be fired, by cutting or breW
the twine between the designated charge and the higher numbered
increments. Reassemble the remaining increments in the cartridge
case in their proper numerical order with the number of each incre-
ment uppermost. Thus, when adjusting the propelling charge to fire
charge 4, increments 5, 6 and 7 will be removed and the remaining
parts to and including 4 will be reassembled in the cartridge case.
(3) Upon completion of the above preparation, rounds fuzed with
the M57 fuze are ready for firing, since this is a single action fuze
requiring no special preparation. In the case of rounds with the M48-
series or M54 fuzes, the fuze must be set for the required action, as
described in the following paragraphs.
(4) FUZE, P.D., M48, M48A1, and M48A2.-As shipped, these
fuzes are set for superquick action (SQ), that is, the slot in the setting
screw is parallel to the axis of the fuze and in line with "SQ." To
adjust for delay action, the setting screw should be turned by means of
the screwdriver end of WRENCH, fuze, M7A1, or similar instrument,
so that the slot is alined with "DELAY," that is, at right angles to
the axis of the fuze. (Delay action is provided for in the fuze by a
delay pellet.) The setting may be made or changed at will, and can
be done in the dark by noting the oosition of the slot in the s
sleeve.
446
TM 9-759
221
. (5)
AMMUNITION
FUZE, P.D., M54.-Prior to firing, with either superquick

or time setting, the safety pull wire securing the time plunger during
shipment must be withdrawn from the fuze (pull lower end of wire
from the hole and slide wire off end of fuze). To obtain superquick
action, the fuze may be left at the safe (S) setting, as shipped, or may
be set for a time longer than the expected time of flight. Since the
superquick action is always operative; it will function on impact un-
less prior functioning has been caused by time action. If time action
is required, the graduated time-ring (graduated to 25 seconds) is set
for the required time of burning by means of a fuze setter. NOTE:
If, after setting the fuze preparatory to firing, the round is not fired,
the fuze should be reset "safe" and the safety pull wire replaced in
its proper position before returning the round to its packing.
447
TM 9-759
222-223
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
APPENDIX
Section XLIII
SHIPMENT AND LIMITED STORAGE
222. GENERAL INSTR[ICTIONS.

a. Preparation for domestic shipment of the vehicle is the same
as preparation for limited storage. Preparation for shipment by rail
includes instructions for loading the vehicles, blocking necessary to
secure the vehicles on freight cars, clearance, weight, and other in-
formation necessary properly to prepare the vehicle for domestic
rail shipment. For more definite information and for preparation of
the vehicles for indefinite storage refer to AR 850-18.
223. PREPARATION FOR LIMITED STORAGE.

a. Vehicles to be prepared for limited storage are those ready
for immediate service, but not used for less than 30 days. If vehj
are to be indefinitely stored after shipment by rail, they shoulW
prepared for such storage at their destination.
b. If the vehicles are to be placed in limited storage, take the

following precautions.
(1) LUBRICATION. Lubricate the vehicle completely (par 29).
(2) COOLING SYSTEM. If freezing temperature may normally
be expected during the limited storage or shipment period, test the
coolant with a hydrometer and add the proper quantity of antifreeze
to afford protection from freezing at the lowest temperature antici-
pated during the storage or shipping period. Completely inspect the
cooling system for leaks.
(3) BATTERY. Check battery and terminals for corrosion, and
if necessary, clean and thoroughly service battery (par. 95).
(4) ROAD TEST. The preparation for limited storage includes
a road test after the battery cooling system and lubrication service,
to check the general condition of the vehicle. Correct any defects
noted in the vehicle operation before the vehicle is stored, or note
on a tag attached to the steering levers, stating the repairs needed
or describing the condition present. Make a written report of these
items to the officer in charge.
448
TM 9-759
223-224
SHIPMENT AND LiMITED STORAGE
W(5) FUEL IN TANKS. It is not necessary to remove fuel from

the vehicle tanks for shipment within the United States, nor to label
the tanks under Interstate Commerce Commission Regulations. Leave
fuel in the tanks except when storing in locations where fire, ordnance,
or other local regulations, require removal of all gasol;-i before
storage.
(6) EXTERIOR OF VEHICLE. If time permits remove rust appear-
ing on any part of the vehicle exterior with flint paper. Repaint
painted surfaces whenever necessary to protect metal. Coat exposed
polished metal surfaces susceptible to rust with medium grade pre-
servative lubricating oil. Close firmly all hatches and other open-
ings. Make sure paulins are in place, and firmly secured. Leave
rubber floor mats, when provided, in an unrolled position on the floor,
not rolled or curled up. Equipment such as pioneer tools, track tools,
and fire extinguishers can remain in place on the vehicle.
(7) INSPECTION. Make a systematic inspection just before ship-
ment or ttnporary storage to ensure all above steps have been covered
and that the vehicle is ready for operation on call. Make a list
.
of all missing or damaged items and attach it to the steering levers.
Refer to Before-operation Service (par. 35).
8) BRAKES. Release brakes and chock tracks.
c. Inspections in Limited Storage. Inspect vehicles in limited

storage for condition of the battery. If water is added to the battery
when freezing weather is anticipated, recharge the battery with a
portable charger or remove and charge the battery. Do not attempt
to charge the battery by running the engine.
224. LOADING AND BLOCKING FOR RAIL SHIPMENT.

at Preparation. In addition to the preparation described in
paragraph 223, when ordnance vehicles are prepared for domestic
shipment take the following steps:
(1) EXTERIOR. Cover the vehicle with the canvas cover supplied
as an accessory, or which is available for use during rail shipment.
(2) BATTERY. Disconnect the battery to prevent its discharge by
vandalism or accident. This may be accomplished by disconnecting
the positive lead, taping the end of the lead, and tying it back away
from the battery.
(3) BRAKES. The brakes must be applied, and the transmission
ced in low gear, after the vehicle has been placed in position. with
learance between car brake wheel of, at least, 6 inches (A, fig. 241).
449
TM 9.759
224
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
LCONTACT POINT
a~BLOCK-~F ~BLOCK-B
BIOCK-C~~~~ BOCK -8
4: BLOCK-C \4 BLOCK-G
RA PD 318268
Figure 241-Blocking Requirements for Rail Shipment
Locate the vehicles on the car in such a manner as to prevent the

car from carrying an unbalanced load.
(4) MARKING CARS. All cars containing ordnance vehicles must
be placarded "DO NOT HUMP."
(5) TYPES OF CARS. Ordnance vehicles may be shipped on flat
cars, end door box cars, side door box cars, or drop end gondola cars,
whichever type is most convenient.
h. Facilities for Loading. Whenever possible, load and unload
vehicles from open cars under their own power, using permanent end
ramps and spanning platforms. Movement from one flat car to an-
other along the length of the train is made possible by cross-over
plates or spanning platforms. If no permanent end ramp is available,
an improvised ramp can be made from railroad ties. Vehicles
be loaded in gondola cars without drop ends by using a crani
450
TM 9-759
224
SHIPMENT AND LIMITED STORAGE
e of shipment in side door box cars, use a dolly-type jack to warp

the vehicles into position within the car.
c. Securing Vehicles. In securing or blocking a vehicle, three

motions; lengthwise, sidewise, and bouncing must be prevented. The
following are approved methods of blocking and securing these
vehicles on freight cars.
(1) METHOD ONE. Place four blocks (B, fig. 241), one to the
front and one to the rear of each track. Nail the heel of each block
to the car floor with five 40-penny nails. Toenail to the car floor with
two 40-penny nails that portion of each block which is under the
track. Locate two blocks (C, fig. 241) on each side of the vehicle on
the outside of each track. Nail each block to the car floor with three
40-penny nails. These blocks may be located on the inside of the
tracks, if conditions warrant.
(2) METHOD TWO. Place two blocks (F, fig. 241), one to the
front and one to the rear of the tracks. These blocks are to be at
least as long as the over-all width of the vehicle at the car floor.
Locate eight blocks (G, fig. 241) against the blocks (F, fig. 241) to
the front and to the rear of each track. Nail the lower block to the
r with three 40-penny nails, and the top block to the lower block
three 40-penny nails. Locate and secure blocks (C, fig. 241) as
lained in Method One.
dl. Shipping Data.

Length (76-mm, less gun) .2..2 0 ft 7 in.
Width ... 8 ft 9 in.
Height over top of A.A. gun pintle stand:
76-mm .... 1347/ in.
75-mm ...... 132 7/8 in.
105-mm 132 7/8 in.
Area of floor occupied per vehicle ................. 180 sq ft
Volume occupied per vehicle .... .................... 1,980 cuft
Shipping weight per vehicle (approximate) ............. 69,000 lb
Bearing pressure (approximate lb per sq ft of floor space
occupied by vehicle) ................. 383
451
TM 9.759
225-226
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
Section XLIV
REFERENCES
225. PUBLICATIONS INDEXES
The following publications indexes should be consulted frequently
for latest changes to or revisions of the publications given in this list
of references and for new publications relating to materiel covered in
this manual:
Introduction to Ordnance Catalog (explains ASF Cat.
SNL system ) ................................................ ORD-1 IOC
Ordnance publications for supply index (index

to SNL's) ........ ... ................. ASF Cat.
ORD-2 OPSI
Index to Ordnance publications (lists FM's,
TM's, TC's of interest to Ordnance person-
nel, FSMWO's, OPSR's, BSD, S of SR's,
OSSC's and OFSB's. Includes alphabetical
listing of Ordnance major items with publi-
cations pertaining thereto) ...................... OFSB 1-1
List of publications for training (lists MR's,
MTP's, T,'BA's, T/A's, and FM's, TM's,
TR's, SB's, WDTB's, MWO's WDLO's,
numbered pamphlets, and firing tables con-
cerning training) ...... ................. ......... FM 21-6
List of training films, film strips and film bul-'
letins (lists TF's, FS's, and FB's by serial
number and subject) ................................ FM 21-7
Military training aids (lists graphic training
aids, models, devices, and displays) ........... FM 21-8
226. STANDARD NOMENCLATURE LISTS.

a. Vehicular.
Tank, medium, M4A3 (75-mm gun, dry) ........ SNL G-104
Vol. 8
Tank, medium, M4A3 (75-mm gun, wet) ........ SNL G-204
Tank, medium, M4A3 (76-mm gun, wet) ........ SNL G-205
Tank, medium, M4A3 (105-mm howitzer) ..... SNL G-104
Vol. 15
452
TM 9.759
226
REFERENCES
Ammunition.
Ammunition, blank, for pack, light, and me-
dium field artillery ............ ORD 11
SNL R-5
Ammunition, fixed and semifixed, including
sub-caliber, for pack, light and medium field
aircraft, tank, and antitank artillery, includ-
ing complete round data ... ORD 11
SNL R-1
Ammunition instruction material for pack,
light and medium field, aircraft, tank, and
antitank artillery.. . ...... ORD 11
SNL R-6
c. Armament.
Gun, 75-mm, M3 (Tank), mount, combination
gun, M34 and M34A1 ........ SNL C-44
Gun, 76-mm MlAl and M1A2 and mount,
combination gun, M62 (T80) . . SNL C-64
Gun, machine, cal..30, Browning M1919A4,
fixed and flexible, M1919A5 fixed and
M1919A6 flexible ....... SNL A-6
Gun, machine, cal..50, Browning M2, heavy
barrel, flexible .... ... ........ SNL A-39
Howitzer, 105-mm, M4; and mount, combina-
tion gun, M52... . SNL C-63
:d. Maintenance.
Cleaning, preserving and lubricating materials:
recoil fluids, special oils, and miscellaneous
related items.... . . . SNL K-1
Kit, repair, instrument, M4 (for field artillery
and coast artillery) ....... SNL F-206
Ordnance maintenance sets ORD 6
SNL N-21
Tools, maintenance, for repair of automatic
guns, automatic gun aircraft materiel, auto-
matic and semiautomatic cannon and mor-
tars-Individual items and parts SNL A-35
Tool-sets for Ordnance Service Command,
automotive shops ..... SNL N-30
Ow~~~ ~ ~453
TM 9-759
226-227
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
Tool-sets (common), specialists and organiza-

tional ................................ SNL G-2
(Section 2
Tool-sets (special), automotive and semi-auto-
motive ..................................... SNL G-27
(Section 1)
Soldering, brazing and welding material, gases
and related items .. ................ SNL K-2
e. Sighting Equipment.
Mount, telescope, M21 ..... .. SNL F-197
Periscopes, telescopes for periscopes, and direct
sighting telescopes for use in tanks ....... SNL F-235
Quadrant, gunner's, M1 (mils) (previously
M1919) . ..... ...................... SNL F-140
Stabilizers (all types) ... ................... SNL C-56
227. EXPLANATORY PUBLICATIONS.

a. Firing Tables.
An up-to-date index of firing tables is main-
tained in ............ ............... FM 21-6 0
Gun, 75-mm, M2 and M3 (Tank), firing:
Shell, H. E., M48;
Shell, H. E., Mk. I;
Shell, smoke (WP) Mk. II; i'T 75-AD-5,
Projectile, A.P.C., M61; (and changes
Shot, A.P., M72;
Shell, fixed (smoke), B.E., M89
Gun, 76-mm, MlA1 and M1A2, firing:
Shell, H. E., M42A1
Projectile, A.P.C., M62
Shot, A.P., M72
Howitzer, 105-mm, M2, M2A1 and M4, firing: FT 105
Shell, smoke, B. E., M84; -H-3,
Shell, H. E., M1; and changes*
h. Fundamental Principles.
Automotive electricity .... . TM 10-580
Ammunition, general.. ........ TM 9-1900
*Change 5 provides corrections required when firing the MI high-explosive rounds for the
0
105-mm Howitzer, M3, in the M2, M2AI or M4 howitzers.
454
TM 9-759
227
REFERENCES
Auxiliary fire-control instruments (field glasses,

eyeglasses, telescopes and glasses) .............. TM 9-575
Basic maintenance manual ................................ TM 38-250
Driver's manual ......................... TM 10-460
Driver selection and training ................ TM 21-300
Electrical fundamentals ............. ... TM 1-455
Field artillery and field motor ammunition OFSB 3-3
Fuels and carburetion ..... . TM 10-550
General instructions for recoil fluid, light and
medium field artillery ..................... OFSB 6-6
Instruction guide, small arms data ........... TM 9-2200
Military motor vehicles .................... AR 850-15
Motor vehicle inspections and preventive main-
tenance service.... TM 9-2810
Precautions in handling gasoline ............... AR 850-20
Qualifications in arms and ammunition train-
ing allowances .. . ............. ......... AR 775-10
Radio fundamentals. . ......................... TM 11-455
Range regulations for firing ammunition for
training and target practice.... ..... AR 750-10
Small arms ammunition .............. OFSB 3-5
Small arms ammunition. .... .. ..... TM 9-1990
Targets, target materials, and rifle range con-
struction ..... ...... .. . TM 9-855
Maintenance and Repair.

Cleaning, preserving, lubricating and welding
materials and similar items issued by the
Ordnance department....... .......... TM 9-850
Maintenance and care of pneumatic tires and
rubber treads ... ...................... ..... TM 31-200
Ordnance maintenance: Accessories for Ford
tank engine, model GAA V-8 . TM 9-1731C
Ordnance maintenance: Auxiliary generator
(Homelite HRUH-28) for medium tank M4
and modifications ............. ....... TM 9-1731K
Ordnance maintenance: Browning machine
gun, cal..50-all types TM 9-1225
455
TM 9-759
227
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
Ordnance maintenance: Carburetors (Strom-

berg) ............................... ..................... T M 9-1826B
Ordnance maintenance: Electric traversing
mechanism for medium tank M4 and modi-
fications . ................................... TM 9-1731E
Ordnance maintenance: Ford tank engine,
Model GAA V-8 ... . ..... ................. TM 9-1731B
Ordnance maintenance: Hydraulic traversing
mechanism (Logansport) for medium tank
M4 and modifications ................................ TM 9-1731E
Ordnance maintenance: Hydraulic traversing
mechanism (Oilgear) for medium tank M4
and modifications . .......... ............ TM 9-1731G
Ordnance maintenance: Power train, one-piece
differential case, for medium tanks M3 and
M4 and related gun motor carriages ...... TM 9-1750B
Ordnance maintenance: Power-train unit,three-
piece differential case, for medium tanks
M3, M4, and modifications .................. TM 9-175~ k
Ordnance maintenance: Thompson subma-

.
-
TM 9-1215
chine gun, cal..45 M1928A1 ............
Ordnance maintenance: Tracks and suspen-
sion, turret and hull for medium tank M4.... TM 9-1750K
Ordnance maintenance: 75-mm tank gun ma-
teriel M2 and M3 ......... ....... ... TM 9-1307
Ordnance maintenance: 76-mm gun Ml1.... TM 9-1308
Ordnance service in the field ... .......... FM 9-5
d. Operation of Materiel.
2-inch mortar, M3 ....... ........................... TM 9-293
75-mm tank guns M2 and M3 and mounts
M1, M34 and M34A1 ................................. TM 9-307
76-mm gun materiel M1 (combat vehicles) ... TM 9-308
105-mm howitzer M4 (mounted in combat
vehicles) ... . TM 9-324
Browning machine gun, cal..30, HB, M1919A4
(mounted in combat vehicles) ........... .. FM 23-50
Browning machine gun, cal. .50, HB, M2
(mounted in combat vehicles) ........... FM 23-6
456
TM 9-759
227
REFERENCES
. Cold weather lubrication and service of artil-

lery materiel . ................... OFSB 6-5
Cold weather lubrication and service of com-
bat vehicles and automotive materiel ....... TB ORD 126
Radio sets SCR-508, SCR-528, SCR-538 .... TM 11-600
U. S. Rifle, cal.:30, M1903 ........... FM 23-10
e. Protection of Materiel.
Camouflage .. . . FM 5-20
Chemical decontamination, materials and
equipment. ...... ......... TM 3-220
Decontamination of armored force vehicle. FM 17-59
Defense against chemical attack .. ........ FM 21-40
Explosives and demolitions .......... FM 5-25
f. Storage and Shipment.

Ordnance storage and shipment chart, group
G-Major items .. OSSC-G
Registration of motor vehicles . AR 850-10
Rules governing the loading of mechanized and
motorized army equipment, also major cal-
iber guns, for the United States Army and
Navy, on open top equipment published by
Operations and Maintenance Department
of Association of American Railroads.
Storage of motor vehicle equipment . .. AR 850-18
457
TM 9.759
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
INDEX
A Page rage
Accelerator, road test . . . 110 Antifreeze compound ......... 61

Accessories Antifreeze record, road test .. . 109
after-operation and weekly Armor
services . ... 92 a ,,er-operation service ...... 94
at-halt service . . 90 road test .... ... 102, 105
before-operation service ... 85
cold-weather accessories 59
run-in test . 77 B
Accessory drives (See Drives, 119
Backfires, engine ........ 119
accessory) Batteries
Accidents, driver's report, motor
after-operation and weekly
transportation .. . ...2 ........... ... 92
service
Adapter housings, removal 173
description
Adapters, carburetor (See batteries....... 241
Carburetors) heater unit .............. 241

Air cleaners master switch ......... . 247
after-operation service .... 92 (master
service 92 instructions
operating
after-operation
service 90 switch) . . 40
at-halt
description .......... 213
descripntion ....... . . .. .213 precautions ... ........ 379
installation ..... 191 ..... ... 449
rail shipment
lubrication ...... 65
removal .............. 189 replacement
replacement . . .... 214
run-in test 77 road test ...... ... 110

Ammeterst .... .... 77
before-operation service 85 st
does not show charge . .124 storag e. 448
operating instructions 38 test of master sitch 141
trouble shooting ........... 122
road test . ... . ...... 98, 115
run-in test .. .79 .. Battery charging system, radio
test shunt for loose connections 146 interference suppression 362
Ammunition Bearing cone, installation
authorized rounds bearing cone ......... 315
gun MIAI . ...... .. 426 bearing cone suspensions . 327
gun M3 . . 395 Bearing cups, replacement ..... 315
howitzer M4 ... 443 Bearings
data . . . 19, 20, 21, 22 adjustment (idler wheel) .... 315
preparation for firing inspection (idler wheel) . .. 315
gun M1A1 .-. 428 installation
gun M3 . .. 397 bearings and studs ....... 175
howitzer M4 .. .446 idler wheels . . .. 335
Antenna suspension wheels .... 340
data . 13 lubrication ... . .70, 72
description .... 374 removal,
inspection ....... 377 idler wheel ...... . ... 335
precautions . .... 378 suspension wheels ......
458
TM 9-759
INDEX
B- Contd. Page rPag

Bearings--( Contd.) removal
replacement control levers ........... 300
clutch release bearing .. 272 cross shaft assembly ....... 304
propeller shaft and universal parking brake .......... 302
joint bearing . 276 steering brake shoes
Belts . double-anchor type .... 286
after-operation and weekly single-anchor type .... 281
services . 92 road test 99, 112
at-halt service 90 run-in test .......... 80
run-in test 77 storage . . .. 449
Binocular M13 ............... 14 (See also Steering brake
Bogie assembly
road test 103 .Breaker point .... 197, 198
run-in test 77 Breaker point gap ..... . 195
Bogie wheels Breather
road test . 101 description ....... 186
tire wear 159 lubrication ............ 70
Bomb thrower 116 road test ... 112
Bonding, radio intereference service filter element ... 186
suppression . .... 360 Breather cap
Bore, gun, lubrication . 71 after-operation ......... 92
. e sighting
un MlAl . 425
at-halt service
road test ......
........90
106
gun M3 395 run-in test ............ 77
howitzer M4 443
Breech mechanism
Brakes ...... lubrication .... 70,72
adjustment of steering brake
band support screw 299 gun MlA 414
gun M1A1 . .. 414
major adjustments gun M3 . 388
double-anchor brake 293
howitzer M4 . ..... 438
single-anchor brake . 298
minor adjustments - 290 Bulkhead, road test ...... 108
recentering brake band 299
description C
parking brake mechanism 302
steering brake shoes Camouflage net
double-anchor type 283 after-operation service .... 94
single-anchor type .. 281 at-halt service . ... 90
during-operation service 88 before-operation service . 87
installation run-in test .... . 78
control levers 300 Camshaft
cross shaft assembly . 306 installation
parking brake . . 302 bearings and studs . . . 175
steering brake shoes camshafts . . . 177
double-anchor type 287 gear assemblies ......... 177
single-anchor type . 283 housings ........... 179
l operating instructions . 28 removal ............. 171
ail shipment 449 time camshafts ........ 177
459
TM 9-759
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
C- Contd. rage
Carburetors description . ....... 13, 372
description and adjustment inspection . ..... 377
adapters ....... 212 Compass
carburetors 194, 208 description .. ...... 241
installation loca tion ........ 39
adapter .. ...... 212 road test ........ .... 113
adapter housings .. . I178 Condensers, radio interference
carburetors .. 180, 210 suppression .... . 360
heating pipes 178 Cooling system
removal capacity of .. ... 225
adapter 212 cleaning . ........ . 225
carburetor ... 171, 210 cold-weather operation . 61
heater pipes .. .. 173 coolant service . .. . 227
road test .. 106, 107 description and servicing .... 225
Circuit breaker draining ....... . 186
description . ... . . 259 filling . 193
operating instructions . 42 leaks .. ............... . 226
replacement . .. 260 neutralizing and flushing . 226
short circuits or grounded wires 151 storage ....... 448
test . ...... 141 trouble shooting ......... 137
Clock Cradle, lubrication of bearings .. 72
before-operation service . 86
Crankcase
road test 99
roadun test.. . . 99 description of breather
run-in test .... 79 brcation
lubrication .
Closing spring cylinder assembly, road test .101
breech, lubrication 72 service lter element . 186
service filter element ... 186
Clutch
Cranking motor
adjustments
clutch . 267 description and replacement
pedal
266,268 cranking motor . 262
pedal .. sil6, 268
connect throw-out clevis 190
description ..... .
266 ...road test 105, 110
testt .. ... 129
disconnect throw-out clevis 189
duringnectthro-operation service 88 Crankshaft, installation of oil seal 183
lubrication of bearing . . 70 Cupola vision blocks 349

operating instructions 32 Cylinder heads and gaskets
replacement installation 173
booster . 269 removal
clutch ........ 271 cylinder heads ... 173
release bearing or fork 272 gaskets .......... 170
road test road test ..... . .... 107
clutch . 99 Cylinders, compression test 105
clutch assembly 107
pedal . . 112 D
run-in test .. . . 80
trouble shooting 156 Decontaminator
Collector ring, road test 113 after-operation service 92
Communications equipment before-operation service
data ........ 10 road test
460
TM 9-759
INDEX
D- Contd. Poag Page

Defroster 265 Electrical connections, engine . 193
Degassers . 211 Electrical system
Differential cold-weather operation ... 62
road test 156 description 241 256
temperatures ' 101 replacement
conduits ....... 256
Door shutter controls, engine conduits 25
compartment 34 wires 257
Doors, engine compartment Elevating mechanism
description and installation 348 road test.115, 116
operation . 28 run-in test ... . 81
removal Elevation quadrant M9
doors ... . 348 gun MIA1 ...... ... 425
doors and floor plate . 186 gun M3 ........... 395
Drive cables, replacement 235 howitzer M4 ... . 443
Drive motor (turret traversing Engine
mechanism) . 359 abnormal noise . 122
Drive shafts (accessory) and after-operation service .... 91,92
check for water and oil leaks . 194
description and replacement 277 cleaning ..... .. .. 95
ubrication of housing ... 70 data 166
definition of terms . 166
sprocket and hub description .... 160
_I cription .......... 300 during-operation service .. 88
removal and installation 301 installation 190
Drive sprockets location and mountings ..... 166
description and removal 319 lubrication system (cold
installation .. 320 weather) . 59
Driver's Permit and Form No. 26 87 preparation for towing 46
removal . 105, 186, 190
Driver's Report-Accident, Motor road test 100 109 114,115
road test ....... 100, 109, 114, 115
Transportation . 2 81
run-in test .............. 79,81
Driver's Trip Ticket and Preven- service before operation ..... 87
tive Maintenance Service starting
Record 2 auxiliary generator .. 54
Drives, accessory engine ........... 42
before-operation service .. 85 stopping ........... 44
description and replacement 231 trouble shooting .. . 118, 119
road test . 108 warm-up ................. 79, 85
Thriving controls, operating in- (See also Mounts, engine)
structions 28 Engine compartment
Duty Roster 2 close and fasten rear door . 194
installation
E covers . ............ . 195
doors .. 348
Echelons, maintenance services road test . ... .. 108
t echelon .83 (See also Doors, engine com-
ond echelon 95 partment)
S3l: .,5,, l --48 .---:. 461

TM 9-759
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
E- Contd. Pcge
Equipment radio interference suppression. 360
after-operation and weekly removal and cleaning of filter
check . . ... 95 element 218
before-operation service 87 road test . .......... . 114
data .............. 13 run-in test ....... 77
gun 19 Filter, oil
road test check ..... 116 after-operation and weekly
run-in test .... . 80 service . 92
Escape hatch description . 184
description .. . 346 lubrication .... 71
operating instructions 28 operation check 185
road test .. 102 radio interference suppression. 360
Exchange Part or Unit Identifi- removal and installation . 185
cation Tag . 4 road test 108
Exhaust pipes Final drive
installation .......... 190 cold-weather lubrication . 62
removal 189, 190 description 278
replacement ... 224 drain housing . 286
road test ............. 108 drain oil 303
Exhaust system . .. 208 installation
final drive assembly . . 301
F housing cover . 289
removal .. ....
Fans
Fandescription . . . 58,229 road test . 101,102, 112
fill oil fans . . . 193 serial number .
installation ... ...... 192, 193 temperatures
operation . . 58. .
removal . . .189 run-inoad
test 1.
replacement run-in test ....... 81
belt . .... 229 Final reduction assembly, removal
fan . . . . 230 and installation . . 301
road test ....... 107 Fire control equipment
Fenders gun M1A1 ....... 417
after-operation service . . 94 gun M3 ............... 392
at-halt service ... 90 howitzer M4 ... . . 441
before-operation service 87 Fire extinguisher
installation . 307 after-operation service... .. 91
removal .... 303
3........ before-operation service ...... 84
replacement . .... 345 connect
road test ......... 102 bracket . ........ 307
run-in test . . 77 nozzle ..... 192
Fighting compartment, road test 111 description .... 55,56
Filter, fuel disconnect
after-operation service 92 bracket . . . 304
description nozzles ..... 189
auxiliary generator tank . 219 operation .... 56
main tank ............ 217 road test . .. . .. 109, 117
drainage .... . 218 run-in test
462
TM 9-759
INDEX
F-Contd. Page
Fire extinguisher system Gear cases, lubrication ....... 71, 72
conduits and cable 370 Gear housing, turret traversing,
cylinders . ........ . . 369 lubrication ............ 72
pull cables .... 371, 372
Gear mechanism, travera'ng
removal mechanism (See Travers-
cylinders, conduits, and cable 369 mechanism (See Travers-
pull cables . 371,372
Fire fighting equipment . . 14 Gears
Firing mechanism, lubrication 70 during-operation service 88
Flag set . 13 oil levels ...... 93
Flange nuts Gearshift lever
at-halt service . 89 operating instructions ..... 34
before-operation service 86 replacement ..... . 281
run-in test . . . 77 Generating system
Flares .. . 13 precautions ...... .' 379
Floor plates ..... . 193, 300 test for interference . . . . 159
Flywheel, timing mark data 198 trouble shooting ... . 122
Fuel (See also Generators)
after-operation and weekly Generator regulator
service 91 description ......... 260
at-halt service 89 replacement .... . 262
before-operation service . 84 test
fuel level check . 210
~~leaks . 11~~0~Generators
adjustment of belts . .. 258 _
run-in test ..... 76
Fuel cut-off switch . ......... 42 219
description
Fuel gage
auxiliary generator ....... 367
before-operation service .... 85 auxiliary generator . 367
fuel tank . . . 219
operating instructions 38
road test . 99 generator .52
disconnect drive pulley ... 303
run-in test . .. 79
*run-in test ... 79 do not charge batteries .. 125
Fuel lines
connect .... 180,191 fuel mixture 52
disconnect . . 170, 189 lubrication . ........... 70, 72
road tesct .. . 108,9114 radio interference sup-
Fuel mixture, auxiliary generator 52 ression 362, 364
replacement
Fuel system
auxiliary generator .. 367
cold-weather operation . . . 60 auxiliary generator . . . 367
trouble shooting ...... 132 fuel tank 224
Fuel tanks (See Tanks, fuel) generator . 258
Fuze setter M14 395,425 road test ....... 105,114,115
Fuze setter
setter M23 41439
425
442 (See also Generating system)
Fuze M23
Fuzes 446,447 Glass
after-operation service . 91
G before-operation service 86
Governor
Gages, run-in test 80 description 212
Gear assemblies, camshaft, instal- installation 18.
lation . 177 link adjustment ..
* 463
TM 9.759
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
G-Contd. Page Page

'ernor-Contd. control of gun ....... ... 387
removal differences among models . . 381
controls .. . 170 elevating or depressing ..... 384
governor ... 171,212 inspection before firing .. .381
road test ...... 107 loading and firing ... 390
set . ... .. - 195 operation
spark advance .... 198 breech mechanism . 388
Grenades, hand 22 gun . 381
Grousers . 335 stabilizer 384,388
Guards place in
at-halt service . 90 firing position . . 381
road test . . 102 traveling position .. . 392
Gun M1AC (See Gun MIA1, starting thle stabilizer . 387
76-mm) (See also Guns)
Gun MIAI, 76-mm Guns
adjustment of rheostats ... 412 after-operation service .... 94
ammunition . 426 data
bore sighting ..... . 425 75-mm gun .. .... 19
characteristics cal. .30 machine gun
gun .. . 400 M1919A4 . 20
sighting and fire control cal. .50 machine gun M2 21
S equipment 417 cal. .45 submachine gun M3 22

control of gun 410 2-inch mortar ............. 22
ifferences among models 403 hand grenades . .. 22
levating or depressing . 410 during-operation service ... 88
ydraulic traverse control road test 115, 116
handle . . 408 spare parts
inspection before firing .... 403 75-mm gun ............ 22
loading and firing 415 cal. .30 machine gun
operation M1919A4 ... 23
breech mechanism 414 cal. .50 machine gun M3 .. 24
gun 403 tools .... 18
stabilizer ............ 410,413 (See also under specific guns)
placing in Gun-traveling locks . ... .. 349
firing position ........... 403
traveling position . 416 H
starting the stabilizer .411
(See also Guns) Hatch doors (driver's) ... 347, 348
Gun M1A2 (See Gun MIA1, Horn
76-mm) after-operation service ..... 91
Gun M3, 75-mm before-operation service .... 86
adjustments description and replacement .. 264
bore sighting . ...... 395 road test . ........... 102
rheostats 387 run-in test . ......... 79
ammunition . .. 395 trouble shooting . ...... 153
characteristics Horn button
gun . 380 installation of conduit .... 307
sighting and fire control operating instructions ....... 42
equipment .......... 392 trouble shooting .......... 153
~W~~~ ~~464
TM 9-759
INDEX
H-Confd. Page P
0
Hose, installation . 181 cleaning

horizontal spring ....... 313
vertical spring . . 335
ammunition 443
inoperative wheel . 159
characteristics
chowitzeric 430 inspection of parts
horizontal spring ...... .. 315
sighting and fire control vertical spring 335
vertical spring ....... ... 335
equipment 441 removal and disassembly
check oil level in recoil
horizontal spring 313
~cylinder 433~ vertical spring ........... 335
cleaning and lubrication . 441
elevating or depressing 437 Idler wheel and hub assembly 313, 315
inspection before firing 433 Ignition system
installation of muzzle cover . 441 description and data ... 195
loading and firing 438 ignition timing . ....... 198
operation radio interference suppression . 361
breech mechanism 438 road test ...... .... . 106
howitzer 432 trouble shooting . ..... 122
place in Inspection records .. 4
firing position 432 Instrument panels
traveling position 441 description and replacement 234
Hub temperatures disassembly and assembly . . 234
at halt 89 panel lamps only will light .
road test . 101 test of main feed wires ......
run-in test 81 use of gages
(See also Drive sprocket and utility outlets ..... 42
hub and Idler wheel and (See also Light switches)
hub assembly) Instruments
after-operations service ... 91
Hull
before-operation service . 85
after-opheration service
. check (engine installation) . .. 194
at-halt service 90
during-operation service . 88
before-operation service 87 durng-operaton service 88
operating instructions . ..... 38
description .... .45
radio interference suppression . 365
removal of engine and exhaust
pipes 190 replacement .. 235
road test . .. . 98
run-in test 78
run-in test . ... 79, 80
use in vehicular operation . .. 42
Intake and exhaust systems . 208
Idler, lock Interphone control boxes
adjustment description ...... 375
horizontal spring 313 inspection .............. 377
vertical spring 332 precautions .... 379
release 332
Idler wheel and bracket J

assembly and installation Junction box
horizontal spring . .. 315 installation ...............
vertical spring . .335, 337 removal .......... ........
465
TM 9-759
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
L Page Page
Lamps (See Lights) records

39 service record 2
Light switches, operation
work sheets 4
Lights 95
second echelon
after-operation service 91
before-operation service: 86 Major Unit Assembly Replace-
ment Record 2
description
blackout and tail lights 255 Manifolds
compartment lights 256 description 167
headlights 253 installation
utility sockets 255 intake and exhaust manifolds 168
water outlet manifolds 179
replacement of lamp-unit
blackout and tail lights 255 removal
compartment lights 256 intake and exhaust manifolds 168
headlights 254 water manifolds 170
256 road test 107
utility socket
113 Microphones, inspection 377
road test
80 119
run-in test
run-in test 80 Misfires, engine 119
timing light Mortar, 2-inch, data 22
timing light
connect 199
use of 200 Mount, gun
141 disconnect spring bracket 304
trouble shooting
lubrication 71
(See Steering brake road test . 115
_ nkage
linkage) Mounting bases, radio sets
ocks, gun-traveling 349 description 373
Lubrication 64 inspection 377

Mounts, engine
M connect 190
description 168
MWO's (Modification Work disconnect 189
Orders) 117 installation and removal 168, 170
road test 108

Magneto
check spark advance 200 Muffler 368,369
167, 195 Muzzle cover, howitzers 441
data
description and replacement 196
installation 205
lock in place 206
lubrication 72 Odometer, road test 99
road test . 106, 114 Oil
after-operation service 91
timing
major adjustments 203 at-halt service 89
202 before-operation service 84
minor adjustments
check for leaks 194
Maintenance services
90 consumption 100, 119
after operation and weekly
89 draining . 186
at halt
84 leaks 110
before operation
87 low or no pressure 119
during operation
. . ... 83 oil levels 93
first echelon
466
TM 9.759
INDEX
O-Contd. va9
e
Oil-Contd. replacement
oil pressure signals periscopes .. ......... 347
engine boil .... ... 38 stowage rack ............ 304
high water temperature 79 road test ............. 111
low oil pressure 38, 79 Pintle, road test ....... 102
run-in test . .. 76 Pintle hook ...... ...... 348
spare supply 117 Power train assembly
Oil cooler description ...... ..... 278
connect tubes 307 installation .......... 306
description 278 removal .. ......... 303
disconnect tubes ....... 304 trouble shooting ....... .. 156
removal and installation . . 302 Pressure filler cap, inspection ... 137
road test ........ 108 Pressure gage, oil
OilOil
filler
fillater pipe
pipe .......... ...193before-operation
service . 85
installation 193 operation .............. 38
removal. .replacement
.188 . .... 240
Oil filter (See Filter, oil) road test ... ... 98
Oil level gage run-in test . ............ 79
before-operation service ..... 86
operating instructions 39 rimer
before-operation service ...... 85
replacement ... . ... 240
road test .. . . ...... 99 ....
run-in test . .... road test .................. 1
Oil pan run-in test
description and removal . 181 Primer lines
drain oil . ..... ... 186 connect ... . 191
installation . ........ ........ 183 disconnect ... .... ..... 189
Oil pressure gage (See Pressure Propeller shaft
gage, oil) after-operation and weekly
Oil reservoir ...... 356 services 93
Oil retainers ......... 340 road test .. 112..........
Oil seal, crankshaft .......... 183 trouble shooting ... 156
Oil temperature gage (See Tem- (See also Propeller shafts and
perature gage, oil) universal joints)
Oilcan points 71 Propeller shafts and universal
Operation joints
auxiliary equipment 52 description .............. 275
under ordinary conditions .. 42 removals ................ 275, 276
under unusual conditions 58, 63 run-in test .......... 78
Publications . ....... 81, 117
P Pump, fuel
Panel set 14 description and replacement . 217
Periscopes installation ... 180
description and operation removal .. 170
general discussion .... 58 road test . ............. 108
periscope M4A1 394,422,442 vacuum and pressure tests .... 101
periscope M1OC . 394 Pump, oil .......... . 183, 184
periscope MIOD 442 Pump, priming
periscope MIOG 425 description and replacement .
467
TM 9-759
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
P--Contd. Page Page

Pump, priming-Contd. Reports ............... 81, 117
disconnect ...... . 304 Rheostats, adjustment
installation of bracket . 307 gun MIA1 ........ 412
Pump, traverse 2 " gun M3 ............. 387
Pump, water Road test .. .. 98
description and lubrication 229 Rubbing plate, replacement 345
inspection ... 137 Run-in test . 78, 80
installation 193, 229 Running gear .. 88
removal 188, 229
road test 107 5
Push rods
check clearance . 171 Seals, idler wheel . . 315
release 175 Seats
removal and installation ... 300
road test 103
R Selector switch ... 38
Radiator Shielding, radio interference sup-
description 227 pression ...... 360
inspection . 138 Shields, sand
installation after-operation service 94
connections 193 at-halt service . . .. 90
radiator 228 before-operation service 87
emoval removal ... 3..
303
connections 189 replacement .. 3....
345
radiator . 227 run-in test.77
road test 105, 109 Shift lever (turret) .... 51
(See also Tank, radiator expan- Shipping .. 449,451
sion) Shock absorbers
Radio description .308, 320
description filling absorber on vehicle 322
master switch . 252 Shroud assemblies
terminal boxes . 365 installation ..... 192
operation of switch 41 removal .......... ... 189
precautions in use of 378 replacement .. ..... 230
radio bonding 113 road test ...... 107
Radio interference suppression Sighting equipment
description and operation 359 characteristics
trouble shooting . 159 gun M1A1 ............. 417
Rations 14 gun M3 ..... ......... 392
Recoil cylinder, check oil level howitzer M4 .... 441
gun M1AI 403 data . ........ 14
g M3
" . . 381 Siren
howitzer M4 433 description and replacement . 264
Recoil mechanism, road test 116 road test ................. 99
Records .2, 72 trouble shooting ..... 153
Regulators Siren button ...... 42
radio interference suppression. 364 Slip joints, lubrication . 70
oad test .. . 111 Spare parts .............. 18,22
468
TM 9-759
INDEX
S-Contd. Page
Spark plugs Support rollers
data . . . 196 assembly and installation
description 206 dual support rollers 316
installation single support rollers 319
flexible conduit 208 inoperative rollers . 159
spark plugs 180 removal and disassembly
wires 207 dual support rollers .. 316
removal single support rollers . 319
flexible conduit 208 road test 101
spark plugs 171 Suspension assembly
wires .. 207 after-operation and weekly
road test . . 105, 114 services . . 93
Speedometer assembly
connect cables . 307 suspension assembly 327
disconnect cables . 303 suspension wheels . 340
operating instructions . 38 at-halt service 89
replacement of drive cable 235 before-operation service 86
road test ........ 99 description 308,322
Spot-check Inspection Report for data .308
All Motor Vehicles .. 4 disassembly
Springs hub 325
after-operation and weekly suspension assembly .. 324
services 93 inspection and repair of parts .
at-halt service . 89 installation
before-operation service ... 86 arms and bracket . . .
Sprockets, road test .. 104 suspension assembly 343

Stabilizer suspension wheels 322,340
Stabilizer
removal
operation
arms and hub assembly 324
gun M1A1 410, 413
bracket .. ...... 325
suspension assembly .... 343
road test 116 ..... 116......
116
.. suspension wheels . ... 322
starting
gun MIstarting . test
41run-in
.. ....... 78
gun MIA .......... ..411 .. trouble shooting ... 159
gun M3 .............. 387
Starting system
operation of switch ... ... 41 T
radio interference suppression . 362 Tachometer
trouble shooting
trouble ...
shooting 129
129 before-operation service ... 85
Steering brake (See Brakes) c3nnect cables .. 307
Steering brake linkage disconnect cables . . 303
after-operation service .... 93 operating instructions 38
at-halt service ..... ... 89 replacement of drive cable 235
before-operation service 86 road test 99
connect . . . 307 run-in test .. 79
disconnect . . 304 Tachometer drive unit
run-in test ........ 78 installation . . . 181
Steering levers ...... ... 28 removal ........
Storage ........... 448 Tail pipe 36
469
TM 9-759
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
T--Contd. Page Page

Tank Temperature gage, water . 234
backing and steering . 44 Thermostat . ... 231
cleaning .... . 95 Throttle
communications data 10 adjustment
description 4 controls . 214
differences among models 4, 9 hand throttle 216
lubrication 62, 64 linkage 194
performance and capacities 10 connect rod 191
setting in motion 43 description
starting 43 controls 214
stopping 44 foot throttle 216
towing 44 hand throttle 214
trouble shooting 118 disconnect
vehicle specifications 9 hand throttle 304
Tank, expansion rod 189
description 232 installation
drainage 233 foot throttle 216
installation 181, 193,233 hand throttle . 216,307
removal 171, 188, 232 rod assembly . 180
Tank, fuel operation of controls ... 31
description and drainage 220 removal
replacement controls . .... 170
auxiliary generator tank 224 throttles 216
horizontal tanks 221, 222 synchronization ... 111
vertical tanks 223 Timing adjustment . 202, 203
road test 105. 108, 114 Timing light
Tarpaulin connect . 199
after-operation service 94 U of 200
at-halt service 90 Tires 104
before-operation service 87
run-in test 78 ools
Telescope M38A2 . 394 after-operation and weekly
Telescope M47A2 422 check ... 95
Telescope M70F . 392 before-operation check . . 87
Telescope M71D . 419 gun tools ....... .. 18
Telescope M72D .. .. 441 road test check . ...... 116
Telescope M77C 442 run-in test ...... 80
Telescope mount M56 . 441 special tools ......... .. 25
Telescope mount M57 419 vehicle tools 11
Temperature gage, engine Towing connections
before-operation service . 85 after-operation service 94
operating instructions . 38 at-halt service . .... . 90
road test . 98 before-operation service . 87
run-in test 79 road test 102
Temperature gage, oil Towing the vehicle . ..... 44
before-operation service 86 Tracks
operating instructions 39 adjustment of tension
road test . . 99 horizontal spring . 311
un-in test . . 79 vertical spring . 332
470
TM 9-759
INDEX
T-Contd. Page
Tracks-Contd. traverse motor and gear box
after-operation and weekly adapter ........ 353, 354
services .. 93 traverse pump ........... 356
at-halt service . . 89 road test 101, 115, 116
before-operation service 86 run-in test .... ... 81
connect shoes 311 trouble shooting . 154
description and data 308, 310 Trouble shooting . .. . 118
removal and installation Turret
dead track block 330, 332 after-operation service ... 94
horizontal spring ... . . 310 controls ........ 46
supporting roller and bracket description ....... 348
337, 340 lubrication 72
vertical spring . . 330 operation
road test .. ...... 102 general discussion .. .. 51
run-in test .... .. 77 gun MlA1 ...... .404,408
space blocks ....... 117 gun M3 ..... ..... 382,384
tension ........ 81, 101, 104 howitzer M4 .. ..... 437
trouble shooting 159 road test ... 105, 111
Transmission trouble shooting .... 157
connect oil tubes .... 307 Turret locks ..... 46
description 278
differential lubrication .62 U
disconnect oil tubes 304
drain oil .. . . 303 Unit identification tag
during-operation service 88 Universal joints
road test ... 100, 108, 112, 156 connect .. ..... 190
run-in test .. .. . . ....... 80 disconnect 189,303
temperatures lubrication ........... 70
at-halt ......... 89
(See also Propeller shafts and
road test . .. 101 universal joints and Drive
run-in test . ... . . ............
81 . . shafts (accessory) and uni-
Traversing mechanism, turret versal joints)
adjustments ... 356
cleadjustments ... 356 Unsatisfactory Equipment Record 4
cleaning ....... 355, 357
description
drive motor . 359 V
oil reservoir ... .. 356
traverse motor and gear box Valves
adapter . ...... 353 cleaning
traverse pump .. 355 oil reservoir . 357
fill with oil . 354,356 traverse pump . 355
lubrication . . 353, 355 operation of fuel shut-off valves 32
operation of lever . . . 51 Ventilating fans (See Fans)
:adio interference suppression . 365 Ventilators, road test ... ..... 106
replacement Vents
drive motor . . 359 after-operation and weekly
gear mechanism and manual services ............ 93
drive ....... 350 at-halt service ............
oil reservoir 358 run-in test
471
TM 9-759
TANK, MEDIUM, M4A3
V--Contd. Paqe Page

Vision devices run-in test 76
after-operation service 94 Wet stowage .. . 345
description . 346 Wheels
run-in test 78 at-halt service 89
Voltmeter before-operation service 86
after-operation and weekly road test . 104
services 92 Windshield
before-operation service 86 description 58
road test 99 road test 99
run-in test . . 79 Windshield wipers
Volute springs after-operation service 91
data . . 308 before-operation service . 86
description description and replacement 264
horizontal spring 308 road test 99
run-in test 79
vertical spring 328 run-in test 79
~~replacement
~Wiring system
after-operation and weekly
springs
springs 324, 343
324, 343
suspension assembly 343rvices 92
road test . 103
run-in test . 78 conduit clamps 306
spring breakage 159 spark plugs 207
wiring 257
radio interference suppression 365
W removal
_I mp (See Pump. water) conduit clamps 304
. ter pump (See Pump, water) spark plugs 207
Water supply wires 171
after-operation service 91 wiring 257
at-halt service 89 road test 106, 113
before-operation service 84 run-in test 79
leaks . 110, 194 trouble shooting 118
472
-. UJ S GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE O 1948

TM 9 759 Tank Medium M4a3 9 15 1944

Uploaded by

Copyright:

TM 9 759 Tank Medium M4a3 9 15 1944

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

TM 9 759 Tank Medium M4a3 9 15 1944

Uploaded by

Copyright:

What is the purpose of this technical manual?

What is the purpose of this technical manual?

What topics does this manual cover?

What topics does this manual cover?

WAR DEPARTMENT TECHNICAL MANUAL

WAR DEPARTMENT . SEPTEMBER 1944

WAR DEPARTMENT * SEPTEMBER 1944

United States Government Printing Office

rA.G. 300.7 (6 Jan 44)

BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF WAR:

DISTRIBUTION: D 17 (10); IR 9 (4); 17 (2); IBn 9 (2), 17 (4)

(For explanation of symbols, see FM 21-6.)

(5) W.D., A.G.O. FORM No. 462, PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Fehicle is pierced. This is referred to as wet stowage. This vehicle

h. M4A3 Tank (75-mm Wet Stowage Vehicles) (fig. 3). The

c. M4A3 Tank (75-mm Dry Stowage Vehicles) (fig. 4). The

d. M4A3 Tank (105-mm Howitzer Vehicles) (fig. 5). The

Maximum sustained speed on hard road ....... 26 mph

Fuel capacity 168 gal

SCR-508, SCR-528 or SCR-538 (FM) sending and receiv-

7. VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND SPARE PARTS.

h. Fire Fighting Equipment.

dl. Sighting Equipment.

LAMP, electric (for telescope reticle

TUBE, flexible, nozzle 2 Right rear sponson

f. Vehicle Spare Parts.

b. Caliber .30 Machine Gun M1919A4.

(2) EQUIPMENT. Manual box, right

hi. Caliber .30 Machine Gun M1919A4.

COVER, receiver, cal. .30 (flex bow

c. Caliber .50 Machine Gun M2.

OILER, filling, oil buffer ................ 1 Spare parts box

10. GUN SPARE PARTS.

PIN, cotter, 1/8 x 13/4 ...... 3 Spare parts box

h. Caliber .30 Machine Gun M1919A4.

EXTENSION, barrel, group .... 1 Spare parts box

c. Caliber .50 Machine Gun M3.

LEVER. cocking 1 Spare parts box

11. SPECIAL TOOLS.

Adapter, volute spring, removing 41-A-30-650

Name Federal Stock Number Mfr. Tool Number

Replacer, bearing cups, inner

Name Federal Stack Number Mfr. Tool Number

Wrench, socket, hex, 1-in. sq

PART TWO-OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

13. DRIVING CONTROLS.

STEFRING LEVER S PARKING BRAKE PEDAL FOOT THROTTLE PEDAL

Figure 8-Parking Brake Controls (Later Vehiclesl

Figure 9-Fuel Shut-off Valves (75-mm Dry Stowage Vehicles)

Figure 11--Gearshiff Lever Positions

panel on earlier models. To operate the primer, the knob is pulled

Figure 12-Typical Instrument Panel 175-mm Wet Stowage,

controlled by cables, mounted on the rear bulkhead in the fighting

I operating the engine in cold weather. To open the shutters, push in

a. Ammeter (figs. 12 and 13). An ammeter (B199959) is pro-

b. Tachometer (figs. 12 and 13). A tachometer is provided on

c. Oil Pressure Gage (figs. 12 and 13). An engine oil pressur 1

e. Speedometer (figs. 12 and 13). The speedometer is equipped

f. Engine Temperature Gage (figs. 12 and 13). The engine

g. Fuel Level Gage and Selector Switch (figs. 12 and 13). A

15. SWITCHES, CIRCUIT BREAKERS, AND UTILITY OUT-

h. Instrument Panel Light Switch (figs. 12 and 13). A five-

c. Battery Master Switch (figs. 7 and 14). The battery master